Prepared for: Prepared by: Arcadis US, Inc. - Hollywood, FL

Prepared for: Prepared by: Arcadis US, Inc. - Hollywood, FL

PROJECT NO.: 14-4233 CITY OF HOLLYWOOD PROJECT MANUAL FOR WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION UPGRADES MAY 2017 100% DESIGN / PERMITTING S...

4MB Sizes 0 Downloads 86 Views

Recommend Documents

Prepared By Supervised By
2,105,000. 88,396,000. [30][31]. Fergana Valley Uzbekistan March 2, 1992. 285,000. 2,090,000. 87,780,000. [9]. Nowruz Fi

Prepared by Kimberly Vachal and Mark Berwick Prepared for: Illinois
Kimberly Vachal and. Mark Berwick ...... ports with inland river terminals on the Mississippi, Illinois, and Ohio waterw

Prepared for publicity
University academic as an expert for a current issue. However, the University can also seek the contact itself. Then the

Prepared for the Woods
This booklet lists basic precautions that can help protect you on trips into the wilderness. For more detailed informati

proposal prepared for - FAU
Aug 19, 2013 - Carolina at Chapel Hill; Scott Cowen at Tulane University; Max Nikias at the University of. Southern Cali

Benton County, Arkansas Prepared by:
Jul 14, 2012 - Bill Edwards. Mayor, City of Centerton. Delton Bush. Fire Chief, City of Centerton. Greg Neely. Fire Chie

Hollywood, FL
Jun 27, 1983 - Edison Miranda. FL060984. 159.5 lbs. 1/7/1981. TITLE. Cisse Salif. NY051447. 263 lbs. 4/7/1971. David Tua

Prepared for the US Department of Housing and - DaytonOhio.gov
Jul 19, 2005 - Peggy B. Lehner ...... apartment buildings containing less than 20 units. ... two and three bedroom homes

Prepared for Wilshire Associates, Inc. - Robert W. Baird
Reinvestment. Price. (Ex-Date NAV). January. Dividend. 1/24/17. 1/26/17. $0.01978309. $11.01. February. Dividend. 2/24/1

SURVEY FIELD PROCEDURES MANUAL Prepared By THE
location, design, construction, maintenance and operation of engineering projects. 4. Construction Surveys - Surveys whi

PROJECT NO.: 14-4233 CITY OF HOLLYWOOD PROJECT MANUAL FOR WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION UPGRADES MAY 2017 100% DESIGN / PERMITTING SUBMITTAL

Prepared for: ENGINEERING AND CONSTRUCTION SERVICES DIVISION 1621 N. 14th Avenue PO Box 229045 Hollywood, FL 33022-9045

Prepared by:

Arcadis U.S., Inc. 8201 Peters Road, Suite 2400 Plantation, FL | 33324 | USA Telephone: 1 954 414 8960 FBPE CA #7917 00361334.0000

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLLY LEFT BLANK

CITY OF HOLLYWOOD FLORIDA

BID PACKAGE

FOR

WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION UPGRADES PROJECT NO: 14-4233 Prepared by:

ARCADIS 8201 PETERS ROAD, SUITE 2400 PLANTATION, FL 33324

SUBMITTED BY: ___________________________ Contractor

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLLY LEFT BLANK

City of Hollywood

Set No. _______

Project Manual Volume 1 of 1

Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Upgrade

100% Review Submittal May 2017

Prepared By:

Arcadis U.S., Inc. 8201 Peters Road, Suite 2400 Plantation, FL | 33324 | USA Telephone: +1 954 414 8960

00361334.0000

HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION UPGRADES PROJECT NO: 14-4233 May 2017 BID PACKAGE CONTENTS AND REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 00 01 07

TITLE Seals and Certifications

00 03 00 00 10 00 00 20 00 00 30 00 00 41 00 00 42 00 00 43 50 00 49 50

Notice to Bidders Instruction to Bidders Cone of Silence Bid Form Approved Bid Bond Information Required from Bidders Local Preference Trench Safety Form

SECTION

PAGE

DIVISION 00 – CONTRACT FORMS AND GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 50 00 00 61 00 00 62 00 00 72 13 00 73 01

Contract Performance Bond Payment Bond General Conditions Supplementary General Conditions

00 50 00-1 thru 6 00 61 00-1 thru 5 00 62 00-1 thru 2 00 72 13-1 thru 57 00 73 01-1 thru 11

SUBMIT THIS COMPLETE PACKAGE AND ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID. The intent is that the bid submittal contain one original and one copy of the following sections, fully completed: 00 30 00, 00 41 00, 00 42 00, 00 43 50, 00 49 50.

Project No. 14-4233 TABLE OF CONTENTS HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION UPGRADES CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS SECTION

PAGE

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 13 Summary of Work ............................................................ 01 11 13-1 thru 3 01 14 16 Coordination with Owner’s Operations............................ 01 14 16-1 thru 13 01 14 19 Use of Site ........................................................................... 01 14 19-1 only 01 22 13 Measurement and Payment ............................................. 01 22 13-1 thru 4 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures ..................................... 01 26 00-1 thru 9 01 29 73 Schedule of Values .......................................................... 01 29 73-1 thru 3 01 29 76 Progress Payment Procedures ........................................ 01 29 76-1 thru 2 01 31 19.13 Pre-Construction Conference ..................................... 01 31 19.13-1 thru 4 01 31 19.23 Progress Meetings ...................................................... 01 31 19.23-1 thru 2 01 31 26 Electronic Communication Protocols ................................ 01 31 26-1 thru 5 01 32 16.00.10 Progress Schedule ....................................................... 01 32 16-1 thru 4 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation........................................... 01 32 33-1 thru 2 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures ....................................................... 01 33 00-1 thru 9 01 41 24 Permit Requirements ........................................................ 01 41 24-1 thru 2 01 42 00 References ....................................................................... 01 42 00-1 thru 8 01 51 05 Temporary Utilities ............................................................ 01 51 05-1 thru 5 01 52 13 Contractor’s Field Office and Sheds ................................. 01 52 13-1 thru 3 01 57 05 Temporary Controls .......................................................... 01 57 05-1 thru 4 01 57 33 Security ............................................................................. 01 57 33-1 thru 2 01 65 00 Product Delivery Requirements ....................................... 01 65 00-1 thru 4 01 66 00 Product Storage and Handling Requirements .................. 01 66 00-1 thru 4 01 71 33 Protection of the Work and Property ................................. 01 71 33-1 thru 4 01 73 19 Installation......................................................................... 01 73 19-1 thru 4 01 73 24 Connections to Existing Facilities ..................................... 01 73 24-1 thru 2 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching......................................................... 01 73 29-1 thru 6 01 74 05 Cleaning............................................................................ 01 74 05-1 thru 4 01 75 11 Checkout and Startup Procedures .................................... 01 75 11-1 thru 4 01 77 19 Closeout Requirements ................................................... 01 77 19-1 thru 2 01 78 23 Operations and Maintenance Data .................................. 01 78 23-1 thru 7 01 78 39 Project Record Documents ............................................... 01 78 39-1 thru 5 01 78 43 Spare Parts and Materials ................................................ 01 78 43-1 thru 2 01 79 23 Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel ..... 01 79 23-1 thru 6

00361334.0000

TOC-i

Table of Contents

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 00 Demolition ......................................................................... 02 41 00-1 thru 9 DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 03 00 05 Concrete ......................................................................... 03 00 05-1 thru 13 03 60 00 Grouting .......................................................................... 03 60 00-1 thru 10

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 04 00 05 Masonry .......................................................................... 04 00 05-1 thru 16

DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 05 33 Anchor Systems................................................................ 05 05 33-1 thru 9 05 50 13 Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications ..................................... 05 50 13-1 thru 6

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry ....................................... 06 10 53-1 thru 5

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 21 05 Building Insulation ............................................................. 07 21 05-1 thru 8 07 22 16 Roof Board Insulation ....................................................... 07 22 16-1 thru 8 07 54 23 Thermoplastic Polyolefin Membrane Roofing ................. 07 54 23-1 thru 13 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ......................................... 07 62 00-1 thru 9 07 92 00 Joint Sealants ................................................................... 07 92 00-1 thru 6

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 08 11 16 Aluminum Doors and Frames ........................................... 08 11 16-1 thru 6 08 87 00 Door Hardware ............................................................... 08 87 00-1 thru 16

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 91 00 Painting ........................................................................... 09 91 00-1 thru 10

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 Signage........................................................................... 10 14 00-1 thru 13 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties ................................................ 10 44 00-1 thru 2

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)

00361334.0000

TOC-ii

Table of Contents

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION (NOT USED)

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING (NOT USED)

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Ductwork, Piping, and Equipment ........... ........................................................................................ 23 05 29-1 thru 10 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC..................... 23 05 93-1 thru 8 23 07 13 Duct Insulation .................................................................. 23 07 13-1 thru 6 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping ........................................................... 23 23 00-1 thru 14 23 31 13 Metal Ductwork ............................................................... 23 31 13-1 thru 18 23 34 05 Metallic HVAC Fans ........................................................ 23 34 05-1 thru 19 23 81 23 Control Room Air Conditioning Units ............................. 23 81 23-1 thru 13

DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION (NOT USED)

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 05 05 General Provisions for Electrical Systems ....................... 26 05 05-1 thru 7 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables ..... 26 05 19-1 thru 5 26 05 23 Instrumentation and Communication Cables .................... 26 05 23-1 thru 4 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems................. 26 05 26-1 thru 4 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems................... 26 05 29-1 thru 5 26 05 33.13 Rigid Conduits ........................................................... 26 05 33.13-1 thru 11 26 05 33.16 Flexible Conduits ......................................................... 26 05 33.16-1 thru 2 26 05 33.26 Expansion/Deflection Fittings....................................... 26 05 33.26-1 thru 3 26 05 33.33 Pull, Junction and Terminal Boxes ............................... 26 05 33.33-1 thru 4 26 05 33.36 Outlet Boxes ................................................................ 26 05 33.36-1 thru 3 26 05 36 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems ...................................... 26 05 36-1 thru 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems ................................ 26 05 53-1 thru 10 26 27 26.13 Low-Voltage Receptacles ............................................ 26 27 26.13-1 thru 4 26 27 26.23 Snap Switches ............................................................. 26 27 26.23-1 thru 2 26 28 16.33 Disconnect Switches .................................................... 26 28 16.33-1 thru 3 26 29 23 Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Drives ......................... 26 29 23-1 thru 13

00361334.0000

TOC-iii

Table of Contents

26 29 33 26 41 13 26 43 00 26 50 00

Control Stations ................................................................... 26 29 33 thru 3 Lightning Protection System For Structures......................... 26 41 13 thru 6 Surge Protective Devices.................................................. 26 43 00-1 thru 5 Lighting ............................................................................. 26 50 00-1 thru 4

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY (NOT USED)

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORKS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

DIVISION 34 – TRANSPORTATION (NOT USED)

DIVISION 35 – WATERWAY AND MARINE (NOT USED)

DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION 40 05 05 Exposed Piping Installation ............................................. 40 05 05-1 thru 13 40 05 06 Couplings, Adapters and Specials for Process Piping ..... 40 05 06-1 thru 6 40 05 07 Pipe Hangers and Supports ............................................. 40 05 07-1 thru 8 40 05 19 Ductile Iron Process Pipe.................................................. 40 05 19-1 thru 2 40 05 23.23 Stainless Steel Process Pipe for Liquid Service ……...40 05 23.23-1 thru 7 40 05 93 Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment ... 40 05 93-1 thru 13 40 05 96 Vibration, Seismic, and Wind Controls ............................ 40 05 96-1 thru 41 40 60 05 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems………40 60 05-1 thru 72

DIVISION 41 – MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)

DIVISION 42 – PROCESS HEATING, COOLING, AND DRYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)

00361334.0000

TOC-iv

Table of Contents

DIVISION 43 – PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT 43 21 13.12 Centrifugal End Suction Pumps ................................. 43 21 13.12-1 thru 10 43 21 13.23 Centrifugal Axial Split Case Pumps ........................... 43 21 13 23-1 thru 10

DIVISION 44 – POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)

DIVISION 45 – INDUSTRY-SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)

DIVISION 46 – WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)

DIVISION 48 – ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION (NOT USED)

______________________________________________________________________

+ + END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS ++

00361334.0000

TOC-v

Table of Contents

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

CITY OF HOLLYWOOD ENGINEERING AND CONSTRUCTION SERVICES DIVISION 1621 N. 14TH AVENUE PO BOX 229045 HOLLYWOOD, FLORIDA 33022-9045 WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION UPGRADE CITY PROJECT NO.: 14-4233

SEALS AND CERTIFICATIONS ENGINEERS: Arcadis U.S., Inc. 8201 Peters Road, Suite 2400 Plantation, FL | 33324 | USA Telephone: +1 954 414 8960 Christopher Allen Barlow, PE License No. 59256

The seal and signature to the left applies to the following Specifications Divisions and Sections of this Project Manual: • Division 01 – General Requirements. • Division 02 – Existing Conditions • 40 05 05 Exposed Piping Installation • 40 05 06 Couplings, Adapters and Specials for Process Piping • 40 05 07 Pipe Hangers and Supports • 40 05 19 Ductile Iron Process Pipe • 40 05 23.23 Stainless Steel Process Pipe for Liquid Service • Division 43 – Process Gas and Liquid Handling, Purification, and Storage Equipment

Adarsh B. Shah, PE License No. 79948

The seal and signature to the left applies to the following Specifications Divisions and Sections of this Project Manual: • Division 03 – Concrete • Division 04 – Masonry • Division 05 – Metals • Division 06 – Wood, Plastics and Composites • Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection • Division 08 – Openings • Division 09 – Finishes • Division 10 – Specialties

00361334.0000

00 01 07-1

Seals and Certifications

James Michael Callahan, PE License No. 67962

The seal and signature to the left applies to the following Specifications Divisions and Sections of this Project Manual: • Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning • 40 05 96 Vibration, Seismic, And Wind Controls

Aubrey A. Haudricourt, PE License No. 66861

The seal and signature to the left applies to the following Specifications Divisions and Sections of this Project Manual: • Division 26 – Electrical • 40 60 05 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems • 40 05 93 Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment

Engineer’s seal and signature does not apply to the documents that comprise Division 00, Bidding and Contracting Requirements. It is a violation of applicable laws and regulations governing professional licensing and registration for any person, unless acting under the direction of the licensed and registered design professional(s) indicated above, to alter in any way the Specifications in this Project Manual.

+ + END OF SEALS AND CERTIFICATIONS + +

00361334.0000

00 01 07-2

Seals and Certifications

CITY OF HOLLYWOOD DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC UTILITIES ENGINEERING AND CONSTRUCTION SERVICES DIVISION (ECSD)

SECTION 00 03 00 NOTICE TO BIDDERS PROJECT NAME:

Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Upgrade

PROJECT NUMBER:

14-4233

NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that the City Commission of the City of Hollywood, Florida, is advertising for sealed bids which shall be submitted to the City Clerk’s Office (City Hall, 2600 Hollywood Blvd., Room 221) of the City of Hollywood, Florida, until 2:00 p.m., local time, June 29, 2017. On June 29, 2017 at 3:00 p.m. the bids will be opened and read publicly in the Department of Public Utilities, Engineering and Construction Services Division Conference Room at 1621 N. 14th Avenue, Building A, Hollywood, Florida. A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held on June 1, 2017 at 10:00 a.m., at the City of Hollywood Water Treatment Plant, located at 3441 Hollywood Boulevard, 3rd Floor Conference Room. The Bid Package and Contract documents can be downloaded at: http://www.hollywoodfl.org/Bids.aspx?CatID=47&txtSort=Category&showAllBids=&Status=open. Technical assistance shall be submitted in writing to the Project Manager, Wilhelmina Montero, P.E., M.S., [email protected] Each bid must be accompanied by a Bid Security in an amount no less than ten percent (10%) of the bid amount. Said security shall be in the form of a Certified Check or Cashier's Check on a solvent National or State Bank, or a bid bond executed by the Bidder and a qualified Surety, satisfactory and payable to the City of Hollywood, Florida. A Cone of Silence is in effect with respect to this bid. The Cone of Silence prohibits certain communications between potential vendors and the City. For further information, please refer to Section 30.15(F) of the City's Code of Ordinances. The City of Hollywood is strongly committed to ensuring the participation of local Hollywood vendors in the procurement of goods and services. For additional information about the City's Local Preference Ordinance, visit www.hollywoodfl.org.

It will be the Bidder’s sole responsibility to hand-deliver or mail his/her proposal to the City Clerk’s Office at City Hall on or before the closing hour and date for the receipt of bids as noted above. The City Commission reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive informalities and to accept or reject all or any part of any bid, as they may deem to be in the best interest of the City of Hollywood, Florida. Dated this 22nd Day of May 2017 CITY OF HOLLYWOOD, FLORIDA

Clece Aurélus, P.E., Engineering Support Services Manager Department of Public Utilities – ECSD

00361334.0000

00 03 00-1

Notice to Bidders

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLLY LEFT BLANK

Project No. 14-4233 SECTION 00 10 00 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. PREPARATION OF BIDS: Bids must be submitted on the separate and enclosed BIDDING PACKAGE forms, which shall be completed by computer, typewriter, or legibly handwritten in ink. The Bid price of each item on the form must be stated in words and numerals; in case of a conflict, words will take precedence. Where unit prices and extended totals are required, unit prices take precedence. Likewise, discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. If the Bid is made by an individual, he must sign his name therein and state his address. If the Bid is made by a firm or partnership, its name and address must be stated, as well as the name and address of each member of the firm or partnership. Bids by corporations must be signed by an authorized corporate officer (accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary of the corporation. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the signature. When the state of incorporation is other than Florida, proof of registry with Florida must be attached. 2. RECEIPT AND OPENING OF BIDS: The separate BIDDING PACKAGE consisting of the PROPOSAL, PROPOSAL BID FORM, APPROVED BID BOND, TRENCH SAFETY FORM, INFORMATION REQUIRED FROM BIDDERS AND LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND/OR MATERIAL SUPPLIERS shall be completed, signed and sealed as required and must be delivered in a sealed, opaque envelope, addressed to the City Clerk of Hollywood, Florida, by the time called for in the Notice to Bidders and shall be properly identified on the face thereof. Proposals will be publicly opened and immediately read aloud at the time and place designated in the Notice to Bidders. No proposal will be considered which is not based upon these Drawings and Specifications, or which contains any letter or written memorandum qualifying the same, or which is not properly made out and signed in writing by the Bidder. 3. PRE-BID CONFERENCE: A mandatory Pre-bid Conference will be held at the City of Hollywood Water Treatment Plant, located at 3441 Hollywood Boulevard, Hollywood, Florida 33021, 3rd Floor Conference Room, on Thursday June 1st, 2017 at 10:00 a.m.. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents give the location and description of the work to be done under this Contract and estimated quantities of each item of work for which Bids are invited, the time in which the work must be completed, the amount of the Bid Guaranty, if any, and the

00361334.0000

00 10 00-1

Instructions to Bidders

date, time and place of the receipt and opening of the Bids. 5. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE: The Bidder is required to carefully examine the site of the work and the Contract Documents for the work contemplated. It will be assumed that the Bidder has investigated and is fully informed as to the requirements of the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, codes and any other factors which may affect the performance of the work. Failure to be so informed will not relieve a successful Bidder of his obligation to furnish all material, equipment and labor necessary to carry out the provision of the Contract Documents and to complete the contemplated work for the consideration set forth in his Bid. 6. DIMENSIONS, QUANTITIES AND SUBSURFACE INFORMATION: Dimensions, quantities and subsurface information supplied by the City are in no way warranted to indicate true amounts or conditions. Bidders/Contractors shall neither plead misunderstanding or deception, nor make claims against the City if the actual amounts, conditions or dimensions do not conform to those stated. Any "Outside" reports made available by the Engineer are neither guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness, nor a part of the Contract Documents. 7. ADDENDA - CHANGES WHILE BIDDING: During the Bidding period, Bidders may be furnished addenda or bulletins for additions or alterations to the Plans or Specifications which shall be included in the work covered by the Proposal. Any prospective Bidder in doubt as to the meaning of any part of the Drawings, Specifications or other Contract Documents may submit a written request to the Engineer for an interpretation. The Bidder submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. Any interpretation of the documents will be made by an addendum and a copy of such addendum will be mailed or delivered to each prospective Bidder who has received a set of documents. The City will not be responsible for any other explanations or interpretations of the proposed documents. ALL INQUIRES MUST BE RECEIVED, IN WRITING, BY THE CITY OF HOLLYWOOD NO LATER THAN 10:00 A.M. THURSDAY, JUNE 15, 2017. AN ADDENDUM WILL BE ISSUED ONE WEEK BEFORE BID DUE DATE. 8. BID GUARANTY: A Bid Guaranty in the form of a Cashier's Check, Certified Check or Bid Bond executed by the Bidder and a qualified Surety in the amount of 10% of the Bid is required for this project in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.

00361334.0000

00 10 00-2

Instructions to Bidders

9. TRENCH SAFETY FORM: The Trench Safety Form included in the Bid Documents must be completed and signed. Noncompliance with this requirement may invalidate the bid. 10. QUALIFICATIONS AND DISQUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS: The Contract will be awarded only to a Bidder, who in the opinion of the Engineer, is fully qualified to undertake the work. The City reserves the right before awarding the Contract to require a Bidder to submit such evidence of his qualifications as it may deem necessary and may consider any available evidence of his financial status, technical qualifications and other qualifications and abilities. Any one of the following causes, among others, may be considered as sufficient justification to disqualify a Bidder and reject his Bid: A. Submission of more than one Bid for the same work by an individual, firm, partnership or corporation under the same or different names. B. Evidence of collusion. C. Previous participation in collusive Bidding on work for the City of Hollywood, Florida. D. Submission of an unbalanced Bid in which the prices Bid for some items are out of proportion to the prices Bid for other items. E. Lack of competency. The Engineer may declare any Bidder ineligible, at any time during the process or receiving Bids or awarding the Contract, if developments arise which, in his opinion, adversely affects the Bidder's responsibility. The Bidder will be given an opportunity, by the Engineer, to present additional evidence before final action is taken. F. Lack of responsibility as shown by past work judged by the Engineer from the standpoint of workmanship and progress. G. Uncompleted work for which the Bidder is committed by Contract, which is in the judgment of the Engineer, might hinder or prevent the prompt completion of work under this Contract. H. Being in arrears on any existing Contracts with the City, or any taxes, licenses or other monies due the City; in litigation with the City or having defaulted on a previous contract with the City. The contract will be awarded only to a responsive contractor qualified by experience to do the Work specified. The bidder shall submit, prior to award of contract, satisfactory evidence of his experience in like Work and that he is fully prepared with the necessary organization, capital, equipment and machinery to complete the Work to the satisfaction of the Owner within the time limit stated. In addition to the above, the Contractor shall satisfy the following criteria:

00361334.0000

00 10 00-3

Instructions to Bidders

1.

Have been a properly licensed General Contractor under the present name of the organization for a minimum of the previous ten (10) years.

2.

Be properly licensed to perform work as a General Contractor in the State of Florida, Broward County, and the City of Hollywood.

3.

Have been awarded and completed at least three (3) similar projects within the last seven (7) years. For purposes of this requirement, ‘similar’ projects shall be considered to include installation or construction of water or wastewater treatment facilities or equipment and mechanical piping/pumping systems at different facilities. ‘Similar’ projects shall have a minimum value of $2,000,000 each. The proposed project manager shall also satisfy the experience criteria set forth above and shall not be changed during the course of the project without provision of a replacement acceptable to the City and the Engineer.

4.

The electrical subcontractor shall have direct experience with municipal or industrial water or wastewater treatment facilities, including, but not limited to, at least ten (10) separate projects of minimum electrical value of $250,000 each within the past ten (10) years. Each of the projects shall have been completed effectively, properly and completely. The electrical subcontractor shall be properly licensed and been in the business of providing electrical contracting services to water or wastewater treatment facilities under its current name, or that of a predecessor organization, for at least the past five (5) years. Confirmatory information shall be submitted and accepted prior to award of the project.

As part of SECTION 004200, the Bidder: A questionnaire included in the Section 00 42 00 shall be completed fully and accurately by the Contractor and submitted with the bid. Information included on the questionnaire will be used in evaluating the qualifications of the Contractor. The Owner reserves the right to request additional information not identified on the questionnaire. 11. NOT USED 12. LIFE AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID: All Bids shall remain open for 90 days after the day of the Bid opening, however, the Engineer may, at his sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Guaranty prior to that date. Any Bid may be modified or withdrawn prior to the time scheduled for the opening of Bids.

00361334.0000

00 10 00-4

Instructions to Bidders

13. REJECTION OF IRREGULAR BIDS: Bids will be considered irregular and may be rejected if they show omissions, alterations of form, additions not called for, conditions, limitations, unauthorized alternate Bids or other irregularities of any kind. 14. BIDDING ERRORS: If after the opening of bids, a Bidder claims an error and requests to be relieved of the Award, or the Engineer believes that an error may have been made then, the Bidder shall present his work sheets and supplier quotations to the Engineer for verification. This information shall be presented on the same day as the bid opening or if the opening is in the afternoon then on the following business day. When the Engineer has suspected an error and requires the documents, Bidder's failure to produce them within the time specified shall make the Bidder non-responsive and thereby eligible for disqualification. Award may then be made to the next lowest responsive, responsible Bidder, or the work may be readvertised or it may be performed by City forces, as the Commission desires. 15. AWARD OF CONTRACT: The City Commission reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, or any part of any Bid, to waive any informality in any Bid, or to re-advertise for all or any part of the work contemplated. If Bids are found to be acceptable by the City Commission, written notice of award will be given to the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder as determined by the Engineer. 16. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT: The Bidder to whom the Contract is awarded shall, within ten days of the date of award, execute and deliver three (3) copies of the following to the Engineer. A. B. C. D. E. F.

The Contract Performance and Payment Bond Evidence of required Insurance Proof of authority to execute the Contract Proof of authority to execute the Bond on behalf of the Awardee List of Subcontractors, estimated Contract Value for each and proof that such subcontractors possess all required Federal, State, County and/or municipality licenses, including but not limited to certified of competency and occupational license

The above documents must be furnished, executed and delivered before the Contract will be executed by the City. The Contract shall not be binding upon the City until it has been

00361334.0000

00 10 00-5

Instructions to Bidders

executed by the City and a copy of such fully executed Contract is delivered to the Contractor. 17. FAILURE TO EXECUTE CONTRACT, BID GUARANTY FORFEITED: Should the Bidder to whom the Contract has been awarded refuse or fail to complete the requirements of Article 16 above within ten (10) days after Notice of Award, the additional time in days (including weekends) required to CORRECTLY complete the documents will be deducted, in equal amount, from the Contract Time, or the City may elect to revoke the Award. In the same manner as Article 13, the Bid Guaranty of any Bidder failing to execute the awarded Contract shall be retained by the City and the Contract awarded as the Commission desires. 18. GUARANTY OF FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT: A Performance Bond and a Payment Bond each equal to 100 percent of the total Bid will be required of the Awardee. The Bond must be written through a company licensed to do business in the State of Florida and be rated at least "A", Class X, in the latest edition of "Best's Key Rating Guide", published by A.M. Best Company. As per Florida Statute Section 255.05, the Contractor shall be required to record the payment and performance bonds in the public records of Broward County. 19. INSURANCE: Bidder must satisfy all insurance requirements as set forth in the Supplementary and General Conditions. The insurance policy shall not contain any exceptions that would exclude coverage for risks that can be directly or reasonably related to the scope of goods or services in this bid/proposal. A violation of this requirement at any time during the term, or any extension thereof shall be grounds for the immediate termination of any contract entered in to pursuant to this bid/proposal. In order to show that this requirement has been met, along with an insurance declaration sheet demonstrating the existence of a valid policy of insurance meeting the requirements of this bid/proposal, the successful proposer must submit a signed statement from insurance agency of record that the full policy contains no such exception. 20. QUALIFICATIONS: At the time of submission of the bid, Bidder must possess, and be able to provide City, any and all required Federal, State, County and/or municipal licenses, including but not limited to certificates of competency and occupational licenses. Moreover, upon receipt of the Award of the Contract, Bidder must provide proof of valid licensing for all subcontractors and/or material suppliers hired by the Contractor as set forth in Article 16 above.

00361334.0000

00 10 00-6

Instructions to Bidders

When the Bidder is a Joint Venture, in order to satisfy the construction licensing requirements one member of a Joint Venture must hold a valid state certificate as well as the appropriate county and city license. The Contractor shall be held responsible for assurance that all subcontractors and/or material suppliers hired by the Contractor have the appropriate state certificate and licenses. 21. PERMITS: The Contractor and Subcontractors must obtain Building Permits required for all work covered under this Contract as well as any other permit required by any other regulatory agency. The Master and Subcontractor Building Permits required by the City shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. Any and all other permits required by the City, County, State of Florida, or any other regulatory agency shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. The Contractor or Subcontractors shall also be responsible to call for all inspections as required in Section 105 (Inspections) of the latest edition of the Florida Building Code. 22. SITE USAGE AND SECURITY: Security at the construction site is given a very high priority by the Owner. The Contractor shall recognize that this project is sensitive in nature as a result of homeland security concerns and the security criteria stipulated herein constitute a material inducement of the Owner to enter into the contract with the Contractor. The Contractor shall restrict all parking, office placement and equipment trailers, stored material storage, lay-down areas, prefabrication work areas and other related items strictly to the Contractor staging area shown on the drawings. The existing site is fully secured. The integrity of the perimeter fence and access gate must be maintained at all times. It is further noted that the Owner has implemented site security measures which restrict and control entrance to and exit from the site. The Contractor shall anticipate and work within the requirements of the Owner’s security measures. The Owner reserves the right to require the Contractor to perform a background check on all agents, licensees, invitees, employees, subcontractors, material-men, workers and suppliers entering the site and supply the results to the Owner. Should this occur, the Contractor shall secure appropriate releases and authorizations from the affected parties prior to performing the background checks. All background checks shall be performed prior to allowing the workers on to the project site. The Owner reserves the right but not the obligation to disallow entrance to the work site of any persons or entities as a result of the background check or other relevant information. Background checks shall be in such form and fashion as is acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall allow for the time to perform the necessary background checks within the project schedule.

00361334.0000

00 10 00-7

Instructions to Bidders

Nothing herein shall confer liability upon the Owner as a result of the security steps and provisions set forth in this contract. If directed by the Owner, each party who has a background check performed shall be required to carry photo identification and a clearance tag. Such identification and clearance tag shall be required to enter the site and shall be maintained with the person at all times while on site. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner a complete roster of all parties to enter the work site pursuant to this construction and to keep said roster updated and current on at least a weekly basis. 23.

SUBCONTRACTORS:

For the Owner to be assured that only competent and qualified subcontractors will be employed on this project, each Bidder shall submit in the bid a list of the subcontractors performing work on this project. This subcontractors list shall include each firm's name, address, telephone number, contact person and work to be performed. Subcontractors shall be properly registered or licensed with the State of Florida, Broward County and the City of Hollywood. Subcontractors shall, in the Owner's opinion, be qualified both technically and financially to perform the work. The Owner reserves the right to reject any subcontractor who is deemed by the Owner to be unacceptable technically or financially, or has previously performed work which the Owner believes to be unsatisfactory. No change may be made to this list of subcontractors by the Contractor, before or after contract award, without the express written consent of the Owner. If, prior to award, the Owner rejects any subcontractor, the Contractor shall be afforded the opportunity to submit qualifications for an alternate subcontractor with no attendant increase in the base lump sum bid amount, adjustment of contract time or alteration of the bid documents. Such qualifications will be due within ten (10) days of receipt of notification of subcontractor rejection. Failure to submit an acceptable alternate subcontractor may result in rejection of the bid. In this event, the bid bond shall be returned to Contractor without claim by the Owner and with forfeiture of all claim rights by the Contractor. ++ END OF SECTION ++

00361334.0000

00 10 00-8

Instructions to Bidders

SECTION 00 20 00

NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS AND PROPOSERS Cone of Silence The City of Hollywood City Commission adopted Ordinance No. O-2007-05, which created Section 30.15(F) imposing a Cone of Silence for certain City purchases of goods and services. The Cone of Silence refers to limits on communications held between vendors and vendor’s representatives and City elected officials, management and staff during the period in which a Formal Solicitation is open. The Ordinance does allow potential vendors or vendor’s representatives to communicate with designated employees for the limited purpose of seeking clarification or additional information. The names and contact information of those employees that may be contacted for clarification or additional information are included in the solicitation. The Cone of Silence does not prohibit a vendor or vendor’s representative from communicating verbally, or in writing to the City Manager, the City Manager’s designee, the City Attorney or the City Attorney’s designee on those procurement items to be considered by the City Commission. The Cone of Silence does not prohibit a vendor or vendor’s representative from making public presentations at a duly noticed pre-bid conference or duly noticed evaluation committee meeting or from communicating with the City Commission during a duly noticed public meeting. The Cone of Silence shall be imposed when a formal competitive solicitation has been issued and shall remain in effect until an award is made, a contract is approved, or the City Commission takes any other action which ends the solicitation. To view the Cone of Silence, Ordinance No. O-2007-05, go to the City of Hollywood’s Official website at http://www.hollywoodfl.org/ConeOfSilence

++ END OF SECTION ++

00361334.0000

00 20 00-1

Cone of Silence

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 00 30 00 BID FORM TO THE MAYOR AND COMMISSIONERS CITY OF HOLLYWOOD, FLORIDA SUBMITTED _____________________ Dear Mayor and Commissioners: The undersigned, as BIDDER, hereby declares that the only person or persons interested in the Proposal as principal or principals is or are named herein and that no other person than herein mentioned has any interest in this Proposal or in the Contract to be entered into; that this Proposal is made without connection with any other person, company or parties making a Bid or Proposal; and that it is in all respects fair and in good faith without collusion or fraud. The BIDDER further declares that he has examined the site of the Work and informed himself fully in regard to all conditions pertaining to the place where the Work is to be done; that he has examined the Drawings and Specifications for the Work and contractual documents relative thereto, including the Notice to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders, Proposal Form, Form of Bid Bond, Form of Contract and Form of Performance Bond, General, Supplementary and Technical Specifications, Addenda, Drawings, and Local Preference, Exhibit A, and has read all of the Provisions furnished prior to the opening of bids; and that he has satisfied himself relative to the work to be performed. The undersigned BIDDER has not divulged to, discussed or compared his bid with other bidders and has not colluded with any other BIDDER of parties to this bid whatever. Pursuant to and in compliance with your Invitation for Bid, the Instruction to Bidders, Special Provision, and other documents relating thereto, the undersigned hereby agrees to furnish all labor, materials, and equipment to do the work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents and all addenda, if any, issued prior to the date of this proposal for the Unit and the Lump Sum prices herein as follows:

00361334.0000

00 30 00-1

Bid Form

Item Description Quantity Unit No. 1 General Conditions, Mobilization and Demobilization 1 LS

Unit Price

Total

NA

$

2

Indemnification

1

LS

NA

$

3

High Service Pump Station Upgrade and all Work, except Item No. 4 and 5

1

LS

NA

$

4

4

EA

$

$

6

EA

$

$

6

Additive Owner’s Allowance: Replacement of the 30-inch Pump Suction Piping located inside the Clearwells (as directed by the Engineer/Owner) Additive Owner’s Allowance: Replacement of the 36-inch Pump Suction Piping located inside the Clearwells (as directed by the Engineer/Owner) Permitting Allowance

1

LS

NA

$

100,000

7

Owner’s Contingency

1

LS

NA

$

250,000

5

10

TOTAL LUMP SUM BASE BID (SUM OF ITEMS 1 THROUGH 7) $ (In numbers)

(In words) Notice: Providing a "no bid" for Bid Item No. 4 and 5 is not an option and will deem the entire Proposal non-reponsive.

00361334.0000

00 30 00-2

Bid Form

If this Proposal is accepted, the undersigned BIDDER proposes and agrees to enter into and execute the Contract with the City of Hollywood, Florida, in the form of Contract specified; of which this Proposal, Instructions to Bidders, General Specifications, Supplementary Conditions and Drawings shall be made a part for the performance of Work described therein; to furnish the necessary bond equal to one hundred (100) percent of the total Contract base bid, the said bond being in the form of a Cash Bond or Surety Bond prepared on the applicable approved bond form furnished by the CITY; to furnish all necessary materials, equipment, machinery, tools, apparatus, transportation, supervision, labor and all means necessary to construct and complete the work specified in the Proposal and Contract and called for in the Drawings and in the manner specified; to commence Work on the effective date established in the "Notice to Proceed" from the ENGINEER; and to substantially complete all Contract Work within 500 days with final completion within 545 days, and stated in the "Notice to Proceed" or pay liquidated damages for each calendar day in excess thereof, or such actual and consequential damages as may result therefrom, and to abide by the Local Preference Ordinance, Exhibit A. The BIDDER acknowledges the provisions of the City-Contractor Contract as to the assignment of the purchase order for the procurement of goods and special services for the Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Upgrade, City Project No.:14-4233.

The BIDDER acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: No. _______________ No. _______________ No. _______________ No. _______________ No. _______________

Dated _________________________ Dated _________________________ Dated _________________________ Dated _________________________ Dated _________________________

And the undersigned agrees that in case of failure on his part to execute the said Contract and the Bond within ten (10) days after being presented with the prescribed Contract forms, the check or Bid Bond accompanying his bid, and the money payable thereon, shall be paid into the funds of the City of Hollywood, Florida, otherwise, the check or Bid Bond accompanying this Proposal shall be returned to the undersigned. Attached hereto is a certified check on the _________________________________ Bank of _______________________ or approved Bid Bond for the sum _____________________________________________ Dollars ($ according to the conditions under the Instructions to Bidders and provisions therein.

of )

NOTE: If a Bidder is a corporation, the legal name of the corporation shall be set forth below, together with signature(s) of the officer or officers authorized to sign Contracts on behalf of the corporation and corporate seal; if Bidder is a partnership, the true name of the firm shall be set forth below with the signature(s) of the partner or partners authorized to sign Contracts in behalf of the partnership; and if the Bidder is an individual, his signature shall be placed below; if a partnership, the names of the general partners. 00361334.0000

00 30 00-3

Bid Form

WHEN THE BIDDER IS AN INDIVIDUAL: ___________________________________ (Signature of Individual) ___________________________________ (Printed Name of Individual) ___________________________________ (Address) ********************************************************************************** WHEN THE BIDDER IS A SOLE PROPRIETORSHIP OR OPERATES UNDER A TRADE NAME: ___________________________________ (Name of Firm) ___________________________________ (Address) _________________________________(S EAL) (Signature of Individual) ********************************************************************************** WHEN THE BIDDER IS A PARTNERSHIP: ___________________________________ (Name of Firm) A Partnership ___________________________________ (Address) By: _____________________________ (SEAL) (Partner) Name and Address of all Partners: ___________________________________ ___________________________________ **********************************************************************************

00361334.0000

00 30 00-4

Bid Form

WHEN THE BIDDER IS A JOINT VENTURE: ___________________________________ (Correct Name of Corporation By: _____________________________ (SEAL) (Address) ___________________________________ (Official Title) As Joint Venture (Corporate Seal) Organized under the laws of the State of ________________________, and authorized by the law to make this bid and perform all Work and furnish materials and equipment required under the Contract Documents. **********************************************************************************

00361334.0000

00 30 00-5

Bid Form

WHEN THE BIDDER IS A CORPORATION: ___________________________________ (Correct Name of Corporation By: _____________________________ (SEAL) ___________________________________ (Official Title) ___________________________________ (Address of Corporation) Organized under the laws of the State of ________________________, and authorized by the law to make this bid and perform all Work and furnish materials and equipment required under the Contract Documents. CERTIFIED COPY OF RESOLUTION OF BOARD OF DIRECTORS ________________________________________________ (Name of Corporation) RESOLVED that __________________________________ (Person Authorized to Sign) ____________________________ of (Title)

(Name of Corporation)

be authorized to sign and submit the Bid or Proposal of this corporation for the following project: CITY OF HOLLYWOOD WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION UPGRADES PROJECT NO. 14-4233 The foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Resolution adopted by __________________________ at a meeting of its Board of (Name of Corporation) Directors held on the _____________ day of _____________________, 20____. By: ______________________________ Title: _____________________________ (SEAL) The above Resolution MUST BE COMPLETED if the Bidder is a Corporation. ++END OF SECTION++ 00361334.0000

00 30 00-6

Bid Form

SECTION 00 41 00 APPROVED BID BOND (Construction)

STATE OF FLORIDA KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we

, as

Principal, and firmly bound unto the City of Hollywood in the sum

, as Surety, are held and

of Dollars ($ ) lawful money of the United States, amounting to 10% of the total Bid Price, for the payment of said sum, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that whereas the principal has submitted the accompanying bid, dated ______________________________,20_____, for: Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Upgrade Project No.: 14-4233

NOW, THEREFORE, if the principal shall not withdraw said bid within 60 days after date of the same and shall within ten days after the prescribed forms are presented to him for signature, enter into a written contract with the CITY, in accordance with the bid as accepted, and give bond with good and sufficient surety or sureties, and provide the necessary Insurance Certificates as may be required for the faithful performance and proper fulfillment of such Contract, then this obligation shall be null and void. In the event of the withdrawal of said bid within the specified period, or the failure to enter into such contract and give such bond and insurance within the specified time, the principal and the surety shall pay to the City of Hollywood the difference between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the City of Hollywood may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work and/or supply the materials covered by said bid.

00361334.0000

00 41 00-1

Approved Bid Bond

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above bound parties have executed this statement under their several seals this day of ,20 , the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body.

WHEN THE PRINCIPAL IS AN INDIVIDUAL: Signed, sealed and delivered in the presence of:

Witness

Signature of Individual

Address

Printed Name of Individual

Witness

Address WHEN THE PRINCIPAL IS A CORPORATION:

Attest:

Secretary

Name of Corporation

Business Address

By: (Affix Corporate Seal)

Printed Name

Official Title 00361334.0000

00 41 00-2

Approved Bid Bond

CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE PRINCIPAL

I, _____________________________________, certify that I am the secretary of the Corporation named as Principal in the attached bond; that _________________________________________ who signed the said bond on behalf of the Principal, was then __________________________________________ of said Corporation; that I know his signature, and his signature thereto is genuine and that said bond was duly signed, sealed and attested for and on behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. __________________________________(SEAL) Secretary

TO BE EXECUTED BY CORPORATE SURETY:

Attest:

Secretary

Corporate Surety

Business Address

By: (Affix Corporate Seal)

Attorney-In-Fact

Name of Local Agency

Business Address

00361334.0000

00 41 00-3

Approved Bid Bond

STATE OF FLORIDA Before me, a Notary Public, duly commissioned, qualified and acting, personally appeared known, who being by me first duly sworn upon oath says

to

that he is the attorney-in-fact for the

me

well

and

that he has been authorized by to execute the foregoing bond on behalf of the CONTRACTOR named therein in favor of the City of Hollywood, Florida. Subscribed and sworn to before me this ___ day of _______, 20___.

(SEAL)

Notary Public, State of Florida

++ END OF SECTION ++

00361334.0000

00 41 00-4

Approved Bid Bond

SECTION 00 42 00 INFORMATION REQUIRED FROM BIDDERS GENERAL INFORMATION

The Bidder shall furnish the following information. Failure to comply with this requirement may cause its rejection. Additional sheets shall be attached as required.

1.

Contractor's Name/Address: ________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________

2.

Contractor's Telephone Number: _____________________________________ and e-mail address: ______________________________________________

3.

Contractor's License (attach copy): ___________________________________ Primary Classification: _____________________________________________ Broward County License Number (attach copy): _________________________

4.

Number of years as a Contractor in construction work of the type involved in this Contract: _______________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________

5.

List the names and titles of all officers of Contractor's firm: ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________

6.

Name of person who inspected site or proposed work for your firm: Name: _________________________________________________________ Date of Inspection: ________________________________________________

7.

What is the last project of this nature you have completed? ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________

00361334.0000

00 42 00-1

Information Required from Bidders

8.

Have you ever failed to complete work awarded to you; if so, where and why? ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________

9.

Name three individuals or corporations for which you have performed work and to which you refer: ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________

10.

List the following information concerning all contracts on hand as of the date of submission of this proposal (in case of co-venture, list the information for all coventures). Total Contracted % Name of Project City Contract Date of Completion Value Completion to Date ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ (Continue list on inset sheet, if necessary)

11.

What equipment do you own that is available for the work? ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________

12.

What equipment will you purchase for the proposed work? ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________

13.

List at least three (3) similar projects complete within the last seven (7) years by the bidder and the proposed project manager. For purposes of this requirement ‘similar’ projects shall be considered to include installation or construction of

00361334.0000

00 42 00-2

Information Required from Bidders

different water or wastewater treatment equipment and mechanical piping systems. ‘Similar’ projects shall have a minimum value of $2,000,000 each. Include owner, project value, completion date, reference contact information and brief project description. The determination of whether a project is sufficiently similar shall be at the sole discretion of the City and the Engineer. ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ (Add sheets as requested.)

14.

Name the Project Manager proposed for this project. Attach a copy of the project manager’s resume. ________________________________________________________________ NOTE: If requested by CITY, the Bidder shall furnish a notarized financial statement, references and other information, sufficiently comprehensive to permit an appraisal of its current financial condition.

00361334.0000

00 42 00-3

Information Required from Bidders

LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS The Bidder shall list below the name and address of each Subcontractor who will perform work under this Contract in excess of one-half percent of the total lump sum base bid price, and shall also list the portion of the work which will be done by such Subcontractor. After the opening of Proposals, changes or substitutions will be allowed with written approval of the City of Hollywood. Subcontractors must be properly licensed and hold a valid Hollywood Certificate of Competency. Work to be Performed

Subcontractor’s Name / Address

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

NOTE: Attach additional sheets if required. ++ END OF SECTION ++

00361334.0000

00 42 00-4

Information Required from Bidders

SECTION 00 43 50 LOCAL PREFERENCE (EXHIBIT “A”) Pursuant to §38.50 of the City of Hollywood Code of Ordinances, the City shall grant a preference to local Hollywood vendors if their initial bid is within 5% of the bid of the lowest responsive responsible bidder that is a non-local Hollywood vendor. The preference shall allow the local Hollywood vendor to submit a second and final offer, which must be at least 1% less than the bid of the lowest responsible responsive nonlocal Hollywood vendor to be awarded. The local Hollywood vendor shall have the burden of demonstrating that it maintains a permanent place of business with full-time employees within the City limits and has done so for a minimum of one (1) year prior to the date of issuance of a bid or proposal solicitation within Hollywood, Florida. All supporting documentation (e.g. City of Hollywood valid local business tax receipt) for local preference eligibility must be received with the bid package prior to the bid opening date and time.

00361334.0000

00 43 50-1

Local Preference

SECTION 00 49 50 TRENCH SAFETY FORM This form must be completed and signed by the Bidder. Failure to complete this form may result in the bid being declared non-responsive. Bidder acknowledges that the Florida Trench Safety Act, Section 553.60 et. seq., which became effective October 1, 1990, shall be in effect during the period of construction of the project. The Bidder by signing and submitting the bid is, in writing, assuring that it will perform any trench excavation in accordance with applicable trench safety standards. The Bidder further identifies the following separate item of cost of compliance with the applicable trench safety standards as well as the method of compliance: Cost

Method of Compliance

Total $ ____________________ Bidder acknowledges that this cost is included in the applicable items of the Proposal and in the Grand Total Bid Price. Failure to complete the above will result in the bid being declared non-responsive. The Bidder is, and the Owner and Engineer are not, responsible to review or assess Bidder’s safety precautions, programs or costs, or the means, methods, techniques or technique adequacy, reasonableness of cost, sequences or procedures of any safety precaution, program or cost, including but not limited to, compliance with any and all requirements of Florida Statute Section 553.60 et. seq. cited as the “Trench Safety Act”. Bidder is, and the owner and Engineer are not, responsible to determine if any safety related standards apply to the project, including but not limited to, the “Trench Safety Act”. ______________________ Witness Signature

________________________ Contractor’s Signature

______________________ Witness Printed Name

________________________ Printed Name

______________________ Witness Address

________________________ Title

______________________ Date

________________________ Date ++ END OF SECTION ++

00361334.0000

00 49 50-1

Trench Safety Form

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 00 50 00 CONTRACT THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into, this

day of

, A.D., 20

, by and between

the CITY OF HOLLYWOOD, Florida, a municipal corporation of the State of Florida, part of the first part, (hereinafter sometimes called the "CITY"), and

party of the second part (hereinafter sometimes called the "CONTRACTOR"). WITNESSETH: follows:

The parties hereto, for the considerations herein after set forth, mutually agree as

Article 1. Scope of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment and perform all work in the manner and form provided by the Contract Documents, for:

Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Upgrade City Project No.: 14-4233 Article 2. The Contract Sum: The CITY shall pay to the CONTRACTOR, for the faithful performance of the Contract, in lawful money of the United States of America, and subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents, as follows: Based upon the prices shown in the Proposal heretofore submitted to the CITY by the CONTRACTOR, a copy of said Proposal being a part of these Contract Documents, the aggregate amount of this Contract being the sum of _______________00/100 Dollars Article 3. Partial and Final Payments: In accordance with the provisions fully set forth in the "General Conditions" of the "Specifications", and subject to additions and deductions as provided, the CITY shall pay the CONTRACTOR as follows: (a)

On the 15th day, or the first business day thereafter, of each calendar month, the CITY shall make partial payments to the CONTRACTOR on the basis of a duly certified and approved estimate of work performed during the preceding calendar month by the CONTRACTOR, less ten percent (10%) of the amount of such estimate which is to be retained by the CITY until all work has been performed strictly in accordance with this Agreement and until such work has been accepted by the CITY; provided, however, that after 50 percent (50%) completion of the work covered by this Agreement, (i) the amount retained from each subsequent progress payment may be reduced to 5 percent (5%) and (ii) upon presentation by the CONTRACTOR of a payment request for up to one-half of the retainage held by the CITY, the CITY shall promptly make payment to the CONTRACTOR. The parties’ rights and obligations regarding retainage are further specified in Florida Statute Section 218.735.

(b)

Upon submission by the CONTRACTOR of evidence satisfactory to the CITY that all payrolls, material bills and other costs incurred by the CONTRACTOR in connection with the construction of the WORK have been paid in full, and also, after all guarantees that may be required in the Specifications have been furnished and are found acceptable by

00361334.0000

00 50 00-1

Contract

the CITY, final payment on account of this Agreement shall be made within sixty (60) days after completion by the CONTRACTOR of all work covered by this Agreement and acceptance of such work by the ENGINEER and approved by the CITY. Article 4. Time of Completion: The CONTRACTOR shall commence work to be performed under this Contract within ten (10) consecutive calendar days after date of written Notice to Proceed and shall fully complete the Contract in accordance within the Contract Documents and meet all intermediate milestone completion dates required after said date of written notice as set forth in the Proposal, as may be modified by Instructions to Bidders, and stated in the Notice to Proceed. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto, that time is the essence, and in the event that construction of the WORK is not completed within the Contract Time and per intermediate dates, as may have been modified solely in accordance with the General Conditions of this Contract, that from the compensation otherwise to be paid to the CONTRACTOR, the CITY is authorized and shall retain, for each day thereafter, Sundays and holidays included, the sum set forth in the Supplementary General Conditions of this Contract as liquidated damages sustained by the CITY in the event of such default by the CONTRACTOR, or shall withhold such compensation for actual and consequential damages as my be stated therein or contemplated therefrom. Article 5. Additional Bond: It is further mutually agreed between the parties hereto, that if, at any time after the execution of this Agreement and the Payment and Performance Bonds required herein for the express purpose of assuring the faithful performance of the Contractor's work hereto attached, the CITY shall deem the surety or sureties' to be unsatisfactory, or, if for any reason, said bonds cease to be adequate to cover the performance of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall, at his expense, within five (5) days after receipt of notice from the CITY furnish an additional bond or bonds in such form and amount, and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the CITY. In such event, no further payment to the CONTRACTOR shall be deemed to be due under this agreement until such new or additional security for the faithful performance of the work shall be furnished in manner and form satisfactory to the CITY. Article 6. Contract Documents: All of the documents hereinafter listed form the Contract and they are as fully a part of the Contract as if hereto attached, or repeated in this Agreement: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7 8.

Notice to Bidders Instruction to Bidders Proposal Bid Form Bid Bond Information Required from Bidders Local Preference Trench Safety Form

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14 15. 16.

Contract Performance Bond Payment Bond General Conditions Supplementary General Conditions Addenda Specifications Drawings

Article 7. The rate of wages and fringe benefits, or cash equivalent, for all laborers, mechanics and apprentices employed by any contractor or subcontractor on the work covered by the contract shall be not less than the prevailing rate of wages and fringe benefit payments or cash equivalent for similar skills or classifications of work as established by the General Wage Decision by the United States Department of Labor for Broward County, Florida that is in effect prior to the date the city issues its invitation for bids. If the General Wage Decision fails to provide for a fringe benefit rate for any worker classification, then the fringe benefit rate applicable to the worker classification shall be the fringe benefit rate applicable to the worker classification with a fringe benefit rate that has a basic hourly wage closest in dollar amount to the worker classification for which no fringe benefit rate has been provided.

00361334.0000

00 50 00-2

Contract

Article 8. No additional work or extras shall be performed unless the same be duly authorized by appropriate action of the City. Article 9. That in the event either party brings suit for enforcement of disagreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to attorney’s fees and court costs in addition to any other remedy afforded by law. Article 10. The Contractor shall guarantee the complete project against poor workmanship and faulty materials for a period of twelve (12) months after final payment and shall immediately correct any defects which may appear during this period upon notification by the City or the Engineer. Article 11. The making and acceptance of the final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor, except those previously made and still unsettled. ***************************************************************************************************************** IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have executed this Agreement on the day and date first above written in three (3) counterparts, each of which shall, without proof or accounting for the other counterparts, be deemed an original contract: THE CITY OF HOLLYWOOD, FLORIDA Party of the First Part By: _______________________________ (SEAL) JOSH LEVY, MAYOR ATTEST: ______________________________ PATRICIA A. CERNY, MMC CITY CLERK

00361334.0000

00 50 00-3

Contract

************************************************************************************************************* CONTRACTOR Party of the Second Part WHEN THE CONTRACTOR IS AN INDIVIDUAL: Signed, sealed and delivered in the presence of: (SEAL) (Witness)

(Signature of Individual)

(Witness)

(Signature of Individual)

****************************************************************************************************************** WHEN THE CONTRACTOR IS A SOLE PROPRIETORSHIP OR OPERATES UNDER A TRADE NAME: Signed, sealed and delivered in the presence of: (Witness)

(Name of Firm)

(Witness)

(Signature of Individual)

(SEAL) ****************************************************************************************************************** WHEN THE CONTRACTOR IS A PARTNERSHIP: (Witness)

(Name of Firm) a Partnership BY:

(Witness)

(SEAL ) (Partner)

*************************************************************************************************************

00361334.0000

00 50 00-4

Contract

WHEN THE CONTRACTOR IS A CORPORATION: Attest: Secretary (Correct Name of Corporation)

BY:

(SEAL) President

************************************************************************* APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY for the use and reliance of the City of Hollywood, Florida only:

APPROVED AS TO FINANCE:

By ______________________________ City Attorney

By _________________________________________ Financial Services Department Director

00361334.0000

00 50 00-5

Contract

CERTIFICATE

STATE OF FLORIDA) COUNTY OF BROWARD)

I HEREBY CERTIFY that a meeting of the Board of Directors of a corporation under the laws of the State of , was held on following resolution was duly passed and adopted:

, , 20

, and the

"RESOLVED, that as President of the corporation, be and he is hereby authorized to execute the contracts on behalf of this corporation, and that his execution thereof, attested by the Secretary of the corporation and with corporate seal affixed, shall be the official act and deed of this corporation." I further certify that said resolution is now in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the official seal of the corporation, this

day of

, 20

.

_____________________________________ Secretary

++ END OF SECTION ++

00361334.0000

00 50 00-6

Contract

SECTION 00 61 00 PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we ______________________________________________________________________, Name Address Tel. No. as Principal, and _______________________________________________________________ Name Address Tel. No. as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Hollywood in the sum of ______________________________________________ Dollars ($_____________________), for the payment of said sum we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and assigns, jointly and severally, for the faithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the _________________day of __________________________________, 20 entered into between the Principal and the City of Hollywood, Florida, for the installation of Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Upgrade, City Project No. 14-4233 A copy of said Contract, No. 14-4233, is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully copied herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the Principal shall in all respects comply with the terms and conditions of said Contract and his obligations thereunder, including all of the Contract Documents (that include the Notice to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Proposal Bid Form, Basis of Payment, Approved Bid Bond, Trench Safety Form, Information Required from Bidders, Contract, Performance Bond, Payment Bond, General and Supplementary General Conditions, Technical Specifications, Addenda and Drawings), therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be made in said Drawings and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless the City of Hollywood against and from all expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care of skill, negligence or default, including patent infringement on the part of said Principal, his agents or employees, in the execution or performance of said Contract, including errors in the Drawings furnished by said Principal, and further, if the Principal shall promptly make payments to all who supply him, with labor and/or materials, used directly or indirectly by the Principal in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise, the Principal and Surety, jointly and severally, agree to pay the City of Hollywood any difference between the sum that the City of Hollywood may be obliged to pay for the completion of said work, by Contract or otherwise, and the sum that the City of Hollywood would have been obliged to pay for the completion said work had the Principal properly executed all of the provisions of said Contract, and any damages, whether direct, indirect, or consequential, which the City of Hollywood may incur as a result of the failure of the said Principal to properly execute all of the provisions of said Contract. AND, the said Principal and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors, administrators and assigns, jointly and severally, that they will amply and fully protect the City of Hollywood against, and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs and judgments which may be recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by reason of any damage arising from the performance of the said work, repair or maintenance thereof, or the manner of doing the same, or his agents or his servants, or the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material furnished or work done, as aforesaid or otherwise. AND, the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications and Drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligations on this Bond, 00361334.0000

00 61 00-1

Performance Bond

and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the work or to the Specifications and Drawings. WHEN THE PRINCIPAL IS AN INDIVIDUAL: Signed, sealed and delivered in the presence of: __________________________ (Witness)

______________________________ (Signature of Individual)

__________________________ (Address)

______________________________ (Printed Name of Individual)

__________________________ (Witness) __________________________ (Address) WHEN THE PRINCIPAL IS A SOLE PROPRIETORSHIP OR OPERATES UNDER A TRADE NAME: Signed, sealed and delivered in the presence of: __________________________ (Witness)

______________________________ (Name of Firm)

__________________________ (Address)

By: _____________________________ (Seal) (Signature of Individual)

__________________________ (Witness) __________________________ Address ******************************************************************************* WHEN THE PRINCIPAL IS A PARTNERSHIP: Signed, sealed and delivered in the presence of: __________________________ (Witness)

______________________________ (Name of Partnership)

__________________________ (Address)

By: _____________________________ (Seal) (Partner)

__________________________ (Witness)

_____________________________ (Printed Name of Partner)

__________________________ Address

00361334.0000

00 61 00-2

Performance Bond

*******************************************************************************

WHEN THE PRINCIPAL IS A CORPORATION: Attest: _____________________________ (Secretary)

_____________________________ (Name of Corporation) By: _____________________________ (Seal) (Affix Corporate Seal) _____________________________ (Printed Name) _____________________________ (Official Title)

00361334.0000

00 61 00-3

Performance Bond

CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE PRINCIPAL I, _____________________________________________________, certify that I am the Secretary of the corporation named as Principal in the within bond; that _________________________________________________, who signed the said bond on behalf of the Principal was then _________________________________ of said corporation; that I know his signature, and his signature thereto is genuine; and that said Bond was duly signed, sealed and attested for and on behalf of said corporation by authority of its governing body.

_________________________________ (SEAL) Secretary

00361334.0000

00 61 00-4

Performance Bond

TO BE EXECUTED BY CORPORATE SURETY Attest: _____________________________ (Secretary)

________________________________ (Corporate Surety) ________________________________ (Business Address) ________________________________ By: _____________________________ (Affix Corporate Seal) ________________________________ (Attorney-In-Fact) ________________________________ (Name of Local Agency) ________________________________ (Business Address) ________________________________

STATE OF FLORIDA Before me, a Notary Public, duly commissioned, qualified and acting, personally appeared, ____________________________________ to me well known, who being by me first duly sworn upon oath, says that he is the attorney-in-fact for the _________________________________ and that he has been authorized by _________________________________ to execute the foregoing bond on behalf of the CONTRACTOR named therein in favor of the City of Hollywood, Florida. Subscribed and sworn to before me this _________ day of ______________________, 20_____. __________________________________ Notary Public, State of Florida My Commission Expires: ******************************************************************************* APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY APPROVED AS TO FINANCE: for the use and reliance of the City of Hollywood, Florida only:

By ______________________________ City Attorney

By ____________________________________________ Financial Services Department Director

++ END OF SECTION ++

00361334.0000

00 61 00-5

Performance Bond

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 00 62 00 PAYMENT BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, ______________________________________________________________________ Name Address Tel. No. As Principal and ________________________________________________________________ Name Address Tel. No. as Surety, are held and firmly bound to the CITY OF HOLLYWOOD, FLORIDA herein called the City, in the sum of Dollars ($ ____________________) for the payment of said sum we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and assigns, jointly and severally, for the faithful performance of a certain written contract dated the _______________ day of ____________________, 20_____, entered into between the Principal and the City of Hollywood, Florida for the installation of the Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station Upgrade, City Project No.: 14-4233 Which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract. THE CONDITION of this bond is that if Principal promptly makes payments to all claimants defined in Section 255.05 (1), F.S., supplying Principal with labor, materials or supplies used directly or indirectly by principal in the prosecution of the work provided for in the Contract, then this bond shall be null and void and of no further force and effect; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Said surety for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or any other changes in or under contract documents and compliance or noncompliance with any formalities connected with the contract does not affect Surety's obligation under this bond and Surety waives notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or any other changes, compliance, or noncompliance to the terms of the Contract or to the Work or to the Specifications. This bond is furnished pursuant to the statutory requirements for bond on public works projects being Florida Statute 255.05. Claimants are hereby notified that the Statute 255.05(2) specifically requires that notice be given to Contractor within 45 days after beginning to furnish labor, materials or supplies for the prosecution of the work that claimants intends to look to the bond for protection. Further notice is hereby given claimants that written notice of nonpayment within ninety (90) days after performance of the labor or after complete delivery of the materials or supplies must be delivered to the Contractor and to the Surety. Further notice is hereby given that no action for labor, materials or supplies may be instituted against the Contractor or the Surety on the bond after one year for the performance of the labor or completion of delivery of the materials or supplies. 00361334.0000

00 62 00-1

Payment Bond

Without modifying the foregoing, this bond shall be construed as requiring of the principal and surety no more and no less than is specified in F.S. 255.050.

SIGNED AND SEALED, this _______________ day of ____________________,20___. PRINCIPAL:

ATTEST: ______________________________

______________________________ (Signature)

______________________________

______________________________ (Title)

(SEAL)

SURETY:

______________________________ (Surety) ATTEST: ______________________________

______________________________ (Signature)

______________________________

______________________________ (Attorney-in-Fact)

********************************************************************************** APPROVED AS TO FORM LEGALITY for the use and reliance of the City of Hollywood, Florida only:

AND APPROVED AS TO FINANCE:

By ______________________________ City Attorney

By ________________________________________ Financial Services Department Director

++ END OF SECTION ++

00361334.0000

00 62 00-2

Payment Bond

SECTION 00 72 13

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

00361334.0000

00 72 13-1

General Conditions

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

00361334.0000

00 72 13-2

General Conditions

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS, TERMINOLOGY AND ORGANIZATIONALABBREVIATIONS ........................................... 00 72 13 - 7 1.01 Defined Terms ..................................................................... 00 72 13 - 7 1.02 Terminology ....................................................................... 00 72 13 - 10 1.03 Organizational Abbreviations............................................. 00 72 13 - 11

ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS .................................................. 00 72 13 - 13 2.01 Contract Document Discrepencies .................................... 00 72 13 - 13 2.02 Submissions ...................................................................... 00 72 13 - 13 2.03 Pre-construction Conference ............................................. 00 72 13 - 13 2.04 Contract Time .................................................................... 00 72 13 - 13 2.05 Computation of Time ......................................................... 00 72 13 - 14 2.06 Commencement of Work ................................................... 00 72 13 - 14 2.07 Extension of Contract Time ............................................... 00 72 13 - 14 2.08 Notice and Service Thereof ............................................... 00 72 13 - 14 2.09 Separate Contract ............................................................. 00 72 13 - 14 2.10 Assignments of Contract ................................................... 00 72 13 - 14 2.11 Patents .............................................................................. 00 72 13 - 15 2.12 Federal Excise Tax ............................................................ 00 72 13 - 15 2.13 Savings Due to Excise Tax Exemptions ............................ 00 72 13 - 15 2.14 Overtime Work .................................................................. 00 72 13 - 16 2.15 Inspections and Testing During Overtime.......................... 00 72 13 - 16 2.16 Nights, Sunday or Holiday Work ........................................ 00 72 13 - 16 2.17 Injury or Damage Claims ................................................... 00 72 13 - 16

ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE00 72 13 - 17 3.01 Intent ................................................................................. 00 72 13 - 17 3.02 Order or Precedence of Documents .................................. 00 72 13 - 17 3.03 Reference to Standards..................................................... 00 72 13 - 18

ARTICLE 4 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS ............ 00 72 13 - 18 4.01 Rights -of-Way ................................................................... 00 72 13 - 18 4.02 Permits .............................................................................. 00 72 13 - 18 4.03 Lines and Grades .............................................................. 00 72 13 - 18

ARTICLE 5 – BONDS AND INSURANCE ................................................. 00 72 13 - 18 5.01 Bid Guarantee ................................................................... 00 72 13 - 18 5.02 Performance and Payment Bond ...................................... 00 72 13 - 19 5.03 Signatures ......................................................................... 00 72 13 - 19 5.04 Insurance Coverage .......................................................... 00 72 13 - 19 00361334.0000

00 72 13-3

General Conditions

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page 5.05 5.06

Certificates of Insurance .................................................... 00 72 13 - 19 Insurance Limits and Liability ............................................ 00 72 13 - 20

ARTICLE 6 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES .............................. 00 72 13 - 20 6.01 Laws/Regulations to Be Observed .................................... 00 72 13 - 20 6.02 Indemnification of City ....................................................... 00 72 13 - 20 6.03 Guarantee of Payments..................................................... 00 72 13 - 21 6.04 Permits and Licenses ........................................................ 00 72 13 - 21 6.05 Emergencies ..................................................................... 00 72 13 - 21 6.06 Substitutes or "Or Equal" ................................................... 00 72 13 - 21 6.07 Shop Drawings .................................................................. 00 72 13 - 23 6.08 Personnel .......................................................................... 00 72 13 - 24 6.09 Safety and Protection ........................................................ 00 72 13 - 25 6.10 Traffic Control, Public Safety and Convenience ................ 00 72 13 - 26 6.11 Use of Explosives .............................................................. 00 72 13 - 27 6.12 Loading of Structures ........................................................ 00 72 13 - 27 6.13 Concerning Subcontractors ............................................... 00 72 13 - 27 6.14 Materials and Equipment ................................................... 00 72 13 - 28 6.15 Temporary Utilities............................................................. 00 72 13 - 29 6.16 Review of Records ............................................................ 00 72 13 - 30 6.17 Use of Premises ................................................................ 00 72 13 - 30 6.18 Contractor's Daily Reports ................................................. 00 72 13 - 30 6.19 Record Documents ............................................................ 00 72 13 - 30 6.20 Cleanliness of the Site ....................................................... 00 72 13 - 30 6.21 Dust Control ..................................................................... 00 72 13 - 30 6.22 Continuing the Work .......................................................... 00 72 13 - 31 6.23 Indemnification ................................................................. 00 72 13 - 31 ARTICLE 7 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE ............................................. 00 72 13 - 32 7.01 Related Work at Site.......................................................... 00 72 13 - 32 ARTICLE 8 – CITY’S RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................... 00 72 13 - 32 8.01 Communications ................................................................ 00 72 13 - 32 8.02 Furnish Contract Documents ............................................. 00 72 13 - 32 8.03 Furnish Right-of-Way......................................................... 00 72 13 - 33 8.04 Timely Delivery of Materials .............................................. 00 72 13 - 33

00361334.0000

00 72 13-4

General Conditions

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page ARTICLE 9 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION........... 00 72 13 - 33 9.01 Authority of the Engineer ................................................... 00 72 13 - 33 9.02 Access to the Work............................................................ 00 72 13 - 34 9.03 Limitations to the ENGINEER'S Responsibilities ............... 00 72 13 - 34 9.04 Inspectors .......................................................................... 00 72 13 - 35 9.05 Inspections ........................................................................ 00 72 13 - 35

ARTICLE 10 – CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS ................................. 00 72 13 - 36 10.01 Changes in the Work or Terms of Contract Documents .... 00 72 13 - 36 10.02 Supplemental Instructions - Clarifications.......................... 00 72 13 - 36 10.03 Field Orders/Change Orders ............................................. 00 72 13 - 36 10.04 Value of Change Order Work ........................................... 00 72 13 - 37 10.05 Notification and Claim for Change of Contract Price ......... 00 72 13 - 41 10.06 Notice of Change ............................................................... 00 72 13 - 41 10.07 Records ............................................................................ 00 72 13 - 42 10.08 Canceled Items and Payments Therefore ......................... 00 72 13 - 42 10.09 Full Payment ..................................................................... 00 72 13 - 42

ARTICLE 11 – CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT TIME ................................ 00 72 13 - 42 11.01 Change Order .................................................................... 00 72 13 - 42 11.02 Notification and Claim for Change of Contract Time ......... 00 72 13 - 42 11.03 Basis for Extension ............................................................ 00 72 13 - 43 11.04 Change of Time Due to Contract Execution Problems ...... 00 72 13 - 43 11.05 Change of Time Due to Change Order Evaluation ............ 00 72 13 - 43 11.06 Change of Time and Inspection and Testing ..................... 00 72 13 - 44 11.07 Change of Time and Defective Work ................................. 00 72 13 - 44 11.08 Liquidated Damages.......................................................... 00 72 13 - 44

ARTICLE 12 – WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE; TEST AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........ ........................................................................................................ 0072 13-44 12.01 Warrantee and Guarantee ................................................. 00 72 13 - 44 12.02 Tests and Inspections........................................................ 00 72 13 - 44 12.03 Uncovering Work ............................................................... 00 72 13 - 45 12.04 City May Stop the Work ..................................................... 00 72 13 - 45 12.05 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ......................... 00 72 13 - 46 12.06 One Year Correction Period .............................................. 00 72 13 - 46 12.07 Acceptance of Defective Work .......................................... 00 72 13 - 46 12.08 City May Correct Defective Work ...................................... 00 72 13 - 46

00361334.0000

00 72 13-5

General Conditions

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page ARTICLE 13 – PAYMENTS TO THE CONTRACTOR .............................. 00 72 13 - 47 13.01 Basis of Payment .............................................................. 00 72 13 - 47 13.02 Unit Price Inclusion ............................................................ 00 72 13 - 47 13.03 Schedule of Values: (Lump Sum Price Breakdown) .......... 00 72 13 - 47 13.04 Changed Conditions .......................................................... 00 72 13 - 47 13.05 Application for Progress Payment ..................................... 00 72 13 - 48 13.06 Payment for Materials........................................................ 00 72 13 - 48 13.07 Affidavit Required .............................................................. 00 72 13 - 48 13.08 Retainage .......................................................................... 00 72 13 - 48 13.09 CONTRACTOR'S Warranty of Title ................................... 00 72 13 - 48 13.10 Review of Application of Payment ..................................... 00 72 13 - 49 13.11 Payment to the Contractor................................................. 00 72 13 - 49

ARTICLE 14 – SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, PARTIAL UTILIZATION, FINAL CLEAN UP, INSPECTION, PAYMENT, AND ACCEPTANCE ..... 00 72 13 - 49 14.01 Substantial Completion...................................................... 00 72 13 - 49 14.02 Partial Utilization ................................................................ 00 72 13 - 50 14.03 Final Clean Up ................................................................... 00 72 13 - 51 14.04 Final Inspection ................................................................. 00 72 13 - 51 14.05 Final Application for Payment ............................................ 00 72 13 - 51 14.06 Final Payment and Acceptance ......................................... 00 72 13 - 52 14.07 Payment of Retainage Without Final Completion ............. 00 72 13 - 52 14.08 CONTRACTOR'S Continuing Obligation ........................... 00 72 13 - 52 14.09 Waiver of Claims ............................................................... 00 72 13 - 53

ARTICLE 15 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION ............... 00 72 13 - 53 15.01 City May Suspend Work .................................................... 00 72 13 - 53 15.02 City May Terminate ........................................................... 00 72 13 - 53 15.03 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ........................... 00 72 13 - 55

ARTICLE 16 – DISPUTE RESOLUTION ................................................... 00 72 13 - 55 16.01 Methods and Procedures .................................................. 00 72 13 - 55

00361334.0000

00 72 13-6

General Conditions

GENERAL CONDITIONS

ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS, TERMINOLOGY AND ORGANIZATIONAL ABBREVIATIONS 1.01

Defined Terms A.

Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents and printed with initial capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms.

1. ADDENDA - Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Contract Documents. CHANGE ORDER - A written order to CONTRACTOR executed in accordance with City procurement procedures, as amended authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued after the date of Award. CITY (CITY) - The City of Hollywood, Florida. COMMERCIALLY USEFUL FUNCTION - shall exist when the Local MBE/SBE is responsible for execution of the work for the contract and is carrying out the responsibilities by actually performing, managing and supervising the work involved. The Local MBE/SBE must also be responsible, with respect to materials and supplies used on the contract, for negotiating price, determining quality and quantity, and ordering the material, and installing. A commercially useful function is not performed if the role of the qualified Local MBE/SBE is that of an extra participant in a transaction, contract, or project through which funds are passed in order to obtain the appearance of qualified local MBE or qualified local SBE participation. COMMISSION - The City Commission of the City of Hollywood, Florida, being the legislative body of the CITY as set forth in the City of Hollywood Charter. CONTRACT - The written agreement between the CITY and the CONTRACTOR covering the work to be performed in accordance with the other Contract Documents which are attached to the Contract and made a part thereof. CONTRACTOR - The person, firm, or corporation with whom the CITY has entered into the Contract. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS - The Notice to Bidders, Instruction to Bidders, Proposal, Information Required of Bidders, all Bonds, Agreement, and all supporting documents, 00361334.0000

00 72 13-7

General Conditions

these General Requirements and Covenants, the Specifications, Drawings and Permits, together with all Addenda and Change Orders issued with respect thereto. CONTRACT PRICE - Total monies payable by the CITY to the CONTRACTOR under the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. CONTRACT TIME - The number of days agreed to in the Proposal, commencing with the date of the Notice to Proceed for completion of the work. CONTROL - shall mean having the primary power, direct or indirect, to influence the management of a business enterprise. The controlling party must have the demonstrable ability to make independent and unilateral business decisions on a dayto-day basis, as well as the independent and unilateral ability to make decisions which may influence and chart the future course of the business. DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION - The date when the work on the project, or specified part thereof, is substantially completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, such that the CITY can occupy or utilize the project or specified part thereof for the use and purpose for which it was intended as determined and accepted by the Engineer. DAYS - Calendar days of 24 hours measured from midnight. DRAWINGS - The drawings which show the character and scope of the work to be performed and which have been prepared by the DESIGN ENGINEER approved by ENGINEER and are referred to in and are a part of the Contract Documents. ENGINEER - The Director of Utilities of the CITY of Hollywood, Florida, or his authorized designee. EXCUSABLE DELAY - Delay caused by the CITY, hurricane, tornadoes, fires, floods, epidemics or labor strikes. GENERAL CONDITIONS - That segment of the Contract Specifications incorporating the Provisions common to all CITY Construction Contracts. INEXCUSABLE DELAY - Any delay caused either (i) by events or circumstances within the control of the CONTRACTOR not specified in the definition of excusable delay. INSPECTOR - The authorized field representative of the ENGINEER. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES - The amount prescribed in the General Requirements to be paid the CITY, or to be deducted from any payments due the CONTRACTOR for each day's delay in completing the whole or any specified portion of the work beyond the Contract Time. LOCAL BUSINESS – shall mean a business which is duly licensed and authorized to 00361334.0000

00 72 13-8

General Conditions

engage in the business at issue and which maintains a permanent principal place of operation with full time personnel within the corporate limits of the City of Hollywood, Florida. A Post Office Box(P.O. Box) shall not be sufficient to constitute a “local business.” The business has the burden of demonstrating that it meets this definition. MINORITY – shall mean a person who is a citizen or lawful permanent resident of the United States and who is a Woman, Black American, Hispanic American, Native American, Asian Pacific American, Subcontinent Asian American or other minorities found to be disadvantaged by the SBA. NOTICE OF AWARD - The written notice by the CITY to the successful Bidder stating that upon his execution of the Agreement and other requirements as listed therein within the time specified the CITY will sign and deliver the Agreement. MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE – shall mean a currently functioning business enterprise which (a) is an independent for profit business concern that is a least 51% owned by minority group member(s); (b) is independently operated and controlled by the minority group member(s); (c) demonstrates the capability to perform a line of business; (d) provides a commercially useful function according to the customs and practices of the industry and (e) is qualified by the City of Hollywood, Florida. NOTICE TO PROCEED - A written notice by the ENGINEER to the CONTRACTOR fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which the CONTRACTOR shall start to perform his obligation under the Contract Documents. "OR EQUAL" - Equivalent or superior in construction, efficiency and effectiveness to a type, brand, model or process called out in the Contract Documents to establish a basis of quality as determined by the ENGINEER. SHOP DRAWINGS - All certified affidavits, drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by CONTRACTOR, a Subcontractor, manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or distributor and submitted by CONTRACTOR to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the WORK. SMALL BUSINESS ENTERPRISE – shall mean a currently functioning business enterprise which (a) is an independent for profit concern that is at least 51% owned by non-minority group member(s); (b) is independently operated and controlled by the nonminority group member(s); (c) demonstrates the capability to perform in a line of business; (d) provides a commercially useful function according to the customs and practices of the industry; and (e) is qualified by the City of Hollywood, Florida. NOTE: In the event 50% of the local business is owned by a minority group member and 50% of the local business is owned by a non-minority group member, the designation selected on the Local Minority Business Enterprise and Local Small 00361334.0000

00 72 13-9

General Conditions

Business Enterprise Program application will be accepted. SMALL BUSINESS NET WORTH SIZE STANDARD – The size standard for a minority business enterprise and a small business enterprise that participates in the City of Hollywood’s Local MBE/SBE Program shall mean an independently owned and operated business concern that employs 50 or fewer permanent full-time employees and whose annual net worth does not exceed $2,000,000. To determine the net worth, the City shall consider the most recent annual financial statement for the business or; in the case of sole proprietorships, annual financial statements for the business and the business CITY. The applicant must provide documentation to demonstrate that the business employs 50 or fewer permanent full-time employees averaged over a two year period. SPECIFICATIONS - Division 1 through 17 of these Contract Documents, consisting of administrative details and written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, standards and workmanship. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS - Division 1 of the Contract Specifications incorporating the provisions peculiar to a specific project. SUBCONTRACTOR - An individual, firm or corporation having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the work SURETY - The person, firm or corporation responsible for the Bidder's acts in the execution of the Contract, or which is bound to the CITY with and for the CONTRACTOR to insure performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations pertaining to the work. WORK - All the work materials or products specified, indicated, shown or contemplated in the Contract Documents to construct and complete the improvement, including all alterations, modifications, amendments or extension thereto made by Change Orders.

1.02

Terminology A.

The words and terms referenced in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning.

B.

Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives 1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed”, “as approved”, “as ordered”, “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or

00361334.0000

00 72 13-10

General Conditions

determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. C.

Day

D.

1. The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective 1.

The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. does not conform to the Contract Documents, or b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or c. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by City at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05).

E.

Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide 1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. When “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide” is not used in connection

00361334.0000

00 72 13-11

General Conditions

with services, materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of Contractor, “provide” is implied. F.

1.03

Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. Organizational Abbreviations

Abbreviations of organizations which may be used in these Specifications are: AASHTO:

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

ACI:

American Concrete Institute

AIA:

American Institute of Architects

AISC:

American Institute of Steel Construction

AITC:

American Institute of Timber Construction

ANSI:

American National Standards Institute

APWA:

American Public Works Association

ASTM:

American Society for Testing and Materials

ASCE:

American Society of Civil Engineers

ASME:

American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASHRAE:

American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers

AWPA:

American Wood Preservers Association

AWWA:

American Water Works Association

AWS:

American Welding Society

BCEQCB:

Broward County Environmental Quality Control Board

CRSI:

Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute

FDEP:

Florida Department of Environmental Protection

FDNR:

Florida Department of Natural Resources

00361334.0000

00 72 13-12

General Conditions

FDOT:

Florida Department of Transportation

FPL:

Florida Power and Light

IEEE:

Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

NACE:

National Association of Corrosion Engineers

NCPI:

National Clay Pipe Institute

NEC:

National Electrical Code

NEMA:

National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NFPA:

National Fire Protection Association

OSHA:

Occupational Safety and Health Act

PCI:

Prestressed Concrete Institute

SFBC:

South Florida Building Code, Broward Edition, Latest Revision

SFWMD:

South Florida Water Management District

SSPC:

Structural Steel Painting Council

UL:

Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

UNCLE: 4770)

Utility Notification Center for Location before Excavation (1-800-432-

USEPA:

United States Environmental Protection Agency

USGS:

United States Geological Survey

WWEMA:

Water and Wastewater Equipment Manufacturers Association

ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01

Contract Document Discrepancies: Any discrepancies, conflicts, errors or omissions found in the Contract Documents shall be promptly reported to the ENGINEER who will issue a correction, if necessary, in writing. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with any corrective measures regarding the same as prescribed by the ENGINEER.

00361334.0000

00 72 13-13

General Conditions

2.02

Submissions: Unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents, within seven days subsequent to the CONTRACTOR executing and submitting the required documents of Article 15 in the Instructions to Bidders, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER an estimated progress schedule indicating the starting and completion days of the various stages of the work. A preliminary Schedule of Values and a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing submissions may also be required by Section 01340 of Division 1 - General Requirements.

2.03

Pre-construction Conference: The Contractor will be required to attend a mandatory Pre- Construction Conference for review of the above schedules, establishing procedures and establishing a working understanding among the parties as to the work.

2.04

Contract Time: The Contract Time will commence on the date of the Notice to Proceed and shall exist for the total number of days as specified in the Bid Form as modified by any subsequent Change Orders, Unless the CONTRACTOR fails to complete the requirements of the Instructions to Bidders, the additional time in days (including weekends) required to correctly complete the documents will be deducted by CITY from the Contract Time specified by the CONTRACTOR in this Proposal.

2.05

Computation of Time: When any period of time is referred to the Contract Documents by days, it shall be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a legal holiday, such day shall be omitted from the computation.

2.06

Commencement of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall not perform work at the site prior to the date of the Notice to Proceed.

2.07

Extension of Contract Time: Extensions of time shall be based solely upon the effect of delays to the work as a whole. Extensions of time shall not be granted for delays to the work, unless the CONTRACTOR can clearly demonstrate, through schedule analysis, that the delay to the work as a whole arose in accordance with Article 11, Changes in Contract Time and that such delays did or will, in fact, delay the progress of work as a whole. Time extensions shall not be allowed for delays to parts of the work that are not on the critical path of the Project schedule. Time extensions shall

00361334.0000

00 72 13-14

General Conditions

not be granted until all float or contingency time, at the time of the delay, available to absorb specific delays and associated impacts, is used.

2.08

Notice and Service Thereof: All notices, demands, requests, instructions, approvals and claims shall be in writing. Notices, demands, etc. shall be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the business address as defined at the PreConstruction Conference.

2.09

Separate Contract: The CITY reserves the right to let other Contracts in connection with this Project. The CONTRACTOR shall afford other Contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage for their materials and the execution of their work and shall properly connect and coordinate his work with theirs.

2.10

Assignments of Contract: No assignment by the CONTRACTOR of the Contract or of any part thereof, or any monies due or to become due thereunder shall be made.

2.11

Patents: It is mutually understood and agreed that without exception, Contract prices are to include all royalties and costs arising from patents, trademarks, and copyrights in any way involved in the work. It is the intent that whenever the Contractor is required or desired to use any design, device, material or process covered by letters, patent, or copyright, the right for such use shall be provided for by suitable legal agreements with the Patentee or CITY and a copy of this agreement shall be filed with the ENGINEER. However, whether or not such an agreement is made or filed as noted, the CONTRACTOR and the Surety in all cases shall indemnify and save harmless the CITY from any and all claims for infringement by reason of the use of any such patented design, device, material or process, to be performed under the Contract, and shall indemnify the said CITY from any costs, expenses, and damages which it may be obliged to pay, by reason of such infringement, at any time during the prosecution or after the completion of the work.

2.12

Federal Excise Tax: The forms needed for applying for exemption certificates for materials and equipment, normally subject to the Federal Excise Tax, may be obtained from the Director of Internal Revenue, Jacksonville, Florida.

00361334.0000

00 72 13-15

General Conditions

The CONTRACTOR is solely responsible for obtaining the desired exemption certificate from the Federal Government. 2.13

Savings Due to Excise Tax Exemptions: The Bidder shall include in the Bid price the estimated cost of all goods, supplies and equipment which will be incorporated in the Work and the taxes that the Bidder would be required to pay if the Bidder were to purchase such goods, supplies or equipment. By subsequent Change Order(s), the parties shall reduce the Bid price to reflect any goods, supplies and equipment purchased directly by City and the resulting tax savings due to City's exemption from Excise Taxes. CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required to be paid by CONTRACTOR in accordance with the laws and regulations of the State of Florida and its political subdivisions. Consistent with the tax exemption for municipalities provided by state law, CITY and CONTRACTOR shall jointly operate so that CITY may purchase directly, goods, supplies and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. The goods, supplies and equipment that will be purchased by CITY shall be approved in advance by the parties. With respect to all goods, supplies and equipment to be purchased by CITY, CONTRACTOR shall, on behalf of CITY, take all actions necessary and appropriate to cause all purchases to be made and shall be responsible for delivery of all such goods, supplies and equipment, including verification of correct quantities and documents or orders, coordination of purchases and delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, unloading, handling and storage through installation, obtaining warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of the goods, supplies and equipment at the time of delivery, and other arrangements normally required for the particular goods, supplies or equipment purchased. Unless otherwise directed by CITY, such actions shall also include taking the lead in efforts to resolve any and all disputes with the vendor. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that each vendor of goods, supplies and equipment purchased by CITY agrees in writing to the terms and conditions contained in CITY'S standard purchase order, which terms and conditions are set forth in Section 00800 of the Contract Documents. Even though CITY may purchase such goods, supplies and equipment, the goods, supplies and equipment shall be stored at the site in the same manner as goods, supplies and equipment purchased by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall hold CITY harmless from delays in manufacturing, delivery, and other unforeseen conditions that may arise as part of the procurement of CITY-purchased goods, supplies and equipment.

00361334.0000

00 72 13-16

General Conditions

2.14

Overtime Work: The CONTRACTOR shall receive no additional compensation for overtime work, i.e., work in excess of eight hours in any one calendar day or 40 hours in any one calendar week, even though such overtime work may be required under emergency conditions and may be ordered by the ENGINEER in writing. Additional compensation will be paid the CONTRACTOR for overtime work only in the event extra work is ordered by the ENGINEER and the Change Order specifically authorizes the use of overtime work and then only to such extent as overtime wages are regularly being paid by the CONTRACTOR for overtime work of a similar nature in the same locality.

2.15

Inspections and Testing during Overtime: The CONTRACTOR shall establish a normal work schedule which does not exceed eight hours per day in a normal work day nor forty hours per week in a normal work week. Normal work days shall be Monday through Friday. Whenever CONTRACTOR's work requires scheduled overtime, unless such overtime work is specifically required by the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the CITY for the extra costs incurred for providing Inspectors. Overtime shall be scheduled only after CONTRACTOR obtains written permission from the CITY. A change order shall be prepared to cover the CITY costs. Inspector costs shall be charged to the CONTRACTOR at a rate of $80.00 per hour with a minimum of four hours charged for weekends and holidays. If the CONTRACTOR has an overtime work force size of fifty or more persons a second Inspector will be required and the costs for two Inspectors will be $160.00 per hour.

2.16

Nights, Sunday or Holiday Work: Except upon specific permission of the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall not perform any work on Sundays or on legal State or Municipal holidays. In accordance with City of Hollywood Code of Ordinances, Section 21.49, no work between 6:00 p.m. and 8:00 a.m. will be permitted, except in case of an emergency, that violates Section 21.49 concerning noise levels. All costs of testing and inspection performed during night, Sunday or holiday work shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall notify all regulatory agencies, including but not limited to the City Police Department, Fire Department, and Code Enforcement Department.

2.17

Injury or Damage Claims: Should CITY or CONTRACTOR suffer injury or damage to their person or property because of any error, omission or act of the other party or of any of the other party's employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim shall be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. However, nothing herein

00361334.0000

00 72 13-17

General Conditions

shall be deemed to affect the rights, privileges and immunities of City as are set forth in Section 768.28, Florida Statutes. ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01

Intent: The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between the CITY and CONTRACTOR concerning the work. The Contract Documents can be altered only by Change Order. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that the CONTRACTOR, for due consideration, shall furnish all equipment, material, supervision and labor, (except as may be specifically noted otherwise) required or necessary to complete the work in total accordance with said Documents. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to describe the Project to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any work that may reasonably be inferred from the Drawings or Specifications as being required to produce the intended result shall be supplied whether or not it is specifically called for.

3.02

Order of Precedence of Contract Documents: In resolving differences resulting from conflicts, errors or discrepancies in any of the following Contract Documents, the order of precedence shall be as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Permits Change Orders Contract Agreement Specification Drawings

Within the Specifications the order of precedence is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Addenda Notice to Bidders Instructions to Bidders Supplementary General Conditions General Conditions Division 1, General Requirements Technical Specifications Referenced Standard Specifications

With reference to the Drawings the order of precedence is as follows: 1. 2. 3.

Figures Govern over Scaled Dimensions Detail Drawings Govern over General Drawings Change Order Drawings Govern over Contract Drawings

00361334.0000

00 72 13-18

General Conditions

4. 3.03

Contract Drawings Govern over Standard or Shop Drawings Reference To Standards:

Any reference to standard Specifications, manuals or codes of any organization or governmental authority shall mean the latest edition, in effect as of the Bid Opening Date. ARTICLE 4 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.01

Rights-of-Way: Lands or Rights-of-Way for the work to be constructed under the Contract will be provided by the CITY. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall be interpreted as giving the CONTRACTOR exclusive occupancy of the lands or Rights-of-Way provided. Any additional lands or Rights-of-Way required for construction operations shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR at his own expense; provided, that the CONTRACTOR shall not; and the CITY nor the ENGINEER shall not be liable for any claims or damages resulting from the CONTRACTOR's unauthorized trespass or use of any such properties.

4.02

Permits: When required by Article 21 of the Instruction to Bidders, the CONTRACTOR shall secure, from the agencies having jurisdiction, the necessary permits to create obstructions, to make excavations if required under the Contract, and to otherwise encroach upon Rights-of-Way, and to present evidence to the ENGINEER that such permission has been granted, before work is commenced. Regulations and requirements of all agencies concerned shall be strictly adhered to in the performance of the Contract. The enforcement of such requirements under the Contract shall not be made the basis for additional compensation.

4.03

Lines and Grades: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all grades and all other lines required for the proper execution of the work.

ARTICLE 5 – BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.01

Bid Guarantee: Bidders maybe required to submit a Bid Guarantee in an amount indicated in the NOTICE TO BIDDERS. This Guarantee may be a Certified or Cashier's Check on a solvent National or State Bank, or a Bid Bond written by a Surety licensed to do business in Florida and rated at least "A", Class X in the latest edition of

00361334.0000

00 72 13-19

General Conditions

"Best's Key Rating Guide" published by A.M. Best Company. 5.02

Performance and Payment Bond: CONTRACTOR shall furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, in amounts equal to the Contract Price as Security for the faithful performance and payment of CONTRACTOR's obligations. The Bond or Bonds shall remain in effect one year after the date of final payment. The Surety must be qualified as specified above in Paragraph 5.1. However, the City reserves the right to require additional bonds as set forth in Article 5 of the Contract.

5.03

Signatures: All Bonds signed by an Agent must be accompanied by a Certified copy of the authority to act, with said copy having been signed (not typed nor printed) by an Officer of the Surety and carrying the seal of the Surety.

5.04

Insurance Coverage: Within ten days from Notice of Award the CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect him from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the CONTRACTOR's operations under the Contract or Contract Documents, whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: A.

Claims under Workmen's Compensation, Disability Benefit and other similar employer's liability acts;

B.

Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death, or death of his employees;

C.

Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than his employees;

D.

Claims for damages covered by personal injury liability which are sustained (1) by any person as a result of any offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by the CONTRACTOR, or (2) by any other person;

E.

Claims for damages, other than to the work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and

F.

Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the CITYship, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.

00361334.0000

00 72 13-20

General Conditions

G.

5.05

The insurance policy shall not contain any exceptions that would exclude coverage for risks that can be directly or reasonably related to the scope of goods or services in this bid/proposal. A violation of this requirement at any time during the term, or any extension thereof shall be grounds for the immediate termination of any contract entered in to pursuant to this bid/proposal. In order to show that this requirement has been met, along with an insurance declaration sheet demonstrating the existence of a valid policy of insurance meeting the requirements of this bid/proposal, the successful proposer must submit a signed statement from insurance agency of record that the full policy contains no such exception. Certificates of Insurance:

Within ten days of award, the Contractor shall obtain a Certificate of Insurance reflecting the necessary coverages as required by the Contract Documents. Certificates of Insurance shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the CITY. The City of Hollywood must be named as additional insured on all coverage with the exception of Workmen's Compensation. Policies shall be issued by companies authorized to do business under the Laws of the State of Florida. Policyholders and Financial Ratings must be no less than "A" and Class X respectively in the latest edition of "Best Key Rating Guide", published by A.M. Best Company. 5.06

Insurance Limits of Liability: The insurance required by this Article shall be written for no less than the level of liability specified in "Insurance Requirements", Section 2 of the Supplementary General Conditions, or required by law, whichever is greater. The insurance shall include contractual liability insurance applicable to the CONTRACTOR's obligations under this contract. The level required in Section 2 of the Supplementary General Conditions will not be reduced for any reason.

ARTICLE 6 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.01

Laws/Regulations to Be Observed: The CONTRACTOR shall familiarize himself and comply with all Federal, State, County and CITY laws, by-laws, ordinances or regulations controlling the action or operation of those engaged or employed in the work or affecting material used, and govern himself in accordance with them. He shall indemnify and save harmless the CITY and all of its officers, agents and employees against any claims or liability arising from or based on the violation of any such laws, by-laws, ordinances, regulations, orders or decrees, whether by himself or his employees

00361334.0000

00 72 13-21

General Conditions

or Subcontractors. 6.02

6.03

Indemnification of City: (a)

CONTRACTOR shall, at all times hereafter, indemnify, hold harmless and defend CITY, its agents, servants and employees from and against any claim, demand or cause of action of any kind or nature arising out of error, omission or negligent act of CONTRACTOR, its agents, servants or employees in the performance of services under this Agreement.

(b)

CONTRACTOR further agrees, at all times hereafter, to indemnify, hold harmless and defend CITY, its agents, servants and employees from and against any claim, demand or cause of action of any kind or nature arising out of any conduct or misconduct of CONTRACTOR resulting from the performance of services under the Contract Documents.

(c)

The obligations of the CONTRACTOR above shall not extend to the liability of the City of Hollywood.

(d)

The provisions of (a) and (b) above shall survive the expiration or earlier termination of the Contract Documents. Guarantee of Payments:

The CONTRACTOR guarantees the payments of all just claims for materials, supplies, tools, labor and other just claims against him, or any Subcontractor in connection with this Contract, and his bond will not be released by final acceptance and payment by the CITY unless all such claims are paid or released. 6.04

Permits and Licenses: The CONTRACTOR shall obtain all permits and licenses required by the Contract Documents. A copy of the permit(s) and such conditions and requirements thereon are a part of the Contract Documents. Failure to obtain such permits or licenses shall subject the CONTRACTOR to the provisions of the South Florida Building Code, Broward Edition.

6.05

Emergencies: In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, CONTRACTOR, without special instruction or authorization from ENGINEER or CITY, is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER prompt written notice of any significant changes in the work or deviations from the Contract Documents caused thereby.

00361334.0000

00 72 13-22

General Conditions

6.06

Substitutes or "Or Equal”: A. Substitutes or "Or-Equal" items of material or equipment will not be considered unless the specific item of material or equipment is followed with the words ‘or equal’. B.

Substitute means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, sequence, technique or procedure of construction acceptable to the ENGINEER, if the CONTRACTOR submits sufficient information to allow the ENGINEER to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that indicated or required by the Contract Documents. The procedure for review by the ENGINEER will be similar to that provided in Paragraph 7.6 A.

C.

The CITY may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish at the CONTRACTOR's expense, a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.

D.

The ENGINEER will record time required by the ENGINEER and/or the ENGINEER's consultants in evaluating substitutions proposed by the CONTRACTOR and in making changes in the Contract Documents occasioned thereby. Whether or not the ENGINEER accepts a proposed substitute, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REIMBURSE THE CITY FOR THE CHARGES OF THE ENGINEER AND THE ENGINEER's CONSULTANTS FOR EVALUATING EACH PROPOSED SUBSTITUTE.

E.

Any and all costs which result from changes to/adaptations of the work shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR including but limited to design, materials, installation, etc.

6.07

Shop Drawings: Shop Drawing submittals shall be as follows: A.

The CONTRACTOR shall submit a sufficient number of copies of each Shop Drawing to enable the ENGINEER to retain three copies unless additional copies are specified in the Contract Documents. Resubmissions of Shop Drawings shall be made in the same quantity until final approval is obtained.

B.

The CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings for all equipment, apparatus, machinery, fixtures, piping, fabricated structures, manufactured

00361334.0000

00 72 13-23

General Conditions

articles and structural components Manufacturer's Certified Affidavit that the item supplied complies with the design Specifications, and all other submittal requirements. C.

Shop Drawings for structural components, electrical or mechanical systems shall be Certified by a Registered Engineer of the discipline involved.

D.

The CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly review and check the Shop Drawings, and each and every copy shall show his approval thereon. If the Shop Drawings show or indicate departures from the Contract requirements, the CONTRACTOR shall make specific mention thereof in his letter of transmittal. Failure to point out such departures shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from his responsibility to comply with the Drawings and Specifications.

E.

No approval will be given to partial submittals of Shop Drawings for items which interconnect and/or are interdependent. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to assemble the Shop Drawings for all such interconnecting and/or interdependent items, check them himself and then make one submittal to the ENGINEER along with his comments as to compliance, non-compliance, or features requiring special attention.

F.

If catalog sheets or prints of manufacturer's standard drawings are submitted as Shop Drawings, any additional information or changes on such Drawings shall be typewritten or lettered in ink.

G.

The CONTRACTOR shall keep one set of Shop Drawings marked with the ENGINEER's approval at the job site at all times.

H.

Where a Shop Drawing or sample is required by the Specifications, no related work shall be commenced until the submittal has been reviewed and approved by the ENGINEER.

I.

Approval of the Shop Drawings shall constitute approval of the subject matter thereof only, and not of any structure, material, equipment or apparatus shown or indicated. The approval of the Shop Drawings will be general and shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of responsibility for the accuracy of such Drawings, nor for the proper fitting and construction of the work, nor for the furnishing of materials or work required by the contract and not indicated on the Drawings. Approval shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for errors or omissions of any sort on the Shop Drawings.

6.08

Personnel: A.

Supervision and Superintendence:

00361334.0000

00 72 13-24

General Conditions

1. The CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, but the CONTRACTOR shall not be solely responsible for the negligence of others in the design or selection of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is indicated in and required by the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that the finished work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident Superintendent fluent in both oral and written communication in the English language, who shall not be replaced without written notice to the ENGINEER except under extraordinary circumstances. The Superintendent will be the CONTRACTOR's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of the CONTRACTOR. All communications given to the Superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR. B.

Workforce: 1. None but skilled workers shall be employed on work requiring special qualifications. When required in writing by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor shall discharge any person who is, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, incompetent, disorderly or otherwise unsatisfactory, and shall not again employ such discharged person on the work except with the consent of the ENGINEER. Such discharge shall not be the basis of any claim for damages against the CITY or any CITY agents.

2. With respect to all skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled workers employed on the Project under this Contract, preference in employment shall be given to persons residing in Hollywood when such persons are available and qualified to perform the work to which the employment relates. No person shall be employed in violation of the State or National Labor Laws. No person under the age of 16 years shall be employed on a Project under the Contract. No person whose age or physical condition is such as to make his employment dangerous to his health or safety or to the health or safety of others shall be employed on the Project under this Contract; provided that this shall not operate against the employment of physically handicapped persons, otherwise employable where such persons may be safely assigned to work which they can ably perform. No person 00361334.0000

00 72 13-25

General Conditions

currently serving sentences in a penal or correctional institution and no inmate of an institution for mentally defective shall be employed on a Project under this Contract without specific approval of the ENGINEER. 3. No discrimination shall be made in the employment of persons on the work by the CONTRACTOR or by any Subcontractor under him, because of the race, color, sex, age or religion of such persons, and there shall be full compliance with the provisions of applicable State and Federal laws in this regard. 6.09

Safety and Protection: A.

Federal Safety and Health Regulations: The CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors shall comply with the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Standards, promulgated by the Secretary of Labor under the "Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970".

B.

Responsibilities: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the work. The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. All employees on the work and other persons who may be affected thereby. 2. All the work and all materials or equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site. 3. Other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocating or replacement in the course of construction.

C.

Designated Safety Officer: The CONTRACTOR shall designate a responsible member of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the CONTRACTOR's Superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER.

D.

Protection of the Work:

00361334.0000

00 72 13-26

General Conditions

Until acceptance of the work by the CITY, it shall be under the charge and in care of the CONTRACTOR and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to the work by action of the elements or from the execution or from the non-execution of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall rebuild, restore and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the work occasioned by any of the above causes before its completion and acceptance. 6.10

Traffic Control, Public Safety and Convenience: A.

The CONTRACTOR shall at all times conduct his work so as to assure the least possible obstruction to traffic and inconvenience to the general public, and provide adequate protection of persons and property in the vicinity of the work.

B.

WHEN THE NORMAL FLOW OF TRAFFIC WILL BE IMPAIRED OR DISRUPTED IN ANY MANNER ON ANY STREET, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE POLICE TRAFFIC SERGEANT AT 921-3610 AT LEAST 48 HOURS IN ADVANCE.

C.

Streets shall not be closed, except when and where directed by the ENGINEER, and whenever a street is not closed the work must be conducted with the provision for safe passageway for traffic at all times. The CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary arrangements concerning maintenance of traffic and selection of detours required.

D.

When permission has been granted to close an existing roadway, or portion thereof, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish and erect signs, barricades, lights, flags and other protective devices as necessary subject to the approval of the ENGINEER. From sunset to sunrise, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish and maintain as many yellow lights as the ENGINEER may direct.

E.

During working hours the CONTRACTOR shall furnish watchmen in sufficient numbers to protect and divert the vehicular and pedestrian traffic from working areas closed to traffic, or to protect any new work. Failure to comply with this requirement will result in the ENGINEER shutting down the work until the CONTRACTOR shall have provided the necessary protection.

F.

No separate payment will be made for such signs, barricades, lights, flags, watchmen or other protective devices as required, with all costs thereof deemed to be included in the prices bid for the various items scheduled in the bid.

G

Sidewalks, gutters, drains, fire hydrants and private drives shall, insofar as

00361334.0000

00 72 13-27

General Conditions

practicable, be kept in condition for their intended uses. While the work is actually going on at any location, as much as half the street width at that location may be barricaded to exclude traffic entirely, but street traffic shall not be obstructed needlessly. Fire hydrants on or adjacent to the work shall be kept accessible to fire apparatus at all times, and no material or obstruction shall be placed within ten feet of any such hydrant. H.

6.11

Construction material stored upon the public street shall be placed so as to cause as little obstruction to the general public as is reasonably possible. Use of Explosives:

When the use of explosives is necessary for the prosecution of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall observe the utmost care so as not to endanger life or property, and whenever directed, the number and size of charges shall be limited. All explosives shall be stored in a secure manner and all such storage places shall be marked clearly "DANGEROUS EXPLOSIVES" and shall be in care of a competent watchman at all times. The CONTRACTOR must familiarize himself with all laws and ordinances pertaining thereto, and govern himself and his employees accordingly. 6.12

Loading of Structures: The CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall the CONTRACTOR subject any part of the work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it.

6.13

Concerning Subcontractors: A.

The CONTRACTOR, with his own forces, shall perform no less than 25% of the work as determined by the Contract price. Each Subcontractor shall be properly licensed for the type of work he is to perform.

B.

A copy of each Sub-Contract shall be filed promptly with the ENGINEER upon request. Each Sub-Contract shall contain a reference to the Contract between the CITY and the CONTRACTOR, and the terms and conditions of the Contract shall be made a part of each Sub-Contract. Each Sub-Contract shall provide for annulment of same by the CONTRACTOR upon written order of the ENGINEER if the Subcontractor fails to comply with the requirements of this Contract.

C.

The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to the CITY and ENGINEER for the acts and omissions of his Sub- Contractors and their employees to the same extent as he is responsible for the acts and omissions of his own employees. Nothing contained in this Contract shall create any

00361334.0000

00 72 13-28

General Conditions

contractual relationship between any Subcontractor and the CITY or ENGINEER nor relieve the CONTRACTOR of any liability or obligation under this Contract. 6.14

Materials and Equipment: A.

Material for the Work: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water and sanitary facilities and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the execution, testing, initial operation and completion of the work. 2. Unless otherwise specified, shown or permitted by the ENGINEER, all material and equipment incorporated in the work shall be new and of current manufacture. The ENGINEER may request the CONTRACTOR to furnish manufacturer's certificates to this effect. 3. The ENGINEER may require any or all materials to be subjected to test by means of samples or otherwise, at production points or after delivery. The CONTRACTOR shall afford such facilities as the ENGINEER may require for collecting and forwarding samples, which samples shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR without charge. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish evidence satisfactory to the ENGINEER that the materials and finished articles have passed the required test prior to the incorporation of such materials and finished articles in the work. Unless otherwise provided, the cost of such inspection and testing shall be as provided in Article 12.2. 4. All packaged manufactured products for use on the work shall be delivered to the work in their original, unopened packages, bearing thereon the manufacturer's name and the brand name of the product. 5. Wherever any product or material is selected to be used on the work, all such products or material shall be of the same brand and manufacture throughout the work. 6. All equipment, tools and machinery used for handling material or executing any part of the work shall be maintained in a satisfactory working condition. All equipment utilized on any portion of the work shall be such that no injury to personnel, the work, adjacent property or other objects will result from its use. 7. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or

00361334.0000

00 72 13-29

General Conditions

distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. B.

Storage of Materials: 1. All materials and equipment including that ordered by the CITY designed for permanent installation in the work shall be properly stored by the CONTRACTOR to insure protection against deterioration of any type. These materials shall be placed as to cause a minimum of inconvenience to other contractors on the work and to the public. The storage piles shall be arranged to facilitate inspections, and any deterioration shall be grounds for rejection. 2. Materials stored in public Rights-of-Way, shall be stored in such a manner so as to be compatible with the Traffic Control requirements set forth in Paragraph 7.10. Materials shall be stored so as not to deny access to public or private property. Stored materials shall be adequately marked with barricades and/or flashing warning lights, where necessary, so as to protect the materials from damage and to protect the public health, safety and welfare. 3. Lawns, grass plots or other private property shall not be used for storage purposes without written permission of the CITY or Lessee of that private property. Should the CONTRACTOR desire to store equipment or materials of any kind on the property of the CITY, he must obtain permission from the ENGINEER. The CITY reserves the right to order materials to be removed or relocated in such approved storage areas, if necessary. 4. The protection of stored materials shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility and the CITY OF HOLLYWOOD shall not be liable for any loss of materials, by theft or otherwise, nor for any damage to the stored materials.

C.

Salvage of Materials and Equipment: The CITY reserves the right to retain title to all soil, sand, stone, gravel, equipment, machinery or any other material that was a part of the structure, site or Right- of-Way and which was developed from excavations or other operations connected with the work. The CONTRACTOR will be permitted to use in the work, without charge, any such material which meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. For that material which the CITY desires to retain the CONTRACTOR shall, at his expense, transfer to a site within the CITY as designated by the ENGINEER. That material which the CITY does not wish to retain shall be the property of the CONTRACTOR and removed from the site at CONTRACTOR's expense.

00361334.0000

00 72 13-30

General Conditions

6.15

Temporary Utilities: The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain at his own expense, all water, power, telephone and sanitary facilities as required to comply with State and/or local Codes and Regulations. If water, including that for testing is required, it is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to arrange through the CITY Water Department for a water meter. A deposit to be paid by the CONTRACTOR is required for meter rental and all water shall be purchased at the prevailing rate.

6.16

Review of Records: The CONTRACTOR shall allow and permit the ENGINEER or his duly authorized representative to inspect and review all payrolls, records of personnel, conditions of employment, invoice of materials, books of accounts and other relevant data and records pertinent to the CONTRACT and Sub-Contracts.

6.17

Use of Premises: CONTRACTOR shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of workmen to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits or required by the Contract Documents, and shall not interfere with the premises or operation of the City Utilities facilities with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Construction which interferes with Plant Operations shall be fully coordinated and approved by the ENGINEER.

6.18

CONTRACTOR's Daily Reports: Except where otherwise provided, the CONTRACTOR shall complete a daily report indicating manpower, major equipment, Subcontractors, etc., involved in the performance of the work. The daily report shall be completed on forms approved by the ENGINEER, and shall be submitted to the ENGINEER at the conclusion of each work day.

6.19

Record Documents: The CONTRACTOR shall keep one record copy of all Specifications, Drawings, Addenda, Modifications, Shop Drawings and samples at the site, in good order and annotated to show all changes made during the construction process. These shall be available to ENGINEER for examination and shall be delivered to ENGINEER upon completion of the work.

6.20

Cleanliness of the Site: During the progress of the work, The CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the work. At the completion of the work the CONTRACTOR shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials, and shall leave the site clean and ready for occupancy by the CITY. The

00361334.0000

00 72 13-31

General Conditions

CONTRACTOR shall restore to their original condition those portions of the site not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.21

Dust Control: It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to control dust by watering as directed by the ENGINEER. The water used shall be paid for by the CONTRACTOR. Should the CONTRACTOR fail to control dust to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER, the CITY will control the dust by whatever means the CITY desires and the CONTRACTOR shall pay all expenses incurred by the CITY associated with the control of the dust.

6.22

Continuing the Work: The CONTRACTOR shall carry on the work and maintain the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the CITY. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the CONTRACTOR and the CITY may otherwise agree in writing.

6.23

Indemnification: In consideration of the amount listed in the Schedule of Prices Bid and other valuable consideration, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and save harmless the CITY, its officers, agents, and employees from or on account of any personal injury, loss of life or damage to property received or sustained by any person or persons during or on account of any operations connected with the construction of this Project; or by or in consequence of any negligence (excluding negligence of the CITY), in connection with the same; or by use of any improper materials or by or on account of any use of any improper materials or by or on account of any act or omission of the said Contractor or his subcontractor, agents, servants or employees. Contractor agrees to indemnify and save harmless the CITY against any liability arising from or based upon the violation of any federal, state, county or city laws, by-laws, ordinances or regulations by the Contractor, his subcontractor, agents, servants or employees. Contractor further agrees to indemnify and save harmless the CITY from all such claims and fees, and from any and all suits and actions of every name and description that may be brought against the CITY on account of any claims, fees, royalties, or costs for any invention or patent, and from any and all suits and actions that may be brought against the CITY for the infringement of any and all patents or patent rights claimed by any person, firm, or corporation. The indemnification provided above shall obligate the Contractor to defend at his own expense or to provide for such defense, at the CITY's option, any and all claims or liability and all suits and actions of every name and description that may be brought against the CITY which may result from the operations and activities under this Contract whether the construction operations be performed by the Contractor, his subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either.

00361334.0000

00 72 13-32

General Conditions

Nothing in this indemnification shall be deemed to affect the rights, privileges or immunities of the CITY as set forth in Section 768.28, Florida Statutes. The CITY will pay to the Contractor the specific consideration, in the amount stated in the Schedule of Prices Bid. The Contractor shall acknowledge the receipt of payment and other good and valuable consideration from the CITY which has been paid to him as specific consideration for the indemnification provided herein and in accordance with the provisions of Chapter F.S.A., Section 725.06. ARTICLE 7 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 7.01 A.

Related Work at Site City may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with City’s employees, or through other direct contracts therefore, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then: 1. written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and

B.

C.

2. if City and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility owner and City, if City is performing other work with City’s employees, proper and safe access to the Site, provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work, and shall properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, Contractor may cut or alter the work of others with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between City and such utility owners and other contractors. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work.

00361334.0000

00 72 13-33

General Conditions

Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. ARTICLE 8 – CITY’S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.01

Communications: The CITY shall issue all communications to the CONTRACTOR through the ENGINEER.

8.02

Furnish Contract Documents: The CITY shall furnish the number of Contract Documents as specified in the Supplementary General Conditions to the CONTRACTOR at no cost. Referenced Standard Specifications Manuals, guidebooks, etc., will not be provided.

8.03

Furnish Right-of-Way: The CITY shall furnish the necessary land or Right-of-Way on which the work is to be accomplished, and will provide lines and grades as specified in Article 6.

8.04

Timely Delivery of Materials: The CITY shall be responsible for the delivery of any CITY furnished material, equipment or labor as specified in the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 9 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.01

Authority of the Engineer: A.

The general supervision of the execution of this Contract is vested in the ENGINEER who is the CITY's sole representative during the construction period. The instructions of the ENGINEER are to be strictly and promptly followed in every case. The CONTRACTOR's representative (Article 7.8 A. 1.) shall be responsible for the execution of any instructions given by the ENGINEER during the absence of the CONTRACTOR.

B.

The ENGINEER is the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of work or requirements of the Contract Documents shall be referred in writing to the ENGINEER within 15 days of the event, with a request for a formal decision, which the ENGINEER will render in writing within a reasonable time. This rendering of a decision by the ENGINEER will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the CITY or CONTRACTOR of rights or

00361334.0000

00 72 13-34

General Conditions

remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or at law in respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter. C.

The ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness any written clarifications or interpretations of the Contract Documents as he shall deem necessary, which shall be consistent with or reasonably inferable from the overall intent of the Contract Documents. If, as a result of a clarification or interpretation, either the CONTRACTOR or ENGINEER believes a Change Order is justified, it shall be submitted.

D.

The ENGINEER has approval authority over the acceptability of all material or equipment furnished, Shop Drawings, Change Orders, work performed and the rate of progress of the work. Verification of the quantities of work performed for pay purposes is the responsibility of the ENGINEER.

E.

The ENGINEER also has the authority to disapprove or reject work which is defective, and may require special inspection or testing of the work, whether or not it is fabricated, installed or completed.

F.

The ENGINEER has the authority to suspend the work wholly or in part for such period or periods as may be deemed necessary, due to the unsuitable prosecution of the work, or for such time as is necessary due to failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to carry out orders given or perform any or all provisions of the Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall not suspend the work and shall not remove any equipment, tools, lumber or other materials without the written permission of the ENGINEER.

9.02

Access to the Work: The ENGINEER is to have free access to the materials and work at all times for laying out, measuring or inspecting same, and the CONTRACTOR is to afford him all necessary facilities and assistance for so doing.

9.03

Limitations on The ENGINEER's Responsibilities: A.

Neither the ENGINEER's authority to act under this Article or elsewhere in the Contract Documents nor any decision made by the ENGINEER in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of the ENGINEER to the CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or distributor or any of their agents or employees or any other person performing any of the work.

B.

Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms "as ordered", "as directed", "as required", "as allowed" or terms of like effect or import are used, or the adjectives "reasonable", "suitable", "acceptable", "proper" or

00361334.0000

00 72 13-35

General Conditions

"satisfactory" or adjectives of like effect or import are used, to describe requirement, direction, review or judgment of the ENGINEER as to the work, it is intended that such requirement, direction, review or judgment will be solely to evaluate the work for compliance with the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective never indicates that the ENGINEER has authority to supervise or direct performance of the work. C.

The ENGINEER will not be responsible for the CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, nor the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, and the ENGINEER will not be responsible for the CONTRACTOR's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

D.

The ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the CONTRACTOR or of any Subcontractors, or of the agents or employees of any CONTRACTOR or subcontractor, or of any other persons at the site or otherwise performing any of the work.

9.04

Inspectors: A.

Inspectors employed by the CITY assist the ENGINEER in ascertaining the work conforms to the Contract Documents and are authorized to inspect all work done and material furnished as representatives of the ENGINEER. Inspectors shall be stationed at the site of the work to report to the ENGINEER as to the progress of the work and the quality of workmanship and material.

B.

In case of any dispute arising between the CONTRACTOR and the Inspector, the Inspector shall have the authority to reject material or to suspend the work until the question of issue can be referred to and decided upon by the ENGINEER.

C.

If the CONTRACTOR refuses to suspend operation on verbal order, the Inspector shall issue a written order giving the reason for shutting down the work. After placing the order in the hands of the man in charge, the Inspector shall immediately leave the job. work done during the absence of the Inspector, after such written notice, will not be accepted nor paid for.

D.

Inspectors are not authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge, relax or release any requirements of these Contract Documents, nor to issue instructions contrary to them. Inspectors shall in no case act as foreman or perform other duties for the CONTRACTOR, nor interfere with management of the work by the latter. Any instructions which Inspectors may give the CONTRACTOR shall in no way be construed as releasing the CONTRACTOR from fulfillment of the terms of the Contract.

00361334.0000

00 72 13-36

General Conditions

E.

9.05

The payment of any compensation, whatever may be its character or form, or the giving of any gratuity, or the granting of any valuable favor, by the CONTRACTOR to any Inspector, directly or indirectly, is strictly prohibited and any such act on the part of the CONTRACTOR will constitute a violation of this Contract and may subject the CONTRACTOR to other penalties provided for by law or ordinance. Inspections:

A.

The ENGINEER will make, or have made, such inspections and tests as he deems necessary to assure that the work is being accomplished in accordance with the requirements of the Contract. In the event such Inspections or tests reveal non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract, the CONTRACTOR shall bear the cost of such corrective measures as well as the cost of subsequent reinspection and retesting.

B.

Work done in the absence of a prescribed inspection may be required to be removed and replaced under proper inspection. The entire cost of removal and replacement, including the cost of all material which may be furnished by the CITY and used in the work thus removed, shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR, regardless of whether the work removed is found to be defective or not. Work covered up without the authority of the ENGINEER, shall, upon order of the ENGINEER, be uncovered to the extent required, and the CONTRACTOR shall similarly bear the entire cost of performing all the work and furnishing all the material necessary for the removal of the covering and its subsequent replacement.

C.

Unless otherwise provided, the cost of inspection and all inspection fees imposed by public agencies other than the fees associated with the issuance of the Master Building Permit by the City of Hollywood shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR.

D.

No inspection nor any failure to inspect at any time or place shall relieve the CONTRACTOR from any obligation to perform all of the work in strict conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 10 – CHANGES IN THE WORK/CONTRACT PRICE 10.01

Changes in the Work or Terms of Contract Documents: A.

Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety CITY reserves and shall have the right, from time to time to make such increases, decreases or other changes in the character or quantity of the Work as may be considered necessary or desirable to complete fully and acceptably the proposed construction in a satisfactory manner. Any extra or additional work within the scope of this Project must be accomplished by means of appropriate Clarifications, Field Orders, or Change Orders.

00361334.0000

00 72 13-37

General Conditions

B.

Any changes to the terms of the Contract Documents must be contained in a written document in accordance with Section 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures, executed by the parties hereto, with the same formality and of equal dignity prior to the initiation of any work reflecting such change. This section shall not prohibit the issuance of Change Orders executed only by CITY as hereinafter provided.

10.02

Supplemental Instructions - Clarifications: A.

B.

10.03

The CITY, through the ENGINEER, shall have the right to approve and issue Clarifications setting forth written interpretations of the intent of the Contract Documents and ordering minor changes in Work execution, providing the Clarifications involve no change in the Contract Price or the Contract Time. The ENGINEER shall have the right to approve and issue Clarifications setting forth written orders, instructions, or interpretations concerning the Contract Documents or its performance, provided such Clarifications involve no change in the Contract Price or the Contract Time. Field Orders / Change Orders:

A.

Changes in the quantity or character of the Work within the scope of the Project which are not properly the subject of Clarifications, including all changes resulting in changes in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, shall be authorized only by Field Orders or Change Orders approved in advance and issued in accordance with the provisions of the CITY Procurement Code, as amended from time to time.

B.

CONTRACTOR shall not start work on any changes requiring an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time until a Field Order or Change Order setting forth the adjustments is approved by the CITY. Upon receipt of a Change Order CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the work set forth within the document.

C.

Field Orders shall be issued for change in Contract Price related to Cost Allowances specifically included on the Bid Form. Change Orders shall be issued when required for all other Contract Price Changes. Hereinafter, the term “Change Order(s)” shall be used to include “Change Orders” and “Field Orders” with the exception that Field Order shall not be used for any Contract Time adjustments.

D.

In the event satisfactory adjustment cannot be reached for any item requiring a change in the Contract Price or Contract Time, and a Change

00361334.0000

00 72 13-38

General Conditions

Order has not been issued, CITY reserves the right at its sole option to either terminate the Contract as it applies to the items in question and make such arrangements as may be deemed necessary to complete the disputed work; or the work shall be performed on the “cost of work” basis as described in Article 10.4. E.

On approval of any Contract change increasing the Contract Price, CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the performance bond and payment bond are increased so that each reflects the total Contract Price as increased.

F.

Under circumstances determined necessary by CITY, Change Orders may be issued unilaterally by CITY.

10.04

Value of Change Order Work: A.

B.

The value of any work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be determined in one of the following ways: A.1

Where the work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of unit prices to the quantities of items involved, subject to the provisions of Article 10.4.G.

A.2

By mutual acceptance of a lump sum which CONTRACTOR and CITY acknowledge contains a component for overhead and profit.

A.3

On the basis of the "cost of work," determined as provided in this Article, plus a CONTRACTOR's fee for overhead and profit which is determined as provided in Article 10.4.D.

The term "cost of work" means the sum of all direct costs necessarily incurred and paid by CONTRACTOR in the proper performance of the Work described in the Change Order. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by CITY, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items and shall not include any of the costs itemized in Article 10.4.C. B.1

00361334.0000

Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of CONTRACTOR in the performance of the work described in the Change Order under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by CITY and CONTRACTOR. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the work covered by the Change Order shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise and payroll taxes, workers' or 00 72 13-39

General Conditions

workmen's compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay application thereto. Such employees shall include superintendents and foremen at the site. The expenses of performing the work after regular working hours, on Sunday or legal holidays shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by CITY. B.2

Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and manufacturers' field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to CONTRACTOR unless CITY deposits funds with CONTRACTOR with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to CITY. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds, and all returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to CITY and CONTRACTOR shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery and the parts thereof whether rented from CONTRACTOR or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by CITY with the advice of ENGINEER and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, installation, dismantling and removal thereof, all in accordance with the terms of said agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the work.

B.3

Payments made by CONTRACTOR to Subcontractors for work performed by Subcontractors, If required by CITY, CONTRACTOR shall obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to CONTRACTOR and shall deliver such bids to CITY who will then determine, with the advice of ENGINEER, which bids will be accepted. If the Subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of cost of the work plus a fee, the Subcontractor's cost of the work shall be determined in the same manner as CONTRACTOR'S cost of the work. All Subcontractors shall be subject to the other provisions of the Contract Documents insofar as applicable.

B.4

Cost of special engineers, including, but not limited to, engineers, architects, testing laboratories, and surveyors employed for services specifically related to the performance of the work described in the Change Order.

B.5

Supplemental costs including the following: The proportion of necessary transportation, travel and subsistence expenses of CONTRACTOR's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the work except for local travel to and from the site of the work.

00361334.0000

00 72 13-40

General Conditions

Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office and temporary facilities at the site and hand tools not owned by the workmen, which are consumed in the performance of the work, and cost less market value of such items used but not consumed which remains the property of CONTRACTOR. Sales, use, or similar taxes related to the work, and for which CONTRACTOR is liable, imposed by any governmental authority. Deposits lost for causes other than CONTRACTOR's negligence; royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. The cost of utilities, fuel and sanitary facilities at the site. Receipted minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the site, expressage and similar petty cash items in connection with the work. Cost of premiums for additional bonds and insurance required because of changes in the work. C.

The term "cost of the work" shall not include any of the following:

00361334.0000

C.1

Payroll costs and other compensation of CONTRACTOR's officers, executives, principals (of partnership and sole proprietorships), general managers, engineers, architects, estimators, lawyers, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks and other personnel employed by CONTRACTOR whether at the site or in its principal or a branch office for general administration of the work and not specifically included in the agreed-upon schedule of job classifications referred to in this Article, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by CONTRACTOR's fee.

C.2

Expenses of CONTRACTOR's principal and branch offices other than CONTRACTOR's office at the site.

C.3

Any part of CONTRACTOR's capital expenses, including interest on CONTRACTOR's capital employed for the work and charges against CONTRACTOR for delinquent payments.

C.4

Cost of premiums for all Bonds and for all insurance whether or not CONTRACTOR is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain the same, except for additional bonds and insurance required because of changes in the work.

C.5

Costs due to the negligence or neglect of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractors, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective work, disposal of materials or 00 72 13-41

General Conditions

equipment wrongly supplied and making good any damage to property. C.6

D.

Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the cost of any item not specifically and expressly included in this Section.

CONTRACTOR's fee allowed to CONTRACTOR for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: D.1

A mutually acceptable fixed fee or if none can be agreed upon,

D.2

A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the cost of the work: For costs incurred under Article 10.4.B.1, CONTRACTOR's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%). For costs incurred under Article 10.4.B.3 and B.4, CONTRACTOR's fee shall not exceed seven and one half percent (7.5%); and if a subcontract is on the basis of cost of the work plus a fee, the maximum allowable to the Subcontractor as a fee for overhead and profit shall not exceed ten percent (10%); No fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Article 10.4.B.5 and Article 10.4.C.

E.

The amount of credit to be allowed by CONTRACTOR to CITY for any such change which results in a net decrease in cost, will be the amount of the actual net decrease. When both additions and credits are involved in anyone change, the combined overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of the net increase, if any, however, CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to claim lost profits for any Work not performed.

F.

Whenever the cost of any work is to be determined pursuant to Articles 10.4.B and 10.4.C, CONTRACTOR will submit in a form acceptable to CONSUL T ANT an itemized cost breakdown together with the supporting data.

G.

Where the quantity of any item of the Work that is covered by a unit price is increased or decreased by more than twenty percent (20%) from the quantity of such work indicated in the Contract Documents, an appropriate Change Order shall be issued to adjust the unit price, if warranted.

H.

Whenever a change in the Work is to be based on mutual acceptance of a lump sum, whether the amount is an addition, credit or no change-in-

00361334.0000

00 72 13-42

General Conditions

cost, CONTRACTOR shall submit an initial cost estimate acceptable to ENGINEER and CITY.

I.

10.05

Breakdown shall list the quantities and unit prices for materials, labor, equipment and other items of cost.

H.2

Whenever a change involves CONTRACTOR and one or more Subcontractors and the change is an increase in the Contract Price, overhead and profit percentage for CONTRACTOR and each Subcontractor shall be itemized separately.

Each Change Order must state within the body of the Change Order whether it is based upon unit price, negotiated lump sum, or "cost of the work." Notification and Claim for Change of Contract Price:

A.

10.06

H.1

Any claim for a change in the Contract Price shall be made by written notice in accordance with Section 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures by CONTRACTOR to the CITY and to ENGINEER within five (5) calendar days of the commencement of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature and cause of the claim. Thereafter, within twenty (20) calendar days of the termination of the event giving rise to the claim, written notice of the extent of the claim with supporting information and documentation shall be provided unless ENGINEER allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim and such notice shall be accompanied by CONTRACTOR's written notarized statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the CONTRACTOR has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for changes in the Contract Price shall be in accordance with Articles 10.3 and 10.4 hereof, if CITY and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree. IT IS EXPRESSLY AND SPECIFICALLY AGREED THAT ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT PRICE SHALL BE WAIVED IF NOT SUBMITTED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION. Notice of Change: If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or change in the Contract Price is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to the Surety, it will be CONTRACTOR's responsibility to so notify the Surety, and the amount of each applicable Bond shall be adjusted accordingly. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish proof of such adjustment to the CITY. Failure of the CONTRACTOR to obtain such approval from the Surety may be a basis for termination of this Contract by the CITY.

00361334.0000

00 72 13-43

General Conditions

10.07

Records: The CONTRACTOR's representative and the ENGINEER shall compare records of extra work done at the end of the day. Such records shall be made in duplicate upon a form provided for such purpose by the ENGINEER and shall be signed by both the Inspector and the CONTRACTOR's representative, one copy being submitted to the ENGINEER and the other being retained by the CONTRACTOR.

10.08

Canceled Items and Payments Therefore: The CITY COMMISSION shall have the right to cancel those portions of the Contract relating to the construction of any item provided therein. Such cancellation shall entitle the CONTRACTOR to payment in a fair and equitable amount covering all items of cost incurred by him prior to the date of cancellation or suspension of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall be allowed a profit percentage on the materials used and on construction work actually performed, at the same rates as provided for "Extra Work", but no allowance will be made for anticipated profits. Acceptable materials ordered by the CONTRACTOR or delivered on the work, prior to date of such cancellation or suspension, may be purchased from the CONTRACTOR by the CITY at actual cost and shall thereupon, become property of the CITY, or may be returned to the manufacturer for a reasonable restocking charge. Full Payment:

10.09

The Compensation herein provided shall be received and accepted by the CONTRACTOR as payment in full for all extra work done or costs incurred in event of cancellation. ARTICLE 11 – CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME 11.01

Change Order: The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. A FULLY EXECUTED CHANGE ORDER MUST EXIST PRIOR TO EXTENSION OR SHORTENING OF THE CONTRACT TIME.

11.02

Notification and Claim for Change of Contract Time: A.

Any claim for a change in the Contract Time shall be made by written notice by the CONTRACTOR to the CITY and to ENGINEER within five (5) calendar days of the commencement of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature and cause of the claim and in accordance with Section 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures. Thereafter within twenty (20) calendar days of the termination of the event

00361334.0000

00 72 13-44

General Conditions

giving rise to the claim, written notice of the extent of the claim with supporting information and documentation shall be provided unless ENGINEER allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim and such notice shall be accompanied by CONTRACTOR’s written notarized statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the CONTRACTOR has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for changes in the Contract Time shall be determined in accordance with Articles 10.3 and 10.4 hereof, if CITY and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree. IT IS EXPRESSLY AND SPECIFICALLY AGREED THAT ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT TIME SHALL BE WAIVED IF NOT SUBMITTED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION. B.

11.03

The Contract Time will be extended an amount equal to time lost on critical Work items due to delays beyond the control of and through no fault or negligence of CONTRACTOR if a claim is made thereafter as provided in Article 11.2. Such delays shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by any separate contractor employed by CITY, fire, floods, labor disputes, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God Basis for Extension:

Extensions of time shall be considered and will be based solely upon the effect of delays to the work as a whole. Extensions of time shall not be granted for delays to the work, unless the CONTRACTOR can clearly demonstrate, through schedule analysis, that the delay to the work as a whole arose in accordance with Article 12.3 or Article 15.1, and that such delays did or will, in fact, delay the progress of work as a whole. Time extensions shall not be allowed for delays to parts of the work that are not on the critical path of the project schedule. Time extensions shall not be granted until all float or contingency time, at the time of the delay, available to absorb specific delays and associated impacts is used. 11.04

Change of Time Due to Contract Execution Problems: Refer to Article 3.4 for a decrease in Contract Time when the CONTRACTOR fails to return the correctly executed Contract Documents within the time allowed.

11.05

Change of Time Due to Change Order Evaluation: When evaluating a proposed Change Order, the ENGINEER shall have access to any available float or contingency time. Extension will only be considered in accordance with Article 11.3.

00361334.0000

00 72 13-45

General Conditions

11.06

Change of Time and Inspection and Testing: Neither observations by the ENGINEER, nor inspections, tests or approvals by others, passing or failing, will be cause for consideration of time extension.

11.07

Change of Time and Defective Work: A.

If WORK is found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall bear all remedial expenses including any additional costs experienced by CITY due to delays to others performing additional WORK. CONTRACTOR shall further bear the responsibility for maintaining schedule, and will be excluded from a time extension and the recovery of delay damages due to the uncovering.

B.

If the WORK is found to be defective per the Specifications, but the CITY chooses to accept it at its sole discretion, CONTRACTOR shall bear the responsibility for maintaining schedule, and will be excluded from a time extension and the recovery of delay damages due to the uncovering.

11.08

Liquidated Damages: All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence. The provisions of this Article 11 shall not exclude recovery for damages by CITY as indicated in Section 3 of the Supplementary General Conditions.

ARTICLE 12 – WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE; TEST AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 12.01

Warranty and Guarantee: The CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to the CITY and the ENGINEER that all work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Prompt notice of all defects shall be given to the CONTRACTOR. All defective work, whether or not in place, may be rejected, corrected or accepted as provided in this Article.

12.02

Tests and Inspections: A.

The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER and, when appropriate, the Building Department and other regulatory authorities which have jurisdiction over the work, timely notice of readiness of the work for all required inspections, tests or approvals.

B.

All inspections performed as a result of the issuance of the Master Building Permit shall be performed by the CITY. All costs associated with such inspections shall be paid by the CITY, EXCEPT THAT should said test or inspection fail to pass the CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs

00361334.0000

00 72 13-46

General Conditions

associated with the rework and the retesting. C.

When any other regulatory authority, by virtue of its rules or regulations, requires specific tests or inspections, the CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for and pay all costs in connection with said tests and inspections.

D.

The CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspection or testing required in connection with the ENGINEER's acceptance of a manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or distributor of materials or equipment proposed to be incorporated in the work, or of materials or equipment submitted for approval prior to ENGINEER's acceptance thereof for incorporation in the work and as otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.

E.

Neither observations by the ENGINEER nor inspections, tests or approvals by others shall relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligations to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

12.03

Uncovering Work: A.

If any work that is to be inspected, tested or approved is covered without written concurrence of the ENGINEER, it must, if requested, by the ENGINEER, be uncovered. Such uncovering and replacement shall be at the CONTRACTOR's expense.

B.

CONTRACTOR must contact all regulatory agencies issuing construction permits to make all necessary inspections. If CONTRACTOR fails to have the necessary inspections performed and such failure results in uncovering of work already performed, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all related time delays and monetary costs.

C.

If the ENGINEER considers it necessary or advisable that work previously covered with his permission or cognizance be observed, inspected or tested, the CONTRACTOR, at the ENGINEER's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as the ENGINEER may require, that portion of the work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such work is defective, the CONTRACTOR shall bear all the expenses of such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory reconstruction, including compensation for additional professional services. If, however, such work is not found to be defective the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing and reconstruction if he makes a claim therefore in accordance with Article 10.2 and Article 11.2.

00361334.0000

00 72 13-47

General Conditions

12.04

City May Stop the Work: If the work is defective, or the CONTRACTOR fails to supply sufficient skilled workmen or suitable materials or equipment, the CITY may order the CONTRACTOR to stop the work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of the CITY to stop the work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the CITY to exercise this right for the benefit of the CONTRACTOR or any other party.

12.05

Correction or Removal of Defective Work: If required by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to the CITY and as specified by the ENGINEER either correct any defective work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or if the work has been rejected by the ENGINEER, remove it from the site and replace it with nondefective work.

12.06

One Year Correction Period: If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or Final Completion as applicable, or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any work is found to be defective, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly without cost to the CITY and in accordance with the ENGINEER's written instructions, either correct such defective work, or if it has been rejected by the ENGINEER remove it from the site and replace it with nondefective work. If the CONTRACTOR does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the ENGINEER may have the defective work corrected or the rejected work removed and replaced, and all direct and indirect costs of such removal and replacement, including compensation for additional professional services, shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR.

12.07

Acceptance of Defective Work: If instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective work, the ENGINEER prefers to accept it, he may do so. In such case, if acceptance occurs prior to the ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order shall be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents, including appropriate reduction in the Contract Price; or if the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR to the CITY.

12.08

City May Correct Defective Work: If the CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time after written notice of the ENGINEER to proceed to correct and to correct defective work or to remove and

00361334.0000

00 72 13-48

General Conditions

replace rejected work as required by the ENGINEER in accordance with Paragraph 12.5, or if the CONTRACTOR fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents, (including any requirements of the progress schedule), the CITY may, after seven days' written notice to the CONTRACTOR, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising its rights under this Paragraph the CITY shall proceed expeditiously. To the extent necessary to complete corrective and remedial action, the CITY may exclude the CONTRACTOR from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the work, and suspend the CONTRACTOR's services related thereto, take possession of the CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and incorporate in the work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the CITY has paid the CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere. The CONTRACTOR shall allow the CITY, the CITY's representatives, agents and employees such access to the site as may be necessary to enable the CITY to exercise his rights under this Paragraph. All direct and indirect costs of the CITY in exercising such rights shall be charged against the CONTRACTOR in an amount verified by the ENGINEER, and a Change Order shall be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents and a reduction in the Contract Price. Such direct and indirect costs shall include, in particular but without limitations, compensation for additional professional services required and all costs of repair and replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of the CONTRACTOR's defective work. The CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time because of any delay in performance of the work attributable to the exercise by the CITY of the CITY's rights hereunder. ARTICLE 13 – PAYMENTS TO THE CONTRACTOR 13.01

Basis of Payment: Progress payments shall be based on the aggregate of the unit price amounts listed in the Proposal or in the Schedule of Values which have been incorporated in the work acceptable to the ENGINEER.

13.02

Unit Price Inclusion: The unit prices stated in the Proposal include all costs and expenses for materials, labor, tools, equipment, transportation, commissions, patent fees and royalties, removing crossings or other obstructions, protection or maintaining pipes, drains, railroad tracks, buildings, bridges, or other structures furnishing temporary crossings or bridges, furnishing all supplemental construction stakes, batter boards, templets, common and ordinary labor for handling materials during inspection replacing any property damage, together with any and all costs or expenses for performing and completing the work as specified.

13.03

Schedule of Values: (Lump Sum Price Breakdown)

00361334.0000

00 72 13-49

General Conditions

A Schedule of Values must be submitted within seven days subsequent to the CONTRACTOR executing and submitting the Documents required of Article 16 of the Instructions to Bidders. The schedules shall be satisfactory in form and substance to the ENGINEER, and shall include quantity and unit prices aggregating the Contract Price, and shall subdivide the work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during construction. Upon acceptance of the schedule of values by the ENGINEER, it shall be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to the ENGINEER. 13.04

Changed Conditions: (Unit Price Only) It is mutually agreed that due to latent field conditions which can not be foreseen at the time of advertising for bids, adjustments of the Plans to field conditions will be necessary during construction; and, therefore, such changes in the plans shall be recognized as constituting a normal and accepted margin of adjustment not unusual and not involving or permitting any change or modification of unit prices, in which case payment will be made for the revised quantities at the unit price bid in the Proposal.

13.05

Application for Progress Payment: On the 20th day of the month or the first working day thereafter, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER for review an Application for Payment form filled out and signed by the CONTRACTOR. The form shall be notarized, and shall cover the work completed as of the date of the application. The Application for Payment shall be accompanied by a Schedule of Values, and any other supporting documentation as the ENGINEER may reasonably require.

13.06

Payment for Materials: If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the work but delivered and suitably stored at the site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by such data, satisfactory to the ENGINEER, as will establish the CITY's title to the material and equipment and protect the CITY's interest therein, including applicable insurance.

13.07

Affidavit Required: All Applications for Payment shall include an Affidavit of the CONTRACTOR stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the work have been applied to discharge in full all of CONTRACTOR's obligations reflected in prior Applications for Payment. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be 10%.

13.08

Retainage:

00361334.0000

00 72 13-50

General Conditions

The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be 10% until 50percent completion of the construction services purchased pursuant to the Contract. After 50-percent completion of the construction services purchased pursuant to the Contract, the CITY shall reduce to 5 percent the amount of retainage withheld from each subsequent progress payment made to the CONTRACTOR. For purposes of this paragraph, the term "50-percent completion" means the point at which the CITY has expended 50 percent of the total cost of the construction services purchased as identified in the Contract together with all costs associated with existing change orders and other additions or modifications to the construction services provided for in the Contract. 13.09

CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title: The CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title to all work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the CITY at the time of payment free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests and encumbrances (hereinafter in these General Conditions referred to as "Liens").

13.10

Review of Application for Payment: The ENGINEER will, within seven (7) days, review the Application for Payment and either approve and submit it for payment or notify the CONTRACTOR of the deficiencies such that the CONTRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit in time for the month's payment. However, the ENGINEER may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in his opinion, it would be incorrect to make such representations. He may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, nullify any such payment previously recommended to such extent as may be necessary in the ENGINEER's opinion to protect the CITY from loss because: A.

The work is defective, or completed work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement.

B.

Written claims have been made against the CITY or Liens have been filed in connection with the work.

C.

The Contract Price has been reduced because of Change Order.

D.

The CITY has been required to correct defective work or complete the work in accordance with Article 12.8.

E.

The CONTRACTOR's unsatisfactory prosecution of the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

00361334.0000

00 72 13-51

General Conditions

F.

13.11

The CONTRACTOR's failure to make payment to Sub- Contractors, or for labor, materials or equipment. Payment to the Contractor:

Payments are made only on the fifteenth day or first workday thereafter of each month. 13.12

Projected Cash Flow Along with the Schedule of Values and the Construction Schedule, the CONTRACTOR must submit for review and acceptance a list of the projected monthly Cash Flows. The cash flows must be in accordance with the construction schedule and must encompass the entire project duration. The contractor must indicate the month and amount expected.

ARTICLE 14 - SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, PARTIAL UTILIZATION, FINAL CLEAN UP, INSPECTION, PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE 14.01

Substantial Completion: When the CONTRACTOR considers the entire work ready for its intended use, the CONTRACTOR shall, in writing to the ENGINEER, certify that the entire work is substantially complete and request that the ENGINEER issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion. Within a reasonable time thereafter the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER shall make an inspection of the work to determine the status of completion. If the ENGINEER does not consider the work substantially complete, the ENGINEER will notify the CONTRACTOR in writing giving his reasons therefor. If the ENGINEER considers the work substantially complete, the ENGINEER will prepare and deliver to the CONTRACTOR a Certificate of Substantial Completion, which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a proposed Punch List, developed by the CONTRACTOR, of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Within 10 days after delivery of the certificate, the CITY shall review the proposed Punch List and either approve it or contact the CONTRACTOR to commence good faith efforts to develop a Punch List that is satisfactory to both parties. If the parties are unable to resolve any differences they may have in the development of the Punch List, the ENGINEER shall resolve their differences. The parties shall expedite the process of developing the Punch List with the intent of finalizing the Punch List within 30 days after the date of Substantial Completion. At the time of delivery of the Certificate of Substantial Completion the ENGINEER will deliver to the CONTRACTOR written notice as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between the CITY and the CONTRACTOR

00361334.0000

00 72 13-52

General Conditions

with respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities and insurance, said responsibilities will be binding on the CITY and the CONTRACTOR until final payment. Unless otherwise stated herein or on the Certificate of Substantial Completion, all building, product, equipment, and machinery warranties will commence on the date of Substantial Completion. The CITY shall have the right to exclude the CONTRACTOR from the work after the date of Substantial Completion, but the CITY shall allow the CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on the Punch List. 14.02

Partial Utilization: Use by the CITY of any finished part of the work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents or which the ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the work that can be used by the CITY without significant interference with CONTRACTOR's performance of the remainder of the work, may be accomplished prior to Substantial Completion of all the work subject to the following: A.

14.03

The ENGINEER at any time may request the CONTRACTOR in writing to permit the CITY to use any such part of the work which the ENGINEER believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If the CONTRACTOR agrees, the CONTRACTOR will certify to the ENGINEER that said part of the work is substantially complete and request the ENGINEER to issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the work. The CONTRACTOR, at any time, may notify the ENGINEER in writing that the CONTRACTOR considers any such part of the work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request the ENGINEER to issue a Certificate of Substantial Complete for the part of the work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER shall make an inspection of that part of the work to determine its status of completion. If the ENGINEER does not consider that part of the work to be substantially complete, the ENGINEER will notify the CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefore. If the ENGINEER considers that part of the work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Article 14.1 will apply with respect to Certificate of Substantial Completion of that part of the work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. It shall be understood by the CONTRACTOR that until such written notification is issued, all responsibility for care and maintenance of all of the WORK shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. Upon issuance of said written notice of partial utilization, the CITY will accept responsibility for the protection and maintenance of all such items or portions of the WORK described in the written notice. Final Clean-Up:

00361334.0000

00 72 13-53

General Conditions

Upon completion of the work and before final inspection shall be made, the CONTRACTOR shall clean and remove from the site, the Right-of-Way and adjacent property, all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures; restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the work; and shall leave the site and vicinity unobstructed in a neat and presentable condition throughout the entire area or length of the work under Contract. The placing of materials of every character, rubbish, or equipment on the abutting property, with or without the consent of the property CITYs, shall not constitute the satisfactory disposal. If the work is of such a character as may be done by block or sections, the CONTRACTOR may be required to promptly remove and dispose of accumulated rubbish, debris or surplus materials from blocks or sections as completed or partially completed. No separate payment will be made for final cleaning up and restoration of property, but all costs thereof shall be included in the prices bid for the various scheduled items of work. 14.04

Final Inspection: Upon written notice from the CONTRACTOR that the entire work or an agreed portion thereof is complete and final clean-up has been completed, the ENGINEER will make a final inspection with the CONTRACTOR and will notify the CONTRACTOR in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the work is incomplete or defective. The CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to remedy such deficiencies.

14.05

Final Application for Payment: After the CONTRACTOR has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER and delivered all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents (as provided in Article 7.19 of the General Conditions and other documents; all as required by the Contract Documents and after the ENGINEER has indicated that the work is acceptable (subject to the provisions of Article 14.9) the CONTRACTOR may make Application for Final Payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied by all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, together with complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the CITY) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the work. In lieu thereof and as approved by the CITY, the CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts or releases in full; an affidavit of the CONTRACTOR that the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and that all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the work for which the CITY or the CITY's property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied; and consent of the Surety, if any, to final payment. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish a release or receipt in full, the CONTRACTOR may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to the CITY to indemnify the CITY against any

00361334.0000

00 72 13-54

General Conditions

Lien.

14.06

Final Payment and Acceptance: If on the basis of the ENGINEER's observation of the work during construction and final inspection, and the ENGINEER's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER is satisfied that the work has been completed and the CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, the ENGINEER will recommend payment. Thereupon the ENGINEER will give written notice to the CITY and the CONTRACTOR that the work is acceptable subject to the provisions of Article 14.9.

14.07

Payment of Retainage Without Final Completion: If through no fault of the CONTRACTOR, final completion of the work is significantly delayed and if the ENGINEER so confirms, the CITY shall, upon receipt of the CONTRACTOR's final Application for Payment and recommendation of the ENGINEER, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for the portion of the work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the CITY for work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement and if Bonds have been furnished as required in Article 5.2, the written consent of the Surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER with the application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.

14.08

CONTRACTOR's Continuing Obligation: The CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and complete the work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. Neither recommendation of any progress or final payment by the ENGINEER, nor the issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion, nor any payment by the CITY to the CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents, nor any use or occupancy of the work or any part thereof by the CITY nor any act of acceptance by the CITY nor any failure to do so, nor any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or sample submission, nor the issuance of a notice of acceptability by the ENGINEER pursuant to Article 14.6, nor any correction of defective work by the CITY will constitute an acceptance of work not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of the CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (except as provided in Article 14.9).

00361334.0000

00 72 13-55

General Conditions

14.09

Waiver of Claims: The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: A.

B.

A waiver of all claims by the CITY against the CONTRACTOR, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Article 14.4 or from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein; however, it will not constitute a waiver by the CITY of any rights in respect of the CONTRACTOR's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. A waiver of all claims by the CONTRACTOR against the CITY other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION

15.01

City May Suspend Work: The CITY may, at any time and without cause, suspend the work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 days by notice in writing to the CONTRACTOR which will fix the date on which work will be resumed. The CONTRACTOR shall resume the work on the date so fixed. The CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to any suspension.

15.02

City May Terminate: A.

Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events: 1. If the CONTRACTOR commences a voluntary case under any chapter of the Bankruptcy Code (Title 11, United States Code), as now or hereafter in effect, or if the CONTRACTOR takes any equivalent or similar action by filing a petition or otherwise under any other federal or state law in effect at such time relating to the bankruptcy or insolvency. 2. If a petition is filed against the CONTRACTOR under any chapter of the Bankruptcy Code as now or hereafter in effect at the time of filing, or if a petition is filed seeking any such equivalent or similar relief against the CONTRACTOR under any other federal or state law in effect at the time relating to bankruptcy or insolvency. 3. If the CONTRACTOR makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors. 4. If a trustee, receiver, custodian or agent of the CONTRACTOR is

00361334.0000

00 72 13-56

General Conditions

appointed under applicable law or under contract, whose appointment or authority to take charge of property of the CONTRACTOR is for the purpose of enforcing a Lien against such property or for the purpose of general administration of such property for the benefit of the CONTRACTOR's creditors. 5. If the CONTRACTOR admits in writing an inability to pay its debts generally as they become due. 6. If the CONTRACTOR persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply a qualified superintendent or sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the approved progress schedule revised from time to time). 7. If the CONTRACTOR disregards laws or regulations of any public body having jurisdiction. 8. If the CONTRACTOR disregards the authority of the ENGINEER. 9. If the CONTRACTOR otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents. B.

The CITY may, after giving the CONTRACTOR and the Surety seven days' written notice and to the extent permitted by laws and regulations, terminate the services of the CONTRACTOR, exclude the CONTRACTOR from the site and take possession of the work and of all the CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by the CONTRACTOR (without liability to the CONTRACTOR for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the CITY has paid the CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the work as the CITY may deem expedient. In such case the CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct, indirect and consequential costs of completing the work (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals, and court and arbitration costs) such excess will be paid to the CONTRACTOR. If such costs exceed such unpaid balance, the CONTRACTOR, or CONTRACTOR's Surety, shall pay the difference to the CITY.

C.

Where the CONTRACTOR's services have been so terminated by the CITY, the CITY alone shall determine the scope and description of the work to be completed and the method and schedule for completing it.

D.

Where the CONTRACTOR's services have been so terminated by the CITY the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the CITY

00361334.0000

00 72 13-57

General Conditions

against the CONTRACTOR then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due the CONTRACTOR by the CITY will not release the CONTRACTOR from liability. E.

15.03

Upon seven days' written notice to the CONTRACTOR the CITY may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, elect to abandon the work and terminate the Contract. In such case the CONTRACTOR shall be paid for all work executed and any expense sustained plus reasonable termination expenses, which will include, but not be limited to, direct, indirect and consequential costs (including, but not limited to, fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and court and arbitration costs). Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate:

If through no act or fault of the CONTRACTOR, the work is suspended for a period of more than 90 days by the CITY or under an order of court or other public authority, or the CITY fails for 60 days to pay the CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due, then the CONTRACTOR may, upon seven days' written notice to the CITY terminate the Contract and recover from the CITY payment for all work executed and any expense sustained plus reasonable termination expenses. In addition and in lieu of terminating the Contract, if the CITY has failed to make any payment as aforesaid, the CONTRACTOR may upon seven days' written notice to the CITY stop the work until payment of all amounts then due are paid. The provisions of this paragraph shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the obligations to carry on the work in accordance with the progress schedule and without delay during disputes and disagreements with the CITY. ARTICLE 16 – DISPUTE RESOLUTION 16.01

Methods and Procedures A.

Dispute resolution methods and procedures, if any, shall be as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. If no method and procedure has been set forth, and subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05, City and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute.

++ END OF SECTION ++

00361334.0000

00 72 13-58

General Conditions

SECTION 00 73 01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS INDEX TO ARTICLES 1. Project Schedule

00 73 01-3

2. Insurance Requirements

00 73 01-4

3. Liquidated Damages

00 73 01-6

4. Restricted Area

00 73 01-7

5. Existing Facilities and Structures

00 73 01-7

6. Explosives

00 73 01-7

7. Contract Documents

00 73 01-7

8. Required Notifications

00 73 01-8

9. Notice of Completion

00 73 01-8

10. Prevailing Wage Requirement

00 73 01-8

11. Inspections and Testing During Overtime

00 73 01-8

12. Retainage

00 73 01-9

13. Sales, Use and Witholding Taxes

00 73 01-10

14. Sales Tax Savings Program, City Direct Purchase of Materials and Equipment

00 73 01-10

00361334.0000

00 73 01-1

Supplementary General Conditions

General Note: The General Conditions refer to specific section numbers in the Supplementary General Conditions. These reference numbers may not coordinate with the actual Article numbers utilized in the Supplementary General Conditions. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all General Conditions and all Supplementary General Conditions as well as related conditions included in the General Requirements, Division 1 of the Technical Specifications. Incorrect cross-reference numbers shall not relieve this requirement. 1.

Project Schedule The following defines the schedule for the project: CONSTRUCTION WORK SCHEDULE CONSTRUCTION / STARTUP / ACCEPTANCE: Completion Time Major Milestones (from Notice to Proceed) of Date

1. Substantial Completion(1) 2. Project Closeout(2)

500 days 545 days

Failure to meet any of the above defined construction/startup/acceptance completion dates shall subject the CONTRACTOR to pay damages as specified in these Supplementary General Conditions in Article 3. (1)Substantial

Completion

1. Refer to General Conditions Articles 14.1. (Certification of Substantial Completion Services appended to the Supplementary General Conditions). 2. Substantial Completion shall also include: 

Completion of all construction work associated with the specific “Major Milestone” listed in the construction work schedule including completion of punch list items. “Completion of punch list items” shall be as determined by the Engineer in the field.



Each individual piece of equipment tested and demonstrated, prior to complete process or system testing, for the Engineer’s acceptance. The Engineer shall determine testing and demonstration sufficient for acceptance.



The complete process for the “Major Milestone” item shall be tested and demonstrated for the Engineer’s acceptance. Demonstration of performance hereinafter called “Performance Testing” shall be for a minimum period of 7 continuous days, unless other sections of the specifications require a longer demonstration period. The Engineer shall determine testing and demonstration sufficient for acceptance.

00361334.0000

00 73 01-2

Supplementary General Conditions



Coating touchup completed



Classroom and field training completion and related video tape and/or DVD submittal as confirmed by the Engineer



Record shop drawings and O&M submittals received and accepted by the Engineer



Record drawing red-lines received and accepted by the Engineer



Delivery and acceptance by the Engineer of all spare parts and special tools



Guarantee certifications, performance affidavits, and all other certifications received and accepted by the Engineer

(2)Project

Closeout

1. Refer to Division 1 General Requirements, Section 01 77 19, Closeout Requirements. 2. Project Closeout shall also include: 

All requirements of substantial completion met plus the following



Site cleanup and restoration completed



All other sitework completed



Minor punch list items completed (minor as defined by the Engineer in the field)



Demobilization completed



Releases from all parties who are entitled to claims The title “Engineer” utilized in these descriptions for substantial and final completion shall mean the City staff engineer assigned to this project, or his designated representative.

2.

Insurance Requirements The insurance required by Article 5.04 of the General Conditions shall be as follows:

1. BUILDERS RISK (BR 1): The Contractor shall be required to purchase and maintain, throughout the life of the contract, and until the project is accepted by the City, Builder's Risk Insurance on an All Risk of Loss form. Coverage shall include:

00361334.0000

00 73 01-3

Supplementary General Conditions

Theft Windstorm Hail Explosion Riot Civil Commotion

Aircraft Vehicles Smoke Fire Collapse Flood

The policy limits shall be no less than the amount of the finished project and coverage shall be provided on a completed value basis. Property located on the construction premises, which is intended to become a permanent part of the building, shall be included as property covered. The policy shall be endorsed permitting the City to occupy the building prior to completion without effecting the coverage. The City of Hollywood shall be named as Additional Insured and Loss Payee. 2. RISK MANAGEMENT (GLR): Prior to the commencement of work governed by this contract, the Contractor shall obtain General Liability Insurance. Coverage shall be maintained throughout the life of the contract and include, as a minimum:     

Premises Operations Products and Completed Operations Blanket Contractual Liability Personal Injury Liability Expanded Definition of Property Damage

The minimum limits acceptable shall be: $2,000,000 Combined Single Limit (CSL) If split limits are provided, the minimum limits acceptable shall be: $1,000,000 per Person $2,000,000 per Occurrence $100,000 Property Damage An Occurrence Form policy is preferred. If coverage is provided on a Claims Made policy, its provisions should include coverage for claims filed on or after the effective date of this contract. In addition, the period for which claims may be reported should extend for a minimum of twelve (12) months following the acceptance of work by the City. The City of Hollywood shall be named as Additional Insured on all policies issued to satisfy the above requirements. 3. GENERAL LIABILITY (GLXCU):

00361334.0000

00 73 01-4

Supplementary General Conditions

Recognizing that the work governed by this contract involves either underground exposures, explosive activities, or the possibility of collapse of a structure, the Contractor's General Liability Policy shall include coverage for the XCU (explosion, collapse, and underground) exposures with limits of liability equal to those of the General Liability Insurance policy. 4. VEHICLE LIABILITY (VL3): Recognizing that the work governed by this contract requires the use of vehicles, the Contractor, prior to the commencement of work, shall obtain Vehicle Liability Insurance. Coverage shall be maintained throughout the life of the contract and include, as a minimum, liability coverage for:  Owned, Non-Owned, and Hired Vehicles The minimum limits acceptable shall be: $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit (CSL) If split limits are provided, the minimum limits acceptable shall be: $500,000 per Person $1,000,000 per Occurrence $100,000 Property Damage The City of Hollywood shall be named as Additional Insured on all policies issued to satisfy the above requirements. 5. WORKERS' COMPENSATION (WC2): Prior to the commencement of work governed by this contract, the Contractor shall obtain Workers' Compensation Insurance with limits sufficient to respond to the applicable state statutes. In addition, the Contractor shall obtain Employers' Liability Insurance with limits of not less than: $500,000 Bodily Injury by Accident $500,000 Bodily Injury by Disease, policy limits $500,000 Bodily Injury by Disease, each employee Coverage shall be maintained throughout the entire term of the contract. Coverage shall be provided by a company or companies authorized to transact business in the state of Florida and the company or companies must maintain a minimum rating of A-VI, as assigned by the A.M. Best Company. If the Contractor has been approved by the Florida's Department of Labor, as an authorized self-insurer, the City shall recognize and honor the Contractor's status. The Contractor may be required to submit a Letter of Authorization issued by the Department of Labor and a Certificate of Insurance, providing details on the Contractor's Excess Insurance Program. 00361334.0000

00 73 01-5

Supplementary General Conditions

If the Contractor participates in a self-insurance fund, a Certificate of Insurance will be required. In addition, the Contractor may be required to submit updated financial statements from the fund upon request from the City. 3.

Liquidated Damages Liquidated damages shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR to the CITY for failure to complete work on time in accordance with the following schedule: CONSTRUCTION/STARTUP/ACCEPTANCE: Completion Time Major Milestones (from Notice to Proceed) or Date

1. Substantial Completion 2. Project Closeout

500 calendar days 545 calendar days

Liquidated Damages

$1,000/day $1,000/day

The CITY is hereby authorized to deduct the sums described above from the monies which may be due to the CONTRACTOR for the work under this contract. Liquidated damages shall be additive such that the maximum total which may be deducted shall be $5000/day. Other damages for failure to meet warranty conditions as defined in other sections of the Specifications shall also be added with liquidated damages for failure to meet completion times. 4.

Restricted Area The CONTRACTOR shall, in installing the new facilities, confine all activities within the CITY property, easement, and right-of-ways indicated.

5.

Existing Facilities and Structures All existing facilities shall be protected, and if damaged, shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the CITY.

6.

Explosives Explosives shall not be used on this project.

7.

Contract Documents The CITY will provide the CONTRACTOR with six (6) sets of Contract Documents after the Notice to Proceed.

8.

Required Notifications

00361334.0000

00 73 01-6

Supplementary General Conditions

When provisions of the pertinent codes, standards or regulations conflict with this Specification, the more stringent shall apply. Prior to any site work, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the Engineering and Construction Services Division Inspector at (954) 921-3930. Prior to excavation at the site, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the appropriate utilities and Sunshine State One-Call of Florida, Inc. (formerly U.N.C.L.E.) at 811 or 1-800-432-4770 for locations of buried utilities. Prior to closure of any CITY streets of alleyways, or other activity which requires the diversion of traffic, the CONTRACTOR shall notify and obtain the permission of the CITY of Hollywood Fire and Police Communications Section at (954) 9674321.

9.

Notice of Completion See attached form.

10.

Prevailing Wage Requirement A.

The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for ensuring payment of the rate of wages and fringe benefits, or cash equivalent, for all laborers, mechanics and apprentices employed by him/her or his/her SUBCONTRACTORS on the work covered by this contract which shall be not less than the prevailing rate of wages and fringe benefits payment or cash equivalent for similar skills or classifications of work as established by the General Wage Decision by the United States Department of Labor for Broward County, Florida that is in effect prior to the date the CITY issued the invitation for bids for this project (the prevailing rate of wages and fringes can be obtained at website http://www.access.gpo.gov/ davisbacon). If the General Wage Decision fails to provide for a fringe benefit rate for any worker classification, then the fringe benefit rate applicable to such worker classification shall be the fringe benefit rate that has a basic wage rate closest in dollar amount to the work classification for which no fringe benefit rate has been provided.

B.

C.

Upon commencement of work, the CONTRACTOR and all of his/her SUBCONTRACTORS shall post a notice in a prominent place at the work site stating the requirements of this Article. As per the City of Hollywood Code of Ordinances, Prevailing Wage Requirements and Fringe Benefits are applicable to the following: (A)

00361334.0000

00 73 01-7

Supplementary General Conditions

Utilities projects over $1,000,000.00 (one million dollars) and (B) All other projects over $500,000.00 (five hundred thousand dollars).

11.

Inspections and Testing During Overtime A.

The following supplement Article 2.13 and 2.15 of the General Conditions: For weekend work, CONTRACTOR shall submit a written request to the CITY by the preceding Wednesday. A separate request is required for each week that the CONTRACTOR wished to work on a weekend. For evening and holiday work, CONTRACTOR shall submit a written request to the CITY 3 days in advance. The CITY will provide inspection services for all overtime work and the CONTRACTOR shall pay for inspection services per Article 2.15, no exceptions. Similarly, holiday and other overtime work shall be requested a minimum of 36-hours in advance and CITY will provide inspection for all overtime.

B.

Exceptions to the hours and days of the week for work and other related limitations are allowed only for tie-ins during low flow periods / early morning hours, coatings that need to be applied during lower temperature times of the day and whenever the Documents specifically define that work shall be completed outside of the limitations for “normal” work hours, days, etc. Inspection for tie-ins during low flow/early morning and specialty coating application performed during nighttime will not be cause for extra inspection costs unless such work is remedial in nature as a result of defective work.

12.

Retainage After 50-percent completion of the construction services purchased pursuant to this contract, CONTRACTOR may present to CITY a payment request for one-half of the retainage then held by CITY. CITY shall promptly make payment to CONTRACTOR, unless CITY has grounds for withholding the payment of retainage. CITY shall have grounds for withholding the payment of retainage with respect to any amounts that are the subject of a good-faith dispute, the subject of a claim brought pursuant to Florida Statute Section 255.05, or otherwise the subject of a claim or demand by CITY or CONTRACTOR. At acceptance of Substantial Completion, CITY shall promptly make payment to CONTRACTOR of one-half of the retainage then held by CITY. At acceptance of completion of all punch list items, CITY shall promptly make payment to CONTRACTOR the balance of retainage then held by CITY.

00361334.0000

00 73 01-8

Supplementary General Conditions

13.

Sales, Use and Witholding Taxes Unless the Contract Documents elsewhere contain a statement that the City is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the Work, Contractor shall pay all federal, state, and local sales and use taxes, as required by Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall pay all federal, state, and local withholding taxes, and pay all Social Security charges and state unemployment compensation charges, and pay or cause to be withheld, as the case may be, any and all taxes, charges, fees, or amounts required to be paid or withheld under Laws, unless otherwise modified in the Contract Documents.

14.

Sales Tax Savings Program, City Direct Purchase of Materials and Equipment City reserves the right to implement a sales tax savings program for the Project. In such event, Contractor shall cooperate and assist City, at no additional cost, with implementing the sales tax savings program. City and Contractor shall work together to identify particular items of material or equipment suitable for direct purchase by City. As such materials and equipment are identified, City and Contractor shall issue purchase orders, in accordance with a schedule mutually acceptable to City and Contractor, to the appropriate suppliers of such materials and equipment for the direct purchase of materials and equipment. Title for such items shall pass directly from the supplier to City. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Contractor shall remain responsible for the ordering, scheduling, coordinating, insuring, delivery, unloading, storage, installation, operation, and warranties of all such materials and equipment directly purchased by the City, as if Contractor had purchased the items for incorporation into the Work. Assignment of City-issued purchase orders shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. As the City issues purchase orders to suppliers of such materials and equipment, City and Contractor will execute a Change Order that deducts from the Contract Price the amount being paid to the supplier by the City, plus the amount of sales tax that otherwise would have been paid on such materials and equipment.

00361334.0000

00 73 01-9

Supplementary General Conditions

CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

PROJECT:

ENGINEER:

TO:

ARCADIS US, Inc.

CONTRACTOR:

CONTRACT FOR:

NOTICE TO PROCEED DATE: DATE OF ISSUANCE: PROJECT OR DESIGNATED PORTION SHALL INCLUDE: Portions of the work performed under this Contract as described above, have been reviewed and found to be substantially complete. The Date of Substantial Completion of Project or designated portion thereof designated above is hereby established as ___________ which is also the date of commencement of applicable warranties required by the Contract Documents for the noted area.

DEFINITION OF DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION The Date of Substantial Completion of the work or designated portion thereof is the date certified by the ENGINEER (“Date of Issuance” above) when construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so the CITY can occupy or utilize the work or designated portion thereof for the use for which it is intended, as expressed in the Contract Documents.

A list of items to be completed or corrected, prepared by the CONTRACTOR and verified and amended by the ENGINEER, for the above referenced “Project or Designated Portion” is attached to this form (attached “Punch List” dated ________________). The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

00361334.0000

00 73 01-10

Supplementary General Conditions

CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

Please note that in accordance with Article 14 General Conditions, the Contractor retains full responsibility for the satisfactory completion of all work regardless of whether the CITY occupies and / or operates a part of the facility and that the taking possession and use of such work shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

ARCADIS US, Inc. ENGINEER

BY

DATE

CONTRACTOR

BY

DATE

The CITY OF HOLLYWOOD, through the City’s authorized representative, accepts the work or designated portion thereof as substantially complete and will assume full possession thereof at (time) on

(date).

BY

DATE

++ END OF SECTION ++

00361334.0000

00 73 01-11

Supplementary General Conditions

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 01 11 13 SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A.

The Work to be performed under this Contract consists of constructing the Work shown in the Contract Documents and described below. This Work consists of the all the improvements, and all related appurtenances, incidentals and General Conditions. The Work is generally described, as follows: 1. Installation of six (6) new variable speed horizontal split-case water distribution system pumps, along with the associated piping, valves, and appurtenances, and associated electrical, instrumentation, and control facilities. These new high service pump provide for the replacement the existing pumps. The Work shall be provided while maintaining operation of the existing high service pump station. 2. Replacement of the existing backwash water supply pumps with two (2) new horizontal end suction centrifugal pumps, appurtenances and suction piping and valves, along with minor modifications to the associated discharge piping by reusing the existing discharge piping, flow meter, control valve, and associated electrical, instrumentation, and control facilities. 3. SCADA and Electrical system upgrades to transition from constant speed high services pump to variable speed pumps that will provide constant discharge pressure, including improvements to plant distribution switchgear, associated MCC improvements and other electrical improvements. 4. Associated building improvements. 5. Demolition and abandonment of Aeration Pump Station and associated piping; including the abandonment of buried pipe, fittings, and associated valves and appurtenances. 6. Additive Owner’s Allowance (only as directed by the Engineer/Owner): Replacement of the Pump Suction Piping located inside the Clearwells. This work shall be provided in the event that it is determined to be necessary by the Engineer/Owner, upon inspection of these materials.

B.

The Work is located at the following address: City of Hollywood Water Treatment Plant 3441 Hollywood Boulevard Hollywood, Florida 33021

C. Contracting Method: Work shall be constructed under one prime contract. 00361334.0000

01 11 13-1

Summary of Work

1.2 A.

1.3 A.

1.4

OTHER CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS Other construction contracts have been or will be awarded by CITY that are in close proximity to or border on the Work of this Contract. Work under these other contracts. The Contractor shall coordinate work activities with other on-site contractors as required, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. SEQUENCE AND PROGRESS OF WORK Requirements for sequencing and coordinating with CITY’s operations, including maintenance of plant operations during construction, and requirements for tie-ins and shutdowns, are in Section 01 14 16, Coordination with CITY’s Operations. CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE

A.

Contractor’s use of the Site shall be confined to the areas shown on the Drawings.

B.

Move stored products that interfere with operations of CITY, other contractors, and others performing work for CITY.

1.5 A.

1.6

EASEMENTS AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY Easements and rights-of-way will be provided by CITY in accordance with the General Conditions. Confine construction operations within CITY’s property, public rights-of-way, easements obtained by CITY, and the limits shown. Use care in placing construction tools, equipment, excavated materials, and materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work to avoid damaging property and interfering with traffic. Do not enter private property outside the construction limits without permission from the owner of the property. NOTICES TO OWNERS AND AUTHORITIES OF PROPERTIES ADJACENT TO THE WORK

A.

Notify owners of adjacent property and utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect their property, facilities, or use of property.

B.

Notify utility owners and other concerned entities at least three business days prior to cutting or closing streets or other traffic areas or excavating near Underground Facilities or exposed utilities.

1.7

SALVAGE OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

00361334.0000

01 11 13-2

Summary of Work

A.

Existing equipment and materials removed and not shown or specified to be reused in the Work will become Contractor’s property, except the following items that shall remain CITY’s property: 1. 2.

B.

All metal, equipment, cable, etc. Anything of value, except for crushed concrete and roofing materials.

Existing equipment and materials removed by Contractor shall not be reused in the Work, except where so specified or indicated.

C. Carefully remove in manner to prevent damage all equipment and materials specified or indicated to be salvaged and reused or to remain property of CITY. Store and protect salvaged items specified or indicated to be used in the Work. Replace in kind or with new items equipment, materials, and components damaged in removal, storage, or handling through carelessness or improper procedures. D. Contractor may furnish and install new items, with Engineer’s approval, instead of those specified or indicated to be salvaged and reused, in which case such removed items will become Contractor’s property.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 11 13-3

Summary of Work

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 01 14 16 COORDINATION WITH CITY’S OPERATIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

Scope: 1. This Section includes requirements for coordinating with CITY’s operations during the Work, and includes requirements for tie-ins and shutdowns necessary to complete the Work without impact on CITY’s operations except as allowed in this Section. 2. CONTRACTOR shall provide labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals shown, specified and required to coordinate with CITY’s operations during the Work.

B.

Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Specification sections and coordinate Work that must be performed with or before the Work specified in this Section.

C. Except for shutdowns specified in this Section, perform the Work such that CITY’s facility remains in continuous satisfactory operation during the Project. Schedule and conduct the Work such that the Work does not: impede CITY’s production or processes, create potential hazards to operating equipment and personnel, reduce the quality of the facility’s products or effluent, or cause odors or other nuisances. D. Work not specifically covered in this Section or in referenced Sections may, in general, be completed at any time during regular working hours in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, subject to the requirements in this Section. E.

CONTRACTOR has the option of providing additional temporary facilities that can eliminate or mitigate a constraint without additional cost to CITY, provided such additional temporary facilities: do not present hazards to the public, personnel, structures, and equipment; that such additional temporary facilities do not adversely affect CITY’s ability to comply with Laws and Regulations, permits, and operating requirements; that such temporary facilities do not generate or foster the generation of odors and other nuisances; and that requirements of the Contract Documents are fulfilled.

FG. Coordinate shutdowns with CITY and ENGINEER. When possible, combine multiple tie-ins into a single shutdown to minimize impacts on CITY’s operations and processes. 00361334.0000

01 14 16-1

Coordination with City’s Operations

1.2

SUBMITTALS

A.

Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Substitute Sequence Submittal: When deviation from specified sequence is proposed, provide submittal explaining in detail the proposed sequence change and its effects, including evidence that CITY’s operations will not be adversely affected by proposed change. List benefits of proposed sequence change, including benefits to Progress Schedule. Submit in accordance with Section 01 25 00, Substitution Procedures.

B.

Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shutdown Planning Submittal: a. For each shutdown, submit an inventory of labor and materials required to perform the shutdown and tie-in tasks, an estimate of time required to accomplish the complete shutdown including time for CITY to take down and start up existing equipment, systems, or conduits, and written description of steps required to complete the Work associated with the shutdown. b. Furnish submittal to ENGINEER at least thirty days prior to proposed shutdown start date. Do not start shutdown until obtaining ENGINEER’s acceptance of shutdown planning submittal. 2. Shutdown Notification: After acceptance of shutdown planning submittal and prior to starting the shutdown, provide written notification to CITY and ENGINEER of date and time each shutdown is to start. Provide notification at least 5 business days in advance of each shutdown.

1.3

GENERAL CONSTRAINTS

A.

Specified in the Contract Documents are the sequence and shutdown durations, where applicable, for CITY’s equipment, systems, and conduits that are to be taken out of service temporarily for the Work. New equipment, materials, and systems may be used by CITY after the specified field quality controls and testing are successfully completed and the materials or equipment are Substantially Complete.

B.

The following constraints apply to coordination with CITY’s operations: 1. Operational Access: CITY’S personnel shall have access to equipment and areas that remain in operation. 2. Temporary Partitions and Enclosures: CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary partitions and enclosures necessary to maintain dust-free, and ventilated spaces in areas that are adjacent to the Work and that must be kept operational. Comply with Section 01 51 05, Temporary Utilities.

00361334.0000

01 14 16-2

Coordination with City’s Operations

3.

4.

5.

1.4 A.

1.5

Schedule and perform equipment and system start-ups for Monday through Thursday. Equipment and systems shall not be placed into operation on Friday, Saturday, and Sunday. Dead End Valves or Pipe: Provide blind flanges, watertight bulkheads, or valve at temporary and permanent terminuses of pipes and conduits. Blind flanges and bulkheads shall be suitable for the service and braced and blocked, as required, or otherwise restrained as directed by ENGINEER. Temporary valves shall be suitable for their associated service. Where valve is provided at permanent terminus of pipe or conduit, also provide on downstream side of valve a blind flange with drain/flushing connection. Draining and Cleaning of Conduits: a. Unless otherwise specified, CONTRACTOR shall dewater conduits and pipelines at beginning of each shutdown. Flush, and clean pipelines, conduits, and other work areas. b. CONTRACTOR shall remove liquids and solids and dispose of them at appropriate location at the Site as directed by ENGINEER. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, contents of pipes and conduits undergoing modifications shall be transferred to sanitary sewer connections at or near the Site with capacity sufficient to accept such discharges, using hoses, piping, pumps, or other means provided by CONTRACTOR. Discharge of fluids across floors is not allowed. c. If drainage point is not available on the piping or conduit to be drained, provide a wet tap using tapping saddle and valve or other method approved by ENGINEER. Uncontrolled spillage of pipes’ or conduits’ contents is not allowed. d. Spillage shall be brought to ENGINEER’s attention immediately, both verbally and in writing, and reported in accordance with Laws and Regulations. CONTRACTOR shall wash down spillage to floor drains or sumps and flush the system to prevent clogging and odors. If spillage is not suitable for discharge to the drainage system, such as chemical spills, as determined by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall remove spillage by other method, such as vactor truck, acceptable to ENGINEER.

TIE-INS Table 01 14 16-A in this Section lists connections by CONTRACTOR to existing facilities. Table 01 14 16-A may not include all tie-ins required for the Work; CONTRACTOR shall perform tie-ins required to complete the Work. For tie-ins not included in Table 01 14 16-A, obtain requirements for tie-ins from ENGINEER. SHUTDOWNS

A. General: 00361334.0000

01 14 16-3

Coordination with City’s Operations

1.

2. 3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

B.

Terminology: A “shutdown” is when a portion of the normal operation of CITY’s facility, whether equipment, systems, piping, or conduit, has to be temporarily suspended or taken out of service to perform the Work. Work that may interrupt normal operations shall be accomplished at times convenient to CITY. Furnish at the Site, in close proximity to the shutdown and tie-in work areas, tools, equipment, spare parts and materials, both temporary and permanent, necessary to successfully complete the shutdown. Complete to the extent possible, prefabrication of piping and other assemblies prior to the associated shutdown. Demonstrate to ENGINEER’s satisfaction that CONTRACTOR has complied with these requirements before commencing the shutdown. If CONTRACTOR’s operations cause an unscheduled interruption of CITY’s operations, immediately re-establish satisfactory operation for CITY. Unscheduled shutdowns or interruptions of continued safe and satisfactory operation of CITY’s facilities that result in fines or penalties by authorities having jurisdiction shall be paid solely by CONTRACTOR if, in ENGINEER’s opinion, CONTRACTOR did not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, or was negligent in the Work, or did not exercise proper precautions in conducting the Work. Shutdowns shall be in accordance with Table 01 14 16-B of this Section. Work requiring service interruptions for tie-ins shall be performed during scheduled shutdowns. Temporary, short-term shutdowns of smaller piping, conduits, equipment, and systems may not be included in Table 01 14 16-B. Coordinate requirements for such shutdowns with ENGINEER and CITY.

Shutdowns of Electrical Systems: Comply with Laws and Regulations, including the National Electric Code. CONTRACTOR shall lock out and tag circuit breakers and switches operated by CITY and shall verify that affected cables and wires are de-energized to ground potential before shutdown Work is started. Upon completion of shutdown Work, remove the locks and tags and notify ENGINEER that facilities are available for use.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 A.

GENERAL In addition to requirements of this Section, conform to requirements of Section 01 73 29, Cutting and Patching, and Section 01 73 24, Connections to Existing Facilities.

00361334.0000

01 14 16-4

Coordination with City’s Operations

3.2 A.

DETAILED SHUTDOWN REQUIREMENTS Shutdown A: 1. General: a. Affected Equipment Operating Prior to Shutdown: Shut down the East side of the clearwell and associated high service pumps. b. Equipment Operating During Shutdown: In accordance with Table 01 14 16-B of this Section. c. Equipment Out of Service During Shutdown: In accordance with Table 01 14 16-B of this Section. d. Impact on Other Equipment and Processes: Shutdown of the east side of the clearwell and associated high service pumps will require additional production from the west clearwell and high service pumps and the Aeration Building high services pumps. The available pump capacity is shown in Table 01 14 16-B. e. Procedure: Shutdown of the east side of the clearwell and associated high service pumps clearwell will be the responsibility of the CITY. f. Time: Shutdowns shall be performed at a time of low water demand, as determined by the City, and shall last no more than the duration shown in Table 01 14 16-B . 2. Prior to Shutdown: a. Obtain ENGINEER’s acceptance of proposed shutdown planning submittal and shutdown notification submittal. b. Submit the City’s standard “Request for Services” form and get it approved. c. Bring necessary piping, couplings, valves, equipment, and appurtenances to the work areas. d. Assist CITY in preparing to take equipment and pipelines temporarily out of service. e. Coordinate other tie-ins to be performed simultaneously. 3. During Shutdown: a. Dewater the east chamber of the finished water clearwell to a degree sufficient to perform the installation of the floor cones, valve and blind flange installation and valve replacements. b. Remove existing vortex breakers, valves and fittings, as required by the contract drawings. c. Provide floor cones, valves and fittings for the tie-ins. d. With CITY, return equipment and system to a condition ready for operation. 4. Following Shutdown: a. Verify functionality of equipment and system. b. Successfully pass a bacteriological test of the clearwell, following the AWWA procedures for disinfecting water storage tanks.

00361334.0000

01 14 16-5

Coordination with City’s Operations

B.

Shutdown B: 1. General: a. Affected Equipment Operating Prior to Shutdown: The High service pump station by-pass header. b. Equipment Operating During Shutdown: In accordance with Table 01 14 16-B of this Section. c. Equipment Out of Service During Shutdown: In accordance with Table 01 14 16-B of this Section. d. Impact on Other Equipment and Processes: None. e. Procedure: Shutdown of the High service pump station by-pass header by closing the existing valves on the branches of the tees in the high service pump station. f. Time: Shutdown shall commence at a time mutually agreed upon between the CITY and CONTRACTOR and shall last no more than the duration shown in Table 01 14 16-B. 2. Prior to Shutdown: a. Obtain ENGINEER’s acceptance of proposed shutdown planning submittal and shutdown notification submittal. b. Complete Shutdown A. c. Verify all parts, tools and test equipment are on-site. d. Preposition new pipe fittings and valves. 3. During Shutdown: a. Install fitting shown on the construction drawing that will provide the fittings shown in Table 01 14 16-A. b. With CITY, return equipment and system to a condition ready for operation. 4. Following Shutdown: a. Verify functionality of equipment and system. b. Observe work and inspect for leaks. c. Repair joints and piping as required to correct all defects. d. Successfully pass a bacteriological test of the piping, following the AWWA procedures for disinfecting water process piping.

C. Shutdown C: 1. General: a. Affected Equipment Operating Prior to Shutdown: Shut down the East high service pump station discharge header and associated high service pumps. b. Equipment Operating During Shutdown: In accordance with Table 01 14 16-B of this Section. c. Equipment Out of Service During Shutdown: In accordance with Table 01 14 16-B of this Section. d. Impact on Other Equipment and Processes: Shutdown of the East high service pump station discharge header and associated high service pumps will require additional production from the west clearwell and high service pumps and the 00361334.0000

01 14 16-6

Coordination with City’s Operations

2.

3.

4.

Aeration Building high services pumps. The available pump capacity is shown in Table 01 14 16-B. e. Procedure: Shutdown of the east side of the clearwell and associated high service pumps clearwell will be the responsibility of the CITY. f. Time: Shutdowns shall be performed at a time of low water demand, as determined by the City, and shall last no more than the duration shown in Table 01 14 16-B. Prior to Shutdown: a. Obtain ENGINEER’s acceptance of proposed shutdown planning submittal and shutdown notification submittal. b. Submit the City’s standard “Request for Services” form and get it approved. c. Bring necessary piping, couplings, valves, equipment, and appurtenances to the work areas. d. Assist CITY in preparing to take equipment and pipelines temporarily out of service. e. Coordinate other tie-ins to be performed simultaneously. During Shutdown: a. Install fitting shown on the construction drawing that will provide the tie-ins and fittings shown in Table 01 14 16-B. b. With CITY, return equipment and system to a condition ready for operation. Following Shutdown: a. Verify functionality of equipment and system. b. Successfully pass a bacteriological test of the clearwell, following the AWWA procedures for disinfecting water storage tanks.

D. Shutdown D: 1. General: a. Affected Equipment Operating Prior to Shutdown: Shut down the West side of the clearwell and associated high service pumps. b. Equipment Operating During Shutdown: In accordance with Table 01 14 16-B of this Section. c. Equipment Out of Service During Shutdown: In accordance with Table 01 14 16-B of this Section. d. Impact on Other Equipment and Processes: Shutdown of the east side of the clearwell and associated high service pumps will require additional production from the east clearwell and high service pumps and the Aeration Building high services pumps. The available pump capacity is shown in Table 01 14 16-B. e. Procedure: Shutdown of the west side of the clearwell and associated high service pumps clearwell will be the responsibility of the CITY. 00361334.0000

01 14 16-7

Coordination with City’s Operations

f.

2.

3.

4.

E.

Time: Shutdowns shall be performed at a time of low water demand, as determined by the City, and shall last no more than the duration shown in Table 01 14 16-B. Prior to Shutdown: a. Obtain ENGINEER’s acceptance of proposed shutdown planning submittal and shutdown notification submittal. b. Submit the City’s standard “Request for Services” form and get it approved. c. Bring necessary piping, couplings, valves, equipment, and appurtenances to the work areas. d. Assist CITY in preparing to take equipment and pipelines temporarily out of service. e. Coordinate other tie-ins to be performed simultaneously. During Shutdown: a. Dewater the west chamber of the finished water clearwell to a degree sufficient to perform the installation of the floor cones, valve and blind flange installation and valve replacements. b. Remove existing vortex breakers, valves and fittings, as required by the contract drawings. c. Provide floor cones, valves and fittings for the tie-ins. d. With CITY, return equipment and system to a condition ready for operation. Following Shutdown: a. Verify functionality of equipment and system. b. Successfully pass a bacteriological test of the piping, following the AWWA procedures for disinfecting water process piping.

Shutdown E: 1. General: a. Affected Equipment Operating Prior to Shutdown: Shut down the West high service pump station discharge header and associated high service pumps. b. Equipment Operating During Shutdown: In accordance with Table 01 14 16-B of this Section. c. Equipment Out of Service During Shutdown: In accordance with Table 01 14 16-B of this Section. d. Impact on Other Equipment and Processes: Shutdown of the West high service pump station discharge header and associated high service pumps will require additional production from the east clearwell and high service pumps and the Aeration Building high services pumps. The available pump capacity is shown in Table 01 14 16-B. e. Procedure: Shutdown of the west side of the clearwell and associated high service pumps clearwell will be the responsibility of the CITY. f. Time: Shutdowns shall be performed at a time of low water demand, as determined by the City, and shall last no more than the duration shown in Table 01 14 16-B.

00361334.0000

01 14 16-8

Coordination with City’s Operations

2.

3.

4.

F.

Prior to Shutdown: a. Obtain ENGINEER’s acceptance of proposed shutdown planning submittal and shutdown notification submittal. b. Submit the City’s standard “Request for Services” form and get it approved. c. Bring necessary piping, couplings, valves, equipment, and appurtenances to the work areas. d. Assist CITY in preparing to take equipment and pipelines temporarily out of service. e. Coordinate other tie-ins to be performed simultaneously. During Shutdown: a. Install fitting shown on the construction drawing that will provide the tie-ins and fittings shown in Table 01 14 16-B. b. With CITY, return equipment and system to a condition ready for operation. Following Shutdown: a. Verify functionality of equipment and system. b. Successfully pass a bacteriological test of the clearwell, following the AWWA procedures for disinfecting water storage tanks.

Shutdown F: 1. General: a. Affected Equipment Operating Prior to Shutdown: Shut down the East high service pump station discharge header and associated high service pumps. b. Equipment Operating During Shutdown: In accordance with Table 01 14 16-B of this Section. c. Equipment Out of Service During Shutdown: In accordance with Table 01 14 16-B of this Section. d. Impact on Other Equipment and Processes: Shutdown of the East high service pump station discharge header and associated high service pumps will require additional production from the west clearwell and high service pumps and the Aeration Building high services pumps. The available pump capacity is shown in Table 01 14 16-B. e. Procedure: Shutdown of the east side of the clearwell and associated high service pumps clearwell will be the responsibility of the CITY. f. Time: Shutdowns shall be performed at a time of low water demand, as determined by the City, and shall last no more than the duration shown in Table 01 14 16-B. 2. Prior to Shutdown: a. Obtain ENGINEER’s acceptance of proposed shutdown planning submittal and shutdown notification submittal. b. Submit the City’s standard “Request for Services” form and get it approved.

00361334.0000

01 14 16-9

Coordination with City’s Operations

c.

3.

4.

Bring necessary piping, couplings, valves, equipment, and appurtenances to the work areas. d. Assist CITY in preparing to take equipment and pipelines temporarily out of service. e. Coordinate other tie-ins to be performed simultaneously. During Shutdown: a. Install fitting shown on the construction drawing that will provide the tie-ins and fittings shown in Table 01 14 16-B. b. With CITY, return equipment and system to a condition ready for operation. Following Shutdown: a. Verify functionality of equipment and system. b. Successfully pass a bacteriological test of the clearwell, following the AWWA procedures for disinfecting water storage tanks. c. Demolish the Aeration Building high service pumps and discharge piping.

G. Shutdown G: 1. General: a. Affected Equipment Operating Prior to Shutdown: Shut down the Backwash header and pumps. b. Equipment Operating During Shutdown: In accordance with Table 01 14 16-B of this Section. c. Equipment Out of Service During Shutdown: In accordance with Table 01 14 16-B of this Section. d. Impact on Other Equipment and Processes: Shutdown of the Backwash header and pumps will require additional production from the Membrane Treatment Systems. The available pump capacity is shown in Table 01 14 16-B. e. Procedure: Shutdown of the Backwash header and pumps will be the responsibility of the CITY. f. Time: Shutdowns shall be performed at a time of low water demand, as determined by the City, and shall last no more than the duration shown in Table 01 14 16-B. 2. Prior to Shutdown: a. Obtain ENGINEER’s acceptance of proposed shutdown planning submittal and shutdown notification submittal. b. Submit the City’s standard “Request for Services” form and get it approved. c. Bring necessary piping, couplings, valves, equipment, and appurtenances to the work areas. d. Assist CITY in preparing to take equipment and pipelines temporarily out of service. e. Coordinate other tie-ins to be performed simultaneously. 3. During Shutdown: a. Install fitting shown on the construction drawing that will provide the tie-ins and fittings shown in Table 01 14 16-B. 00361334.0000

01 14 16-10

Coordination with City’s Operations

b.

4.

3.3 A.

With CITY, return equipment and system to a condition ready for operation. Following Shutdown: a. Verify functionality of equipment and system. b. Successfully pass a bacteriological test of the clearwell, following the AWWA procedures for disinfecting water storage tanks.

SCHEDULES The schedules listed below, following the “End of Section” designation, are part of this Specification section: 1. Table 01 14 16-A, Schedule of Tie-ins. 2. Table 01 14 16-B, Schedule of Shutdowns.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 14 16-11

Coordination with City’s Operations

Tie-In No.

New Line Size and Service

1

24-inch – Finished Water

2

36-inch – Finished Water

3

24-inch – Finished Water

4

36-inch – Finished Water

5

30-inch – Finished Water

6

30-inch – Finished Water

7

24-inch – Finished Water

8

30-inch – Finished Water

9

36-inch – Finished Water

10

30-inch – Finished Water

11

30-inch – Finished Water

12

36-inch – Finished Water

13

18-inch – Finished Water

14

36-inch – Finished Water

00361334.0000

TABLE 01 14 16-A SCHEDULE OF TIE-INS Existing (Connecting) Tie-In Line Size & Service Building/Location HSPS – By-pass 42-inch Header Wall Sleeve – West 36-inch Clearwell HSPS – By-pass 42-inch Header Wall Sleeve – East 36-inch Clearwell HSPS – East 30-inch Discharge Header Wall Sleeve – East 30-inch Clearwell HSPS – West 24-inch Discharge Header Wall Sleeve – West 30-inch Clearwell Wall Sleeve – West 36-inch Clearwell HSPS – West 30-inch Discharge Header HSPS – East 30-inch Discharge Header Wall Sleeve – East 36-inch Clearwell Backwash Flow 18-inch Meter Wall Sleeve – West 36-inch Clearwell 01 14 16-12

Construction Stage* HSP Pump No. 1 HSP Pump No. 1 HSP Pump No. 4 HSP Pump No. 4 HSP Pump No. 6 HSP Pump No. 6 HSP Pump No. 5 HSP Pump No. 5 HSP Pump No. 3 HSP Pump No. 3 HSP Pump No. 2 HSP Pump No. 2 Backwash Pump No. 1 HSP Pump No. 1

Remarks

Coordination with City’s Operations

15

20-inch – Finished Water

20-inch

16

36-inch – Finished Water

36-inch

17

20-inch – Finished Water

20-inch

18

30-inch – Finished Water

30-inch

19

24-inch – Finished Water

24-inch

24-inch – Finished Water

24-inch

24-inch – Finished Water

24-inch

20 21

Backwash Pump No. 2 Discharge Wall Sleeve – East Clearwell Backwash Pump No. 1 Discharge HSPS – West Discharge Header HSPS – West Discharge Header HSPS – East Discharge Header HSPS – East Discharge Header

Backwash Pump No. 2 HSP Pump No. 2 Backwash Pump No. 1 HSP Pump No. 7 (Future) HSP Pump No. 7 (Future) HSP Pump No. 8 (Future) HSP Pump No. 8 (Future)

* = Proposed pump numbers shown on Sheet M-04.

00361334.0000

01 14 16-13

Coordination with City’s Operations

TABLE 01 14 16-B SCHEDULE OF SHUTDOWNS Shutdown No.

Process Equipment and Service Lines Out-of-Service During Shutdown

B

East side of the clearwell and associated high service pumps High service pump station by-pass header

C

East high service pump station discharge header

A

D

E

F

G

00361334.0000

Process Equipment In Operation During Shutdown West side of the clearwell, associated high service pump, and Aeration Building high service pumps

East high service pump station discharge header

All high service pump systems West side of the clearwell, associated high service pump, and Aeration Building high service pumps East side of the clearwell, associated high service pump, and Aeration Building high service pumps East side of the clearwell, associated high service pump, and Aeration Building high service pumps West side of the clearwell, associated high service pump, and Aeration Building high service pumps

Backwash header and pumps

Membrane Treatment Systems

West side of the clearwell and associated high service pumps

West high service pump station discharge header

01 14 16-14

Tie-In Nos.

Maximum Duration

HS Pump Capacity (gpm)

4, 12, 16, 20

7 days

36,300

1, 3

48 hours

Full

5, 6

24 hours

36,300

2, 8, 10, 14, 18

7 days

27,300

7, 9, 19,

24 hours

36,300

11, 21

24 hours

30,300

13, 15, 17

72 hours

48,000

Coordination with City’s Operations

SECTION 01 14 19 USE OF SITE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

USE OF PREMISES

A.

Limit use of premises at the Site to work areas shown or indicated on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. Do not disturb portions of the Site beyond areas of the Work. 1. Limits: a. Confine construction operations to the following site: Northern portion of the Hollywood WTP site between the northern shore of the Retention Basin, Filmore Street and N. 35th Ave. b. Confine staging and storage of materials and equipment, and locations of temporary facilities to the areas shown on the drawings. 2. Access to Site, Access Roads, and Parking Areas: a. Access to this exiting facilty is through a gate that is controlled by a security guard b. The access road is exiting and will continue to support plant operations throughout the construction project. The Contractor shall coordinate use of the road with plant operations. c. Parking shall be provided with the contruction staging area, as shown on the drawings.

B.

Use of Existing Buildings: Obtain CITY’s written permission for each proposed use of existing buildings. 1. Use of Existing Utilities, Sanitary Facilities, and First-aid Facilities: Refer Section 01 51 05, Temporary Utilities.

C. Promptly repair damage to premises caused by construction operations. Upon completion of the Work, restore premises to specified condition; if condition is not specified, restore to pre-construction condition.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 14 19-1

Use of Site

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 01 22 13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

Items listed starting in Article 1.3 of this Section refer to and are the same pay items listed in the Bid Form and constitute all pay items for completing the Work. No direct or separate payment will be made for providing miscellaneous temporary or accessory works, plant services, CONTRACTOR’s or ENGINEER’s field offices, layout surveys, Project signs, sanitary requirements, testing, safety provisions and safety devices, submittals and record drawings, water supplies, power and fuel, traffic maintenance, removal of waste, security, coordination with CITY’s operations, information technology (including hardware, software, and services) required during construction, bonds, insurance, or other requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, and other requirements of the Contract Documents. Compensation for all services, items, materials, and equipment shall be included in prices stipulated for lump sum and unit price pay items listed in this Section and included in the Contract.

B.

Each lump sum price shall include an amount considered by CONTRACTOR to be adequate to cover CONTRACTOR’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item.

1.2

RELATED PROVISIONS

A.

Payments to CONTRACTOR: Refer to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Agreement, and Section 01 29 76, Progress Payment Procedures.

B.

Changes in Contract Price: Refer to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Section 01 26 00, Contract Modification Procedures.

C. Schedule of Values: Refer to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Section 01 29 73, Schedule of Values. 1.3 A.

GENERAL CONSTRUCTION Item 1 – General Conditions, Mobilization and Demobiliation: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall include a lump sum amount for all mobilization and demobilization required for the Work.

00361334.0000

01 22 13-1

Measurement and Payment

2. Measurement and Payment: Lump sum payment for Item 1 will be full compensation for completing the Work, as shown or indicated in this bid package. B.

Item 2 – Indemnification: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall include indemnification in the base lump sum amount for the amount indicated on the bid form. 2. Measurement and Payment: Lump sum payment for Item 2 will be full compensation for starting the Work, as shown or indicated in this bid package.

C. Item 3 – High Services Pump Station Upgrade and All Work, Except Item No. 4 and 5: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall include a lump sum amount for all services and equipment required for the Work. 2. Measurement and Payment: Lump sum payment for Item 3 will be full compensation for completing the Work, as shown or indicated in this bid package. Additional work items that CONTRACTOR may be ordered by ENGINEER to perform are described below. D. Item 4 and 5 – Additive Owner’s Allowance: 1. Replacement of the Pump Suction Piping located inside the existing east and west Clearwells, as directed by the ENGINEER. During the project, the pump suction piping will be inspected and may require replacement. Estimated Work for this additive alternate is included in the Scope of Work. Work for this item shall only be performed by the CONTRACTOR if directed by the ENGINEER. Unused bid allowance amounts shall be deducted from the contract at project closeout. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall include a unit price for each of the items for all services and equipment required for this Additive Alternate. 3. Measurement and Payment: Unit price payment for Item 4 and 5 will be full compensation for completing the Work, as directed by the ENGINEER and as shown or indicated in this bid package, during an additional shutdown of each of the clearwells. E.

Item 6 – Permitting Allowance: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall include in the base lump sum amount a permitting allowance in the amount indicated on the bid form. All costs for permitting fees paid by the CONTRACTOR to permitting agencies, including but not limited to the City, shall be paid for through this allowance. Unused bid allowance amounts shall be deducted from the contract at project closeout. 2. Measurement and Payment: CONTRACTOR shall submit receipts with pay application requesting reimbursement. Markup for overhead, profit, time or CONTRACTOR expenses associated with permitting shall not be paid out of the allowance. If permit costs exceed the permit allowance the allowance amount will be increased via change order or the City will pay the overage amount directly to the permitting

00361334.0000

01 22 13-2

Measurement and Payment

agency. F.

Item 7 – Owner’s Contingency: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall include in the base lump sum amount of $250,000 Owner’s contingency bid allowance. The allowance shall be used to cover additional work that may be required by the OWNER. Any usage of the allowance shall require advance written approval by the ENGINEER. Unused bid allowance amounts shall be deducted from the contract at project closeout. 2. Payment: Payment for Work authorized under Item 6 will be full compensation for providing all Work authorized under the Owner’s contingency, complete as shown, indicated, or directed by ENGINEER. Work authorized under Owner’s contingency may be included in subsequent Application(s) for Payment, as applicable, following authorization of and performance of Owner’s contingency Work.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 22 13-3

Measurement and Payment

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

Scope. 1. This Section expands upon provisions of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and includes: a. Requests for interpretation. b. Written clarifications. c. Minor changes in the Work and Field Orders. d. Work Change Directives. e. Proposal Requests. f. Change Proposals. g. Change Orders.

B.

Submit Contract modification documents to ENGINEER, addressed to the contact person and contact information indicated in Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures, and in accordance with Section 01 31 26, Electronic Communication Protocols.

C. Retain at CONTRACTOR’s office and at the Site complete copy of each Contract modification document and related documents, and ENGINEER’s response. 1.2 A.

REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION General. 1. Transmit written requests for interpretation to ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR and OWNER may prepare and transmit requests for interpretation. 2. Prepare and transmit request for interpretation to obtain clarifications or interpretations of the Contract Documents. Report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies in the Contract Documents by requesting an interpretation. 3. Do not transmit request for interpretation when other form of communication is appropriate, such as CONTRACTOR’s submittals, requests for approvals of substitutes, notices, ordinary correspondence, or other form of communication. Improperly prepared or inappropriate requests for interpretation will be returned without response or action by ENGINEER. 4. Do not submit request for interpretation or clarification when: a. answer may be obtained by observations at the Site; or

00361334.0000

01 26 00-1

Contract Modification Procedures

b.

5.

B.

required information is clearly indicated in the Contract Documents; or c. required information is included in industry standards referenced in the Contract Documents or Supplier’s instructions that are consistent with the Contract Documents; or d. are reasonably inferable from any of foregoing. CONTRACTOR shall have sole financial responsibility for requests for interpretations or clarifications that are submitted late, out of sequence, or that are unnecessary.

Procedure. 1. Transmit requests for interpretation in accordance with Section 01 31 26, Electronic Communication Protocols, and requirements of this Section. Include with each request for interpretation a separate letter of transmittal. 2. ENGINEER will provide timely review of requests for interpretation. Allow sufficient time for review and response. 3. ENGINEER will maintain log of requests for interpretation. Upon request, copy of log will be transmitted to requestor. 4. ENGINEER’s response to requests for interpretation will be transmitted in accordance with Section 01 31 26, Electronic Communication Protocols, and requirements of this Section. Each response to a request for interpretation will include a separate letter of transmittal. 5. ENGINEER’s written response to each request for interpretation will be distributed to: a. CONTRACTOR. b. OWNER. c. Resident Project Representative (RPR). d. ENGINEER. 6. If ENGINEER requests additional information to make an interpretation, entity requesting the interpretation shall transmit the information requested within ten days, unless ENGINEER allows additional time, via correspondence referring to request for interpretation number. 7. Interpretations that One or Both Parties Believes Entails a Change to the Contract: a. If CONTRACTOR or OWNER believes that a change in the Contract Price or Contract Times or other change to the Contract is required as a result of ENGINEER’s interpretation, so advise ENGINEER in writing before proceeding with the Work associated with the request for interpretation. b. If, after this initial communication, either OWNER or CONTRACTOR believes that change in Contract Price, Contract Times, both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract is necessary, recourse shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Preparation of Requests for Interpretation: 00361334.0000

01 26 00-2

Contract Modification Procedures

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.3

Prepare each request for interpretation on the “Request for Interpretation” form included with this Section, or other form acceptable to ENGINEER. Number each request for interpretation as follows: Numbering system shall be the Contract number and designation followed by a hyphen and three-digit sequential number. Example: First request for interpretation on the general contract for project titled, “Contract A15” would be, “RFI No. A15-GC-001”. In space provided on form, describe the interpretation requested. Provide additional sheets as necessary. Include text and sketches as required in sufficient detail to describe the the need for an interpretation. When applicable, request for interpretation shall include CONTRACTOR’s recommended resolution.

WRITTEN CLARIFICATIONS

A.

General: 1. Written clarifications, when required, will be initiated and issued by ENGINEER. 2. Written clarifications do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times, and do not alter the Contract Documents. 3. Written clarifications will be issued as correspondence or using clarification notice form, with additional information as required.

B.

Procedure. 1. ENGINEER’s written clarifications will be transmitted in accordance with Section 01 31 26, Electronic Communication Protocols, and requirements of this Section. 2. Each written clarification will be distributed to: a. CONTRACTOR. b. OWNER. c. Resident Project Representative (RPR). d. ENGINEER. 3. Written Clarifications that One or Both Parties Believes Entails a Change to the Contract: a. If CONTRACTOR or OWNER believes that a change in the Contract Price or Contract Times or other change to the Contract is required as a result of ENGINEER’s written clarification, so advise ENGINEER in writing before proceeding with the Work associated with the written clarification. b. If, after this initial communication, either OWNER or CONTRACTOR believes that change in Contract Price, Contract Times, both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract is necessary, recourse shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents.

00361334.0000

01 26 00-3

Contract Modification Procedures

4.

1.4 A.

MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK AND FIELD ORDERS General: 1. Field Orders, when required, will be initiated and issued by ENGINEER. 2.

3. 4. B.

1.5 A.

If ENGINEER’s written clarification is unclear, prepare and transmit a request for interpretation.

Field Orders authorize minor variations in the Work but do not change the Contract Times but may change the Contract Price related to Cost Allowances specifically included on the Bid Form. Field Orders will be in the form of Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee document EJCDC® C-942, “Field Order”. ENGINEER will maintain a log of Field Orders issued.

Procedure. 1. Field Orders will be transmitted in accordance with Section 01 31 26, Electronic Communication Protocols, and requirements of this Section. Each Field Order will include a separate letter of transmittal. 2. Each Field Order will be distributed to: a. CONTRACTOR. b. OWNER. c. Resident Project Representative (RPR). d. ENGINEER. 3. Field Orders that One or Both Parties Believes Entails a Change to the Contract Price or Contract Times: a. If CONTRACTOR or OWNER believes that a change in the Contract Price or Contract Times or other change to the Contract is required as a result of a Field Order, so advise ENGINEER in writing before proceeding with the Work associated with the Field Order. b. If, after this initial communication, CONTRACTOR believes that change in Contract Price, Contract Times, both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract is necessary, recourse shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4. If the Field Order is unclear, submit request for interpretation. WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVES General: 1. Work Change Directives, when required, order additions, deletions, or revisions to the Work. 2. Work Change Directives do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times but are evidence that the parties to the Contract expect that the change ordered or documented by the Work Change Directive will be incorporated in subsequently issued Change Order following agreement

00361334.0000

01 26 00-4

Contract Modification Procedures

3.

B.

1.6 A.

by the parties as to the Work Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times.. Work Change Directives will be in the form of EJCDC® C-940, “Work Change Directive”.

Procedure. 1. Work Change Directives signed by OWNER and ENGINEER will be transmitted in accordance with Section 01 31 26, Electronic Communication Protocols, and requirements of this Section. Each Work Change Directive will include a separate letter of transmittal. CONTRACTOR shall print three originals of Work Change Directive for CONTRACTOR’s signature. 2. CONTRACTOR shall promptly sign each original Work Change Directive and, within five days of receipt, return all originals to ENGINEER. 3. Original, signed Work Change Directives will be distributed as follows: a. CONTRACTOR: One original. b. OWNER: One original. c. ENGINEER: One original. 4. One copy of each Work Change Directive will be distributed to: a. Resident Project Representative (RPR). 5. Documentation of Costs: a. When basis of payment for Work ordered under a Work Change Directive will be paid as Cost of the Work, or when otherwise required by ENGINEER, document for the Work performed under each separate Work Change Directive, for each day, the following: 1) Number and labor classifications of workers employed and hours worked. 2) Construction equipment used including manufacturer, model, and year of manufacture, and number of hours such equipment was onsite and used for the Work under the Work Change Directive. 3) Consumables and similar materials used. 4) Receipts, bills, or invoices for and descriptions of materials and equipment incorporated into the Work. 5) Invoices and labor and equipment breakdowns for Subcontractors and Suppliers. 6) Other information required by OWNER or ENGINEER, b. Submit such information in a format acceptable to ENGINEER. c. Transmit such documentation to ENGINEER as a Change Proposal. PROPOSAL REQUESTS General: 1. Proposal Requests may be initiated by ENGINEER or OWNER.

00361334.0000

01 26 00-5

Contract Modification Procedures

2.

3.

B.

1.7

Proposal Requests are for requesting the effect on the Contract Price and the Contract Times and other information relative to contemplated changes in the Work. Proposal Requests do not authorize changes or variations in the Work, and do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times or terms of the Contract. Proposal Requests will be furnished using the “Proposal Request” form included with this Section.

Procedure. 1. Proposal Requests will be transmitted in accordance with Section 01 31 26, Electronic Communication Protocols, and requirements of this Section. Each Proposal Requests will include a separate letter of transmittal. 2. Each signed Proposal Request will be transmitted to: a. CONTRACTOR. b. OWNER. c. Resident Project Representative (RPR). d. ENGINEER. 3. Transmit request for interpretation to clarify conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies in Proposal Request. 4. Upon receipt of Proposal Request, CONTRACTOR shall prepare and transmit to ENGINEER a Change Proposal, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for the proposed Work described in the Proposal Request. CHANGE PROPOSALS

A.

General. 1. Prepare and transmit written Change Proposal to ENGINEER in response to each Proposal Request; or when CONTRACTOR believes a change in the Contract Price or Contract Times or other change to the terms of the Contract is required; or to appeal an initial decision by ENGINEER concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; contest a set-off against payment due; or seek other relief under the Contract.

B.

Procedure. 1. Prepare and transmit Change Proposals within time limits indicated in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 2. Transmit Change Proposals in accordance with Section 01 31 26, Electronic Communication Protocols, and requirements of this Section. Include with each Change Proposal all required supporting documentation and a separate letter of transmittal. 3. ENGINEER’s Review and Requests for Additional Information:

00361334.0000

01 26 00-6

Contract Modification Procedures

a.

4.

5.

6.

ENGINEER will review and act on each Change Proposal in accordance with, and within the time limits indicated in, the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. b. When, ENGINEER requests additional information to render a decision, submit required information within five days of receipt of ENGINEER’s request, unless ENGINEER allows more time. Submit the required information via correspondence that refers to the specific Change Proposal number. c. OWNER shall transmit to ENGINEER such comments, if any, that OWNER has on the Change Proposal, within 10 days of OWNER’s receipt of the Change Proposal. d. ENGINEER will render a written decision on the Change Proposal. e. ENGINEER’s response to Change Proposals will be transmitted in accordance with Section 01 31 26, Electronic Communication Protocols, and requirements of this Section, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions. ENGINEER’s response to each Change Proposal will be distributed to: a. CONTRACTOR. b. OWNER. c. Resident Project Representative (RPR). d. ENGINEER. If Change Proposal is recommended for approval by ENGINEER and is approved by OWNER, a Change Order will be issued or, when applicable, an appropriate use of contingency allowance will be authorized by OWNER. If parties do not agree on terms for the change, OWNER or CONTRACTOR may file a Claim against the other, in accordance with the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions.

C. Preparation of Change Proposals: 1. Each Change Proposal shall be submitted on the “Change Proposal” form included with this Section, or other form acceptable to ENGINEER. 2. Number each Change Proposal as follows: Numbering system shall be the Contract number and designation followed by a hyphen and threedigit sequential number. Example: First Change Proposal for the general contract for project named “Contract A15” would be, “ Change Proposal No. A15-GC-001”. 3. In space provided on Change Proposal form: a. Describe scope of each proposed change. Include text and sketches on additional sheets as required to provide detail sufficient for ENGINEER’s review and response. If a change item is submitted in response to Proposal Request, write in as scope, “In accordance with Proposal Request No.” followed by the

00361334.0000

01 26 00-7

Contract Modification Procedures

4.

1.8

Proposal Request number. Submit written clarifications, if any, to scope of change. b. Submit justification for each proposed change. If change is in response to proposal request, write in as justification, “In accordance with Proposal Request No.” followed by the proposal request number. c. List the total change in the Contract Price and Contract Times for each separate change item included in the Change Proposal. Unless otherwise directed by ENGINEER, attach to the Change Proposal detailed breakdowns of pricing (Cost of the Work and CONTRACTOR’s fee) including: a. List of Work tasks to accomplish the change. b. For each task, labor cost breakdown including labor classification, total hours per labor classification, and hourly cost rate for each labor classification. b. Construction equipment and machinery to be used, including manufacturer, model, and year of manufacture, and number of hours for each. c. Detailed breakdown of cost of materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, including quantities, unit costs, and total cost, with Supplier’s written quotations. d. Breakdowns of the Cost of the Work and fee for Subcontractors, including labor, construction equipment and machinery, and materials and equipment incorporated into the Work, other costs, and Subcontractor fees (e.g., overhead and profit). e. Breakdown of other costs eligible, in accordance with the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions under “Cost of the Work” provisions. f. Other information required by ENGINEER. g. CONTRACTOR’s fees applied to eligible CONTRACTOR costs and eligible Subcontractor costs.

CHANGE ORDERS

A.

General: 1. Change Orders will be recommended by ENGINEER (when required by the General Conditions), and will be signed by OWNER and CONTRACTOR, to authorize additions, deletions, or revisions to the Work, or changes to the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2. Change Orders will be in the form of EJCDC® C-941, “Change Order”.

B.

Procedure. 1. Change Orders for signature by CONTRACTOR will be transmitted in accordance with Section 01 31 26, Electronic Communication Protocols, and requirements of this Section. Each Change Order will include a separate letter of transmittal. CONTRACTOR shall print three originals of Change Order for CONTRACTOR’s signature.

00361334.0000

01 26 00-8

Contract Modification Procedures

2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

CONTRACTOR shall promptly sign each original Change Order and, within five days of receipt, return all originals to ENGINEER. ENGINEER will sign each original Change Order and forward them to OWNER. After approval and signature by OWNER, original Change Orders will be distributed as indicated below. Original, signed Change Orders will be distributed as follows: a. CONTRACTOR: One original. b. OWNER: One original. c. ENGINEER: One original. One copy of each Change Order will be distributed to: a. Resident Project Representative (RPR).

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 A.

ATTACHMENTS The forms listed below, following this Section’s “End of Section” designation, are part of this Specifications Section: 1. Request for Interpretation form (one page). 2. Proposal Request form (one page). 3. Change Proposal form (one page).

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 26 00-9

Contract Modification Procedures

REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION Owner: _________________________________________________________________________ Project Name: ____________________________________________________________________ Contractor: RFI ________________________ Date Transmitted: _______________________________ Date Response Requested: _______________________

No.

Date Received: __________________ Date Response Transmitted: _______

Subject: _________________________________ Specification Section and Paragraph: ________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ ________ Drawing References: ______________________________

INTERPRETATION REQUESTED:

Signature: _______________

Date:

ENGINEER’S RESPONSE:

Signature: _________________

Date:

PROPOSAL REQUEST Owner: _________________________________________________________________________ Project Name: ____________________________________________________________________ Proposal Request No.: __________________ Date: Contract Name and No.:

Contractor:

Other Contracts Involved in ___________________________________________

Proposed

Change:

TO CONTRACTOR: Please submit a complete Change Proposal for the proposed modifications described below. If the associated Change Proposal is approved, a Change Order or allowance authorization will be issued to authorize adjustment so the scope of the Work. This Proposal Request is not a Change Order, Work Change Directive, Field Order, or an authorization to proceed with the proposed Work described below.

SCOPE OF PROPOSED WORK: 1. Item: 2. Item: 3. Item:

Proposal requested by:

Signature of Requestor: ______________________________________________________________

CHANGE PROPOSAL Owner: _________________________________________________________________________ Project Name: ____________________________________________________________________ Change Proposal No.: ________________________ Date: Submitted in Response to Proposal _________________________________________

Request

No.:

Contract Name and No.: Contractor:

Subject: _________________________________________________________________________ _ _________________________________________________________________________ _______ The following changes to the Contract are proposed:

SCOPE OF WORK: (attach and list supporting information as required) 1. Item: 2. Item:

JUSTIFICATION: 1. Item: 2. Item:

CHANGES IN CONTRACT PRICE AND CONTRACT TIMES: We propose that the Contract Price and Contract Times be changed as follows: For Contract Price, attach detailed cost breakdowns for Contractor and Subcontractors, Supplier quotations, and other information required. For the Contract Times, state increase, decrease, or no change to Contract Times for Substantial Completion, readiness for final payment, and Milestones, if any. If increase or decrease, state specific number of days for changes to the Contract Times.

Description 1. Item 2. Item Total This Change Proposal

Amount

Contract Times (days) Substantial Final

$0.00 $0.00 $0.00

Changes to Milestones, if _____________________________________________________

0 0 0

0 0 0

any:

Contractor represents that supporting data attached to this Change Proposal are accurate and complete. The requested time or price adjustment indicated in this Change Proposal is the entire adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of the proposed change(s) indicated herein. Change Proposal by: Signature of Proposer: _______________________________________________________________

SECTION 01 29 73 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

Submit to ENGINEER for acceptance a Schedule of Values that allocates cost to each item of the Work. Schedule of Value list of line items shall correspond to each aspect of the Work, establishing in detail the portion of the Contract Price allocated to each major component of the Work.

B.

Upon request of ENGINEER, support values with data that substantiate their correctness.

C. Submit preliminary Schedule of Values to ENGINEER for initial review. CONTRACTOR shall incorporate ENGINEER’s comments into the Schedule of Values and resubmit to ENGINEER. ENGINEER may require corrections and re-submittals until Schedule of Values is acceptable. D. Schedule of Values and the Progress Schedule updates specified in Section 01 32 16, Progress Schedule, shall be basis for preparing each Application for Payment. Schedule of Values may be used as a basis for negotiating price of changes, if any, in the Work. E.

Include in Schedule of Values unit price payment items with their associated quantity. Provide in the Schedule of Values detailed breakdown of unit prices when required by ENGINEER.

F.

Include in Schedule of Values itemized list of Work for each major part of the Contract, for each payment item specified in Section 01 22 13, Measurement and Payment, and shall be grouped under the following areas: 1. High service pump installations and replacements 2. Backwash pump replacements 3. Electrical improvements 4. Instrumentation and Controls improvements 5. Ventilation improvements 6. Architectural improvements 7. Abandonment of the Aeration (High Service) Pump Station

G. Requirements for preliminary Schedule of Values and Schedule of Values are: 1. Schedule of Values shall show division of Work between CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors. Line items for Work to be done by Subcontractor shall include the word, “(SUBCONTRACTED)”. 00361334.0000

01 29 73-1

Schedule of Values

2.

Schedule of Values shall include breakdown of costs for contract administration (mobilization, progress schedules, indemnification), materials and equipment, installation, and other costs used in preparing the Bid by CONTRACTOR and each Subcontractor. 3. Identify each line item with number corresponding to the associated Specification Section number. List sub-items of major products or systems, as appropriate or when requested by ENGINEER. 4. Sum of individual values shown on the Schedule of Values shall equal the total of associated payment item. Sum of payment item totals in the Schedule of Values shall equal the Contract Price. 5. Include in each line item a directly proportional amount of CONTRACTOR’s overhead and profit. Do not include overhead and profit as separate item(s). 6. Include separate line item for each allowance, and for each unit price item. Allowances shall be included as separate line items below the subtotal for all other items in the construction contract. 7. Include line item for bonds and insurance, in amount not exceeding 2.0 percent of the Contract Price. This line item shall be included in the “contract administration” section of the Schedule of Values. This may be applied for in the first Application for Payment. 8. Line items for Site maintenance such as dust control, compliance with storm water pollution prevention plans and permits, spill prevention control and countermeasures plans, and for construction photographic documentation; temporary utilities and temporary facilities, field offices, temporary controls, field engineering, and similar Work shall be included in the Schedule of Values and proportioned in Applications for Payment throughout duration of the Work. 9. Include separate line items for mobilization and demobilization. Document for ENGINEER the activities included in mobilization and demobilization line items. a. Mobilization will be limited to 5 percent of the Contract Price. b. Demobilization shall be at least 1 percent of the Contract Price and shall be included with the Application for Payment following Substantial Completion, or other schedule accepted by ENGINEER. 10. Submit Schedule of Values on 8.5-inch by 11-inch white paper. 1.2 A.

SUBMITTALS Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Submit to ENGINEER four copies of Schedule of Values. 2. Content of Schedule of Values submittals shall conform to Article 1.1 of this Section. 3. Time Frames for Submittals: a. Submit preliminary Schedule of Values within ten days of date that the Contract Times commence running in accordance with the Notice to Proceed.

00361334.0000

01 29 73-2

Schedule of Values

b.

c.

Submittal of the Schedule of Values shall be in accordance with the General Conditions. ENGINEER will not accept Applications for Payment without an acceptable Schedule of Values. When required by ENGINEER, promptly submit updated Schedule of Values to include cost breakdowns for changes in the Contract Price.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 29 73-3

Schedule of Values

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 01 29 76 PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

PROGRESS PAYMENTS

A.

General. 1. CONTRACTOR’s requests for payment shall be in accordance with the Agreement, General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, and the Specifications. 2. Applications for Payment shall be in the form of the CITY’s Standard Application for Payment Form. The CITY will provide a copy of this form to the contractor upon execution of the contract.

B.

Procedure: 1. Submit to ENGINEER four originals of each complete Application for Payment and other documents to accompany the Application for Payment. 2. ENGINEER will act on request for payment in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.

C. Each request for progress payment shall include: 1. Completed City of Hollywood Application for Payment form, including summary/signature page, narrative progress summary, updated Schedule of Values indicating the percent complete for each line item, up-to-date progress schedule, and stored materials summary. . 2. For materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but suitably stored on site, submit documentation in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Legibly indicate on invoice or bill of sale the specific materials or equipment included in the payment request and corresponding bid/payment item number for each. 3. For payment requests that include payment for Work under an allowance, submit documentation acceptable to CITY of the authorization of allowance Work. Access to the construction allowance must be approved in writing by the City prior to including in a payment application. Applications for payment that include unapproved access to an allowance will be rejected. D. Requirements for request for final payment are in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and Section 01 77 19, Closeout Requirements.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 00361334.0000

01 29 76-1

Progress Payment Procedures

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 29 76-2

Progress Payment Procedures

SECTION 01 31 19.13 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

Scope: 1. A pre-construction conference will be held for the Project. 2. CONTRACTOR shall attend the conference prepared to discuss all items on the agenda. 3. ENGINEER will distribute an agenda, preside at conference, and prepare and distribute minutes to all conference participants and others as requested.

B.

The purpose of the conference is to designate responsible personnel, establish working relationships, discuss preliminary schedules submitted by the CONTRACTOR, and review administrative and procedural requirements for the Project. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters will be established.

C. Date, Time and Location: Conference will be held after execution of the Contract and before Work starts at the Site. ENGINEER will establish the date, time, and location of conference and notify the interested and involved parties. D. Prior to the conference, submit the following preliminary schedules in accordance with the General Conditions: 1. Progress Schedule. 2. Schedule of Submittals. 3. Schedule of Values. E.

1.2 A.

CONTRACTOR shall provide information required and contribute appropriate items for discussion. CONTRACTOR shall bring to the conference the following, with sufficient number of copies for each attendee: 1. Preliminary Progress Schedule, as submitted to ENGINEER. 2. Preliminary Schedule of Submittals, as submitted to ENGINEER. 3. Preliminary Schedule of Values, as submitted to ENGINEER. 4. List of emergency contact information, in accordance with Article 1.4 of this Section. REQUIRED ATTENDANCE Representative of each entity attending the conference shall be authorized to act on that entity’s behalf.

00361334.0000

01 31 19.13-1

Pre-Construction Conference

B.

Contractor Attendance: Conference shall be attended by CONTRACTOR’s project manager, Site superintendent, project managers for major Subcontractors, and major equipment Suppliers as CONTRACTOR deems appropriate.

C. Other attendees will be representatives of: 1. CITY. 2. ENGINEER. 3. Others as requested by CITY, CONTRACTOR, or ENGINEER. 1.3 A.

AGENDA Preliminary Agenda: Be prepared to discuss in detail the topics listed below. Revisions to this agenda, if any, will be furnished to CONTRACTOR prior to conference. 1. Procedural and Administrative: a. Personnel and Teams: Designation of roles and personnel. Limitations of authority of personnel, including personnel who will sign Contract modifications and make binding decisions. Lists of proposed Subcontractors and manufacturers (where applicable). Authorities having jurisdiction. b. Procedures for communications and correspondence. c. Copies of the Contract Documents and availability. d. Subcontractors. e. The Work and Scheduling: Scope of the Work. Contract Times, including Milestones (if any). Phasing and sequencing. Preliminary Progress Schedule. Critical path activities. f. Safety: Responsibility for safety. Designation of Contractor’s safety representative. Emergency procedures and accident reporting. Emergency contact information. Confined space entry procedures. Hazardous materials communication program. Impact of Project on public safety. g. Permits. h. Review of insurance requirements and insurance claims. i. Coordination: Project coordination, and coordination among contractors. Coordination with CITY’s operations. Progress meetings.

00361334.0000

01 31 19.13-2

Pre-Construction Conference

j.

2.

Products and Submittals: Preliminary Schedule of Submittals. Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals. Product options, “or equals”, and substitutions.. Construction photographic documentation. k. Contract Modification Procedures Requests for interpretation Clarification notices Field Orders Proposal requests Change Order proposals Work Change Directives. Change Orders. Procedure for filing Claims. l. Payment: CITY’s Project financing and funding, as applicable. CITY’s tax-exempt status. Preliminary Schedule of Values, and procedures for measuring for payment. Retainage. Progress payment procedures. Prevailing wage rates and payrolls. m. Testing and inspections, including notification requirements. n. Disposal of demolition materials. o. Record documents. p. Preliminary Discussion of Contract Closeout: Procedures for Substantial Completion. Contract closeout requirements. Correction period. Duration of bonds and insurance. Site Mobilization: a. Working hours and overtime. b. Field offices, trailers, and staging areas. c. Temporary facilities. d. Temporary utilities and limitations on utility consumption (where applicable). e. Utility company coordination (if not done as a separate meeting). f. Access to Site, access roads, and parking for construction vehicles. g. Maintenance and protection of traffic. h. Use of premises. i. Protection of existing property. j. Security. k. Temporary controls, such as sediment and erosion control, noise control, dust control, storm water control, and other such measures. l. Site barriers and temporary fencing.

00361334.0000

01 31 19.13-3

Pre-Construction Conference

3. 4. 5. 1.4

m. Storage of materials and equipment. n.. Reference points and benchmarks; surveys and layouts. o. Site maintenance during the Project. p. Cleaning and removal of trash and debris. q. Restoration. General discussion and questions. Next meeting. Site visit, if required.

EMERGENCY CONTACT INFORMATION

A.

CONTRACTOR shall provide list of emergency contact information for 24hour use throughout the Project. Emergency contact information shall be updated and kept current throughout the Project. If personnel or contact information change, provide updated emergency contact information list at the next progress meeting.

B.

CONTRACTOR’s list of emergency contact information shall include: 1. CONTRACTOR’s project manager’s office, field office, and cellular telephone numbers. 2. CONTRACTOR’s Site superintendent’s office, field office, and cellular telephone numbers. 3. CONTRACTOR’s foreman’s field office, and cellular telephone numbers. 4. Major Subcontractors’ and Suppliers’ office, and cellular telephone numbers.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 31 19.13-4

Pre-Construction Conference

SECTION 01 31 19.23 PROGRESS MEETINGS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

Scope: 1. Progress meetings will be held throughout the Project. CONTRACTOR shall attend each progress meeting prepared to discuss in detail all items on the agenda. 2. ENGINEER will preside at progress meetings and will prepare and distribute minutes of progress meetings to all meeting participants and others as requested.

B.

Date and Time: 1. Regular Meetings: Once every two weeks on a day and time agreeable to CITY, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR. 2. Other Meetings: As required.

C. Place: Hollywood Water Treatment Plant or other location mutually agreed upon by CITY, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER. D. Handouts: CONTRACTOR shall bring to each progress meeting a minimum of ten copies of each of the following: 1. List of Work accomplished since the previous progress meeting. 2. Up-to-date Progress Schedule. 3. Up-to-date Schedule of Submittals. 4. When applicable, list of upcoming, planned time off (with dates) for personnel with significant roles on the Project, and the designated contact person in their absence. 1.2

REQUIRED ATTENDANCE

A.

Representatives present for each entity shall be authorized to act on that entity’s behalf.

B.

Required Attendees: 1. CONTRACTOR: a. Project manager. b. Site superintendent. c. When needed for the discussion of a particular agenda item, representatives of Subcontractors and Suppliers shall attend meetings. 2. ENGINEER: a. Project manager or designated representative

00361334.0000

01 31 19.23-1

Progress Meetings

3. 4. 5. 1.3 A.

b. Others as required by ENGINEER. CITY’s representative(s), as required. Testing and inspection agencies, as required. Others, as appropriate.

AGENDA Preliminary Agenda: Be prepared to discuss in detail the topics listed below. Revised agenda, if any, will be furnished to CONTRACTOR prior to first progress meeting. Progress meeting agenda may be modified by ENGINEER during the Project as required. 1. Review, comment, and amendment (if required) of minutes of previous progress meeting. 2. Review of progress since the previous progress meeting. 3. Planned progress through next progress meeting. 4. Review of Progress Schedule a. Contract Times, including Milestones (if any) b. Critical path. c. Schedules for fabrication and delivery of materials and equipment. d. Corrective measures, if required. 5. Applications for progress payments. 6. Problems, conflicts, and observations. 7. Quality standards, testing, and inspections. 8. Coordination between parties. 9. Site management issues, including access, security, maintenance and protection of traffic, maintenance, cleaning, and other Site issues. 10. Record document status.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 31 19.23-2

Progress Meetings

SECTION 01 31 26 ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

Scope: 1. This Section establishes the procedures with which the parties will comply regarding transmission or exchange of electronic data for the Project. 2. CONTRACTOR shall provide labor, materials, tools, equipment, services, utilities, and incidentals shown, specified, and required for complying with this Section throughout the Project. 3. This Section does not supersede the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, regarding transmitting of the Contract Documents to CONTRACTOR after the Effective Date of the Contract. 4. In addition to the requirements of this Section, comply with requirements for exchange of electronic data in the following: a. Section 01 32 16, Progress Schedule. b. Section 01 32 33, Photographic Documentation. c. Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. d. Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documents.

B.

Coordination: 1. CONTRACTOR shall require all Subcontractors and Suppliers to comply with the electronic communication protocols established in this Section.

C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 32 16, Progress Schedule. 2. Section 01 32 33, Photographic Documentation. 3. Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. 4. Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documents. 1.2 A.

TERMINOLOGY The following words or terms are not defined but, when used in this Section, have the following meaning: 1. “Electronic data” means information, communications, drawings, or designs created or stored for the Project in electronic or digital form. 2. “Confidential information” means electronic data that the transmitting party has designated as confidential and clearly marked with an indication such as “Confidential”, “Business Proprietary”, or similar designation.

00361334.0000

01 31 26-1

Electronic Communication Protocols

3.

1.3

“Written” or “in writing” means any and all communications, including without limitation a notice, consent, or interpretation, prepared and sent to an address provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed upon by the parties and ENGINEER using a transmission method sent forth in this Section that allows the recipient to print or store the communication. Communications transmitted electronically are presumed received when sent in conformance with this Paragraph 1.2.A.3.

TRANSMISSION OF ELECTRONIC DATA

A.

Transmission of electronic data constitutes a warrant by the transmitting party to the receiving party that the transmitting party is one or more of the following: 1. The copyright owner of the electronic data. 2. Has permission from the copyright owner to transmit the electronic data for its use on the Project. 3. Is authorized to transmit confidential information.

B.

Receiving party agrees to keep confidential information confidential and not to disclose it to another person except to (1) its employees, (2) those who need to know the content of the confidential information to perform services or construction solely and exclusively for the Project, or (3) its consultants, contractors, Subcontractors, and Suppliers whose contracts include similar restrictions on the use of electronic data and confidential information.

C. Transmitting party does not convey any right in the electronic data or in the software used to generate or transmit such data. Receiving party may not use electronic data unless permission to do so is provided in the Contract Documents, or in a separate license. D. Unless otherwise granted in a separate license, receiving party’s use, modification, or further transmission of electronic data, as provided the Contract Documents, is specifically limited to the design and construction of the Project in accordance with this Section, and nothing contained in this Section conveys any other right to use the electronic data for any other purpose. E.

To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, receiving party shall indemnify and defend the transmitting party from and against all claims arising from or related to receiving party’s modification to, or unlicensed use of, electronic data.

F.

Means of Transmitting Electronic Data: Unless otherwise indicated in Table 01 31 26-A of this Section or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, transmission of electronic data for the Project will generally be via:

00361334.0000

01 31 26-2

Electronic Communication Protocols

1.

2.

1.4 A.

E-mail and files attached to e-mail. Maintain e-mail system capable of transmitting and receiving files not less than 20 megabytes (MB) file size. For the transmission of files that exceed the size of the City’s emails system, use the Project’s Internet-based website. a. Software Platform: Drop Box or similar application. b. Website hosting will be by CONTRACTOR. c. Website address will be furnished to CONTRACTOR within ten days after the Effective Date of the Contract. d. To access the Project website, CONTRACTOR shall acquire and maintain throughout the Project high-speed Internet service suitable for transferring electronic data, and Internet browsing software such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 9.0 or equal.

ELECTRONIC DATA PROTOCOLS Comply with the data formats, transmission methods, and permitted uses set forth in Table 01 31 26-A, Electronic Data Protocol Table, below, when transmitting or using electronic data on the Project. Where a row in the table has no indicated means of transmitting electronic data, use for such documents only printed copies transmitted to the receiving party via appropriate delivery method.

TABLE 01 31 26-A ELECTRONIC DATA PROTOCOL TABLE (E-MAIL ATTACHMENTS) Electronic Data 1.4.A.1. Project communications General communications & correspondence Meeting notices and agendas Meeting minutes 1.4.A.2. Contractor's submittals to Engineer Shop Drawings Product data Informational and closeout submittals: Documentation of delivery of maintenance materials submittals 1.4.A.3. Engineer’s return of reviewed submittals to Contractor Shop Drawings Product data Informational and closeout submittals: Documentation of delivery of maintenance materials submittals 1.4.A.4. Contract Modifications Documents Requests for interpretation to Engineer Engineer’s interpretations (RFI responses) Engineer’s clarifications to Contractor Engineer's issuance of Field Orders

00361334.0000

Data Format

Transmitting Party

Transmission Method

EM, PDF

O, E, C

EM, EMA

O, E, C

R

EM, PDF PDF

E E

EM, EMA EM, EMA

O, C O, C

R R

PDF PDF PDF PDF

C C C C

EMA EMA EMA EMA

E E E E

M (1) M (1) M (1) M (1)

PDF PDF PDF PDF

E E E E

EMA EMA EMA EMA

O., C O., C O., C O. C

R R R R

PDF PDF

C., O E

EMA EMA

E C, O

M (1) R

EM, PDF PDF

E E

EM, EMA EMA

C, O C, O

R R

01 31 26-3

Receiving Party

Permitted Uses

Electronic Communication Protocols

Notes

(1) (1) (1) (6)

(6)

(1)

Proposal Requests Change Proposals – submitted to Engineer Change Proposals – Engineer’s response Work Change Directives (for Contractor signature) Change Orders (for Contractor signature) 1.4.A.5. Applications for Payment 1.4.A.6. Claims and other notices 1.4.A.7. Closeout Documents Record drawings Other record documents Contract closeout documents

B.

PDF PDF

E, O C

EMA EMA

C O, E

R S

PDF

E

EMA

C. O

PDF

E

EMA

C

R

(2)

PDF

E

EMA

C

R

(2) (3) (4)

DWG and PDF PDF

C

EMA

E, O

M (5)

(5)

C

EMA

E. O

M (5)

(5)

Key to Electronic Data Protocol Table: Data Format: EM W EX PDF DWG

.msg, .htm, .txt, .rtf, e-mail text .docx, Microsoft® Word 2007 or later .xlsx, Microsoft® Excel 2007 or later .pdf. Portable Document Format .dwg. Autodesk AutoCAD 2013 drawing.

Transmitting Party: O C E

OWNER CONTRACTOR ENGINEER

Transmission Method: EM EMA CD PW FTP

Via e-mail As an attachment to an e-mail transmission Delivered via compact disc Posted to Project website FTP transfer to receiving FTP server

Receiving Party: O C E

OWNER CONTRACTOR ENGINEER

Permitted Uses: S R

00361334.0000

Store and view only Reproduce and distribute

01 31 26-4

Electronic Communication Protocols

I M

Integrate (incorporate additional electronic data without modifying data received) Modify as required to fulfill obligations for the Project

Notes: (1)

(2)

(3) (4)

Modifications by ENGINEER to CONTRACTOR’s submittals and requests for interpretations are limited to printing out, marking-up, and adding comment sheets. May be distributed only to affected Subcontractors and Suppliers. Print out, sign document, and return executed printed copy originals to ENGINEER. Submit printed Applications for Payment with original (“wet”) signatures. Submit notices, including Claims, in accordance with the notice provisions of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions.

(5)

Submit record drawings in native CAD format indicated when CONTRACTOR has executed ENGINEER’s standard agreement for release of electronic files. In addition, always submit record drawings as a PDF file. Comply with requirements of Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documents.

(6)

For operation and maintenance data, also submit printed copies as required by Section 01 78 23, Operations and Maintenance Data.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 31 26-5

Electronic Communication Protocols

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 01 32 16.00.10 PROGRESS SCHEDULE

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

DESCRIPTION Scope: 1. Prepare and submit Progress Schedules in accordance with the General Conditions and this Section, unless otherwise accepted by ENGINEER. 2. Maintain and update Progress Schedules. Submit updated Progress Schedules as specified in this Section unless otherwise directed by ENGINEER. 3. ENGINEER’s acceptance of the Progress Schedule, and comments or opinions concerning the activities in the Progress Schedule shall not control CONTRACTOR’s independent judgment relative to means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. CONTRACTOR is solely responsible for complying with the Contract Times. SUBMITTALS Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Progress Schedules: a. Submit six copies of preliminary Progress Schedule in accordance with Paragraph 2.05 of the General Conditions. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. b. After making revisions in accordance with ENGINEER’s comments on the preliminary Progress Schedule, submit six copies of Progress Schedule in accordance with Paragraph 2.07 of the General Conditions. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. c. Submit updated Progress Schedule at each progress meeting. If a Progress Schedule remains unchanged from one progress meeting to the next, submit a written statement to that effect. For monthly Progress Schedule submittals, bring to progress meeting the number of copies of the updated Progress Schedule specified in Section 01 31 19.23, Progress Meetings. d. Submit each Progress Schedule submittal with letter of transmittal complying with requirements of Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures, and specifically indicating the following: 1) Listing of activities and dates that have changed since the previous Progress Schedule submittal. 2) Discussion of problems causing delays, anticipated duration of delays, and proposed countermeasures.

00361334.0000

01 32 16.00.10-1

Progress Schedule

2. 1.3

Recovery Schedules: Submit in accordance with this Section.

PROGRESS SCHEDULE FORMAT AND CONTENT

A.

Format: 1. Type: a. Gantt chart prepared using software such as Microsoft Project 2003 or later edition, Primavera P6, Primavera Project Planner – P3, or similar software. 2. Sheet Size: 11 inches by 17 inches, unless otherwise accepted by ENGINEER. 3. Time Scale: Indicate first date of each work week. 4. Organization: a. Indicate on the separate Schedule of Submittals dates for submitting and reviewing Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals. b. Group construction into a separate sub-schedule (that is part of the Progress Schedule) by activity. c. Clearly indicate the critical path on the Progress Schedule. 5. Activity Designations: Indicate title and related Specification Section number.

B.

Content: Progress Schedules shall indicate the following: 1. Dates for shop-testing. 2. Delivery dates for materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. 3. Dates for beginning and completing each phase of the Work by activity and by trade. 4. Dates for start-up and check-out, field-testing, and instruction of OWNER’s personnel. 5. Dates corresponding to the Contract Times, and planned completion date associated with each Milestone (if any), Substantial Completion, and readiness for final payment.

C. Coordinate the Progress Schedule with the Schedule of Submittals. 1.4 A.

RECOVERY SCHEDULES Recovery Schedules, General: 1. When updated Progress Schedule indicates that the ability to comply with the Contract Times falls 10 or more days behind schedule, and there is no excusable delay, Change Order, or Work Change Directive to support an extension of the Contract Times, CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit a Progress Schedule demonstrating CONTRACTOR’s plan to accelerate the Work to achieve compliance with the Contract Times (“recovery schedule”) for ENGINEER’s acceptance.

00361334.0000

01 32 16.00.10-2

Progress Schedule

2.

B.

Submit recovery schedule within 5 days after submittal of updated Progress Schedule where need for recovery schedule is indicated.

Implementation of Recovery Schedule: 1. At no additional cost to OWNER, do one or more of the following: furnish additional labor, provide additional construction equipment, provide suitable materials, employ additional work shifts, expedite procurement of materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, and other measures necessary to complete the Work within the Contract Times. 2. Upon acceptance of recovery schedule by ENGINEER, incorporate recovery schedule into the next Progress Schedule update.

C. Lack of Action: 1. CONTRACTOR’s refusal, failure, or neglect to take appropriate recovery action, or to submit a recovery schedule, shall constitute reasonable evidence that CONTRACTOR is not prosecuting the Work or separable part thereof with the diligence that will ensure completion within the Contract Times. Such lack of action shall constitute sufficient basis for OWNER to exercise remedies available to OWNER under the Contract Documents.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 32 16.00.10-3

Progress Schedule

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

CONTRACTOR shall retain professional photographer to perform services specified, including: 1. Digital photography.

B.

Provide photographic documentation for the following: 1. Pre-construction. 2. Construction progress. 3. Final.

C. Image Quality: 1. Photographic documentation shall be in color. 2. Photographic images shall be suitably staged and set up (“framed”), focused, and shall have adequate lighting. 3. For still photographs, use camera with minimum 7.0-megapixel resolution. 1.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Qualifications: 1. Photographer: a. CONTRACTOR may use the services of a construction photography specialist, or may use one of its employees with experience providing photographic documentation of construction activities. 2. Upon request of ENGINEER, submit documentation of having successfully performed photographic documentation for at least two previous construction projects, each lasting at least three months.

B.

ENGINEER will approve the views to be taken and select time at which images will be taken. Photographic subjects, views, and angles will vary with progress of the Work.

1.3 A.

VIDEO TAPING The CONTRACTOR, in the presence, and to the satisfaction, of the ENGINEER, shall video tape all areas of the construction, staging, etc. A copy of the video tapes shall be delivered to the ENGINEER in DVD format and approved as acceptable before any work or site mobilization occurs.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

+ + END OF SECTION +

SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide submittals in accordance with the General Conditions as modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and this Section. 2. Provide submittals well in advance of need for the material or equipment, or procedure (as applicable), in the Work and with ample time required for delivery of material or equipment and to implement procedures following ENGINEER’s approval or acceptance of the associated submittal. Work covered by a submittal will not be included in progress payments until approval or acceptance of related submittals has been obtained in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. CONTRACTOR is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and corrected at the Site, for information pertaining solely to the fabrication processes and to techniques of construction, and for coordinating the work of all trades. CONTRACTOR’s signature of submittal’s stamp and letter of transmittal shall be CONTRACTOR’s representation that CONTRACTOR has met his obligations under the Contract Documents relative to that submittal.

B.

Samples: 1. Conform submittal of Samples to the General Conditions as modified by the Supplementary Conditions, this Section, and the Specification Section in which the Sample is specified. 2. Furnish at the same time Samples and submittals that are related to the same unit of Work or Specification Section. ENGINEER will not review submittals without associated Samples, and will not review Samples without associated submittals. 3. Samples shall clearly illustrate functional characteristics of product, all related parts and attachments, and full range of color, texture, pattern, and material.

C. Restrictions on Quantity of Submittals and Compensation of OWNER: 1.

CONTRACTOR shall furnish required submittals with sufficient information and accuracy to obtain required approval or acceptance of submittal by ENGINEER with not more than three (3) resubmittals.

2.

Total number of CONTRACTOR’s submittals shall not exceed 25 percent above the total number of first-time submittals indicated in the

00361334.0000

01 33 00-1

Submittal Procedures

Schedule of Submittals initially accepted by ENGINEER in accordance with the General Conditions. ENGINEER will record ENGINEER’s time for reviewing submittals of Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals and items requiring approval or acceptance, beyond the quantity of first-time submittals indicated in the Schedule of Submittals initially accepted by ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER for ENGINEER’s charges for such time.

1.2 A.

3.

In the event that CONTRACTOR requests a substitution for a previously approved item, Contractor shall reimburse OWNER for ENGINEER’s charges for such time unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of CONTRACTOR.

4.

OWNER may impose set-offs against CONTRACTOR for the costs for which CONTRACTOR is to reimburse or compensate OWNER, in accordance with the General Conditions.

TYPES OF SUBMITTALS Submittal types are classified as follows: 1) Action Submittals, 2) Informational Submittals, 3) Closeout Submittals, and 4) Maintenance Material submittals. Type of each required submittal is designated in the respective Specification Sections; when type of submittal is not specified in the associated Specification Section, submittal will be classified as follows: 1. Action Submittals include: a. Shop Drawings. b. Product data. c. Delegated design submittals, which include documents prepared, sealed, and signed by a design professional retained by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, or Supplier for materials and equipment to be incorporated into the completed Work. Delegated design submittals do not include submittals related to temporary construction unless specified otherwise in the related Specification Section. Delegated design submittals include: design drawings, design data including calculations, specifications, certifications, and other submittals prepared by such design professional. d. Samples. e. Testing plans, procedures, and testing limitations. 2. Informational Submittals include: a. Certificates. b. Design data not sealed and signed by a design professional retained by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, or Supplier. c. Pre-construction test and evaluation reports, such as reports on pilot testing, subsurface investigations, potential Hazardous Environmental Condition, and similar reports. d. Supplier instructions, including installation data, and instructions for handling, starting-up, and troubleshooting.

00361334.0000

01 33 00-2

Submittal Procedures

e.

3.

4.

5.

Source quality control submittals (other than testing plans, procedures, and testing limitations), including results of shop testing. f. Field or Site quality control submittals (other than testing plans, procedures, and testing limitations), including results of operating and acceptability tests at the Site. g. Supplier reports. h. Sustainable design submittals (other than sustainable design closeout documentation). i. Special procedure submittals, including health and safety plans and other procedural submittals. j. Qualifications statements. Closeout Submittals include: a. Maintenance contracts. b. Operations and maintenance data. c. Bonds, such as maintenance bonds and bonds for a specific product or system. d. Warranty documentation. e. Record documentation. f. Sustainable design closeout documentation. g. Software. Maintenance Material Submittals include: a. Spare parts. b. Extra stock materials. c. Tools. When type of submittal is not specified and is not included in the list above, ENGINEER will determine the type of submittal.

B.

Not Included in this Section: Administrative and procedural requirements for following are covered elsewhere in the Contract Documents: 1. Requests for interpretations of the Contract Documents. 2. Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. 3. Applications for Payment 4. Progress Schedules. 5. Photographic documentation. 6. Reports and documentation required in accordance with applicable permits 7. Site survey data.

1.3

SUBMITTALS REQUIRED IN THIS SECTION

A.

Informational Submittals: Provide the following: 1. Schedule of Submittals: a. Timing: 1) Provide submittal within time frames specified in the Contract Documents. 2) Provide updated Schedule of Submittals with each submittal of the updated Progress Schedule.

00361334.0000

01 33 00-3

Submittal Procedures

b.

c. d. e.

f.

1.4 A.

Content: In accordance with the General Conditions as modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and this Section. Requirements for content of preliminary Schedule of Submittals and subsequent submittals of the Schedule of Submittals are identical. Identify on Schedule of Submittals all submittals required in the Contract Documents. Updates of Schedule of Submittals shall show scheduled dates and actual dates for completed tasks. Indicate submittals that are on the Project’s critical path. Indicate the following for each submittal: 1) Date by which submittal will be provided to ENGINEER. 2) Whether submittal will be for a substitution or “equal”. Procedures for substitutions and “or equals” are specified in the General Conditions and the Division 01 Specifications. 3) Date by which ENGINEER’s response is required. At least 15 business days shall be allowed from ENGINEER’s receipt of each submittal. Allow increased time for large or complex submittals. 4) For submittals for materials or equipment, date by which material or equipment must be at the Site to avoid delaying the Work and to avoid delaying the work of other contractors. Prepare Schedule of Submittals using same software, and in same format, specified for Progress Schedules. Coordinate Schedule of Submittals with the Progress Schedule. Schedule of Submittals that is not compatible with the Progress Schedule, or that does not indicate submittals on the Project’s critical path, or that that places extraordinary demands on ENGINEER for time and resources, is unacceptable. Do not include submittals not required by the Contract Documents. In preparing Schedule of Submittals: 1) Considering the nature and complexity of each submittal, allow sufficient time for review and revision. 2) Reasonable time shall be allowed for: ENGINEER’s review and processing of submittals, for submittals to be revised and resubmitted, and for returning submittals to CONTRACTOR. 3) Identify and accordingly schedule submittals that are expected to have long anticipated review times.

PROCEDURE FOR SUBMITTALS Submittal Identification System: Use the following submittal identification system, consisting of submittal number and review cycle number. 1. Submittal Number: Shall be separate and unique number correlating to each individual submittal required. CONTRACTOR shall assign submittal number as follows: a. First part of submittal number shall be the applicable Specification Section number, followed by a hyphen. b. Second part of submittal number shall be a three-digit number (sequentially numbered from 001 through 999) assigned to each

00361334.0000

01 33 00-4

Submittal Procedures

2.

3.

separate and unique submittal provided under the associated Specification Section. c. Typical submittal number for the third submittal provided for Section 40 05 19, Ductile Iron Process Pipe, would be “40 05 19003”. Review Cycle Number: Shall be a letter designation indicating the initial submittal or re-submittal associated with each submittal number: a. “A” = Initial (first) submittal. b. “B” = Second submittal (e.g., first re-submittal). c. “C” = Third submittal (e.g., second re-submittal). Examples:

Example Description Initial (first) review cycle of the third submittal provided under Section 40 05 19, Ductile Iron Process Pipe Second review cycle (first re-submittal) of third submittal provided under Section 40 05 19, Ductile Iron Process Pipe

B.

Submittal Identification Submittal Review No. Cycle 40 05 19-003- A

40 05 19-003- B

Letter of Transmittal for Submittals: 1. Provide separate letter of transmittal with each submittal. Each submittal shall be for one Specification Section. 2. At beginning of each letter of transmittal, provide a reference heading indicating: CONTRACTOR’s name, CITY’s name, Project name, Contract name and number, transmittal number, and submittal number. 3. For submittals with proposed deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, letter of transmittal shall specifically describe each proposed variation.

C. Contractor’s Review and Stamp: 1. Contractor’s Review: Before transmitting submittals to ENGINEER, review submittals to: a. assure proper coordination of the Work; b. determine that each submittal is in accordance with CONTRACTOR’s desires; c. verify that submittal contains sufficient information for ENGINEER to determine compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. Incomplete or inadequate submittals will be returned without review. 3. Contractor’s Stamp and Signature: a. Each submittal provided shall bear CONTRACTOR’s stamp of approval and signature, as evidence that submittal has been 00361334.0000

01 33 00-5

Submittal Procedures

b.

c.

reviewed by CONTRACTOR and verified as complete and in accordance with the Contract Documents. Submittals without CONTRACTOR’s stamp and signature will be returned without review. Signatures that appear to be computergenerated will be regarded as unsigned and the associated submittal will be returned without review. CONTRACTOR’s stamp shall contain the following:

“Project Name: Contractor’s Name: Date: -------------------- Reference --------------------Item/Submittal Title: Specifications: Section: Page No.: Paragraph No.: Drawing No.: ________________ of Location of Work: _______________ Submittal No. and Review Cycle: Coordinated by Contractor with Submittal Nos.: _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ I hereby certify that the Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents relative to Contractor’s review and approval of this submittal. I specifically certify that all differences, if any, between the requirements of the plans and specifications and the information contained in the submittal are so annotated on the shop drawing. Approved By (for Contractor):



D. Submittal Marking and Organization: 1. Arrange submittal information in same order as requirements are written in the associated Specification Section. 2. Each Shop Drawing sheet shall have title block with complete identifying information satisfactory to ENGINEER. 3. Package together submittals for the same Specification Section. Do not provide required information piecemeal. E.

Format of Submittal and Recipients:

00361334.0000

01 33 00-6

Submittal Procedures

1.

Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Furnish in accordance with Table 01 33 00-A, except that submittals of Samples shall be as specified elsewhere in this Section: TABLE 01 33 00-A: SUBMITTAL CONTACTS AND REQUIRED COPIES

Address for Deliveries a. Engineer: ARCADIS US, Inc., 8201 Peters Rd, Suite 2400, Plantation, FL 33324

Contact Person

E-mail Address (e-mail one electronic copy of each submittal package)*

Format*

No. of Printedcopies

TBD

TBD

E

Zero

*Format: E = Electronic files; P = Printed Copies TBD = To Be Determined

2.

Samples: a. Securely label or tag Samples with submittal identification number. Label or tag shall include clear space at least three inches by three inches in size for affixing ENGINEER’s review stamp. Label or tag shall not cover, conceal, or alter appearance or features of Sample. Label or tag shall not be separated from the Sample. b. Submit number of Samples required in Specifications. If number of Samples is not specified in the associated Specification Section, provide at least three identical Samples of each item required for ENGINEER’s approval. Samples will not be returned to CONTRACTOR. If CONTRACTOR requires Sample(s) for CONTRACTOR’s use, notify ENGINEER in writing and provide additional Sample(s). CONTRACTOR is responsible for furnishing, shipping, and transporting additional Samples. c Deliver Samples to ENGINEER at address listed in Table 01 33 00-A, unless otherwise directed by ENGINEER. 3. Closeout Submittals: a. Provide the following Closeout Submittals in accordance with Table 01 33 00-A: maintenance contracts; bonds for specific products or systems; warranty documentation; and sustainable design closeout documentation. On documents such as maintenance contracts and bonds, include on each document furnished original signature of entity issuing the document. b. Operations and Maintenance Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operations and Maintenance Data. c. Record Documentation: Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documentation. d. Software: Submit number of copies required in Specification Section where the software is specified. If number of copies is not specified, provide two copies on compact disc in addition to software loaded on to CITY’s computer(s) or microprocessor(s). 00361334.0000 01 33 00-7 Submittal Procedures

Remarks Minimal print copies may be requested.

4.

F.

b.

Maintenance Material Submittals: For spare parts, extra stock materials, and tools, submit quantity of items specified in associated Specification Section. Furnish in accordance with Section 01 78 43, Spare Parts and Extra Materials.

Electronic Submittals: 1. Format: Electronic files shall be in “portable document format” (.PDF). Files shall be electronically searchable. 2.

Organization and Content: a. Each electronic submittal shall be one file; do not divide individual submittals into multiple files each. b. When submittal is large or contains multiple parts, furnish PDF file with bookmark for each section of submittal. c. Content shall be identical to printed submittal. First page of electronic submittal shall be CONTRACTOR’s letter of transmittal.

3.

Quality and Legibility: Electronic submittal files shall be made from the original and shall be clear and legible. Do not submit scans of faxed copies. Electronic file shall be full size of original, printed documents. Properly orient all pages for reading on a computer screen.

4.

Provide sufficient Internet service and e-mail capability for CONTRACTOR’s use in transferring electronic submittals, receiving responses to electronic submittals, and associated electronic correspondence. Check not less than once per day for distribution of electronic submittals, electronic responses ot submittal, and electronic correspondence related to submittals.

5.

Submitting Electronic Files: a. Transmit electronic files in accordance with Section 01 31 26, Electronic Communication Protocols.

Transmit printed copies of submittals in accordance with Table 01 33 00-A for delivery on same day that electronic files are delivered.

G. Distribution: 1. Distribution of Hardcopies: ENGINEER will distribute each reviewed submittal requiring ENGINEER’s written response as follows: a. CONTRACTOR: two copies (except closeout submittals and maintenance material submittals). b. CITY: one copy d. ENGINEER’s File: one copy. H. Resubmittals: Refer to the General Conditions for requirements regarding resubmitting required submittals. 1.5

ENGINEER’S REVIEW

00361334.0000

01 33 00-8

Submittal Procedures

A.

Submittals not required in the Contract Documents will not be reviewed by ENGINEER and will not be recorded in ENGINEER’s submittal log. All hardcopies of such submittals will be returned to CONTRACTOR.

B.

Action Submittals, Results of ENGINEER’s Review: Each submittal will be given one of the following dispositions: 1. Approved: Upon return of submittal marked “Approved”, order, ship, or fabricate materials and equipment included in the submittal (pending ENGINEER’s approval or acceptance, as applicable, of source quality control submittals) or otherwise proceed with the Work in accordance with the submittal and the Contract Documents. 2. Approved as Corrected: Upon return of submittal marked “Approved as Corrected”, order, ship, or fabricate materials and equipment included in the submittal (pending ENGINEER’s approval or acceptance, as applicable, of source quality control submittals) or otherwise proceed with the Work in accordance with the submittal and the Contract Documents, provided it is in accordance with corrections indicated. 3. Approved as Corrected – Resubmit: Upon return of submittal marked “Approved as Corrected – Resubmit”, order, ship, or fabricate materials and equipment included in the submittal (pending ENGINEER’s approval or acceptance, as applicable, of source quality control submittals) or otherwise proceed with the Work in accordance with the submittal and the Contract Documents, provided it is in accordance with corrections indicated. Provide to ENGINEER record re-submittal with all corrections made. Receipt of corrected re-submittal is required before materials or equipment covered in the submittal will be eligible for payment. 4. Revise and Resubmit: Upon return of submittal marked “Revise and Resubmit”, make the corrections indicated and re-submit to ENGINEER for approval. 5. Not Approved: This disposition indicates material or equipment that cannot be approved. Upon return of submittal marked “Not Approved”, repeat initial submittal procedure utilizing approvable material or equipment.

C. Informational Submittals, Results of ENGINEER’s Review: 1. Each submittal will be given one of the following dispositions: a. Accepted: Information included in submittal conforms to the applicable requirements of the Contract Documents, and is acceptable. No further action by CONTRACTOR is required relative to this submittal, and the Work covered by the submittal may proceed, and products with submittals with this disposition may be shipped or operated, as applicable. b. Not Accepted: Submittal does not conform to applicable requirements of the Contract Documents and is not acceptable. Revise submittal and re-submit to indicate acceptability and conformance with the Contract Documents. 00361334.0000

01 33 00-9

Submittal Procedures

D. Closeout Submittals, Results of ENGINEER’s Review: Dispositions and meanings are the same as specified for Informational Submittals. When acceptable, Closeout Submittals will not receive a written response from ENGINEER. Disposition as “accepted” will be recorded in ENGINEER’s submittal log. When Closeout Submittal is not acceptable, ENGINEER will provide written response to CONTRACTOR. E.

Maintenance Material Submittals, Results of ENGINEER’s Review: Dispositions and meanings are the same as specified for Informational Submittals. When acceptable, Maintenance Material Submittals will not receive a written response from ENGINEER. Disposition as “accepted” will be recorded in ENGINEER’s submittal log. When Maintenance Material Submittal is not acceptable, ENGINEER will provide written response to CONTRACTOR, and CONTRACTOR is responsible for costs associated with transporting and handling of maintenance materials until compliance with the Contract Documents is achieved.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 33 00-10

Submittal Procedures

SECTION 01 41 24 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

Scope: 1. This Section includes general requirements relative to permitting requirements of which OWNER and ENGINEER are aware that apply to the Project. 2. CONTRACTOR shall provide labor, materials, equipment, tools, and incidentals shown, specified, and required to obtain required permits and comply with required permits and licenses. 3. Obtain, pay for, and comply with required permits and licenses whether or not indicated in this Section or elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

B.

Coordination: 1. Coordinate compliance with permit and license requirements with Work under other Sections and with other contractors, if any, working at the Site. 2. Coordinate with the Progress Schedule the time required to apply for and obtain required permits and licenses. Changes in Contract Times or Contract Price will not be authorized because of timing and costs associated with obtaining permits and licenses required for the Work.

C. Related Sections: In addition to permits and licenses required under this Section, obtain and comply with permits required under the following Sections: 1. Section 01 51 05 Temporary Utilities. 2. Section 01 52 13 Contractors Field Office and Sheds 1.2 A.

1.3 A.

SUBMITTALS Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Copy of each of the following permits as applicable to the Contract: a. City of Hollywood Building Department Permit 2. Copy of each of the following licenses as applicable to the Contract: a. As required by Statute and this Project Manual. . MUNICIPAL PERMITS AND LICENSES Permits: 1. City of Hollywood Building Department Permit 2. Other Permits or Inspections required by the Broward County Administrative Code and the Florida Building Code.

00361334.0000

01 41 24-1

Permit Requirements

B.

Licenses: 1. As required by Statute and this Project Manual.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 41 24-2

Permit Requirements

SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DEFINITIONS

A.

Definitions and terminology applicable to all the Contract Documents are included in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.

B.

Terminology used in the Specifications includes: 1. “Indicated” refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar locations in the Contract Documents. Terminology such as “shown”, “noted”, “scheduled”, and “specified” are used to help the user locate the reference without limitation on the location. 2. “Installer”, “applicator”, or “erector” is CONTRACTOR or another entity engaged by CONTRACTOR, either as an employee or Subcontractor, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application or similar Work. Installers shall be experienced in the Work that installer is engaged to perform. a. The term “experienced”, when used with the term “installer” means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with the special requirements indicated; being familiar with Laws and Regulations; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and complying with requirements of the Supplier of the material or equipment being installed. 3. Trades: Use of a term such as “carpentry” does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as “carpenter”, unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents or required by Laws or Regulations. Such terminology also does not imply that specified requirements apply exclusively to trade personnel of the corresponding generic name.

1.2 A.

APPLICABLE CODES References in the Contract Documents to local code(s) shall include the following: 1. Florida Building Code. 2. City of Hollywood, FL Code of Ordinances. 3. Broward County, FL Code of Ordinances. 4. National Electric Code. 5. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.

00361334.0000

01 42 00-1

References

1.3 A.

ABBREVIATIONS Common abbreviations that may be found in the Contract Documents are listed below, alphabetically by their written-out meaning:

alternating current ampere Americans with Disabilities Act Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines ante meridian average brake horsepower British thermal unit Centigrade (or Celsius) chlorinated polyvinyl chloride Code of Federal Regulations cubic inch cubic foot cubic yard cubic feet per minute cubic feet per second decibel degree Centigrade (or Celsius) degrees Fahrenheit diameter direct current Dollars (US) each efficiency Fahrenheit feet feet per hour feet per minute feet per second figure flange foot-pound 00361334.0000

01 42 00-2

a-c A ADA ADAAG a.m. avg bhp Btu C CPVC CFR cu in cu ft cu yd, or CY cfm cfs db degrees C or oC degrees F or oF dia d-c $ ea eff F ft fph fpm fps Fig flg ft-lb References

gallon gallons per hour gallons per minute gallons per second gram grams per liter Hertz horsepower hour human-machine interface inch inches water gage inch-pound inside diameter iron pipe size thousand pounds thousand pounds per square inch kilovolt-ampere kilowatt kilowatt-hour linear foot liter Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (USGBC) maximum mercury milligram milligrams per liter milliliter millimeter million gallons per day million gallon minimum national pipe threads net positive suction head net positive suction head available

00361334.0000

01 42 00-3

gal gph gpm gps g g/L Hz hp or HP hr HMI in. in. w.g. in.-lb ID IPS kips ksi kva kw kwhr or kwh lin ft or LF L LEED max Hg mg mg/l or mg/L ml mm mgd or MGD MG min NPT NPSH NPSHA

References

net positive suction head required nominal pipe size number operator interface terminal ounce ounce-force outside diameter parts per hundred parts per million parts per billion polyvinyl chloride post meridian pound pounds per square inch pounds per square inch absolute pounds per square inch gauge pounds per square foot process control system programmable logic controller revolutions per minute second specific gravity square square foot square inch square yard standard standard cubic feet per minute total dynamic head totally-enclosed fan-cooled volt volts alternating current volts direct current volatile organic compounds

00361334.0000

NPSHR NPS no. OIT oz ozf OD pph ppm ppb PVC p.m. lb psi psia psig psf PCS PLC rpm sec sp gr, or SG sq sq ft, or sf sq in. sq yd, or SY std scfm TDH TEFC V vac vdc VOC

01 42 00-4

References

1.4

REFERENCE STANDARDS

A.

Refer to Article 3 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, relative to reference standards and resolving discrepancies between reference standards and the Contract Documents. Provisions of reference standards are in effect in accordance with the Specifications.

B.

Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in the Work shall be familiar with reference standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable reference standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Where reference standards are needed for a construction activity, obtain copies of standards from the publication source.

C. Abbreviations and Names: Where reference standards, specifications, codes, manuals, Laws or Regulations, or other published data of international, national, regional or local organizations are referred to in the Contract Documents, the organization issuing the standard may be referred to by their acronym or abbreviation only. Following acronyms or abbreviations that may appear in the Contract Documents shall have the meanings indicated below. Listing is alphabetical by acronym. AA AABC AASHTO ACI ACS ABMA AGMA AI AIA AIChE AISC AISI AMA AMCA AMP ANSI API APHA ARI 00361334.0000

Aluminum Association Associated Air Balance Council American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials American Concrete Institute American Chemical Society American Bearing Manufacturers Association (formerly Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA)) American Gear Manufacturers Association Asphalt Institute American Institute of Architects American Institute of Chemical Engineers American Institute of Steel Construction American Iron and Steel Institute Acoustical Materials Association Air Movement and Control Association National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, Architectural Metal Products Division American National Standards Institute American Petroleum Institute American Public Health Association Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 01 42 00-5

References

ASAE ASCE ASHRAE ASME ASNT ASQ ASSE ASTM AWS AWWA BHMA BIA CISPI CRSI CSI DIPRA EJCDC EJMA FCC FEMA FHWA FM FRPI HEW HI IBC ICC ICEA IEEE IESNA IFI IRI ISA ISO ISO LPI ML/SFA 00361334.0000

American Society of Agricultural Engineers American Society of Civil Engineers American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers American Society of Mechanical Engineers American Society for Non-Destructive Testing American Society for Quality American Society of Safety Engineers American Society for Testing and Materials American Welding Society American Water Works Association Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association Brick Industry Association Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Construction Specifications Institute Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. Federal Communications Commission Federal Emergency Management Agency Federal Highway Administration Factory Mutual (FM Global) Fiberglass Reinforced Plastics Institute United States Department of Health, Education and Welfare Hydraulic Institute International Building Code International Code Council Insulated Cable Engineers Association Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Illuminating Engineering Society of North America Industrial Fasteners Institute Industrial Risk Insurers Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (formerly Instrument Society of America) Insurance Services Office International Organization for Standardization Lightning Protection Institute Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association 01 42 00-6

References

MS MSS NAAMM NACE NAPF NARUC NBHA NBS NCMA NEC NEMA NESC NETA NFPA NGA NIST NRMCA NSF NSSGA OSHA PCA PCI PEI PFI PPI PS RCSC RMA SAE SCTE SDI SJI SMACNA SPI SSPC SWI 00361334.0000

Military Specifications Manufacturers’ Standardization Society National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers National Association of Corrosion Engineers National Association of Pipe Fabricators, Inc. National Association of Regulatory Utilities Commissioners National Builders Hardware Association United States Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards National Concrete Masonry Association National Electric Code National Electrical Manufacturers Association National Electrical Safety Code International Electrical Testing Association National Fire Protection Association National Glass Association United States Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology National Ready Mixed Concrete Association National Sanitation Foundation National Stone, Sand, and Gravel Association Occupational Safety and Health Administration Portland Cement Association Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Porcelain Enamel Institute Pipe Fabrication Institute Plastics Pipe Institute Product Standards Section, United States Department of Commerce Research Council on Structural Connections (part of AISC) Rubber Manufacturers Association Society of Automotive Engineers Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers Steel Deck Institute Steel Joist Institute Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association Society of the Plastics Industry Society for Protective Coatings Steel Window Institute 01 42 00-7

References

TIA/EIA UL USAB USEPA USGBC USGS USPHS WWEMA

Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. United States Access Board United States Environmental Protection Agency United States Green Building Council United States Geological Survey United States Public Health Service Water and Wastewater Equipment Manufacturers Association

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 42 00-8

References

SECTION 01 51 05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

CONTRACTOR shall provide all temporary utilities required for the Project. 1. Make all arrangements with utility service companies for temporary services and obtain required permits and approvals for temporary utilities. 2. Pay all utility service costs, including cost of electricity, water, fuel, and other utility services required for the Work. 3. Continuously maintain adequate utilities for all purposes during the Project, until removal of temporary utilities and temporary facilities. At minimum, provide and maintain temporary utilities through Substantial Completion and removal of temporary field offices and sheds. 4. Should CITY occupy part of the Project prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, cost of utilities consumed via temporary utilities serving the portion occupied by CITY will be shared proportionately between CITY and CONTRACTOR as mutually agreed to by the parties. 5. Maintain, including cleaning, temporary utilities and continuously provide consumables as required. 6. Temporary utilities and temporary facilities shall be adequate for personnel using the Site and requirements of Project. 7. Provide temporary utilities and temporary facilities in compliance with Laws and Regulations and, when applicable, requirements of utility owners.

B.

Provide the following temporary utilities: 1. Electricity 2. Lighting. 3. Telephone and communications. 4. Air conditioning, ventilating, and temporary enclosures. 5. Water. 6. Sanitary facilities. 7. First-aid facilities. 8. Fire protection.

1.2

A.

REQUIREMENTS FOR TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND TEMPORARY FACILITIES Electrical: 1. Provide temporary electrical service required for the Work, including continuous power for temporary field offices and sheds. Provide

00361334.0000

01 51 05-1

Temporary Utilities

temporary outlets with circuit breaker protection and ground fault protection. B.

Lighting. 1. Minimum lighting shall be five foot-candles for open areas and ten footcandles for stairs and shops. Provide minimum of one, 300-watt lamp every 15 feet in indoor Work areas. Provide night security lighting of five foot-candles, minimum, within 50 feet of all parts of the Site during hours of darkness, controlled by photocell.

C. Telephone and Communications. 1. Provide temporary telephone and communications required for CONTRACTOR’s operations at the Site and for summoning emergency medical assistance. Cellular telephones shall satisfy this requirement, provided that all of the CONTRACTOR’s onsite staff have access to a cellular phone at all times when Work is being prosecuted. D. Air Conditioning, Ventilating, and Enclosures. 1. Provide sufficient temporary air conditioning, ventilating, and enclosures to ensure safe working conditions and prevent damage to existing facilities and the Work. 2. Required temperature range for storage areas and certain elements of the Work, including preparation of materials and surfaces, installation or application, and curing as applicable, shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents for the associated Work and the Supplier’s recommended temperature range for storage, application, or installation, as appropriate. 4. Provide temporary ventilation sufficient to prevent accumulation in construction areas and areas occupied by CITY of hazardous and nuisance levels or concentrations of dust and particulates, mist, fumes or vapors, odors, and gases, associated with construction. 5. Provide temporary enclosures and partitions required to maintain required temperature and humidity. E.

Water. 1. Provide temporary water facilities including piping, valves, backflow preventers, pressure regulators, and other appurtenances. Potable water for the site may be obtained from the 2-inch potable water main on the North side of the Work area. 2. Provide water for temporary sanitary facilities, field offices, Site maintenance and cleaning and, when applicable, disinfecting and testing of systems. 3. Continuously maintain adequate water flow and pressure for all purposes during the Project, until removal of temporary water system.

F.

Sanitary Facilities. 1. Provide suitably-enclosed chemical or self-contained toilets for CONTRACTOR’s employees and visitors to the Site. Location of

00361334.0000

01 51 05-2

Temporary Utilities

2. 3.

temporary toilets shall be acceptable to the CITY. Provide supply of potable drinking water and related facilities and consumables for all personnel using the Site. Provide suitable temporary washing facilities for employees and visitors.

G. First-aid Facilities. 1. Provide temporary first-aid stations at or immediately adjacent to the Site’s major work areas, and inside CONTRACTOR’s temporary field office. Locations of first-aid stations shall be determined by CONTRACTOR’s safety representative. 2. Provide list of emergency telephone numbers in the contractor’s construction trailer. List shall be in accordance with the list of emergency contact information required in Section 01 31 19.13, PreConstruction Conference. H. Fire Protection. 1. Provide temporary fire protection, including portable fire extinguishers rated not less than 2A or 5B in accordance with NFPA 10, Portable Fire Extinguishers, for each temporary building and for every 3,000 square feet of floor area under construction. 2. Comply with NFPA 241, Safeguarding Building Construction, Alternation, and Demolition Operations, and requirements of fire marshals and authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. 1.3 A.

USE OF CITY’S SYSTEM Use of Permanent Utility Systems Provided Under the Project: 1. Permanent electrical, lighting, water, heating, ventilating, and fire protection systems and first-aid facilities may be used to provide temporary utilities and temporary facilities if the following are met: a. Obtain CITY’s written permission to use permanent systems. b. Permanent systems to be used for temporary utilities or temporary facilities shall have achieved Substantial Completion, including complete functionality of all controls. c. CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs while using permanent system, including operation, maintenance, replacement of consumables, and provide replacement parts. 2. Do not use the following permanent facilities: a. Telephone and communication facilities. b. Sanitary facilities.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

00361334.0000

01 51 05-3

Temporary Utilities

A.

Materials and equipment for temporary systems may be new or used, but shall be adequate for purposes intended and shall not create unsafe conditions, and shall comply with Laws and Regulations.

B.

Provide required materials, equipment, and facilities, including piping, wiring, and controls.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Install temporary facilities in neat, orderly, manner, and make structurally, mechanically, and electrically sound throughout.

B.

Location of Temporary Utilities and Temporary Facilities: 1. Locate temporary systems for proper function and service. 2. Temporary systems shall not interfere with or provide hazards or nuisances to: the Work under this and other contracts, movement of personnel, traffic areas, materials handling, hoisting systems, storage areas, finishes, and work of utility companies. 3. Do not install temporary utilities on the ground, with the exception of temporary extension cords, hoses, and similar systems in place for short durations.

C. Modify and extend temporary systems as required by progress of the Work. 3.2

USE

A.

Maintain temporary systems to provide safe, continuous service as required.

B.

Properly supervise operation of temporary systems: 1. Enforce compliance with Laws and Regulations. 2. Enforce safe practices. 3. Prevent abuse of services. 4. Prevent nuisances and hazards caused by temporary systems and their use. 5. Prevent damage to finishes. 6. Ensure that temporary systems and equipment do not interrupt continuous progress of construction.

C. At end of each work day, check temporary systems and verify that sufficient consumables are available to maintain operation until work is resumed at the Site. Provide additional consumables if the supply on hand is insufficient. 3.3 A.

REMOVAL Completely remove temporary utilities, facilities, equipment, and materials

00361334.0000

01 51 05-4

Temporary Utilities

when no longer required. Repair damage caused by temporary systems and their removal and restore the Site to condition required by the Contract Documents; if restoration of damaged areas is not specified, restore to preconstruction condition. B.

Where temporary utilities are disconnected from existing utility, provide suitable, watertight or gastight (as applicable) cap or blind flange, as applicable, on service line, in accordance with requirements of utility owner.

C. When permanent utilities and systems that were used for temporary utilities, upon Substantial Completion replace all consumables such as filters and light bulbs and parts used during the Work.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 51 05-5

Temporary Utilities

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 01 52 13 CONTRACTOR’S FIELD OFFICE AND SHEDS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide field office for CONTRACTOR’s use with at least the minimum facilities specified. 2. Provide required storage and work sheds. 3. Pay for required permits and utilities. Field offices and sheds shall comply with Laws and Regulations.

B.

Location: 1. Locate field offices and sheds in accordance with the Contract Documents and in accordance with the Site mobilization discussions at the preconstruction conference.

C. Furnish in field office one complete set of the Contract Documents for ready reference by interested parties. In addition to the reference set, comply with Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documents.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

FIELD OFFICE AND SHEDS, FURNISHINGS, AND EQUIPMENT Field Office and Furnishings: 1. Construction: As required by CONTRACTOR and sufficient for maintaining project documents on site. 2. Utilities and Services: Provide the following: a. Telephone service (cellular is acceptable). b. Computer network and related facilities as required for CONTRACTOR needs. c. Electrical System and Lighting: 1. Electric service as required, including paying all costs. Provide electrical submeter if electrical service is obtained from CITY’s system. 2. Interior lighting of 50 foot-candles at desktop height. 3. Minimum of two120-volt, wall-mounted, duplex convenience electrical receptacles. 4. Exterior, wall-mounted lighting at entrance to field office, 250watt.

00361334.0000

01 52 13-1

d.

3.

4.

B.

2.2

Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning System: 1. Automatic heating to maintain indoor temperature of at least 65 degrees F in cold weather. Furnish all fuel and pay all utility costs. 2. Automatic cooling to maintain indoor temperature no warmer than 80 degrees F in warm weather. Provide on field office an exterior identification sign displaying CONTRACTOR’s company name. Maximum size of sign shall be four feet by eight feet. Sign shall be suitable for outdoor use for the duration of the Project. Furnish and maintain at CONTRACTOR’s field office three protective helmets for use by visitors to the Site.

Storage and Work Sheds: 1. Provide storage and work sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate personnel, materials, and equipment involved in the Work, including temporary utility services and facilities required for environmental controls sufficient for personnel, materials, and equipment. ENGINEER’S OFFICE

A. CONTRACTOR’s field office shall contain a separate, lockable office with outside access for the ENGINEER. ENGINEER’s office shall contain a desk, chair, 4 drawer file cabinet, plan table, electrical outlets, and copier/fax/printer with consumables. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 A.

3.2

INSTALLATION Installation: 1. Install field offices, sheds, and related facilities in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 2. Install materials and equipment, including prefabricated structures, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Install field offices, sheds, and related facilities in such a way as to prevent damage to CITY facilities and equipment during windstorms. MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL

A.

Maintenance: 1. Clean and maintain field offices and sheds as required. 2. Provide consumables as required.

B.

Removal: 1. Do not remove field offices and sheds until after Substantial Completion of the entire Work, unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER.

00361334.0000

01 52 13-2

2.

Remove field offices and sheds and restore areas prior to final inspection.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 52 13-3

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 01 57 05 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 A.

DESCRIPTION Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain methods, equipment, and temporary construction as required to control environmental conditions at the Site and adjacent areas. 2. Maintain controls until no longer required. 3. Temporary controls include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Erosion and sediment controls. b. Noise controls. c. Dust control. d. Control of water, including storm water runnoff.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.3

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: 1. SFWMD. 2. FDEP through the Florida Department of Health in Broward County 3. City of Hollywood, FL SUBMITTALS

A.

Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Shop Drawing shall include proposed erosion and sediment control measures as required by Laws and Regulations. 2. Product Data: a. Silt fencing materials.

B.

Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Procedural Submittals: a. Proposed dust control measures, when submittal is requested by ENGINEER.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS FOR TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS

00361334.0000

01 57 05-1

Temporary Controls

A.

Materials for temporary erosion and sediment controls shall be as shown or indicated on the Drawings.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 A.

3.2 A.

3.4

NOISE CONTROL Noise Control – General: 1. CONTRACTOR’s vehicles and equipment shall minimize noise emissions to greatest degree practicable. Provide mufflers, silencers, and sound barriers when necessary. 2. Noise levels shall comply with Laws and Regulations, including OSHA requirements and local ordinances. 3. Noise emissions shall not interfere with the work of CITY or others. DUST CONTROL Dust Control – General: 1. Control objectionable dust caused by CONTRACTOR's operation of vehicles and equipment, clearing, and other actions. To minimize airborne dust, apply water or use other methods subject to acceptance of ENGINEER and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. CONTRACTOR shall prevent blowing and movement of dust from exposed soil surfaces and access roads to reduce on- and off-Site damage, nuisances, and health hazards associated with dust emissions. Control may be achieved by irrigation in which the Site shall be sprinkled with water until the surface is moist. Apply dust controls as frequently as required without creating nuisances such as excessive mud and ponding of water at the Site. 3. Remove dust from roadways and access roads at maximum intervals of seven days by mechanical brooming or other method acceptable to ENGINEER. WATER CONTROL

A.

Water Control – General: 1. Provide methods to control surface water and water from excavations and structures to prevent damage to the Work, the Site, and adjoining properties. 2. Control fill, grading, and ditching to direct water away from excavations, pits, tunnels and other construction areas and to direct drainage to proper runoff courses to prevent erosion, damage, or nuisance.

B.

Equipment and Facilities for Water Control: Provide, operate, and maintain equipment and facilities of adequate size to control surface water.

00361334.0000

01 57 05-2

Temporary Controls

C. Discharge and Disposal: Dispose of drainage water in manner to prevent flooding, erosion, and other damage to any and all parts of the Site and adjoining areas, and that complies with Laws and Regulations. 3.5

POLLUTION CONTROL

A.

Pollution Control – General: 1. Provide means, methods, and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere caused by discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. 2. Equipment used during construction shall comply with Laws and Regulations.

B.

Spills and Contamination: 1. Provide equipment and personnel to perform emergency measures required to contain spills and to remove contaminated soils and liquids. 2. Excavate contaminated material and properly dispose of off-Site, and replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil.

C. Protection of Surface Waters: Implement special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering surface waters. Prevent disposal of wastes, effluents, chemicals, and other such substances in or adjacent to surface waters and open drainage routes, in sanitary sewers, or in storm sewers. D. Atmospheric Pollutants: 1. Provide systems for controlling atmospheric pollutants related to the Work. 2. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals and vapors. 3. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into atmosphere. E.

3.6 A.

Solid Waste: 1. Provide systems for controlling and managing solid waste related to the Work. 2. Prevent solid waste from becoming airborne, and from discharging to surface waters and drainage routes. 3. Properly handle and dispose of solid waste.

REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY CONTROLS Removals – General: 1. Upon completion of the Work, remove temporary controls and restore Site to specified condition; if condition is not specified, restore Site to pre-construction condition. 2. After soils are permanently stabilized, remove from the Site temporary erosion and sediment controls.

00361334.0000

01 57 05-3

Temporary Controls

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 57 05-4

Temporary Controls

SECTION 01 57 33 SECURITY PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

1.3 A.

DESCRIPTION Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall safely guard all the Work, the Project, products, equipment, and property from loss, theft, damage, and vandalism until Substantial Completion. CONTRACTOR’s duty includes safely guarding OWNER’s property in vicinity of the Work and Project from injury and loss in connection with performance of the Project. 2. Employ watchmen as required to provide required security and prevent unauthorized entry. 3. Costs for security required under this Section shall be paid by CONTRACTOR. 4. Make no claim against OWNER for damage resulting from trespass. 5. Pay full compensation for, or repair or replace, damage to property of OWNER and others arising from failure to furnish adequate security. 6. Provide temporary fencing in accordance with the Contract Documents. 7. CONTRACTOR’s security measures shall be at least equal to those usually provided by OWNER to protect existing facilities during normal operation. SUBMITTALS Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Temporary Fencing: Submit site plan drawings showing proposed locations and extent of breaches in site security fencing and proposed locations and extent of temporary site security fencing. 2. Product Data: a. Temporary Fencing: Manufacturer’s literature, specifications, and installation instructions for temporary fencing proposed for site security use. CONTRACTOR’S SITE ACCESS AND SECURITY PROCEDURES Comply with OWNER’s security procedures and access restrictions at the Site throughout the Project. Comply with the following: 1. Vehicle Identification: While on-Site, all CONTRACTOR vehicles, including employee vehicles, shall display vehicle identification tag in a clearly visible location on dashboard. Vehicle tag shall be issued by CONTRACTOR. Vehicle tag shall include the following information: Site name, CONTRACTOR name, contract number, vehicle license plate

00361334.0000

01 57 33-1

Security

2.

number and state of issue, name and employer of vehicle owner, and vehicle owner contact telephone number. Parking: Do not park outside of designated CONTRACTOR parking area, which will be designated by OWNER. Prepare and maintain parking area as required. Personal vehicles are not allowed outside the contractor parking area.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

TEMPORARY FENCING Erect and maintain temporary fencing at locations where security fencing or barriers are breached or temporarily removed for the Work.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1

TEMPORARY FENCING

A.

Install temporary fencing used for site security in accordance with the Contract Documents and fence manufacturer’s instructions. Provide temporary fencing for site security so that integrity of site security is maintained throughout the Project.

B.

Maintain temporary fencing throughout the Project. Repair damage to temporary fencing and replace fencing when required to maintain site security.

C. Remove temporary fencing when permanent site security fencing is in place and fully functional, or when otherwise directed by OWNER or ENGINEER.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 57 33-2

Security

SECTION 01 65 00 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

1.2

Scope: 1. This Section includes the general requirements for preparing for shipping, delivering, and handling materials and equipment. 2. CONTRACTOR shall make all arrangements for transporting, delivering, and handling of materials and equipment required for prosecution and completion of the Work. 3. When required, move stored materials and equipment without additional compensation and without changes to the Contract Times. SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to individual Specification Sections for submittal requirements relative to delivering and handling materials and equipment. 1.3

PREPARING FOR SHIPMENT

A.

When practical, factory-assemble materials and equipment. Match mark or tag separate parts and assemblies to facilitate field assembly. Cover machined and unpainted parts that may be damaged by the elements with strippable, protective coating.

B.

Package materials and equipment to facilitate handling, and protect materials and equipment from damage during shipping, handling, and storage. Mark or tag outside of each package or crate to indicate the associated purchase order number, bill of lading number, contents by name, CITY’s contract name and number, CONTRACTOR name, equipment number, and approximate weight. Include complete packing lists and bills of materials with each shipment.

C. Protect materials and equipment from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry and dust-free at all times. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Lubricate bearings and other items requiring lubrication in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. D. Advance Notice of Shipments: 1. Keep ENGINEER informed of delivery of all materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 00361334.0000

01 65 00-1

Product Delivery Requirements

2.

E.

1.4 A.

Upon receipt of Supplier’s advance notice of shipment, at least seven days prior to delivery of materials and equipment, provide ENGINEER written notification of anticipated date and place of arrival of the following: a. Stainless Steel Pipes. b. High Service Pumps c. Backwash Pumps d. Variable Frequency Drives

Do not ship materials and equipment until: 1. Related Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals have been approved or accepted (as applicable) by ENGINEER, including, but not necessarily limited to, all Action Submittals associated with the materials and equipment being delivered. 2. Manufacturer’s instructions for handling, storing, and installing the associated materials and equipment have been submitted to and accepted by ENGINEER in accordance with the Specifications. 3. Results of source quality control testing (factory testing), when required by the Contract Documents for the associated materials or equipment, have been reviewed and accepted by ENGINEER. 4. Facilities required for handling materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions are in place and available. 5. Required storage facilities have been provided. DELIVERY Scheduling and Timing of Deliveries: 1. Arrange deliveries of materials and equipment in accordance with the accepted Progress Schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation. 2. Schedule deliveries to minimize space required for and duration of storage of materials and equipment at the Site or delivery location, as applicable. 3. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflicting with the Work and conditions at Site, and to accommodate the following: a. Work of other contractors and CITY. b. Storage space limitations. c. Availability of equipment and personnel for handling materials and equipment. d. CITY’s use of premises. 4. Deliver materials and equipment to the Site during regular working hours. 5. Deliver materials and equipment to avoid delaying the Work and the Project, including work of other contractors, as applicable. Deliver anchor system materials, including anchor bolts to be embedded in concrete or masonry, in ample time to avoid delaying the Work.

00361334.0000

01 65 00-2

Product Delivery Requirements

B.

Deliveries: 1. Shipments shall be delivered with CONTRACTOR’s name, Subcontractor’s name (if applicable), Site name, Project name, and contract designation (example: “ABC Construction Co., City of Hollywood Water Treatment Plant DIW Pump Station, Contract 104031, General Construction”) clearly marked. 2. Site may be listed as the “ship to” or “delivery” address; but CITY shall not be listed as recipient of shipment unless otherwise directed in writing by ENGINEER. 3. Provide CONTRACTOR’s telephone number to shipper; do not provide CITY’s telephone number. 4. Arrange for deliveries while CONTRACTOR’s personnel are at the Site. CONTRACTOR shall receive and coordinate shipments upon delivery. Shipments delivered to the Site when CONTRACTOR is not present will be refused by CITY, and CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the associated delays and additional costs, if incurred.

C. Containers and Marking: 1. Have materials and equipment delivered in manufacturer’s original, unopened, labeled containers. 2. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of materials and equipment to identify materials and equipment, to allow easy accumulation of parts, and to facilitate assembly. D. Inspection of Deliveries: 1. Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipment to verify that: a. Materials and equipment comply with the Contract Documents and approved or accepted (as applicable) submittals. b. Quantities are correct. c. Materials and equipment are undamaged. d. Containers and packages are intact and labels are legible. e. Materials and equipment are properly protected. 2. Promptly remove damaged materials and equipment from the Site and expedite delivery of new, undamaged materials and equipment, and remedy incomplete or lost materials and equipment to furnish materials and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents, to avoid delaying progress of the Work. 3. Advise ENGINEER in writing when damaged, incomplete, or defective materials and equipment are delivered, and advise ENGINEER of the associated impact on the Progress Schedule. 1.5 A.

HANDLING OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle materials and equipment, including those furnished by CITY, by methods that prevent soiling or damaging materials and equipment and packaging.

00361334.0000

01 65 00-3

Product Delivery Requirements

B.

Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent scraping, marring, and otherwise damaging materials and equipment and surrounding surfaces.

C. Handle materials and equipment by methods that prevent bending and overstressing. D. Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points. E.

Handle materials and equipment in safe manner and as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent damage. Do not drop, roll, or skid materials and equipment off delivery vehicles or at other times during handling. Hand-carry or use suitable handling equipment.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 65 00-4

Product Delivery Requirements

SECTION 01 66 00 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

DESCRIPTION This Section includes general requirements for storing and protecting materials and equipment. STORAGE

A.

Store and protect materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and the Contract Documents.

B.

CONTRACTOR shall make all arrangements and provisions necessary for, and pay all costs for, storing materials and equipment. Excavated materials, construction equipment, and materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall be placed to avoid injuring the Work and existing facilities and property, and so that free access is maintained at all times to all parts of the Work and to public utility installations in vicinity of the Work. Store materials and equipment neatly and compactly in locations that cause minimum inconvenience to CITY, other contractors, public travel, and owners, tenants, and occupants of adjoining property. Arrange storage in manner to allow easy access for inspection.

C. Areas available at the Site for storing materials and equipment are shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or as approved by ENGINEER. D. Store materials and equipment to become CITY’s property to facilitate their inspection and ensure preservation of quality and fitness of the Work, including proper protection against damage by freezing, moisture, and high temperatures with ambient temperatures as high as 100 degrees F. Heaters on electric motors provided same shall be connected to a suitable temporary power source within 72 hours of receipt and maintained on that source until permanent power is available. Motors shall be meggared upon receipt and again prior to startup. Store in indoor, climate-controlled storage areas all materials and equipment subject to damage by moisture, humidity, heat, cold, and other elements. When placing orders to Suppliers for equipment and controls containing computer chips, electronics, and solid-state devices, CONTRACTOR shall obtain, coordinate, and comply with specific temperature and humidity limitations on materials and equipment, because temperature inside cabinets and components stored in warm temperatures can approach 200 degrees F.

00361334.0000

01 66 00-1

Product Storage and Handling

E.

CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for loss or damage (including theft) to stored materials and equipment.

F.

Do not open manufacturers’ containers until time of installation, unless recommended by the manufacturer or otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.

G

Do not store materials or equipment in structures being constructed unless approved by ENGINEER in writing.

1.3

PROTECTION

A.

Equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipping, handling, and storage, in accordance with Section 01 65 00, Product Delivery Requirements.

B.

Store all materials and equipment off the ground (or floor) on raised supports such as skids or pallets.

C. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Painted equipment surfaces that are damaged or marred shall be repainted in their entirety in accordance with equipment manufacturer and paint manufacturer requirements, to the satisfaction of ENGINEER. D. Protect electrical equipment, controls, and instrumentation against moisture, water damage, heat, cold, and dust. Space heaters provided in equipment shall be connected and operating at all times until equipment is placed in operation and permanently connected. 1.4 A.

1.5 A.

UNCOVERED STORAGE The following types of materials may be stored outdoors without cover on supports so there is no contact with the ground: 1. Reinforcing steel. 2. Precast concrete materials. 3. Structural steel. 4. Metal access hatches. 5. Castings. 6. Rigid electrical conduit. 7. Piping, except polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or chlorinated PVC (CPVC) pipe. COVERED STORAGE The following materials and equipment may be stored outdoors on supports and completely covered with covering impervious to water: 1. Grout and mortar materials.

00361334.0000

01 66 00-2

Product Storage and Handling

2. 3. 4. B.

Masonry units. Soil materials and granular materials such as aggregate. PVC and CPVC pipe.

Tie down covers with rope, and slope covering to prevent accumulation of water.

C. Store loose granular materials, with covering impervious to water, in welldrained area or on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter. 1.6 A.

1.7 A.

1.8

FULLY PROTECTED STORAGE Store all material and equipment not named in Articles 1.4 and 1.5 of this Section on supports in buildings or trailers that have concrete or wooden flooring, roof, and fully closed walls on all sides. Covering with visquine plastic sheeting or similar material in space without floor, roof, and walls is not acceptable. Comply with the following: 1. Provide heated storage for materials and equipment that could be damaged by low temperatures. 2. Provide air-conditioned storage for materials and equipment that could be damaged by high temperatures. 3. Protect mechanical and electrical equipment from being contaminated by dust, dirt, and moisture. 4. Maintain humidity at levels recommended by manufacturers for electrical and electronic equipment. HAZARDOUS PRODUCTS Prevent contamination of personnel, storage area, and the Site. Comply with Laws and Regulations, and manufacturer’s instructions. MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE

A.

On scheduled basis, periodically inspect stored materials and equipment to ensure that: 1. Condition and status of storage facilities is adequate to provide required storage conditions. 2. Required environmental conditions are maintained on continuing basis. 3. Materials and equipment exposed to elements are not adversely affected.

B.

Mechanical and electrical equipment requiring long-term storage shall have complete manufacturer’s instructions for servicing each item, with notice of enclosed instructions shown on exterior of container or package. 1. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions on scheduled basis. 2. Space heaters that are part of electrical equipment shall be connected and operated continuously until equipment is placed in service and permanently connected.

00361334.0000

01 66 00-3

Product Storage and Handling

1.9 A.

1.10 A.

MICROPROCESSORS, PANELS, AND INSTRUMENTATION STORAGE Store panels, microprocessor-based equipment, electronics, and other devices subject to damage or decreased useful life because of temperatures below 40 degrees F or above 100 degrees F, relative humidity above 90 percent, or exposure to rain or exposure to blowing dust in climate-controlled storage space. RECORDS Keep up-to-date account of materials and equipment in storage to facilitate preparation of Applications for Payment, if the Contract Documents provide for payment for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site agreed to in writing.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 66 00-4

Product Storage and Handling

SECTION 01 71 33 PROTECTION OF THE WORK AND PROPERTY

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 A.

DESCRIPTION Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for taking all precautions, providing all programs, and taking all actions necessary to protect the Work and all public and private property and facilities from damage, as specified in the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and this Section. 2. To prevent damage, injury, or loss, CONTRACTOR’s actions shall include the following: a. Storing apparatus, materials, supplies, and equipment in an orderly, safe manner that does not unduly interfere with progress of the Work or work of other contractors or utility companies. b. Providing suitable storage facilities for materials and equipment subject to damage or degradation by exposure to weather, theft, breakage, or other cause. c. Placing upon the Work or any part thereof only loads consistent with the safety and integrity of that portion of the Work and existing construction. d. Frequently removing and disposing of refuse, rubbish, scrap materials, and debris caused by CONTRACTOR’s operations so that, at all times, the Site is safe, orderly, and workmanlike in appearance. e. Providing temporary barricades and guard rails around the following: openings, scaffolding, temporary stairs and ramps, around excavations, for elevated walkways, and other hazardous areas. 3. Do not, except after written consent from proper parties, enter or occupy privately-owned land with personnel, tools, materials or equipment, except on lands and easements provided by CITY. 4. CONTRACTOR has full responsibility for preserving public and private property and facilities on and adjacent to the Site. Direct or indirect damage done by, or on account of, any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct by CONTRACTOR in executing the Work, shall be restored by CONTRACTOR, at his expense to condition equal to that existing before damage was done.

00361334.0000

01 71 33-1

Protection of Work and Property

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1

BARRICADES AND WARNING SIGNALS

A.

Barricades and Warning Signals – General: 1. Where the Work is performed on or adjacent to roadway, access road, right-of-way, or public place: a. Provide barricades, fences, lights, warning signs, danger signals, watchmen, and take other precautionary measures for protecting persons, property, and the Work. All items shall comply with FDOT Index 600 Series requirements and the most current Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, as applicable. b. Comply with Laws and Regulations, and coordinate with the appropriate Authorities having Jurisdiction for each roadway in which work will be conducted. b. Paint barricades to be visible at night. c. From sunset to sunrise, furnish and maintain at least one light at each barricade. d. Erect sufficient barricades to keep vehicles from being driven on or into Work under construction. e. Furnish watchmen in sufficient numbers to protect the Work. 2. Provide temporary barricades to protect personnel and property for Work not in or adjacent to vehicular travel areas, including indoor work, in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 3. CONTRACTOR’s responsibility for maintaining temporary barricades, signs, lights, and for providing watchmen shall continue until the Work is accepted in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B.

Temporary Fencing: Refer to Section 01 57 33, Security.

3.2 A.

TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION Tree and Plant Protection – General: 1. Protect existing trees, shrubs, and plants on or adjacent to the Site, shown or designated to remain in place, against unnecessary cutting, breaking, or skinning of trunk, branches, bark, and roots. 2. Whenever possible, do not store materials or equipment or park construction equipment and vehicles within the foliage drip line. 3. In areas subject to traffic, provide temporary fencing or barricades to protect trees and plants. 5. Within the limits of the Work, water trees and plants that are to remain to maintain their health during construction operations. 6. Cover exposed roots with burlap, which shall be kept continuously wet. Cover exposed roots with earth as soon as possible. Protect root systems from mechanical damage and damage by erosion, flooding, runoff, and noxious materials in solution.

00361334.0000

01 71 33-2

Protection of Work and Property

7.

8.

3.3

If branches or trunks are damaged, prune branches immediately and protect cut or damaged areas with emulsified asphalt compounded specifically for horticultural use, in manner acceptable to ENGINEER. When directed by ENGINEER, remove and dispose of at location away from the Site damaged trees and plants that die or suffer permanent injury, and replace damaged tree or plant with specimen of equal or better quality.

PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

A.

Underground Facilities: 1. Underground Facilities known to CITY and ENGINEER, except water, gas, sewer, electric, and communications services to individual buildings and properties, are shown. Information shown for Underground Facilities is the best available to CITY and ENGINEER but, in accordance with the General Conditions, is not guaranteed to be correct or complete. 2. CONTRACTOR shall explore ahead of trenching and excavation Work and shall uncover obstructing Underground Facilities sufficiently to determine their location, to prevent damage to Underground Facilities, and to prevent service interruption to building or parcels served by Underground Facilities. If CONTRACTOR damages an Underground Facility, CONTRACTOR shall restore it to original condition, in accordance with requirements of the owner of the damaged facility and the General Conditions. 3. Necessary changes in the location of the Work may be directed by ENGINEER to avoid Underground Facilities not shown or indicated on the Contract Documents. 4. If permanent relocation of existing Underground Facilities is required and is not otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR will be directed in writing to perform the Work. When the relocation Work results in a change in the Contract Price, Contract Time, contract modification procedures and payment for such Work shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B.

Surface Structures: 1. Surface structures are existing buildings, structures, and other facilities at or above ground surface, including their foundations or any extension below ground surface. Surface structures include, but are not limited to, buildings, tanks, walls, roads, open drainage, exposed piping and utilities, poles, exposed wires, posts, signs, markers, curbs, walks, fencing, and other facilities visible at or above ground surface. 2. Existing surface facilities, including but not limited to guard rails, posts, guard cables, signs, poles, markers, curbs, and fencing, that are temporarily removed to facilitate the Work shall be replaced and restored to their original condition at CONTRACTOR’s expense.

00361334.0000

01 71 33-3

Protection of Work and Property

C. Protection of Underground Facilities and Surface Structures: 1. CONTRACTOR shall sustain in their places and protect from direct or indirect injury all Underground Facilities and surface structures located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Such sustaining and supporting shall be done carefully and as required by the party owning or controlling such structure or facility. Before proceeding with the Work of sustaining and supporting such structure or facility, CONTRACTOR shall satisfy ENGINEER that methods and procedures to be used have been approved by party owning same. 2. CONTRACTOR shall bear all risks attending the presence or proximity of all Underground Facilities and surface structures within or adjacent to limits of the Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for damage and expense for direct or indirect injury caused by his Work to structures and facilities. CONTRACTOR shall repair immediately damage caused by his Work, to the satisfaction of owner of damaged structure or facility.

3.4

PROTECTION OF LANDSCAPING

INSTALLED

MATERIALS,

EQUIPMENT,

AND

A.

Protect installed materials and equipment to prevent damage from subsequent operations. Remove protection facilities when no longer needed prior to completion of the Work.

B.

Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment, materials, and surfaces.

C. Coverings: 1. Provide coverings to protect materials and equipment from damage. 2. Cover projections, wall corners and jambs, sills, and soffits of openings, in areas used for traffic and for passage of materials and equipment in subsequent work.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 71 33-4

Protection of Work and Property

SECTION 01 73 19 INSTALLATION

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

DESCRIPTION Scope: 1. This Section describes general requirements for installing materials and equipment. Additional installation requirements are included in the Specification Sections in Divisions 02 through 49. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

General: 1. Provide appropriate quality assurance for installing materials and equipment, and provide quality control over Suppliers, materials and equipment, services, Site conditions, and workmanship, to provide Work of the required quality.

B.

Qualifications: 1. Installer: Installers shall be experienced in the types of Work required.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. 29 CFR 1910, OSHA.

PART 2 – MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 2.1 A.

EQUIPMENT DRIVE GUARDS Equipment Drive Guards – General: 1. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, provide all-metal guards complying with 29 CFR 1910, Subpart O, with equipment driven by open shafts, belts, chains, pulleys, sheaves, or gears. Guards shall enclose drive and driven mechanism. 2. If material of guards is not otherwise specified, guards shall be aluminum sheet, aluminum woven wire, or expanded aluminum set in a frame of aluminum members, as appropriate. 3. Secure guards in position by aluminum braces or straps, securely fastened to frame of equipment, floor, or wall as required. 4. Fastenings shall allow removal of guards for servicing equipment.

00361334.0000

01 73 19-1

Installation

2.2 A.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Shims shall be Type 316L stainless steel, clean and free of slag, unless otherwise shown or indicated.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

General: 1. Installation Instructions and Requirements: a. Install materials and equipment in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and other approved CONTRACTOR submittals, the Contract Documents, and manufacturer’s installation instructions. When manufacturer’s installation instructions conflict with the Contract Documents, obtain interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding. 2. Prior to installing materials and equipment, complete preparation of surfaces on which materials and equipment are to be installed. Prior to installing materials and equipment on new concrete, concrete shall achieve sufficient compressive strength to support the materials and equipment. 3. Maintain the work area in a broom-clean condition while installing materials and equipment. 4. Use proper tools to assemble materials and equipment. Do not deform or mar surface of shafts, nuts, and other parts. 5. Do not support rigging from building or structure without written permission of ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR is responsible for and shall repair damage to building or structure resulting from CONTRACTOR’s operations. 6. During installation, maintain materials and equipment in neutral position and do not exert undue stress on materials and equipment. 7. Tighten connections requiring gaskets evenly all around to ensure uniform stress over entire gasket. 8. Use only an oil bath heater to expand couplings, gears, and other mechanical components to be expanded for installation. Do not force or drive couplings, gears, and other mechanical components onto equipment shafts, or subject such items to open flame or torch. 9. Do not alter or repair materials and equipment and do not burn or weld materials and equipment unless required in the Contract Documents or allowed by ENGINEER. 10. Provide plugs in lubrication holes to prevent entry of foreign matter.

B.

Setting and Erection: 1. Wedging is not allowed. During installation, use the minimum number of shims required in leveling equipment. Provide shims, filling pieces,

00361334.0000

01 73 19-2

Installation

2.

3.

4. 5.

keys, packing, grout of the type required by the Contract Documents, and other materials and equipment necessary to properly align, level, and secure apparatus in place. Install materials and equipment plumb, level, true, and free of rack unless otherwise specified, and demonstrate plumbness and level to ENGINEER. Bring parts to proper bearing after installation and erection. Using experienced millwrights, carefully set and align equipment on foundations, after equipment soleplates or baseplates, as applicable, have been shimmed to true alignment at anchorages. Set anchorages in place and tighten nuts against shims. Check bedplates or wing feet of equipment after securing to foundations and, after confirming alignments, grout soleplates or baseplates, as applicable, in place in accordance with the Contract Documents. Anchorages: a. Provide anchorage setting drawings in time to coordinate with fabrication of materials and equipment and the Work. b. Anchorages shall comply with Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. Ream misaligned holes. Do not “force” bolts or keys. Where applicable, properly align equipment with associated piping and utility connections, without exerting undue stress on connecting piping and utilities.

C. Alignment and Leveling: 1. Verify that all shafts, couplings, and sheaves are properly aligned and adjust to required tolerances. 2. Align couplings while equipment is free from external loads. 3. Check angular and parallel alignment and record actual alignment and submit to ENGINEER. Alignment shall be within tolerances specified in Contract Documents and as recommended by Supplier of the material or equipment item. 4. Use laser indicators or dial indicators for checking angular and parallel alignment. Using dial indicators requires that, during rotation of half couplings in performance of test, dial indicator shall be maintained in same relative position, and dial indicator readings taken at same place on circumference of coupling. D. Threaded Connections: 1. Apply a molybdenum disulfide, anti-seize compound to threads in mechanical connections such as bolts, studs, cap screws, tubing, and other threads, unless otherwise shown or indicated. 3.2 A.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Supplier’s Services: 1. When specified, provide competent, qualified representatives of material or equipment Supplier to provide services required, including: supervising installation, checking the completed installation, adjusting, testing of materials and equipment, and where required instructing

00361334.0000

01 73 19-3

Installation

operations and maintenance personnel in the use and care of materials and equipment.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 73 19-4

Installation

SECTION 01 73 24 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING FACILITIES

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

Scope: 1. This Section includes requirements for connections to existing facilities. Requirements for tie-ins and shutdowns necessary to complete the Work are in Section 01 14 16, Coordination with Owner’s Operations. 2. CONTRACTOR shall provide labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals shown, specified, and required for performing connections to existing facilities.

B.

Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate Work that will be performed with or before the Work specified in this Section.

C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 14 16, Coordination with Owner’s Operations. 2. Section 01 73 29, Cutting and Patching. D. General: 1. Requirements for shutdowns, tie-ins, and other provisions on connections to existing facilities, are indicated in Section 01 14 16, Coordination with Owner’s Operations. 2. Requirements for cutting and patching are in Section 01 73 29, Cutting and Patching. 3. To extent possible, materials, equipment, systems, piping, and appurtenances that will be placed into service upon completion of connection to existing facilities shall be checked, successfully tested, and in condition for operation prior to making connections to existing facilities, if valves, gates, or similar watertight and gastight isolation devices are not provided at the connection point.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

00361334.0000

01 73 24-1

Connections to Existing Facilities

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 73 24-2

Connections to Existing Facilities

SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

DESCRIPTION Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall perform cutting and coring, and rough and finish patching of holes and openings in existing construction. 2. Provide cutting, coring, fitting and patching, including attendant excavation and fill, required to complete the Work, and to: a. remove and replace defective Work; b. remove samples of installed Work as specified or required for testing; c. remove construction required to perform required alterations or additions to existing work; d. uncover the Work for ENGINEER’s observation of covered Work or observation by authorities having jurisdiction; e. connect to completed Work not performed in proper sequence; f. remove or relocate existing utilities and pipes that obstruct the Work in locations where connections must be made; g. make connections or alterations to existing or new facilities. SUBMITTALS Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Cutting and Patching Request: a. Submit written request to ENGINEER, well in advance of executing cutting or alteration that affects one or more of the following: 1) Design function or intent of Project. 2) Work of CITY or other contractors. 3) Structural value or integrity of an element of the Project or an existing structure. 4) Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moistureresistant elements or systems. 5) Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of operational elements. 6) Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. b. Request shall include: 1) Identification of Project and contract name and number. 2) Description of affected Work of CONTRACTOR and work of others (if any). 3) Necessity for cutting.

00361334.0000

01 73 29-1

Cutting and Patching

2.

3.

B.

4) Effect on work of CITY, other contractors (if any), and on structural or weatherproof integrity of Project. 5) Description of proposed Work, describing: scope of cutting and patching; trades who will be executing the Work; products proposed to be used; extent of refinishing; schedule of operations; alternatives to cutting and patching, if any. 7) Designation of entity responsible for cost of cutting and patching, when applicable. 8) Written permission of other contractors (if any) whose work will be affected. Recommendation Regarding Cutting and Patching: a. Should conditions of work, or schedule, indicate a change of materials or methods, submit written recommendation to ENGINEER including: 1) Conditions indicating change. 2) Recommendations for alternative materials or methods. 3) Items required with substitution request, in accordance with the substitution request requirements of the Contract Documents. Product Data: a. Submit manufacturer’s product data for the protective compound to be applied to core-drilled surfaces and cut concrete surfaces.

Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Submit written indication at least seven days in advance of cutting or patching designating the day and time that the construction associated with cutting and patching will be uncovered, to provide for observation. Use the CITY’s standard request for services form. Do not begin cutting or patching operations until submittal is accepted by ENGINEER.

C. Comply with submittal requirements in the Division 02 through Division 49 Specifications for patching materials.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

MATERIALS Materials - General: 1. Use materials in conformance with the Contract Documents. 2. If not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, use materials and products that are identical to existing materials and products affected by cutting and patching Work. 3. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials.

00361334.0000

01 73 29-2

Cutting and Patching

4.

B.

Replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, using materials that do not void required or existing warranties.

Compound Applied to Core-Drilled Surfaces and Cut Concrete Surfaces: 1. After core-drilling and before installing the utility or equipment through the penetration, coat exposed concrete and steel with solvent-free, twocomponent, epoxy protective coating. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Sikagard 62, by Sika Corporation. b. Or approved equal.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1

GENERAL

A.

Perform cutting and coring in such manner that limits extent of patching.

B.

Structural Elements: Do not cut or patch structural elements in manner that would change structural element’s load-carrying capacity as load deflection ratio.

C. Operating Elements: Do not cut or patch operating elements in manner that would reduce their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut or patch operating elements or related components in manner that would increase maintenance requirements or decrease operational life or safety. D. Replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, using methods that do not void required or existing warranties. 3.2

INSPECTION

A.

Examine surfaces to be cut or patched and conditions under which cutting or patching are to be performed before starting cutting or patching work.

B.

Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to ENGINEER in writing. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.3

PREPARATION

A.

Provide temporary support required to maintain structural integrity of Project, to protect adjacent Work from damage during cutting, and to support the element(s) to be cut.

B.

Protection of Existing Construction During Cutting and Patching:

00361334.0000

01 73 29-3

Cutting and Patching

1.

2. 3.

3.4

Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that will be exposed during cutting and patching operations. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. Do not cut existing pipe, conduit, ductwork, or other utilities serving facilities scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.

CORING

A.

Core-drill holes to be cut through concrete and masonry walls, slabs, or arches, unless otherwise accepted by ENGINEER in writing.

B.

Coring: 1. Perform coring with non-impact rotary tool using diamond core-drills. Size holes for pipe, conduit, sleeves, equipment or mechanical seals, as required, to be installed through the penetration. 2. Do not core-drill through electrical conduit or other utility lines embedded in walls or slabs without approval of ENGINEER. To extent possible, avoid cutting reinforcing steel in slabs and walls.

C. Protection: 1. Protect existing equipment, utilities, and adjacent areas from water and other damage covered by core-drilling operations. 2. After core-drilling and before installing the utility or equipment through the penetration, coat exposed concrete and steel with protective coating material indicated in Paragraph 2.1.B. of this Section. Apply protective coating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. D. Cleaning: 1. Vacuum or otherwise remove slurry and tailings from the work area following core-drilling. 3.5 A.

CUTTING Cutting – General: 1. Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction, and that provide proper surfaces to receive installation or repair. 2. In general, use hand or small power tools suitable for sawing or grinding. Avoid using hammering and chopping when possible. 3. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to the size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. 4. Provide adequate bracing of area to be cut prior to start of cutting.

00361334.0000

01 73 29-4

Cutting and Patching

5. 6. 7. B.

3.6

To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from exposed or finished side into concealed side. Provide equipment of adequate size to remove cut panel. Provide temporary covering over cut openings where not in use.

Cutting – Concrete and Masonry: 1. Cut through concrete and masonry using concrete wall saw with diamond saw blades. 2. On both the element being cut, provide for control of slurry generated during sawing. 3. After cutting concrete and before installing subsequent construction on or through the opening, coat exposed concrete and steel with protective coating material indicated in Paragraph 2.1.B. of this Section. Apply protective coating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PATCHING

A.

Patching – General: 1. Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing-up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. 2. Patch with durable seams that are as inconspicuous as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Patch to provide airtight connections to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. 4. Where feasible, test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of installation.

B.

Restoration: 1. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. 2. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. 3. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit that was patched. 4. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

3.7 A.

CLEANING Cleaning and Restoration: 1. Clean areas and spaces where cutting, coring, or patching were performed. 2. Clean piping, conduit, and similar constructions before applying paint or other finishing materials. 3. Restore damaged coverings of pipe and other utilities to original condition.

00361334.0000

01 73 29-5

Cutting and Patching

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 73 29-6

Cutting and Patching

SECTION 01 74 05 CLEANING

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

1.3

DESCRIPTION Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall execute cleaning during the Project, at completion of the Work, and as required by the General Conditions and this Section. 2. Maintain in a clean manner the Site, the Work, and areas adjacent to or affected by the Work. REFERENCES Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. NFPA 241, Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations. PROGRESS CLEANING

A.

General: Clean the Site, work areas, and other areas occupied by CONTRACTOR at least weekly. Dispose of materials in accordance with the General Conditions and the following: 1. Comply with NFPA 241 for removing combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold non-combustible materials at the Site more than three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 degrees F. When temperature is less than 80 degrees F, dispose of non-combustible materials within seven days of their generation. 3. Provide suitable containers for storage of waste materials and debris. 4. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately.

B.

Site: 1. Keep outdoor, dust-generating areas wetted down or otherwise control dust emissions. 2. At least weekly, brush-sweep roadways and paved areas at the Site that are used by construction vehicles or otherwise affected by construction activities.

C. Work Areas: 1. Clean areas where the Work is in progress to level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 00361334.0000

01 74 05-1

Cleaning

2. 3. 4.

Remove liquid spills promptly and immediately report spills to CITY, ENGINEER, and authorities having jurisdiction. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum entire work area, as appropriate. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed Work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of material or equipment installed, using only cleaning agents and methods specifically recommended by material or equipment manufacturer. If manufacturer does not recommend specific cleaning agents or methods, use cleaning agents and methods that are not hazardous to health and property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E.

Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration until Substantial Completion.

F.

Cutting and Patching: 1. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. 2. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

G. Waste Disposal: 1. Properly dispose of waste materials, surplus materials, debris, and rubbish off the Site. 2. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials at the Site. 3. Do not discharge volatile or hazardous substances, such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner, into storm sewers or sanitary sewers. 4. Do not discharge wastes into surface waters or drainage routes. 5. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for complying with Laws and Regulations regarding storing, transporting, and disposing of waste. H. During handling and installation of materials and equipment, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials and equipment already in place. Apply protective covering where required for protection from damage or deterioration, until Substantial Completion. I.

1.4 A.

Clean completed construction as frequently as necessary throughout the construction period. CLOSEOUT CLEANING Complete the following prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion:

00361334.0000

01 74 05-2

Cleaning

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7.

8. 9. 10. 11.

12.

13. 14

15.

Clean and remove from the Site rubbish, waste material, debris, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom-clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. Hose-clean sidewalks and loading areas. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, eventextured surface. Leave surface waterways, drainage routes, storm sewers, and gutters open and clean. Repair pavement, roads, sod, and other areas affected by construction operations and restore to specified condition; if condition is not specified, restore to pre-construction condition. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to dirt-free condition, free of spatter, grease, stains, fingerprints, films, and similar foreign substances. Remove debris and surface dust from limited-access spaces, including roofs, equipment vaults, manholes, and similar spaces. In unoccupied spaces, sweep concrete floors broom-clean. Remove non-permanent tags and labels. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore chipped, scratched, dented or otherwise marred surfaces to specified finish and match adjacent surfaces. a. Do not paint over “UL” or similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint, and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. Clean lighting fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace temporary lamps provided in permanent fixtures. Replace existing lighting fixture components that are burned out or noticeably dimmed from use during construction. Replace defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. Leave the Site clean, and in neat, orderly condition, satisfactory to CITY and ENGINEER.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

00361334.0000

01 74 05-3

Cleaning

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 74 05-4

Cleaning

SECTION 01 75 11 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP PROCEDURES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall initially start up and place equipment installed under the Contract into successful operation, in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s written instructions and as instructed by Supplier at the Site. 2. Provide all material, labor, tools, and equipment required to complete equipment checkout and start-up. 3. Provide chemicals, lubricants, and other required operating fluids. 4. Provide fuel, electricity, water, filters, and other expendables required for start-up of equipment, unless otherwise specified. 5. General Activities Include: a. Cleaning, as required under other provisions of the Contract Documents. b. Removing temporary protective coatings. c. Flushing and replacing lubricants, where required by manufacturer. d. Lubrication. e. Checking shaft and coupling alignments and resetting where required. f. Checking and setting motor, pump, and other equipment rotation, safety interlocks, and belt tensions. g. Checking and correcting (if necessary) leveling plates, grout, bearing plates, anchorage devices, fasteners, and alignment of piping, conduits, and ducts that may place stress on the connected equipment. h. All adjustments required.

B.

Coordination: 1. Coordinate initial checkout and start-up with other contractors, as necessary. 2. Do not start up system or subsystem for continuous operation until all components of that system or subsystem, including instrumentation and controls, have been tested to the extent practicable and proven to be operable as intended by the Contract Documents. 3. CITY will provide sufficient personnel to assist CONTRACTOR in starting up equipment, but responsibility for proper operation is CONTRACTOR’s. 4. Supplier shall be present during checkout, Engineer witness and startup, and initial operation, unless otherwise acceptable to ENGINEER.

00361334.0000

01 75 11-1

Checkout and Startup Procedures

5.

6.

Where equipment training is required such training shall not be scheduled to occur during the same visit as the initial startup or Engineer witness visit. Start-up of heating and air conditioning equipment and systems is dependent upon the time of year. Return to the Site at beginning of next heating or air conditioning season (as applicable) to recheck and start the appropriate systems. Do not start up system, unit process, or equipment without submitting acceptable preliminary operations and maintenance manuals by CONTRACTOR, in accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operations and Maintenance Data.

C. CITY’s Assumption of Responsibility for Equipment and Systems: 1. CITY will assume responsibility for the equipment upon Substantial Completion. 2. Prior to turning over to CITY responsibility for operating and maintaining system or equipment: a. Provide training of operations and maintenance personnel in accordance with Section 01 79 23, Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel. b. Complete system field quality control testing in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Submit acceptable final operations and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operations and Maintenance Data. d. Obtain from ENGINEER final certificate of Substantial Completion for either entire Work or the portion being turned over to CITY. D. Engineer Witness: 1.

CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the ENGINEER for ENGINEER to witness the startup and proper operation of all equipment and systems. Engineer witness and performance confirmation shall occur after the initial startup is completed and on a separately scheduled visit. Engineer witness and startup shall not occur until after an initial startup report has been prepared, submitted and accepted by the ENGINEER. The startup report shall contain certification by the manufacturer’s representative and the CONTRACTOR that the following have been checked/confirmed and that the equipment can be placed into permanent service. a. Soundness (without cracked otherwise damaged parts). b. Completeness in every detail as specified. c. Correctness of setting and alignment and relative arrangement of various parts. d. Accuracy and correctness of packing, sealing and lubricants. e. Completion and accuracy of calibration. f. Proper automated sequence of starting and stopping.

00361334.0000

01 75 11-2

Checkout and Startup Procedures

g.

Proper operation of all applicable controls and safeties.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 A.

3.2

SERVICES OF SUPPLIER When specified, furnish services of competent, qualified representatives of material and equipment manufacturers as specified, including supervising installation, adjusting, checkout, start-up, and testing of materials and equipment. MINIMUM START-UP REQUIREMENTS

A.

Bearings and Shafting: 1. Inspect for cleanliness, and clean and remove foreign matter. 2. Verify alignment. 3. Replace defective bearings and those that operate roughly or noisily. 4. Grease as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B.

Drives: 1. Adjust tension in V-belt drives and adjust vari-pitch sheaves and drives for proper equipment speed. 2. Adjust drives for alignment of sheaves and V-belts. 3. Clean and remove foreign matter before starting operation.

C. Motors: 1. Check each motor for comparison to amperage nameplate value. 2. Correct conditions that produce excessive current flow and conditions that exist due to equipment malfunction. D. Pumps: 1. Check glands and seals for cleanliness and adjustment before running pump. 2. Inspect shaft sleeves for scoring. 3. Inspect mechanical faces, chambers, and seal rings, and replace if defective. 4. Verify that piping system is free of dirt and scale before circulating liquid through pump. 5. Perform vibration testing and confirm compliance with vibration requirements of the manufacturer and requirements set forth elsewhere in this specification, if any. E.

Valves:

00361334.0000

01 75 11-3

Checkout and Startup Procedures

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

F.

Inspect manual and automatic control valves, and clean bonnets and stems. Tighten packing glands to ensure no leakage, but allow valve stems to operate without galling. Replace packing in valves to retain maximum adjustment after system is determined to be complete. Replace packing on valves that continue to leak. Remove and repair bonnets that leak. After cleaning, coat packing gland threads and valve stems with surface preparation of “Molycote” or “Fel-Pro”.

Verify that control valve seats are free of foreign matter and are properly positioned for intended service.

G. Tighten flanges and other pipe joints after system has been placed in operation. Replace gaskets that show signs of leakage after tightening. H. Inspect all joints for leakage: 1. Promptly remake each joint that appears to be faulty; do not wait for rust other corrosion to form. 2. Clean threads on both parts, and apply compound and remake joints. I.

After system has been placed in operation, clean strainers, drives, pockets, orifices, valve seats, and headers in fluid system to ensure freedom from foreign matter.

J.

Remove rust, scale, and foreign matter from equipment and renew defaced surfaces.

K.

Set and calibrate draft gauges of air filters and other equipment.

L.

Inspect fan wheels for clearance and balance. Provide factory-authorized personnel for adjustment when needed.

M. Check each electrical control circuit to verify that operation complies with the Contract Documents. O. Calibrate each gauge, transducer, transponder, and other instruments and provide certificates of calibration to ENGINEER. Replace items that are defaced, broken, or that read incorrectly. P.

Repair damaged insulation.

Q. Excess Gasses and Fluids: 1. Vent gasses trapped in systems. 2. Verify that liquids are drained from all parts of gas or air systems.

00361334.0000

01 75 11-4

Checkout and Startup Procedures

SECTION 01 77 19 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

1.3 A.

1.4

GENERAL Scope: 1. Section Includes. a. Substantial Completion. b. Final inspection. c. Request for final payment. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Procedures for requesting and documenting Substantial Completion are in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. FINAL INSPECTION Procedures for requesting and documenting the final inspection are in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. REQUEST FOR FINAL PAYMENT

A.

Procedure: 1. Submit request for final payment in accordance with the Agreement and General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, using procedure specified in Section 01 29 76, Progress Payment Procedures.

B.

Request for final payment shall include: 1. Documents required for progress payments in Section 01 29 76, Progress Payment Procedures. 2. Documents required in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 3. Releases or Waivers of Lien Rights: a. When submitting releases or waivers of Lien rights, provide release or waiver by CONTRACTOR and each Subcontractor and Supplier that provided CONTRACTOR with labor, material, or equipment totaling $1,000 or more. b. Provide list of Subcontractors and Suppliers for which release or waiver of Lien is required. c. Each release or waiver of Lien shall be signed by an authorized representative of the entity submitting release or waiver to

00361334.0000

01 77 19-1

Closeout Requirements

d.

CONTRACTOR, and shall include Subcontractor’s or Supplier’s corporate seal, when applicable. Release or waiver of Lien shall not be conditional upon receipt of final payment.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 77 19-2

Closeout Requirements

SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

DESCRIPTION Scope: 1. Submit operation and maintenance data, in accordance with this Section and in accordance with requirements elsewhere in the Contract Documents, as instructional and reference manuals by operations and maintenance personnel at the Site. 2. Required operation and maintenance data groupings are listed in table(s) in Article 1.2 of this Section. At minimum, submit operation and maintenance data for: a. All equipment and systems. b. Valves, gates, actuators, and related accessories. c. Instrumentation and control devices. d. Electrical gear. 3. For each operation and maintenance manual, submit the following: a. Preliminary Submittal: Printed and bound copy of entire operation and maintenance manual, except for test data, service reports by Supplier, and electronic copies. b. Final Submittal: Printed and bound copy of complete operations and maintenance manual, including test data and service reports by Supplier, with electronic copies. SUBMITTALS Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and maintenance Data a. Submit the operations and maintenance data indicated in the Contract Documents, grouped into submittals as indicated in Table 01 78 23-A:

TABLE 01 78 23-A, REQUIRED OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA For Materials or Equipment Name of O&M Manual/Data Specified in Section(s) High Service Pump Station and Control System Bachwash Pumps B.

Quantity Required and Timing of Submittals: 1. Preliminary Submittal: a. Printed Copies: 2 copies, exclusive of copies required by CONTRACTOR.

00361334.0000

01 78 23-1

Operations and Maintenance Data

b. c.

2.

1.3

Electronic Copies: 3 copies. Submit to ENGINEER by the earlier of: sixty days prior to starting training of operations and maintenance personnel. Final Submittal: Provide final submittal prior to Substantial Completion, unless submittal is specified as required prior to an interim Milestone. a. Printed Copies: 3 copies. b. Electronic Copies: 3 copies.

FORMAT OF PRINTED COPIES

A.

Binding and Cover: 1. Bind each operation and maintenance manual in durable, permanent, stiff-cover binder(s), comprising one or more volumes per copy as required. Binders shall be minimum one-inch wide and maximum of three-inch wide. Binders for each copy of each volume shall be identical. 2. Binders shall be locking three-ring/”D”-ring type, or three-post type. Three-ring binders shall be riveted to back cover and include plastic sheet lifter (page guard) at front of each volume. 3. Do not overfill binders. 4. Covers shall be oil-, moisture-, and wear-resistant, including identifying information on cover and spine of each volume. 5 Provide the following information on cover of each volume: a. Title: “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS”. b. Name or type of material or equipment covered in the manual. c. Volume number, if more than one volume is required, listed as “Volume __ of __”, with appropriate volume-designating numbers filled in. d. Name of Project and, if applicable, Contract name and number. e. Name of building or structure, as applicable. 6 Provide the following information on spine of each volume: a. Title: “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS”. b. Name or type of material or equipment covered in the manual. c. Volume number, if more than one volume is required, listed as “Volume __ of __”, with appropriate volume-designating numbers filled in. d. Project name and building or structure name.

B.

Pages: 1. Print pages in manual on 30-pound (minimum) paper, 8.5 inches by 11 inches in size. 2. Reinforce binding holes in each individual sheet with plastic, cloth, or metal. When published, separately-bound booklets or pamphlets are part of the manual, reinforcing of pages within booklet or pamphlet is not required. 3. Provide each page with binding margin at least one inch wide. Punch each page with holes suitable for the associated binding.

00361334.0000

01 78 23-2

Operations and Maintenance Data

C. Drawings: 1. Bind into the manual drawings, diagrams, and illustrations up to and including 11 inches by 17 inches in size, with reinforcing specified for pages. 2. Documents larger than 11 inches by 17 inches shall be folded and inserted into clear plastic pockets bound into the manual. Mark pockets with printed text indicating content and drawing numbers. Include no more than three drawing sheets per pocket. D. Copy Quality and Document Clarity: 1. Contents shall be original-quality copies. Documents in the manual shall be either original manufacturer-printed documents or firstgeneration photocopies indistinguishable from originals. If original is in color, copies shall be in color. Manuals that contain copies that are unclear, not completely legible, off-center, skewed, or where text or drawings are cut by binding holes, are unacceptable. Pages that contain approval or date stamps, comments, or other markings that cover text or drawing are unacceptable. Faxed copies are unacceptable. 2. Clearly mark in ink to indicate all components of materials and equipment on catalog pages for ease of identification. In standard or pre-printed documents, indicate options furnished or cross out inapplicable content. Using highlighters to so indicate options furnished is unacceptable. E.

1.4 A.

Organization: 1. Table of Contents: a. Provide table of contents in each volume of each operations and maintenance manual. b. In table of contents and at least once in each chapter or section, identify materials and equipment by their functional names. Thereafter, abbreviations and acronyms may be used if their meaning is clearly indicated in a table bound at or near beginning of each volume. Using material or equipment model or catalog designations for identification is unacceptable. 2. Use dividers and indexed tabs between major categories of information, such as operating instructions, preventive maintenance instructions, and other major subdivisions of data in each manual. FORMAT OF ELECTRONIC COPIES Electronic Copies of Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Each electronic copy shall include all information included in the corresponding printed copy. 2. Submit each electronic copy on a separate compact disc (CD), unless another electronic data transfer method or format is acceptable to ENGINEER. 3. File Format:

00361334.0000

01 78 23-3

Operations and Maintenance Data

a.

b. c.

B.

1.5 A.

Files shall be in “portable document format” (PDF). Text in files shall be electronically searchable. Text included in the PDF file as an image is not acceptable. Submit separate file for each separate document in the printed copy. Within each file, provide bookmarks for the following: 1) Each chapter and subsection listed in the corresponding printed copy document’s table of contents. 2) Each figure. 3) Each table. 4) Each appendix.

Copies of Programming and Configuration Files: 1. Provide on CD copy of all software programming, such as programmable logic controller programs, prepared specifically for the Project. Third-party, licensed, commercially available software is excluded from requirements of this Article; submit copies of commercially-available, licensed, third-party software, where required, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Submit on CD copies of system configuration prepared specifically for the Project, such as plant monitoring system and SCADA display configurations. 3. Submit programming and configuration files together with electronic copies of operation and maintenance data. CONTENT General: 1. Prepare each operations and maintenance manual specifically for the Project. Include in each manual all pertinent instructions, as-built drawings as applicable, bills of materials, technical bulletins, installation and handling requirements, maintenance and repair instructions, and other information required for complete, accurate, and comprehensive data for safe and proper operation, maintenance, and repair of materials and equipment furnished for the Project. Include in manuals specific information required in the Specification Section for the material or equipment, data required by Laws and Regulations, and data required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Text in the manual should be clear and concise, and free from grammatical errors or ambiguity. All errors must be corrected, and all ambiguities clarified within the text of the document, in order for the manual to be accepted. 3. Completeness and Accuracy: a. Operation and maintenance manuals that include language stating or implying that the manual’s content may be insufficient or stating that the manual’s content is not guaranteed to be complete and accurate are unacceptable. b. Operations and maintenance manuals shall be complete and

00361334.0000

01 78 23-4

Operations and Maintenance Data

4.

B.

accurate. c. Operation and maintenance manuals shall indicate the specific alternatives and features furnished, and the specific operation and maintenance provisions for the material or equipment furnished. Submit complete, detailed written operating instructions for each material or equipment item including: function; operating characteristics; limiting conditions; operating instructions for start-up, normal and emergency conditions; regulation and control; operational troubleshooting; and shutdown. Also include, as applicable, written descriptions of alarms generated by equipment and proper responses to such alarm conditions.

Submit written explanations of all safety considerations relating to operation and maintenance procedures.

C. Submit complete, detailed, written preventive maintenance instructions including all information and instructions to keep materials, equipment, and systems properly lubricated, adjusted, and maintained so that materials, equipment, and systems function economically throughout their expected service life. Instructions shall include: 1. Written explanations with illustrations for each preventive maintenance task such as inspection, adjustment, lubrication, calibration, and cleaning. Include pre-startup checklists for each equipment item and maintenance requirements for long-term shutdowns. 2. Recommended schedule for each preventive maintenance task. 3. Lubrication charts indicating recommended types of lubricants, frequency of application or change, and where each lubricant is to be used or applied. 4. Table of alternative lubricants. 5. Troubleshooting instructions. 6. List of required maintenance tools and equipment. D. Submit complete bills of material or parts lists for materials and equipment furnished. Lists or bills of material may be furnished on a per-drawing or perequipment assembly basis. Bills of material shall indicate: 1. Manufacturer’s name, address, telephone number, fax number, and Internet website address. 2. Manufacturer’s local service representative’s or local parts supplier’s name, address, telephone number, fax number, Internet website address, and e-mail addresses, when applicable. 3. Manufacturer’s shop order and serial number(s) for materials, equipment or assembly furnished. 4. For each part or piece include the following information: a. Parts cross-reference number. Cross-reference number shall be used to identify the part on assembly drawings, Shop Drawings, or other type of graphic illustration where the part is clearly shown or indicated. b. Part name or description. 00361334.0000

01 78 23-5

Operations and Maintenance Data

c. d. e.

Manufacturer’s part number. Quantity of each part used in each assembly. Current unit price of the part at the time the operations and maintenance manual is submitted. Price list shall be dated.

E.

Submit complete instructions for ordering replaceable parts, including reference numbers (such as shop order number or serial number) that will expedite the ordering process.

F.

Submit manufacturer’s recommended inventory levels for spare parts, extra stock materials, and consumable supplies for the initial two years of operation. Consumable supplies are items consumed or worn by operation of materials or equipment, and items used in maintaining the operation of material or equipment, including items such as lubricants, seals, reagents, and testing chemicals used for calibrating or operating the equipment. Include estimated delivery times, shelf life limitations, and special storage requirements.

G. Submit manufacturer’s installation and operation bulletins, diagrams, schematics, and equipment cutaways. Avoid submitting catalog excerpts unless they are the only document available showing identification or description of particular component of the equipment. Where materials pertain to multiple models or types, mark the literature to indicate specific material or equipment supplied. Marking may be in the form of checking, arrows, or underlining to indicate pertinent information, or by crossing out or other means of obliterating information that does not apply to the materials and equipment furnished. H. Submit original-quality copies of each approved and accepted Shop Drawing, product data, and other submittal, updated to indicate as-installed condition. Reduced drawings are acceptable only if reduction is to not less than onehalf original size and all lines, dimensions, lettering, and text are completely legible on the reduction. I.

Submit complete electrical schematics and wiring diagrams, including complete point-to-point wiring and wiring numbers or colors between all terminal points.

J.

Programmable Logic Controllers: 1. Submit complete annotated logic listings in ladder diagram format. 2. Format Requirements: a. For ladder diagram logic, include complete cross-referencing of all logic elements. Annotate all elements with clearly understandable tags or descriptive labels. 3. Submit complete programmable logic controller listing of all input/output address assignments, tag assignments, and pre-set constant values, with functional point descriptions. 4. Submit complete manufacturer’s programming manuals.

00361334.0000

01 78 23-6

Operations and Maintenance Data

K.

Submit copy of warranty bond and service contract as applicable.

L.

When copyrighted material is used in operations and maintenance manuals, obtain copyright holder’s written permission to use such material in the operation and maintenance manual.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) + + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 78 23-7

Operations and Maintenance Data

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

CONTRACTOR shall maintain and submit to ENGINEER with record documents in accordance with the Specifications, General Conditions, and Supplementary Conditions.

B.

Maintenance of Record Documents: 1. Maintain in CONTRACTOR’s field office, in clean, dry, legible condition, complete sets of the following record documents: Drawings, Specifications, and Addenda; Shop Drawings, Samples, and other CONTRACTOR submittals, including records of test results, approved or accepted as applicable, by ENGINEER; Change Orders, Field Orders, photographic documentation, survey data, and all other documents pertinent to the Work. 2. Provide files and racks for proper storage and easy access to record documents. File record documents in accordance with the edition of the Construction Specification Institute’s “MasterFormat” used for organizing the Project Manual. 3. Make record documents available for inspection upon request of ENGINEER or CITY. 4. Do not use record documents for purpose other than serving as Project record. Do not remove record documents from CONTRACTOR’s field office without ENGINEER’s approval.

C. Submittal of Record Documents: 1. Submit to ENGINEER the following record documents: a. Drawings. b. Project Manual including Specifications and Addenda (bound). 2. Prior to readiness for final payment, submit to ENGINEER one copy of final record documents. Submit complete record documents; do not make partial submittals. 3. Submit record documents with transmittal letter on CONTRACTOR letterhead complying with letter of transmittal requirements in Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. 4. Record documents submittal shall include certification, with original signature of official authorized to execute legal agreements on behalf of CONTRACTOR, reading as follows: “[Insert Contractor’s corporate name] has maintained and submitted record documentation in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documents, and other elements of Contract Documents, for the City of 00361334.0000

01 78 39-1

Project Record Documents

Hollywood Water Treatment Plant, Hollywood, Florida, Project No. 104031. We certify that each record document submitted is complete, accurate, and legible relative to the Work performed under our Contract, and that the record documents comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. [Provide signature, print name, print signing party’s corporate title, and date]” 1.2

RECORDING CHANGES

A.

General: 1. At the start of the Project, label each record document to be submitted as, “PROJECT RECORD” using legible, printed letters. Letters on record copy of the Drawings shall be two inches high. 2. Keep record documents current. Make entries on record documents within two working days of receipt of information required to record the change. 3. Do not permanently conceal the Work until required information has been recorded. 4. Accuracy of record documents shall be such that future searches for items shown on the record documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from ENGINEER-accepted record documents. 5. Marking of Entries: a. Use erasable, colored pencils (not ink or indelible pencil) for marking changes, revisions, additions, and deletions to record documents. b. Clearly describe the change by graphic line and make notations as required. Use straight-edge to mark straight lines. Writing shall be legible and sufficiently dark to allow scanning of record documents into legible electronic files. c. Date all entries on record documents. d. Call attention to changes by drawing a “cloud” around the change(s) indicated. e. Mark initial revisions in red. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for subsequent changes.

B.

Drawings: 1. Record changes on copy of the Drawings. Submittal of CONTRACTORoriginated or -produced drawings as a substitute for recording changes on the Drawings is unacceptable. 2. Record changes on plans, sections, schematics, and details as required for clarity, making reference dimensions and elevations (to Project datum) for complete record documentation. 3. Record actual construction including: a. Depths of various elements of foundation relative to Project datum.

00361334.0000

01 78 39-2

Project Record Documents

b.

4.

Horizontal and vertical location of Underground Facilities referenced to permanent surface improvements. For each Underground Facility, including pipe fittings, provide dimensions to at least two permanent, visible surface improvements. c. Location of exposed utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of structure. d. Changes in structural and architectural elements of the Work, including changes in reinforcing. e. Field changes of dimensions, arrangements, and details. f. Changes made in accordance with Change Orders and Field Orders. g. Changes in details on the Drawings. Submit additional details prepared by CONTRACTOR when required to document changes. Recording Changes for Schematic Layouts: a. In some cases on the Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping, ducts, and similar items are shown schematically and are not intended to portray physical layout. For such cases, the final physical arrangement shall be determined by CONTRACTOR subject to acceptance by ENGINEER. b. Record on record documents all revisions to schematics on Drawings, including: piping schematics, ducting schematics, process and instrumentation diagrams, control and circuitry diagrams, electrical one-line diagrams, motor control center layouts, and other schematics when included in the Contract. Record actual locations of equipment, lighting fixtures, in-place grounding system, and other pertinent data. c. When dimensioned plans and dimensioned sections on the Drawings show the Work schematically, indicate on the record documents, by dimensions accurate to within one inch in the field, centerline location of items of Work such as conduit, piping, ducts, and similar items 1) Clearly identify the Work item by accurate notations such as “cast iron drain”, “rigid electrical conduit”, “copper waterline”, and similar descriptions. 2) Show by symbol or note the vertical location of Work item; for example, “embedded in slab”, “under slab”, “in ceiling plenum”, “exposed”, and similar designations. For piping not embedded, also provide elevation dimension relative to Project datum. 3) Descriptions shall be sufficiently detailed to be related to Specifications. d. ENGINEER may furnish written waiver of requirements relative to schematic layouts shown on plans and sections when, in ENGINEER’s judgment, dimensioned layouts of Work shown schematically will serve no useful purpose. Do not rely on waiver(s) being issued.

00361334.0000

01 78 39-3

Project Record Documents

5.

Supplemental Drawings: a. In some cases, drawings produced during construction by ENGINEER or CONTRACTOR supplement the Drawings and shall be included with record documents submitted by CONTRACTOR. Supplemental record drawings shall include drawings provided with Change Orders and Field Orders and that cannot be incorporated into the Drawings due to space limitations. b. Supplemental drawings provided with record drawings shall be integrated with the Drawings and include necessary crossreferences between drawings. Supplemental record drawings shall be on sheets the same size as the Drawings. c. When supplemental drawings developed by CONTRACTOR using computer-aided drafting/design (CADD) software are to be included in record drawings, submit electronic files for such drawings in AutoCAD 2011 as part of record drawing submittal. Submit electronic files on compact disc labeled, “Supplemental Record Drawings”, together with CONTRACTOR name, Project name, and Contract name and number.

C. Specifications and Addenda: 1. Mark each Section to record: a. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually provided. b. Changes made by Addendum, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. D. Nameplate Information: 1. Provide an electronic ‘Word’ file showing all nameplate information for all equipment supplied on the project identifying the equipment by tag number, general description and location. 1.3 A.

ELECTRONIC FILES FURNISHED BY ENGINEER CADD files may be furnished by ENGINEER, at the sole discretion of the ENGINEER, upon the following conditions: 1. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER a letter on CONTRACTOR letterhead requesting CADD files and providing specific definition(s) or description(s) of how files will be used, and specific description of benefits to CITY (including credit proposal, if applicable) if the request is granted. 2. CONTRACTOR shall execute ENGINEER’s standard agreement for release of electronic files and shall abide by all provisions of the agreement for release of electronic files. 3. Layering system incorporated in CADD files shall be maintained as transmitted by ENGINEER. CADD files transmitted by ENGINEER containing cross-referenced files shall not be bound by CONTRACTOR. Drawing cross-references and paths shall be maintained. If CONTRACTOR alters layers or cross-reference files, CONTRACTOR

00361334.0000

01 78 39-4

Project Record Documents

4.

shall restore all layers and cross-references prior to submitting record documents to ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall submit record drawings to ENGINEER in same CADD format that files were furnished to CONTRACTOR.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 78 39-5

Project Record Documents

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 01 78 43 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIALS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

CONTRACTOR shall furnish spare parts data and extra materials for materials and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B.

List of Spare Parts and Extra Materials: With the Shop Drawings and product data for each Specification Section, submit a complete list of spare parts, extra stock materials, maintenance supplies, and special tools required for maintenance (“spare parts and extra materials”) for two years of operation, with unit prices in current United States funds, and source(s) of supply for each.

C. Packaging and Labeling: Furnish spare parts and extra materials in manufacturer’s unopened cartons, boxes, crates, or other original, protective covering suitable for preventing corrosion and deterioration for maximum length of storage normally anticipated by manufacturer. Packaging of spare parts and extra materials shall be clearly marked and identified with name of manufacturer, applicable equipment, part number, part description, and part location in the equipment. Protect and package spare parts and extra materials for maximum shelf life normally anticipated by manufacturer. D. Storage Prior to Delivery to CITY: Prior to furnishing spare parts and extra materials to CITY, store spare parts and extra materials in accordance with the Contract Documents and manufacturers’ recommendations. E.

Delivery Time and Eligibility for Payment: 1. Deliver to CITY spare parts and extra materials prior to date of Substantial Completion for equipment or system associated with the spare parts and extra materials. Do not deliver spare parts and extra materials before commencing start-up for associated equipment or system. 2. Spare parts and extra materials are not eligible for payment until delivered to CITY and CONTRACTOR’s receipt of CITY’s countersignature on letter of transmittal.

F.

Procedure for Delivery to CITY: Deliver spare parts and extra materials to CITY’s permanent storage rooms at the Site or area(s) at the Site designated by CITY. When spare parts and extra materials are delivered, CONTRACTOR and CITY will mutually inventory the spare parts and extra

00361334.0000

01 78 43-1

Spare Parts and Extra Materials

materials delivered to verify compliance with the Contract Documents regarding quantity and part numbers. Additional procedures for delivering spare parts and extra materials to CITY, if required, will be developed by ENGINEER and complied with by CONTRACTOR. G. Transfer Documentation: 1. Furnish on CONTRACTOR letterhead a letter of transmittal for spare parts and extra materials furnished under each Specification Section. Letter of transmittal shall accompany spare parts and extra materials. Do not furnish letter of transmittal separate from associated spare parts and extra materials. 2. Furnish three original, identical, signed letters of transmittal for each Specification Section. Upon delivery of specified quantities and types of spare parts and extra materials to CITY, designated person from CITY will countersign each original letter of transmittal indicating CITY’s receipt of spare parts and extra materials. CITY will retain one fully signed original, CONTRACTOR shall submit one fully signed original to ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR shall retain one fully signed original for CONTRACTOR’s file. 3. Letter of transmittal shall include the following: a. Information required for letters of transmittal in Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. b. Transmittal shall list spare parts and extra materials furnished under each Specification Section. List each individual part or product and quantity furnished. c. Provide space for countersignature by CITY as follows: space for signature, space for printed name, and date. H. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for loss or damage to spare parts and extra materials until spare parts and extra materials are received by CITY.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 78 43-2

Spare Parts and Extra Materials

SECTION 01 79 23 INSTRUCTION OF OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish services of Supplier’s operation and maintenance training specialists to instruct CITY’s personnel in recommended operation and maintenance procedures for materials and equipment furnished, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Supplier shall provide a combination of classroom and field training at the Site, unless otherwise required elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 3. CITY reserves the right to record training sessions on video for CITY’s later use in instructing CITY’s personnel.

B.

Scheduling of Training Sessions: 1. General: a. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate training services with start-up and initial operation of materials and equipment on days and times, and in manner, acceptable to CITY, in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Training may be required outside of normal business hours to accommodate schedules of operations and maintenance personnel. Furnish training services at the required days and times at no additional cost to CITY. 2. Prerequisites to Training: a. Training of CITY’S personnel shall commence after acceptable preliminary operation and maintenance data and the start-up report have been submitted and after the final O&M manual has been submitted and accepted. The work required in Section 01 75 11, Checkout and Startup Procedures, is complete. b. The training shall take place after equipment start-up, or a different visit. 3. Training Schedule Submittal: a. Training Schedule Required: CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit proposed training schedule for review and acceptance by ENGINEER and CITY. Proposed training schedule shall show all training required in the Contract Documents, and shall demonstrate compliance with specified training requirements relative to number of hours of training, number of training sessions, and scheduling. c. Timing of Training Schedule Submittal: Submit initial training schedule at least sixty days before scheduled start of first training

00361334.0000

01 79 23-1

Instruction of O&M Personnel

d.

1.2 A.

1.3

session. Submit final training schedule, incorporating revisions in accordance with ENGINEER’s comments, no later than thirty days prior to starting the first training session. CITY reserved the right to modify personnel availability for training in accordance with process or emergency needs at the Site.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer’s instructors shall be factory-trained by manufacturer of material or equipment. 2. Manufacturer’s instructors shall be proficient and experienced in conducting training of type required. 3. Qualifications of instructors are subject to acceptance by ENGINEER. If ENGINEER does not accept qualifications of proposed instructor, furnish services of replacement instructor with acceptable qualifications. SUBMITTALS

A.

Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Training Schedule: Detailed schedule of training sessions, demonstrating compliance with number of training sessions, hours required in the Contract Documents, and complying with the Contract Times. Submit training schedule submittals in accordance with time frames specified in this Section.

B.

Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Lesson Plan: Acceptable lesson plan for training on each material or equipment item, in accordance with Table 01 79 23-A and the Contract Documents. Lesson plan shall comply with requirements of this Section. Include with lesson plan copy of handouts that will be used during training sessions. Provide lesson plan submittals in accordance with time frames specified in this Section. 2. Qualifications: Credentials of manufacturer’s proposed operations and maintenance instructor(s). Credentials shall demonstrate compliance with requirements of this Section and shall include brief resume’ and specific details of instructor’s operating, maintenance, and training experience relative to the specific material and equipment for which instructor will provide training.

C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Trainee sign-in sheet for each training session. Submit to CITY’s training coordinator. 1.4 A.

LESSON PLAN Supplier’s lesson plan shall describe specific instruction topics, system components for which training will be furnished, and training procedures.

00361334.0000

01 79 23-2

Instruction of O&M Personnel

Handouts, if any, to be used in training shall be included with the lesson plan. Describe in lesson plan “hands-on” demonstrations planned for training sessions. B.

Submit acceptable lesson plan no less than 30 days prior to starting associated training.

C. Lesson plan shall include estimated duration of each training segment. D. Lesson plan shall include the following: 1. Equipment Overview (required for all types of operations and maintenance training): a. Describe equipment’s operating (process) function and performance objectives. b. Describe equipment’s fundamental operating principles and dynamics. c. Identify equipment’s mechanical, electrical, and electronic components and features. Group related components into subsystems and describe function of subsystem and subsystem’s interaction with other subsystems. d. Identify all support equipment associated with operation of subject equipment, such as air intake filters, valve actuators, motors, and other appurtenant items and equipment. e. Identify and describe safety precautions and potential hazards related to operation. f. Identify and describe in detail safety and control interlocks. 2. Operations Personnel Training: a. Equipment Overview: As described in Paragraph 1.4.D.1 of this Section. b. Operation: 1) Describe operating principles and practices. 2) Describe routine operating, start-up, and shutdown procedures. 3) Describe abnormal or emergency start-up, operating, and shutdown procedures that may apply. 4) Describe alarm conditions and responses to alarms. 5) Describe routine monitoring and recordkeeping procedures. 6) Describe recommended housekeeping procedures. c. Troubleshooting: 1) Describe how to determine if corrective maintenance or an operating parameter adjustment is required. 3. Mechanical Maintenance Training: a. Equipment Overview: As described in Paragraph 1.4.D.1 of this Section. b. Equipment Preventive Maintenance: 1) Describe preventative maintenance inspection procedures required to: a) Inspect equipment in operation. 00361334.0000

01 79 23-3

Instruction of O&M Personnel

4.

1.5 A.

b) Identify potential trouble symptoms and anticipate breakdowns. c) Forecast maintenance requirements (predictive maintenance). 2) Define recommended preventative maintenance intervals for each component. 3) Describe lubricant and replacement part recommendations and limitations. 4) Describe appropriate cleaning practices and recommend intervals. 5) Identify and describe use of special tools required for maintenance of equipment. 6) Describe component removal, installation, and disassembly and assembly procedures. 7) Perform “hands-on” demonstrations of preventive maintenance procedures. 8) Describe recommended measuring instruments and procedures, and provide instruction on interpreting alignment measurements, as appropriate. 9) Define recommended torquing, mounting, calibrating, and aligning procedures and settings, as appropriate. 10) Describe recommended procedures to check and test equipment following corrective maintenance. c. Equipment Troubleshooting: 1) Define recommended systematic troubleshooting procedures. 2) Provide component-specific troubleshooting checklists. 3) Describe applicable equipment testing and diagnostic procedures to facilitate troubleshooting. 4) Describe common corrective maintenance procedures with “hands on” demonstrations. Instrumentation/Controls Maintenance Training: a. Equipment Overview: As described in Paragraph 1.4.D.1 of this Section.

TRAINING AIDS Manufacturer’s instructor shall incorporate training aids as appropriate to assist in the instruction. Provide handouts of text, tables, graphs, and illustrations as required. Other appropriate training aids include: 1. Audio-visual aids, such as videos, Microsoft Powerpoint presentations, overhead transparencies, posters, drawings, diagrams, catalog sheets, or other items. 2. Equipment cutaways and samples, such as spare parts and damaged equipment. 3. Tools, such as repair tools, customized tools, and measuring and calibrating instruments.

00361334.0000

01 79 23-4

Instruction of O&M Personnel

B.

Handouts: 1. Manufacturer’s instructor shall distribute and use descriptive handouts during training. Customized handouts developed especially for training for the Project are encouraged. 2. Photocopied handouts shall be good quality and completely legible. 3. Handouts should be coordinated with the instruction, with frequent references made to the handouts. 4. Provide at least fifteen copies of handouts for each training session.

C. Audio-visual Equipment: Training provider shall provide audio-visual equipment required for training sessions. Audio-visual equipment that training provider shall provide, as required, includes: 1. Laptop computer, presentation software, and suitable projector. 2. As required, extension cords and spare bulb for projector.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1

TRAINING DELIVERY

A.

General: 1. Instructors shall be fully prepared for the training sessions. Training delivery shall be communicative, clear, and proceed according to lesson plan accepted by ENGINEER, with lesson content appropriate for trainees. If CITY or ENGINEER deems that training delivery does not to comply with the Contract Documents, training shall be postponed, rescheduled, and re-performed in acceptable manner at no additional cost to CITY. 2. Trainee Sign-in Sheets: In format acceptable to CITY, furnish sign-in sheet for trainees for each session. Sign-in sheets shall include the Project name, equipment or system for which training was provided, and type of training (e.g., operations, mechanical maintenance, instrumentation/controls maintenance, or other), and name of each trainee. Upon completion of training, submit copy of each sign-in sheet to CITY’s training coordinator.

B.

“Hands-on” Demonstrations: 1. CONTRACTOR and manufacturer shall furnish tools necessary for demonstrations.

3.2 A.

TRAINING SCHEDULE Manufacturer shall furnish, at minimum, hours of training and number of sessions indicated in Table 01 79 23-A. Travel time and expenses are responsibility of manufacturer and are excluded from required training time indicated in the Contract Documents.

00361334.0000

01 79 23-5

Instruction of O&M Personnel

B.

Shifts and Training Sessions Required: 1. CITY’s operations at the Site take place 24 hours per day, divided into three shifts as follows: day, evening, and night shift. 2. Training Sessions per Shift: a. Operators: Maximum training per day is four hours; sessions longer than four hours shall be spread over multiple, preferably consecutive, days. Provide identical training sessions as follows: 1) Two identical sessions during day shift, each session in a different week. 2) One session during evening shift. 3) One session during night shift. b. Mechanical Maintenance: Provide two identical training sessions during day shift, each session in a separate week, for indicated equipment. Maximum training per day is four hours; sessions longer than four hours shall be spread over multiple, preferably consecutive, days. c. Instrument/Controls Maintenance: Provide two identical training sessions during day shift, each session in a separate week, for indicated equipment. Maximum training per day is four hours; sessions longer than four hours will be spread over multiple, preferably consecutive, days. c. Operations, maintenance, and instrumentation training sessions may be combined if materials overlap. Minimum instruction times are presented in Table 01 79 23-A. TABLE 01 79 23-A, TRAINING SUMMARY TABLE

Equipment Pumps (high service andbackwash) Instrumentation Overall high service pump control system operation VFDs Smart MCCs and switchgear

Specification Section(s) 43 21 13.12 and 43 21 13.23 40 60 05 40 60 05 and related

26 29 23 26 13 26 26 24 19

Training Sessions Length (hours, each session) Instrument Mechanic Maint (ICE Operations Maint. department). 4 4 0

6 8

0 0

4 0

2 2

2 2

2 4

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

01 79 23-6

Instruction of O&M Personnel

SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified and required for demolition, removal, and disposal Work. 2. The Work under this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Demolition and removal of existing materials and equipment as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work includes demolition of structural concrete, foundations, metals, roofs, masonry, attachments, appurtenances, piping, electrical, pumps and mechanical systems and equipment, and similar existing facilities. 3. Demolitions and removals specified under other Sections shall comply with requirements of this Section. 4. Perform demolition Work within areas shown or indicated. 5. Pay all costs associated with transporting and, as applicable, disposing of materials and equipment resulting from demolition.

B.

Coordination: 1. Comply with Section 01 14 16, Coordination with Owner’s Operations. 2. Review procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the Work that will be performed with or before demolition and removals.

1.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Qualifications: 1. Electrical Removals: Entity and personnel performing electrical removals shall be electrician legally qualified to perform electrical construction and electrical work in the jurisdiction where the Site is located.

B.

Regulatory Requirements: 1. Demolition, removal, and disposal Work shall be in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.850 through 29 CFR 1926.860 (Subpart T - Demolition), and all other Laws and Regulations. 2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 A.

SUBMITTALS Informational Submittals: Submit the following:

00361334.0000

02 41 00-1

Demolition

1.

2. 3.

Procedure Submittals: a. Demolition and Removal Plan: Not less than ten days prior to starting demolition Work, submit acceptable plan for demolition and removal Work, including: 1) Plan for coordinating shut-offs, capping, temporary services, and continuing utility services. 2) Planned demolition operating sequences. 3) Detailed schedule of demolition Work in accordance with the accepted Process Schedule. Notification of Intended Demolition Start: Submit in accordance with Paragraph 3.1.A of this Section. Qualifications Statements: a. Name and qualifications of entity performing electrical removals, including copy of licenses required by authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION

A.

Protection of Surrounding Areas and Facilities: 1. Perform demolition and removal Work in manner that prevents damage and injury to property, structures, occupants, the public, and facilities. Do not interfere with use of, and free and safe access to and from, structures and properties. 2. Closing or obstructing of roads, drives, sidewalks, and passageways adjacent to the Work is not allowed unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Conduct the Work with minimum interference to vehicular and pedestrian traffic. 3. Provide temporary barriers, lighting, sidewalk sheds, and other necessary protection. 4. Repair damage to facilities that are to remain.

B.

Existing Utilities: In addition to requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01 Specifications, do the following: 1. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted Underground Facilities be encountered, CONTRACTOR responsibilities shall be in accordance with the General Conditions as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. Cooperate with utility owners in keeping adjacent services and facilities in operation. 2. Sanitary Sewer: Before proceeding with demolition, locate and cap all sewer lines and service laterals discharging from the building or structure being demolished. 3. Storm Water: Existing storm water system shall remain in place until demolitions of existing building or structure is completed. Upon

00361334.0000

02 41 00-2

Demolition

4.

5.

6.

completing demolition, cut and cap storm sewer laterals at locations shown on the Drawings. Remove existing storm water piping and related structures between points of cutting, and backfill, restore to grade, and stabilize the area over the removed facilities. Water Piping: Before proceeding with demolition, locate and cap all potable and non-potable waterlines and service laterals serving the building or structure being demolished. Other Utilities: Before proceeding with demolition, locate and cap as required all other utilities, such as fuel and gas; heating, ventilating, and air conditioning; electric; and communications; and service laterals serving the building or structure being demolished. Shutdown of utility services shall be coordinated by CONTRACTOR, assisted by OWNER as required relative to contacting utility owners.

C. Remediation: 1. Prior to performing demolition Work that disturbs Asbestos, remove and dispose of Asbestos in accordance with Section 02 82 33, Removal and Disposal of Asbestos Containing Materials. 2. Prior to performing demolition Work involving lead-based paint, remediate lead in accordance with Section 02 83 19, Lead-Based Paint Remediation. 3.2

DEMOLITION – GENERAL

A.

Locate construction equipment used for demolition Work and remove demolished materials and equipment to avoid imposing excessive loading on supporting and adjacent walls, floors, framing, facilities, and Underground Facilities.

B.

Pollution Controls: 1. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit emissions of dust and dirt to lowest practical level. Comply with Section 01 57 05, Temporary Controls, and Laws and Regulations. 2. Do not use water when water may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as icing, flooding, or pollution. 3. Clean adjacent structures, facilities, properties, and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition Work, in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01 74 05, Cleaning.

C. Comply with Section 01 73 29, Cutting and Patching. D. Salvage and Ownership: 1. Refer to Section 01 11 13, Summary of Work, for requirements on salvage, ownership, and handling of equipment and materials removed during demolition and removal Work. 2. Materials and equipment to remain OWNER’s property shall be carefully removed and appropriately handled by CONTRACTOR to avoid damage and invalidation of warranties in effect, and shall be 00361334.0000

02 41 00-3

Demolition

cleaned and stored at the Site (or other site specified in the Contract Documents) at place designated by ENGINEER or OWNER. E.

3.3

Finishing of Surfaces Exposed by Removals: Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, surfaces of walls, floors, ceilings, and other areas exposed by removals, and that will remain as finished surfaces, shall be repaired and re-finished with materials that match existing adjacent surface, or as otherwise approved by ENGINEER.

STRUCTURAL REMOVALS

A.

Remove structures to lines and grades shown or indicated, unless otherwise directed by ENGINEER. Where limits are not shown or indicated, limits shall be four inches outside item to be installed. Removals beyond limits shown or indicated shall be at CONTRACTOR’s expense and such excess removals shall be reconstructed to satisfaction of ENGINEER without additional cost to OWNER.

B.

Recycling and Reuse of Demolition Materials: 1. All concrete, brick, tile, masonry, roofing materials, reinforcing steel, structural metals, miscellaneous metals, plaster, wire mesh, and other items contained in or upon building or structure to be demolished shall be removed, transported, and disposed of away from the Site, unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER. 2. Do not use demolished materials as fill or backfill adjacent to structures, in pipeline trenches, or as subbase under structures or pavement.

C. After removing concrete and masonry walls or portions thereof, slabs, and similar construction that ties in to the Work or to existing construction, neatly repair the junction point to leave exposed only finished edges and finished surfaces. D. Where parts of existing structures are to remain in service following demolition, remove the portions shown or indicated for removal, repair damage, and leave the building or structure in proper condition for the intended use. 1. Remove concrete and masonry to the lines shown or indicated by sawing, drilling, chipping, and other suitable methods. Leave the resulting surfaces true and even, with sharp, straight corners that will result in neat joints with new construction and be satisfactory for the purpose intended. 2. Do not damage reinforcing bars beyond the area of concrete and masonry removal. Do not saw-cut beyond the area to be removed. 3. Reinforcing bars that are exposed at surfaces of removed concrete and masonry that will not be covered with new concrete or masonry shall be removed to 1.5 inches below the final surface. Repair the resulting hole, 00361334.0000

02 41 00-4

Demolition

4.

with repair mortar for concrete and grout for masonry, to be flush with the surface. Where existing reinforcing bars are shown or indicated to extend into new construction, remove existing concrete so that reinforcing bars are clean and undamaged.

E.

Where equipment or material anchored to concrete or masonry are removed and anchors are not to be re-used, remove the anchors to not less than 1.5 inches beneath surface of concrete or masonry member. Repair the resulting hole, using repair mortar for concrete and grout for masonry, to be flush with the surface. Alternately, when the anchor is stainless steel, the anchor may be cut flush with the surface of the concrete or masonry, when so approved by ENGINEER.

F.

Jambs, sills and heads of windows, passageways, doors, or other openings (as applicable) cut-in to the Work or to existing construction shall be dressed with masonry, concrete, or metal to provide smooth, finished appearance.

G. Where anchoring materials, including bolts, nuts, hangers, welds, and reinforcing steel, are required to attach the Work to existing construction, provide such materials under this Section, unless specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 3.4

MECHANICAL REMOVALS

A.

Mechanical demolition and removal Work includes dismantling and removing existing piping, ductwork, pumps, equipment, tanks, and appurtenances as shown, indicated, and required for completion of the Work. Mechanical removals include cutting and capping as required, except that cutting of existing piping and ductwork to make connections is included under Section 01 14 16, Coordination with Owner’s Operations; Section 01 73 29, Cutting and Patching; and applicable Sections of Division 40, Process Integration.

B.

Demolition and Removals of Piping, Ductwork, and Similar Items: 1. Purge piping and tanks (as applicable) of chemicals or fuel (as applicable) and make safe for removal and capping. Remove to the extent shown or indicated existing process, water, waste and vent, chemical, gas, fuel, and other piping. Remove piping to the nearest solid piping support, and provide caps on ends of remaining piping. Where piping to be demolished passes through existing walls to remain, cut off and cap pipe on each side of the wall. 2. Caps, Closures, Blind Flanges, and Plugs: a. Provide closure pieces, such as blind flanges and caps, where shown or required to complete the Work. b. Where used in this Section, the term “cap” means the appropriate type closure for the piping or ductwork being closed, including caps, blind flanges, and other closures.

00361334.0000

02 41 00-5

Demolition

c.

3. 4.

5.

Caps shall be compatible with the piping or ductwork to which the cap is attached, fluid-tight and gastight, and appropriate for the fluid or gas conveyed in the pipe or duct. d. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, caps shall be mechanically fastened, fused, or welded to pipe or duct. Plug piping with means other than specified in this Section only when so shown or indicated in the Contractor Documents or when allowed by ENGINEER. When Underground Facilities are altered or removed, properly cut and cap piping left in place, unless otherwise shown or indicated. Remove waste and vent piping, and ductwork to extent shown and cap as required. Where demolished vent piping, stacks, and ductwork passes through existing roofing, patch the roof with the same or similar materials. Completed patch shall be watertight and comply with roofing manufacturer’s recommendations. Modifications to potable water piping and other plumbing and heating system work shall comply with Laws and Regulations. All portions of potable water system that have been modified or opened shall be hydrostatically tested and disinfected in accordance with the Contract Documents, and Laws and Regulations. Hydrostatically test other, normally-pressurized, plumbing piping and heating piping.

C. Equipment Demolition and Removals: 1. To the extent shown or indicated, remove existing process equipment; pumps; storage tanks; hoisting and conveying equipment; heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment; generators; and other equipment. 2. Where required, disassemble equipment to avoid imposing excessive loading on supporting walls, floors, framing, facilities, and Underground Facilities. Disassemble equipment as required for access through and egress from building or structure. Disassembly shall comply with Laws and Regulations. Provide required means to remove equipment from building or structure. 3. Remove control panels, operator stations, and instruments associated with equipment being removed, unless shown or indicated otherwise. 4. Remove fuel appurtenances as applicable, including fuel storage tanks. Dispose of tank contents in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 5. Remove equipment supports as applicable, anchorages, base, grout, and piping. Remove anchorage systems in accordance with the “Structural Removals” Article in this Section. Remove small-diameter piping back to header unless otherwise indicated. 6. Remove access platforms, ladders, and stairs related to equipment being removed, unless otherwise shown or indicated. 3.5 A.

ELECTRICAL REMOVALS Electrical demolition Work includes removing existing transformers, distribution switchboards, control panels, motors, starters, conduit and

00361334.0000

02 41 00-6

Demolition

raceways, cabling, poles and overhead cabling, panelboards, lighting fixtures, switches, and miscellaneous electrical equipment, as shown, specified, or required. B.

Remove existing electrical equipment and fixtures to avoid damaging systems to remain, to keep existing systems in operation, and to maintain integrity of grounding systems.

C. Remove or modify motor control centers and switchgear as shown or indicated. Modified openings shall be cut square and dressed smooth to dimensions required for installation of equipment. D. Disconnect and remove motors, control panels, and other electrical gear where shown or indicated. Motors, microprocessors and electronics, other electrical gear to be reused shall be stored in accordance with Section 01 66 00, Product Storage and Handling Requirements. E.

Cables in conduits to be removed shall be removed back to the power source or control panel, unless otherwise shown or indicated. Verify the function of each cable before disconnecting and removing.

F.

Conduits, raceways, and cabling shall be removed where shown or indicated. Abandoned conduits concealed in floor, ceiling slabs, or in walls shall be cut flush with the slab or wall (as applicable) at point of entrance, suitably capped, and the area repaired in a flush, smooth manner acceptable to ENGINEER. Exposed conduits, junction boxes, other electrical appurtenances, and their supports shall be disassembled and removed. Repair all areas of the Work to prevent rusting on exposed surfaces.

G. Conduits in Underground Facilities not scheduled for reuse shall be suitably capped watertight where each enters building or structure to remain. H. Where shown or indicated, remove direct burial cable. Openings in buildings for entrance of direct burial cable shall be patched with repair mortar or other material approved by ENGINEER for this purpose, and made watertight. I.

Existing poles and overhead cables shall be removed or abandoned as shown and specified. Existing substation(s) and poles owned by electric utility will be removed by the electric utility. Completely remove from the Site poles not owned by electric utility and shown or indicated for removal. Make necessary arrangements with electric utility for removal of utility company’s transformers and metering equipment after new electrical system has been installed and energized.

J.

Lighting fixtures, wall switches, receptacles, starters, and other miscellaneous electrical equipment, not designated as remaining as OWNER’s property, shall be removed and properly disposed off-Site as required.

00361334.0000

02 41 00-7

Demolition

3.6

DISPOSAL OF DEMOLITION DEBRIS

A.

Remove from the Site all debris, waste, rubbish, and material resulting from demolition operations and equipment used in demolition Work. Comply with the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Section 01 74 05, Cleaning.

B.

Transportation and Disposal: 1. Non-hazardous Material: Properly transport and dispose of nonhazardous demolition debris at appropriate landfill or other suitable location, in accordance with Laws and Regulations. Non-hazardous material does not contain Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, Radioactive Material, or other material designated as hazardous in Laws and Regulations. 2. Hazardous Material: When handling and disposal of hazardous materials is included in the Work, properly transport and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations.

C. Submit to ENGINEER information required in this Section on proposed facility(ies) where demolition material will be recycled. Upon request, ENGINEER or OWNER, shall be allowed to visit recycling facility(ies) to verify adequacy and compliance status. During such visits, recycling facility operator shall cooperate and assist ENGINEER and OWNER.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

02 41 00-8

Demolition

SECTION 03 00 05 CONCRETE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION: A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install concrete, reinforcing, and related materials. 2. The Work includes: a. Providing concrete consisting of portland cement, fine and coarse aggregates, water, and approved admixtures; combined, mixed, transported, placed, finished, and cured. b. Fabricating and placing reinforcing, including ties and supports. c. Design, erection, and removal of formwork. d. Building into the concrete all sleeves, frames, anchorage devices, inserts, and other items required to be embedded in concrete. e. Providing openings in concrete as required to accommodate Work under this and other Sections. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed in the concrete Work. C. Classifications of Concrete: 1. Class “A” concrete shall be steel-reinforced and includes all concrete unless otherwise shown or indicated.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. 2. Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 1.2 REFERENCES: A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ACI 224R, Control of Cracking in Concrete Structures. 2. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 3. ACI 304R, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. 4. ACI 305R, Specification for Hot Weather Concreting. 5. ACI 306R, Cold Weather Concreting. 6. ACI 309R, Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. 7. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. 8. ACI 347, Guide to Formwork for Concrete. 9. ACI SP-66, ACI Detailing Manual. 10. ASTM A82/A82M, Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 11. ASTM A185/A185M, Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. 12. ASTM A615/A615M, Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

00361334.0000

03 00 05-1

Concrete

13. ASTM C31/C31M, Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 14. ASTM C33/C33M, Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 15. ASTM C39/C39M, Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 16. ASTM C42/C42M, Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 17. ASTM C94/C94M, Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 18. ASTM C138/C138M, Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete. 19. ASTM C143/C143M, Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. 20. ASTM C150/C150M, Specification for Portland Cement. 21. ASTM C172, Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 22. ASTM C231, Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 23. ASTM C260, Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 24. ASTM C309, Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 25. ASTM C494/C494M, Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 26. ASTM C579, Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 27. ASTM C1064/C1064M, Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. 28. ASTM D1752, Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 29. ASTM E96/E96M, Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 30. ASTM E154, Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover. 31. CRD-C 572, U. S. Army Corps of Engineers Specification for Polyvinylchloride Waterstops. 32. CRSI 1MSP, Manual of Standard Practice. 1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Laboratory Trial Batch: 1. Employ independent testing laboratory experienced in design and testing of concrete materials and mixes to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. 2. Each concrete mix design specified shall be verified by laboratory trial batch, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Perform the following testing on each trial batch: a. Aggregate gradation for fine and coarse aggregates. b. Slump. c. Air content. d. Compressive strength based on three cylinders each tested at seven days and at 28 days. 4. Submit for each trial batch the following information: a. Project identification name and number (if applicable). b. Date of test report. c. Complete identification of aggregate source of supply. d. Tests of aggregates for compliance with the Contract Documents. e. Scale weight of each aggregate. f. Absorbed water in each aggregate. g. Brand, type, and composition of cementitious materials.

00361334.0000

03 00 05-2

Concrete

h. i. j. k. l. m. n.

1.4

Brand, type, and amount of each admixture. Amounts of water used in trial mixes. Proportions of each material per cubic yard. Gross weight and yield per cubic yard of trial mixtures. Measured slump. Measured air content. Compressive strength developed at seven days and 28 days, from not less than three test cylinders cast for each seven day and 28-day test, and for each design mix.

SUBMITTALS: A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. List of concrete materials and concrete mix designs proposed for use. Include results of tests performed to qualify the materials and to establish the mix designs. Do not start laboratory trial batch testing until this submittal is approved by ENGINEER. b. Laboratory Trial Batch Reports: Submit laboratory test reports for concrete cylinders, materials, and mix design tests. c. Concrete placement drawings showing the location and type of all joints. d. Drawings for fabricating, bending, and placing concrete reinforcing. Comply with ACI SP-66. For walls and masonry construction, provide elevations to a minimum scale of 1/4-inch to one foot. Show bar schedules, stirrup spacing, adhesive dowels, splice lengths, diagrams of bent bars, arrangements, and assemblies, as required for fabricating and placing concrete reinforcing. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer’s specifications with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including admixtures and bonding agents. 3. Samples: a. Samples: Submit samples of materials as specified and as otherwise requested by ENGINEER, including names, sources, and descriptions. 4.

1.5

Site Quality Control Submittals: a. Report of testing results for testing of field concrete cylinders for each required time period. Submit within 24 hours after completion of associated test. Test report shall include results of all testing required at time of sampling.

PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Transportation, Delivery, and Handling: 1. Deliver concrete reinforcing products to Site bundled, tagged, and marked. Use metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding to markings on approved Shop Drawings. 2. Materials used for concrete shall be clean and free from foreign matter during transportation and handling, and kept separate until measured and placed into concrete mixer. 3. Implement suitable measures during hauling, piling, and handling to ensure that segregation of coarse and fine aggregate particles does not occur and grading is not affected.

00361334.0000

03 00 05-3

Concrete

4. 5.

Deliver grout materials from manufacturers in unopened containers that bear intact manufacturer labeling. Comply with Section 01 65 00, Product Delivery Requirements.

B. Storage: 1. Store formwork materials above ground on framework or blocking. Cover wood for forms and other accessory materials with protective, waterproof covering. Provide for adequate air circulation or ventilation under cover. 2. Store concrete reinforcing materials to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt and excessive rust. Store on heavy wood blocking so that reinforcing does not come into contact with the ground. Space framework or blocking supports to prevent excessive deformation of stored materials. 3. Store concrete joint materials on platforms or in enclosures or covered to prevent contact with ground and exposure to weather and direct sunlight. 4. For storage of concrete materials, provide bins or platforms with hard, clean surfaces. 5. Comply with Section 01 66 00, Product Storage and Handling Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1

CONCRETE MATERIALS: A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I/II. B. Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M. 1. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand free of loam, clay, lumps, and other deleterious substances. Dune sand, bank run sand, and manufactured sand are unacceptable. 2. Coarse Aggregate: a. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam, or foreign matter. b. Coarse aggregate shall comply with the following: 1) Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. c. Coarse Aggregate Size: ASTM C33/C33M, Nos. 57, unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER. C. Water: Clean, potable. D. Admixtures: 1. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260. 2. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A. 3. Water Reducing and Set-Adjusting Admixtures: ASTM C494/C494M, Types D and E. 4. High Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F/G. 5. Use only admixtures that have been tested and approved in the mix designs. 6. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride ions.

2.2

CONCRETE MIX: A. General: 1. Normal weight: 145 pounds per cubic foot. 2. Use air-entraining admixture in all concrete. Provide not less than four percent, nor more than eight percent, entrained air for concrete exposed to

00361334.0000

03 00 05-4

Concrete

freezing and thawing, and provide from three to five percent entrained air for other concrete. B. Proportioning and Design of Class “A” Concrete Mix: 1. Minimum compressive strength at 28 days: 4,500 psi. 2. Maximum water-cement ratio by weight: 0.42. 3. Minimum cement content: 564 pounds per cubic yard. C. Slump Limits: 1. Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement of not less than one inch and not more than four inches. 2. When using high-range water reducers, slump prior to addition of admixture shall not exceed three inches. Slump after adding admixture shall not exceed eight inches at point of placement. D. Adjustment of Concrete Mixes: 1. Concrete mix design adjustments may be requested by CONTRACTOR when warranted by characteristics of materials, Site conditions, weather, test results, or other, similar circumstances. 2. Submit for ENGINEER’s approval laboratory test data for adjusted concrete mix designs, including compressive strength test results. 3. Implement adjusted mix designs only after ENGINEER’s approval. 4. Adjustments to concrete mix designs shall not result in additional costs to OWNER. 2.3

FORM MATERIALS: A. Provide form materials with sufficient stability to withstand pressure of placed concrete without bow or deflection. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for designing the formwork system to resist all applied loads including pressures from fluid concrete and construction loads. B. Smooth Form Surfaces: Acceptable panel-type to provide continuous, straight, smooth, as-cast surfaces in accordance with ACI 301. C. Unexposed Concrete Surfaces: Material to suit project conditions. D. Provide 3/4-inch chamfer at all external corners. Chamfer is not required at reentrant corners unless otherwise shown or indicated. E. Form Ties: 1. Provide factory-fabricated, removable, or snap-off metal form ties, that prevent form deflection and prevent spalling of concrete surfaces upon removal. Materials used for tying forms are subject to approval of ENGINEER. 2. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, provide ties so that portion remaining within concrete after removal of exterior parts is at least 1.5 inches from outer surface of concrete. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, provide form ties that, upon removal, will leave a uniform, circular hole not larger than one-inch diameter in the concrete surface. 3. Wire ties are unacceptable.

00361334.0000

03 00 05-5

Concrete

2.4

REINFORCING MATERIALS: A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 deformed bars. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185/A185M. C. Steel Wire: ASTM A82/A82M. D. Provide supports for reinforcing including bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing in place. 1. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI MSP1 recommendations, except as specified in this Section. Do not use wood, brick, or other unacceptable materials. 2. For slabs on grade, use precast concrete blocks, four inches square minimum with compressive strength equal to or greater than the surrounding concrete, or supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base materials will not support chair legs. 3. For all concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports having either hot-dip galvanized, plastic-protected, or stainless steel legs in accordance with CRSI MSP1. 4. Provide precast concrete supports over waterproof membranes.

E.

2.5

Adhesive Dowels: 1. Dowels: a. Dowel reinforcing bars shall comply with ASTM A615, Grade 60. 2. Adhesive: a. For requirements for adhesive, refer to Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. RELATED MATERIALS:

A. Epoxy Bonding Agent: 1. Two-component epoxy resin bonding agent. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod LPL, by Sika Corporation. b. Eucopoxy LPL, by the Euclid Chemical Company. c. Or equal. B. Epoxy-Cement Bonding Agent: 1. Three-component blended epoxy resin-cement bonding agent. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem, by Sika Corporation. b. Duralprep A.C., by Euclid Chemical Company. c. Or equal. C. Preformed Expansion Joint Filler: 1. Provide preformed expansion joint filler complying with ASTM D1752, Type I (sponge rubber) or Type II (cork). D. Joint Sealant and Accessories: 1. For joint sealants and accessories used on isolation joints, control joints, and expansion joints, refer to Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants.

00361334.0000

03 00 05-6

Concrete

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION: A. CONTRACTOR shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which the Work will be performed and notify ENGINEER in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2

FORMWORK: A. Construct formwork in accordance with ACI 347 such that concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. B. Provide openings in formwork to accommodate the Work of other trades. Accurately place and securely support items required to be built into formwork. C. Clean and adjust forms prior to placing concrete. Apply form release agents or wet forms as required. Re-tighten forms during and after concrete placing, when required, to eliminate cement paste leaks. D. Removing Formwork: 1. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 347, except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not remove formwork and shoring until supported concrete members have acquired minimum of 90 percent of specified compressive strength. Results of suitable quality control tests of field-cured specimens may be submitted to ENGINEER for review as evidence that concrete has attained sufficient strength for removal of supporting formwork and shoring prior to removal times indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Removal time for formwork is subject to ENGINEER’s acceptance. 4. Repair form tie-holes following in accordance with ACI 301.

3.3

REINFORCING, JOINTS, AND EMBEDDED ITEMS: A. Comply with the applicable recommendations of Laws and Regulations and standards referenced in this Section, including CRSI MSP1, for details and methods of placing and supporting reinforcing. B. Clean reinforcing to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which act to reduce or destroy bond between reinforcing material and concrete. C. Position, support, and secure reinforcing against displacement during formwork construction and concrete placing. Locate and support reinforcing by means of metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required. 1. Place reinforcing to obtain minimum concrete coverages as shown on the Drawings and as required in ACI 318. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports together with 16-gage wire to hold reinforcing accurately in position during concrete placing. Set with ties so that twisted ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces. 2. Do not secure reinforcing to formwork using wire, nails or other ferrous metal. Metal supports subject to corrosion shall not be in contact with formed or exposed concrete surfaces.

00361334.0000

03 00 05-7

Concrete

D. Provide sufficient quantity of supports of strength required to carry reinforcing. Do not place reinforcing more than two inches beyond the last leg of continuous bar support. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. E. Splices: Provide standard reinforcing splices by lapping ends, placing bars in contact, and tying tightly with wire. Comply with requirements shown or indicated for minimum lap of spliced bars, in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318. F. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practical, lapping adjoining sections a minimum of one full mesh. G. Do not place concrete until reinforcing is inspected and ENGINEER indicates that conditions are acceptable for placing concrete. Concrete placed in violation of this paragraph will be rejected. Notify ENGINEER in writing at least two working days prior to proposed concrete placement. H. Joints: 1. Provide construction, isolation, expansion, and control joints as indicated or required. Locate construction joints so as to not impair the strength and appearance of the structure. Place isolation and control joints in slabs-ongrade to stabilize differential settlement and random cracking. 2. Locations of joints shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents and as approved by ENGINEER in the Shop Drawings. 3. Where construction joints are indicated to be roughened, intentionally roughen surfaces of previously-placed concrete to amplitude of 1/4-inch. I. Installation of Embedded Items: Set and build into the Work anchorage devices or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting diagrams, templates, and instructions providedper equip ment manufacturer’s. Refer to Paragraph 1.1.B of this Section. Do not embed in concrete uncoated aluminum items. Where aluminum items are in contact with concrete surfaces, coat aluminum to prevent direct contact with concrete. J. Adhesive Dowels: 1. Adhesive dowels shall be all threaded rods set in an adhesive in hole drilled into hardened concrete. Comply with adhesive system manufacturer’s installation instructions regarding hole diameter, drilling method, embedment depth required to fully develop required tensile strength, and hole cleaning and preparation instructions. Unless more-stringent standards are required by adhesive system manufacturer, comply with the following. 2. Drill holes to adhesive system manufacturer’s recommended diameter and depth to develop required tensile strength. Holes shall not be more than 1/4inch greater than nominal bar diameter, and hole depth shall not be less than twelve times nominal bar diameter. Hammer-drill holes. Cored holes are not allowed. 3. Embedment depths shall be based on concrete compressive strength of 2,000 psi when embedded in existing concrete, and 4,000 psi when embedded in new concrete. 4. Determine location of existing reinforcing steel in vicinity of proposed holes prior to drilling. Adjust location of holes to be drilled to avoid drilling through or damaging existing reinforcing bars only when approved by ENGINEER. 5. Before setting adhesive dowel, hole shall be free of dust and debris using method recommended by adhesive system manufacturer. Hole shall be 00361334.0000

03 00 05-8

Concrete

6.

7. 3.4

brushed, with manufacturer-approved brush and blown clean with clean, dry, oil-free compressed air to remove dust and loose particles. Hole shall be dry as defined by adhesive system manufacturer. Inject adhesive into hole through injection system mixing nozzle and necessary extension tubes, placed to bottom of hole. Withdraw discharge end as adhesive is placed, but keep end of tube immersed to prevent forming air pockets. Fill hole to depth that ensures that excess material is expelled from hole during dowel placement. Twist dowels during insertion into partially-filled hole to guarantee full wetting of bar surface with adhesive. Insert bar slowly to avoid developing air pockets.

CONCRETE PLACING: A. Site Mixing: Use drum-type batch machine mixer, mixing not less than 1.5 minutes for one cubic yard or smaller capacity. Increase required mixing time by minimum of 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or fraction thereof. B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M. C. Concrete Placing: 1. Place concrete in a continuous operation within planned joints or sections in accordance with ACI 304R. 2. Do not begin placing concrete until work of other trades affecting concrete is completed. 3. Wet concrete and subgrade surfaces to saturated surface dry condition immediately prior to placing concrete. 4. Deposit concrete as near its final location as practical to avoid segregation due to re-handling or flowing. 5. Avoid separation of the concrete mixture during transportation and placing. Concrete shall not free-fall for distance greater than four feet during placing. 6. Complete concrete placing within 90 minutes of addition of water to the dry ingredients. D. Consolidate placed concrete in accordance with ACI 309R using mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented with hand rodding and tamping, such that concrete is worked around placing and other embedded items and into all parts of formwork. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly-spaced locations. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete within the formwork. Vibration of formwork or placing is not allowed. E. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to weather extremes during mixing, placing, and curing. 1. In hot weather comply with ACI 305R. 2. In cold weather comply with ACI 306R.

3.5

QUALITY OF CONCRETE WORK: A. Make concrete solid, compact, smooth, and free of laitance, cracks, and cold joints. B. Concrete for liquid-retaining structures and concrete in contact with earth, water, or exposed directly to the elements shall be watertight.

00361334.0000

03 00 05-9

Concrete

C. Cut out and properly replace to extent directed by ENGINEER, or repair to satisfaction of ENGINEER, surfaces that contain cracks or voids, are unduly rough, or are in defective in any way. Patches or plastering are unacceptable. D. Repair, removal and replacement of defective concrete directed by ENGINEER shall be at no additional cost to OWNER. 3.6

CURING: A. Begin initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from exposed surfaces. Where possible, keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. Continue curing by using moisture-retaining cover or membrane-forming curing compound. Cure formed surfaces by moist curing until formwork is removed. Provide protection, as required, to prevent damage to exposed concrete surfaces. Total curing period shall not be less than seven days. Curing methods and materials shall be compatible with scheduled finishes.

3.8

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Site Testing Services: 1. OWNER will employ testing laboratory to perform field quality control testing for concrete. ENGINEER will direct the testing requirements. 2. Testing laboratory will provide all labor, material, and equipment required for sampling and testing concrete, including: scale, glass tray, cones, rods, molds, air tester, thermometer, and other incidentals required. B. Site Testing Services: 1. CONTRACTOR shall employ independent testing laboratory to perform field quality control testing for concrete. ENGINEER will direct where samples are obtained. 2. Testing laboratory will provide all labor, material, and equipment required for sampling and testing concrete, including: scale, glass tray, cones, rods, molds, air tester, thermometer, and other incidentals required. 3. CONTRACTOR shall provide curing and necessary cylinder storage for Testing Laboratory. C. Quality Control Testing During Construction: 1. Perform sampling and testing for field quality control during concrete placing, as follows: a. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172. b. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M; one test for each concrete load at point of discharge. c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M; one for every two concrete loads at point of discharge, and when a change in the concrete is observed. Test each load when time from batching to placement exceeds 75 minutes. d. Air Content: ASTM C231; one for every two concrete load at point of discharge, and when a change in the concrete is observed. e. Unit Weight: ASTM C138/C138M; one for every two concrete loads at point of discharge, and when a change in the concrete is observed. f. Compression Test Specimens: 1) In accordance with ASTM C31/C31M, make one set of compression cylinders for each 50 cubic yards of concrete, or fraction thereof, of

00361334.0000

03 00 05-10

Concrete

g.

h. i.

00361334.0000

each mix design placed each day. Each set shall be four standard cylinders, unless otherwise directed by ENGINEER. 2) Cast, store, and cure specimens in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M. Compressive Strength Tests: 1) In accordance with ASTM C39/C39M; one specimen tested at seven days, and three specimens tested at 28 days. 2) Concrete that does not comply with strength requirements will be considered as defective Work. Submit test results from certified by testing laboratory to ENGINEER within 24 hours of completion of test. When there is evidence that strength of in-place concrete does not comply with the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall employ the services of concrete testing laboratory to obtain cores from hardened concrete for compressive strength determination. Cores and tests shall comply with ASTM C42/C42M and the following: 1) Testing of Adhesive Dowels: CONTRACTOR shall employ testing agency to perform field quality control testing of drilled dowel installations. After adhesive system manufacturer’s recommended curing period and prior to placing connecting reinforcing, proof-test for pullout ten percent of adhesive dowels installed. Adhesive dowels shall be tensioned to 60 percent of specified yield strength. Where dowels are located less than six bar diameters from edge of concrete, ENGINEER will determine tensile load required for test. If one or more dowels fail, retest all dowels installed for the Work. Dowels that fail shall be reinstalled and retested at CONTRACTOR’s expense.

03 00 05-11

Concrete

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 03 60 00 GROUTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

Scope: 1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install grout. 2. The types of grout include the following: a. Non-Shrink Grout: This type of grout is to be used wherever grout is shown in the Contract Documents, unless another type is specifically referenced. Two classes of non-shrink grout (Class I and II) and areas of application are specified herein. b. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout (Class III). c. Grout Fill, Topping Grout. d. Construction Joint Grout.

B.

Related Sections: 1. Section 03 15 00, Concrete Accessories. 2. Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. 3. Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems.

C. Application: The following is a listing of typical applications and the corresponding type of grout which is to be used. Unless otherwise indicated, grouts shall be provided as listed below whether called for on the Drawings or not. Application

Type of Grout

Beam and column (1 or 2 story) base plates and precast concrete bearing less than 16-inches in the least dimension.

Non-shrink Class II.

Base plates for non-motorized equipment and machinery less than 50 horsepower.

Non-shrink Class I.

Machinery over 50 horsepower and equipment under 50 horsepower but subject to severe shock loads and high vibration.

Non-shrink Class III.

00361334.0000

03 60 00-1

Grouting

1.2 A.

Filling blockout spaces for embedded items such as railing posts, gate guide frames, etc.

Non-shrink Class II (Class I where placement time exceeds 15 minutes).

Toppings and concrete fill less than 4inches thick.

Grout Fill, Topping Grout.

Toppings and concrete fill greater than 4inches thick.

Class "A" Concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete.

All anchor bolts and reinforcing steel set in grout.

Refer to Section 03 20 00, Concrete Reinforcing, and Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems.

Applications not listed above, where grout is called for on the Drawings.

Non-shrink Class I, unless noted otherwise.

REFERENCES Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ACI 211.1, Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavy-Weight and Mass Concrete. 2. ACI 301, Specification for Structural Concrete (Includes ASTM Standards referred to herein). 3. ASTM C33, Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 4. ASTM C109, Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (using 2-in. or 50 mm. Cube Specimens). 5. ASTM C150, Specification for Portland Cement. 6. ASTM C230, Specification for Flow Table for use in Tests of Hydraulic Cement. 7. ASTM C531, Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical- Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings. 8. ASTM C579, Test Method for Compressive Strength of ChemicalResistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes. 9. ASTM C827, Test Method for Early Volume Change of Cementitious Mixtures. 10. ASTM C882, Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete. 11. ASTM C937, Specification for Grout Fluidifier for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete.

00361334.0000

03 60 00-2

Grouting

12. ASTM C939, Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete (Flow Cone Method). 13. ASTM C1107, Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink). 14. ASTM C1181, Test Method for Compressive Creep of ChemicalResistant Polymer Machinery Grouts. 15. ASTM D696, Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics. 1.3 A.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE Field Tests: 1. Compression test specimens will be taken during construction from the first placement of each type of grout, and at intervals thereafter as selected by the ENGINEER to ensure continued compliance with these Specifications. The specimens shall be made by the CONTRACTOR’s testing laboratory. 2. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for non-shrink grout will be performed as specified in ASTM C 109 at intervals during construction as selected by the ENGINEER. A set of three specimens will be made for testing at seven days, 28 days, and each additional time period as appropriate. 3. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for epoxy grout will be performed as specified in ASTM C 579, Method B, at intervals during construction as selected by the ENGINEER. A set of three specimens will be made for testing at seven days. 4. The cost of all laboratory tests on grout will be borne by the CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall retain an independent laboratory with experience in sampling and testing grout and concrete specimens. CONTRACTOR shall supply all materials necessary for fabricating the test specimens. SUBMITTALS

A.

Shop Drawings: Submit the following: 1. For Grout Fill and Construction Joint Grout, copies of grout design mix and laboratory test reports for grout strength tests.

B.

Reports and Certificates, submit for approval the following: 1. For proprietary materials, submit copies of manufacturer’s certification of compliance with the specified properties for Class I, II, and III grouts. 2. Submit certified testing lab reports for ASTM C 1107, Grade B and Grade C (as revised herein) requirements for Class I and II grouts tested at a fluid consistency for temperatures of 45, 73.4, 90°F with a pot life of 30 minutes at fluid consistency. 3. Submit certification that materials conform to the Specifications requirements for nonproprietary materials.

00361334.0000

03 60 00-3

Grouting

4. 5.

1.5

Submit certifications that all grouts used on the project are free of chlorides or other chemicals causing corrosion. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for all proprietary materials.

PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.

Delivery of Materials: Grout materials from manufacturers shall be delivered in unopened containers and shall bear intact manufacturer's labels.

B.

Storage of Materials: Store grout materials in a dry shelter and protect from moisture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

GROUTS

A.

General: Non-shrink grout shall be a prepackaged, inorganic, flowable, nongas-liberating, non-metallic, cement-based grout requiring only the addition of water. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each bag or other container in which the materials are packaged. The specific formulation for each class of non-shrink grout specified herein shall be that recommended by the manufacturer for the particular application.

B.

Class I, Non-Shrink Grout: 1. Class I, non-shrink grouts shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7,000 psi. Grout is for precision grouting and where watertightness and non-shrink reliability in both plastic and hardened states are critical. Refer to areas of application as specified in this Section. 2. Meet requirements of ASTM C1107 Grade C and B (as modified below) when tested using amount of water required to achieve the following properties: a. Fluid consistency (20 to 30 seconds) in accordance with ASTM C939. b. At temperatures of 45, 73.4, and 95 degrees F. 3. Length change from placement to time of final set shall not have a shrinkage greater than amount of expansion measured at three or fourteen days. Expansion at three or fourteen days shall not exceed the 28-day expansion. 4. Non-shrink property is not based on a chemically generated gas or gypsum expansion. 5. Fluid grout shall pass through the flow cone, with a continuous flow, one hour after mixing. 6. Products and Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following: a. Masterflow 928, manufactured by Master Builders, Inc. b. Five Star Grout, manufactured by Five Star Products, Inc. c. Hi-Flow Grout, manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company. d. Or equal.

00361334.0000

03 60 00-4

Grouting

C. Class II Non-Shrink Grout: 1. Class II, non-shrink grouts shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7,000 psi. Grout is for general purpose grouting applications as specified in this Section. 2. Meet requirements of ASTM C1107 and the following requirements when tested using amount of water required to achieve the following properties: a. Flowable consistency (140 percent flow on ASTM C230, five drops in 30 seconds). b. Fluid working time of at least 15 minutes. c. Flowable for at least 30 minutes. 3. Grout when tested shall not bleed at maximum allowed water. 4. Non-shrink property is not based on a chemically generated gas or gypsum expansion. 5. Products and Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following: a. Construction Grout, manufactured by Master Builders, Inc. b. NBEC Grout, manufactured by Five Star Products, Inc. c. NS Grout, manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company. d. Or equal. D. Class III Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: 1. Epoxy grout shall be a pourable, non-shrink, 100 percent solids system. Epoxy grout system shall have three components: resin, hardener, and specially blended aggregate, all premeasured and prepackaged. Resin component shall not contain non-reactive diluents. Resins containing butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) or other highly volatile and hazardous reactive diluents are not acceptable. Variation of component ratios is not allowed unless specifically recommended by manufacturer. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each container in which products are packaged. The following properties shall be attained with minimum quantity of aggregate allowed by manufacturer. 2. Products and Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following: a. Euco High Strength Grout, manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company. b. Sikadur 42 Grout Pak, manufactured by Sika Corporation. c. Five Star Epoxy Grout, manufactured by Five Star Products, Incorporated. d. Or equal. 3. Vertical volume change at all times before hardening shall be between zero percent shrinkage and 4.0 percent expansion when measured according to ASTM C827 (modified for epoxy grouts by using an indicator ball with a specific gravity between 0.9 and 1.1). Alternately, epoxy grouts that maintain an effective bearing area of not less than 95 percent are acceptable. 4. Length change after hardening shall be less than 0.0006 inch per inch and coefficient of thermal expansion shall be less than 0.00003 inch per 00361334.0000

03 60 00-5

Grouting

5.

6. 7. 8.

9. E.

inch per degree F when tested in accordance with requirements of ASTM C531. Compressive creep at one year shall be less than .001 inch per inch when tested under a 400 psi constant load at 140 degrees F per requirements of ASTM C1181. Seven-day compressive strength shall be a minimum of 14,000 psi when tested per requirements of ASTM C579 Grout shall be capable of maintaining at least a flowable consistency for a minimum of 30 minutes at 70 degrees F. Shear bond strength to portland cement concrete shall be greater than shear strength of concrete when tested per requirements of ASTM C882. Effective bearing area shall be a minimum of 95 percent.

Grout Fill, Topping Grout: 1. Grout for topping of slabs and concrete fill for built-up surfaces of tank, channel, and basin bottoms shall be composed of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, and admixtures proportioned and mixed as specified herein. Materials and procedures specified for normal concrete in Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete, shall apply except as otherwise specified in this Section. 2. Topping grout and concrete fill shall contain a minimum of 564 pounds of cement per cubic yard with a maximum water cement ratio of 0.45. Where concrete fill is thicker than four inches, Class “A” concrete, as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete, may be used when accepted by ENGINEER. 3. Coarse aggregate shall be graded as follows: U.S. Standard Sieve Size 1/2-inch 3/8-inch No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 4. 5.

F.

Percent by Weight Passing 100 90 to 100 20 to 55 5 to 30 0 to 10 0

Final mix design shall be as determined by trial mix design under supervision of approved testing laboratory. Strength: Minimum compressive strength of grout fill at the end of 28 days shall be 4000 psi.

Construction Joint Grout: 1. Construction Joint Grout approximates Class “A” concrete, as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete, with aggregate coarser than 1/2-inch removed. Mix shall be designed as flowable with high mortar content. It is intended to be placed over construction joints and

00361334.0000

03 60 00-6

Grouting

mixed with Class “A” concrete as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-InPlace Concrete. Mix requirements are: a. Compressive Strength: 4,500 psi minimum at 28 days. b. Maximum Water-Cement Ratio: 0.45 by weight. c. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, No. 8 size. d. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33, approximately 60 percent by weight of total aggregate. e. Air Content: eight percent (plus or minus one percent). f. Minimum Cement Content: 752 pounds per cubic yard. G. Requirements for Grout Fill and Construction Joint Grout: 1. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the Project for grout required. Comply with ACI 211.1 and report to ENGINEER the following data: a. Complete identification of aggregate source of supply. b. Tests of aggregates for compliance with specified requirements. c. Scale weight of each aggregate. d. Absorbed water in each aggregate. e. Brand, type and composition of cement. f. Brand, type and amount of each admixture. g. Amounts of water used in trial mixes. h. Proportions of each material per cubic yard. i. Gross weight and yield per cubic yard of trial mixtures. j. Measured slump. k. Measured air content. l. Compressive strength developed at seven days and 28 days, from not less than three test specimens cast for each seven-day and 28-day test, and for each design mix. 2. Submit written reports to ENGINEER of proposed mix of grout at least 30 days prior to start of the Work. Do not begin grout production until mixes have been approved by ENGINEER. 3. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select grout proportions, prepare test specimens and conduct strength tests as specified in ACI 301, Section 4 - Proportioning. However, mixes need not be designed for greater than 125 percent of specified strength, regardless of standard deviation of production facility. 4. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select grout proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301, Section 4. 5. Admixtures: Use air-entraining admixture in all grout. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by grout manufacturer for climate conditions prevailing at time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality. Do not use admixtures that have not been incorporated and tested in accepted design mix unless otherwise authorized in writing by ENGINEER.

00361334.0000

03 60 00-7

Grouting

2.2 A.

2.3

CURING MATERIALS Curing materials shall conform to Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete, and as recommended by manufacturer of prepackaged grouts. CONSISTENCY

A.

Consistency of grouts shall be that necessary to completely fill the space to be grouted for the particular application. Dry pack consistency is such that grout is plastic and moldable, but will not flow. Where “dry pack” is required per the Contract Documents, it shall mean a grout of that consistency; type of grout to be used shall be as specified in this Section for the application.

B.

Slump for topping grout and grout fill shall be adjusted to match placement and finishing conditions, but shall not exceed four inches.

C. Slump for construction joint grout shall be seven inches (plus or minute one inch).

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

3.2

INSPECTION CONTRACTOR shall examine substrate and conditions under which grout is to be placed and notify ENGINEER in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. INSTALLATION

A.

General: 1. Place grout as shown and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. If manufacturer's instructions conflict with the Contract Documents, request clarification from ENGINEER and do not proceed until ENGINEER provides clarification. 2. Manufacturers of proprietary products shall make available upon 72 hours notification services of qualified, full time employee to aid in assuring proper use of product under job conditions. 3. Placing grout shall conform to temperature and weather limitations in Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete. 4. Cure grout per manufacturer’s instructions for prepackaged grout and requirements of Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete, for grout fill and topping grout.

B.

Columns, Beams and Equipment Bases: 1. Epoxy Grout: After shimming equipment to proper grade, securely tighten anchorages. Properly form around base plates, allowing

00361334.0000

03 60 00-8

Grouting

2.

sufficient room around edges for placing grout. Provide adequate depth between bottom of base plate and top of concrete base to assure that void is completely filled with epoxy grout. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: After shimming columns, beams and equipment to proper grade, securely tighten anchorages. Properly form around base plates allowing sufficient room around edges for placing grout. Provide adequate depth between bottom of base plate and top of concrete base to assure that void is completely filled with non-shrink, non-metallic grout. All equipment bases shall be fully grouted.

C. Handrails and Railings: 1. After posts have been properly inserted into holes or sleeves, fill annular space between posts and sleeve with non-shrink, non-metallic grout. Bevel grout at juncture with post so that moisture flows away from post. D. Construction Joints: 1. Place a six-inch minimum thick layer of construction joint grout over contact surface of old concrete at interface of horizontal construction joints as specified in Section 03 15 00, Concrete Accessories, and Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. E.

Topping Grout: 1. All mechanical, electrical, and finish work shall be completed prior to placement of topping grout. Base slab shall be given a roughened textured surface by sandblasting or hydroblasting exposing aggregates to ensure bonding to base slab. 2. Minimum thickness of grout topping shall be one-inch. 3. Thoroughly clean and wet base slab prior to placing topping and fill. Do not place topping concrete until slab is complete free from standing pools and ponded water. A thin coat of neat Type II cement slurry shall be broomed into surface of slab and topping or fill concrete shall be placed while slurry is wet. Topping and fill shall be compacted by rolling or tamping, brought to established grade, and floated. Grouted fill for tank and basin bottoms where scraping mechanisms are to be installed shall be screeded by blades attached to revolving mechanism of equipment in accordance with procedures recommended by equipment manufacturer after grout is brought to established grade. 4. Topping grout placed on sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from bottom of slab to top, for full width of placement. 5. Surface shall be tested with a straight edge to detect high and low spots that shall be immediately eliminated. When topping has hardened sufficiently, it shall be steel troweled to a smooth surface free of pinholes and other imperfections. An approved type of mechanical trowel may be used as an assist in this operation, but last pass over surface shall be by hand-troweling. During finishing, do not apply the following to surface: water, dry cement, or mixture of dry cement and sand.

00361334.0000

03 60 00-9

Grouting

6.

F.

Cure and protect grout topping as specified in Section 03 30 00, CastIn-Place Concrete.

Grout Fill: 1. All mechanical, electrical, and finish work shall be completed prior to placement of grout fill. Grout fill shall be mixed, placed, and finished as required in Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. 2. Minimum thickness of grout fill shall be one inch. Where finished surface of grout fill is to form an intersecting angle of less than 45 degrees with concrete surface it is to be placed against, a key shall be formed in concrete surface at intersection point. Key shall be a minimum of 3.5-inches wide by 1.5-inches deep. 3. Surface shall be tested with a straight edge to verify that surface slopes uniformly to drain, and to detect high and low spots that shall be immediately eliminated. When grout fill has hardened sufficiently, it shall be steel troweled to a smooth surface free of pinholes and other imperfections. During finishing, do not apply the following to surface: water, dry cement, or mixture of dry cement and sand.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

03 60 00-10

Grouting

SECTION 04 00 05 MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified and required for masonry Work, including: a. Providing openings in unit masonry construction to accommodate the Work under this and other Specification Sections, and building into unit masonry construction all items such as sleeves, anchorage devices, inserts and other items to be embedded in unit masonry construction for which placement is not specifically provided under other Specification Sections. 2. Extent of each type of unit masonry is shown. 3. Types of products and features required include: a. Concrete unit masonry. b. Masonry mortar and grout. c. Masonry accessories. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Specification Sections and coordinate the items that must be installed with unit masonry construction Work. 2. Unit masonry construction done without built-in flashings and other built-in Work shall be removed and rebuilt at no additional cost to Owner, even if discovered after apparent completion of unit masonry construction. 3. Coordinate Work under other Specification Sections to avoid delay of masonry construction. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation. 1.2

REFERENCES

A. Referenced Standards: Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ACI 530, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. 2. ACI 530.1, Specification for Masonry Structures. 3. ASTM A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 4. ASTM A82, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement 5. ASTM A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 00361334.0000

04 00 05-1

Masonry

6. ASTM A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 7. ASTM A1008, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. 8. ASTM A1011, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, HotRolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-LowAlloy with Improved Formability. 9. ASTM C5, Standard Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes. 10. ASTM C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 11. ASTM C90, Standard Specification for Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 12. ASTM C91, Standard Specification for Masonry Cement. 13. ASTM C62, Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale) 14. ASTM C129, Standard Specification for Non-loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units 15. ASTM C136, Standard Test Method for Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 16. ASTM C140, Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units. 17. ASTM C144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 18. ASTM C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 19. ASTM C207, Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 20. ASTM C 216, Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). 21. ASTM C270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 22. ASTM C331, Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units. 23. ASTM C387, Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete. 24. ASTM C404, Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grouts. 25. ASTM C426, Standard Test Method for Linear Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Block. 26. ASTM C780, Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. 27. ASTM C1019, Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout. 28. ASTM C1093, Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry. 29. ASTM C1314, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms. 30. ASTM D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property- Durometer Hardness. 00361334.0000

04 00 05-2

Masonry

31. ASTM D2287, Standard Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds. 32. ASTM E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 33. ASTM E119, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 34. NCMA, Guide Specifications and Technical Bulletins. 35. UL, Design No. U 906, Bearing Wall Rating – 2 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating –2 HR. 36. UL, Design No. U 913, Bearing Wall Rating – 2 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating –2 HR. 37. UL 901, Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes. 1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: 1. Installer: Hire a single installer regularly engaged in preformed unit masonry installation and with successful and documented experience in erecting unit masonry of scope and type of Work required; and employs only tradesmen with specific skill and successful experience in this type of Work. Submit name and qualifications to Engineer with the following information for at least three successful, completed projects: a. Names and telephone numbers of owners, architects or engineers responsible for project. b. Approximate contract cost of unit masonry for which installer was responsible. c. Amount (square feet) of unit masonry installed. 2. Laboratory Qualifications: a. Testing Laboratory: In accordance with ASTM C1093. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain each type of concrete masonry unit from one Supplier, cured by one process and of uniform texture and color, or in an established uniform blend thereof. 2. Do not change source or brands of mortar products during the Project. 3. Where question of compliance to requirements of this Section arise, mortar properties Specification will take precedence over mortar proportion Specification. 4. Do not change proportions established for mortar accepted under property Specifications, and do not use products with different physical characteristics in mortar used in the Work, unless compliance with requirements of property Specifications is re-established by submitting acceptable data to Engineer. 5. Do not combine two air-entraining materials in mortar. C. Regulatory Requirements: Where fire-resistance classification is shown or scheduled for unit masonry construction (four-hour, three-hour, and similar 00361334.0000

04 00 05-3

Masonry

designations), comply with applicable requirements for products and installation established by UL tests referenced in this Section and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4

SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Submit the following: a. Shop Drawings showing location, extent and accurate configuration and profile of all items shown, specified, and required by this and other Specification Sections included in unit masonry construction. b. Shop Drawing for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcing bars. Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabricating and placing reinforcing for unit masonry Work. 2. Product Data: Submit the following: a. Copies of manufacturer’s specifications and test data for each type of concrete masonry unit specified, including certification that concrete masonry unit complies with Contract Documents. Include instructions for handling, storage, installation and protection of each type of concrete masonry unit. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: Submit the following: a. Pre-construction laboratory test results, in accordance with ASTM C140. 2. and Evaluation Reports a. Preconstruction testing results as specified in Paragraph 3.1.B of this Section. 3. Qualification Statements: a. Testing laboratory. b. Installer. 1.5

PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery and Handling of Products: 1. Comply with Section 01 65 00, Product Delivery Requirements. B. Storage of Materials: 1. Comply with 01 66 00, Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 2. Maintain temperatures under cover so that masonry products are above 20 degrees F during installation. 1.6

JOB CONDITIONS

00361334.0000

04 00 05-4

Masonry

A. Temporary Facilities: Provide supplemental heat sources and equipment as required should Contractor desire to continue unit masonry Work in cold weather. Pay for fuel for supplemental heat. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not perform unit masonry Work when air temperature is below 28 degrees F on a rising temperature, or below 36 degrees F on falling temperatures without providing temporary, heated enclosures, or without providing temporary heating or other precautions to prevent freezing. 2. Do not use frozen products, and do not build upon frozen unit masonry Work. 3. Remove and replace all unit masonry Work damaged by cold. C. Protection: 1. Protect unit masonry Work against freezing for at least 48 hours after being placed. a. For Mean Daily Air Temperatures of 40 degrees F to 32 degrees F: Protect unit masonry construction from precipitation for 48 hours after installation. b. For Mean Daily Air Temperatures of 32 degrees F to 25 degrees F: Completely cover unit masonry construction for 48 hours after installation. c. For Mean Daily Temperatures of 25 degrees F to 20 degrees F: Completely cover unit masonry construction with insulating blankets for 48 hours after installation of the masonry. d. For Mean Daily Air Temperatures of 20 degrees F and Below: Maintain unit masonry construction above 32 degrees F for 48 hours by enclosure and supplementary heating. 2. When Work is not in progress, protect partially completed unit masonry construction against rapid heat loss and from water entering the masonry by covering the top of walls with a strong, waterproof, non-staining membrane. Extend the membrane at least two feet down both sides of wall and secure in place using wall cover clamps spaced at intervals of four feet and at each end, and at joints in membrane. D. Hot Weather Unit Masonry Work: Protect unit masonry Work by methods acceptable to Engineer from direct exposure to wind and sun when surrounding air temperature is 99 degrees F in the shade with relative humidity less than 50 percent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: Provide the following for Portland cement-lime mortars: 1. ASTM C150, Type I.

00361334.0000

04 00 05-5

Masonry

2. Use ASTM C150, Type III high-early strength, for laying masonry when air temperature is less than 50 degrees F. 3. Provide nonstaining Portland cement of natural color. B. Masonry Cement: Provide the following for masonry cement mortars: 1. ASTM C91 Type S, proportioned to comply with ASTM C270. 2. Maximum Air Content, ASTM C91: 19 percent. 3. Non-staining. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207 Type S, or lime putty ASTM C5. D. Sand Aggregates: 1. ASTM C144, except for joints less than ¼-inch, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 2. White Mortar Aggregates: Provide natural white sand or ground white stone for Portland cement-lime mortars. 3. Colored Mortar Aggregates: Provide ground marble, granite, or other sound stone as required to match the sample approved by Engineer for Portland cement-lime mortars. 4. Fine Aggregate for Grout: Sand, ASTM C404, Size No. 1. 5. Course Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404, Size No. 8 or Size No. 89. E. Ready-mixed Mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with requirements specified for mortar materials, combined with set-controlling admixtures to produce a ready-mixed mortar complying with ASTM C270 and C387. F. Water: Free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, or organic matter, and clean, fresh, and potable. 2.2

MORTAR MIXES

A. General: 1. Anti-freeze Admixture or Agents: Not allowed. 2. Calcium Chloride: Not allowed. B. Fire-Resistant Mortar: 1. Reference Standard: ANSI/UL BXUV U901 through BXUV U914. 2. Proportion: Use one part portland cement, three parts clean sand, and 15 percent hydrated lime (by cement volume). C. Mortar for All Other Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Table 2, except limit materials to those specified in this Section. Limit cement-tolime ratio by volume as follows: 1. Type N: a. Provide the following proportions by volume: 1) Portland Cement: One part. 2) Hydrated Lime or Lime Putty: Over 1/2 to 1-1/4, maximum. 00361334.0000

04 00 05-6

Masonry

3) Aggregate Ratio (measured in damp loose condition): Not less than 2-1/4 and not more than three times sum of volumes of cementitious materials. b. Properties: 1) Average Compressive Strength, ASTM C270: 750 psi. 2) Minimum Water Retention, ASTM C270: 75 percent. 3) Maximum Air Content, ASTM C270: 12 percent. D. Grout: 1. Fine Grout: a. Provide the following proportions by volume: 1) Portland Cement: One part. 2) Hydrated Lime or Lime Putty: Zero to 1/10 part. 3) Aggregate Ratio (Measured in a Damp Loose Condition): Sand shall be not less than 2.25 times and not more than three times sum of volumes of cement and lime. b. Mix grout to have a slump of ten inches plus or minus one-inch at placement. 2. Coarse Grout: a. Provide the following proportions by volume: 1) Portland Cement: One part. 2) Hydrated Lime or Lime Putty: Zero to 1/10 part. 3) Fine Aggregate Ratio (Measured in a Damp Loose Condition): Sand shall be not less than 2.25 times and not more than three times sum of volumes of cement and lime. 4) Coarse Aggregate Ratio: Not less than one and not more than two times sum of volumes of cement and lime. b. Mix grout to have slump of ten inches plus or minus one-inch, at placement. 2.3

CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. General: Concrete masonry units shall comply with requirements below. B. Hollow and Solid Load-bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C90, with minimum of 15 percent coal fly ash and 50 percent recycle aggregate as part of concrete mix. C. Hollow Non-load-bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C129 with minimum of 15 percent coal fly ash and 20 percent recycle aggregate as part of the concrete mix. D. Weight: 1. Provide lightweight concrete masonry units using aggregate complying with ASTM C331 producing dry net weight of not more than 105 pounds per cubic foot.

00361334.0000

04 00 05-7

Masonry

E. Size: Manufacturer’s standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 inches long by eight inches high by nominal width dimension shown on Drawings (15-5/8-inches by 7-5/8-inches actual). F. Special Shapes: Provide the following: 1. Lintels, bond beams, reinforcing units, and flush-end reinforcing units, interior and exterior corner shapes, solid jambs, sash block, coves, pre-molded control joint blocks, headers, and other special conditions. 2. Bullnose units for outside vertical corners including doors, windows, louvers and other openings, unless specifically shown by note indicating that this feature is not required. 3. End blocks at all locations where masonry walls abut concrete, or steel columns to facilitate installation of compressible filler, backer rod and sealant or fire-rated fire stop sealant systems, if required. G. Exposed Faces: Provide manufacturer’s standard color and texture. H. Exposed Faces: Provide manufacturer’s standard and custom colors and textures as specified for type of concrete masonry unit. I.

Provide two-core concrete masonry units.

J.

Provide exterior concrete masonry units with polystyrene foam insulation core inserts specified in Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation.

2.4

MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Continuous Horizontal Wire Reinforcing and Ties for Masonry: Provide the following unless otherwise shown: 1. General: Welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than ten feet, with matching corner “L” and intersection “T” units. Fabricate from cold-drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A82, with deformed continuous 3/16-inch gage side rods and plain 9 gage cross rods, crimped for cavity wall construction, with unit width of 1.5 to two inches less than thickness of wall or partition. All reinforcing and ties shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication with 1.5 ounces per square foot of zinc coating complying with ASTM A153, Class B-2, unless otherwise specified. 2. For single-wythe masonry, use units fabricated as follows: a. Truss-type fabricated with one horizontal rod beneath each unit masonry shell wall and continuous diagonal cross-rods spaced not more than 16 inches on centers. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) #120 Truss-Mesh by Hohmann and Barnard, Inc. 2) Series 300 Single Wythe System by Wire-Bond. 3) Or equal.

00361334.0000

04 00 05-8

Masonry

B. Anchoring Devices for Masonry: Provide the following, unless otherwise shown: 1. General: Provide the following: a. Cold rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A1008, hot-rolled steel sheet and strip complying with ASTM A1011, plates and bars complying with ASTM A36 and cold drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A82, all hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication with 1.5 ounces per square foot of zinc coating complying with ASTM A153. b. Rectangular, corrugated, one-inch wide ties, fabricated of 12-gage sheet metal, unless otherwise specified. c. Size tie lengths to extend to within one-inch of outside face of outer wythe face shell of opposite face of masonry or to maximum depth of 12 inches and between 1.5 inches to two inches less than width of masonry abutting webs and to a maximum depth of 12 inches abutting flanges of structural supports. Provide wire crimped with a vee-drip for use in cavity wall construction. d. Flexible Anchors: When masonry abuts structural walls or framework provide flexible anchors that allow horizontal and vertical movement of masonry, but provide lateral restraint. 2. Anchorage to Existing Cast-in-place Concrete Walls and Columns and Concrete Masonry: Provide the following for lateral restraint of unit masonry walls abutting cast-in-place concrete members: a. Triangular-shaped ties, fitted with 12-gage attachments, fabricated of 3/16-inch diameter wire with parallel overlapping ends, spaced not more than 16 inches on centers. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 1) No. 345-BT Flexible Dovetail Ties by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2) Or equal. 3. Anchorage to Bottom of Concrete Beams and Slabs and Bottom of Steel Beam Flanges: Provide the following for lateral restraint of unit masonry walls at bottom of beam flanges and concrete slabs: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) #PTA - 420 - Partition Top Anchors with PTA Tube, by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2) #419 Pin Type with #421 Plastic Tube, by Heckmann Building Products. 3) Or equal. C. Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories: Provide the following, where shown: 1. Reinforcing Bars: a. Deformed carbon steel, ASTM A615, Grade 60 for bars No. 3 to No. 18 except as otherwise shown. 2. Rebar Positioners: Provide the following: a. Nine-gage reinforcing bar positioners that accommodate both horizontal and vertical reinforcing steel. 00361334.0000

04 00 05-9

Masonry

b. Fabricate units as required for the Work. c. Products and Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 1) #RB Series and #RB-Twin Series Rebar Positioners by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc 2) Rebar Positioners by Heckmann Building Products. 3) Or equal. 3. Masonry Control Joint Components: Provide the following: a. Pre-molded Control Joint Strips: Provide complete selection of solid extruded rubber and PVC strips with a Shore A durometer hardness of 80 to 90 complying with ASTM D2240 and D2287, designed to fit standard sash block and maintain lateral stability in masonry wall. Size and configuration shall be as shown. 1) Products and Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a) #RS8 - Control Joints by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. b) 352-12 Control Joints by Heckmann Building Products. c) Or equal. 2.5

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Allowable Tolerances: For concrete masonry units provide the following: 1. Face Dimension: Total variation in finished and installed face dimensions of units shall not exceed 1/16-inch between largest and smallest units in each lot of units of each size. 2. Distortion: Distortion of plane and edges of face of individual units, as installed, from corresponding plane surface and edges of prefaced concrete masonry unit, shall not exceed 1/16-inch. 3. Top and Bottom Surfaces: Ground to provide finish height of 7-5/8 inches plus or minus 1/16-inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION

A. Contractor and installer shall examine areas and conditions under which unit masonry construction Work will be installed, and notify Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Engineer. B.

Preconstruction Testing: Testing agency shall perform tests prior to installation of unit masonry. Special inspections testing procedures are specified in the referenced standards and the Contract Documents. 1. Mortar Test: For each mix required, per ASTM C780. 2. Grout Test: For each mix required, per ASTM C1019 and ACI 530.1. 3. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, per ASTM C 1314 and ACI 530.1.

00361334.0000

04 00 05-10

Masonry

4. Compressive strength of completed concrete unit masonry walls shall not be less than 1,500 psi as determined by methods specified in ACI 530.1. 3.2

PREPARATION

A. Measurement of Mortar Materials: 1. Cement and Hydrated Lime: Batched by the bag. 2. Sand: Batched by volume in suitably calibrated containers, provided proper allowance is made for bulking and consolidation and for weight per cubic foot, of contained moisture. 3. Proportion of Volumetric Mixtures: One 94-pound sack of Portland cement and one 50-pound sack of hydrated lime constitute nominal one cubic foot. 4. Shovel measurement: Not allowed. B. Mortar Mixing: 1. Type of Mixer: Machine mix in approved mixer in which quantity of water is accurately and uniformly controlled. 2. While mixer is in operation add approximately three-quarters of required water, half the sand, all the cement, then add remainder of sand. 3. Allow batch to mix briefly then add water in small quantities until satisfactory workability is obtained. 4. Mix for at least five minutes after all materials have been added. 5. Hydrated Lime for Mortar Requiring Lime Content: Use dry-mix method. Turn over materials for each batch together until even color of mixed, dry materials indicates that cementitious material has been thoroughly distributed throughout mass, then add water to obtain required plasticity. 6. Lime putty, if approved for use, shall be prepared in accordance with ASTM C5. 7. Mixer drum shall be completely emptied before recharging next batch. 8. Re-tempering of mortar is not allowed. C. Wetting of Masonry Units: 1. Concrete Masonry Units: Except for absorbent units specified to be wetted, lay masonry units dry. Do not wet concrete masonry units. D. Cleaning Reinforcement: Before being placed, remove loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice, and other coatings except galvanizing from reinforcement. Do not use reinforcing bars with kinks or bends not shown on Drawings or approved Shop Drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section. 3.3

INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build single-wythe walls to actual thickness of masonry units using units of nominal thickness shown or specified. 00361334.0000

04 00 05-11

Masonry

B. Leave openings for equipment, piping, ducts, and other items to be installed subsequent to start of masonry Work. After installing said items, complete unit masonry Work to match Work immediately adjacent to openings. C. Cut masonry units using wet cutting, motor driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining Work neatly. Use full size units without cutting wherever possible. 3.4

LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. General: 1. Mortar Types: Unless otherwise indicated, use mortar as specified and as follows: a. For all Work, use type N mortar. b. Use coarse grout fill for structural requirements and for grouting reinforcing steel in unit masonry construction Work. c. Do not use mortar that has begun to set or if more than 30 minutes have elapsed since initial mixing. Re-temper mortar during the 30minute period only as required to restore workability. 2. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface pattern bond with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, masonry control joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less than half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. 3. Lay up walls plumb and true to comply with specified tolerances, with courses level, accurately spaced, and coordinated with other Work. 4. Pattern Bond Unit Masonry: a. Lay all unit masonry Work visible in the finished Work in running bond with vertical joints in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Avoid using less than full-size units. b. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. c. Do not use units with less than eight-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. d. Interlock alternate courses at corners. 5. Color of Concrete Unit Masonry: a. Lay all concrete unit masonry of natural color. b. Lay all concrete unit masonry of colors as shown. B. Construction Tolerances: 1. Variation from Plumb: For lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises, do not exceed 1/4-inch in 10 feet, or 3/8-inch in a story height (20 feet maximum), nor two-inch in 40 feet or more. Except for external corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4-inch in any story or 20 feet maximum, nor two-inch in 40 feet or more.

00361334.0000

04 00 05-12

Masonry

2. Variation from Level: For lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4inch in any bay or 20 feet maximum, nor 3/4-inch in 40 feet or more. 3. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown and related portion of columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed two-inch in any bay or 20 feet maximum, nor 3/4-inch in 40 feet or more. 4. Variation in Cross-sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4-inch nor plus two-inch. C. Mortar Bedding and Jointing: 1. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joint; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. 2. Lay hollow masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. a. Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain pattern bond alignment. Lay walls with 3/8-inch joints. 3. Cut joints flush for masonry walls that are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials, except paint, unless otherwise shown. 4. Tool exposed joints, when mortar is "thumbprint" hard, slightly concave. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of calking or sealants where required. 5. Concave-tool exterior joints below grade. 6. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rake back half-unit masonry length in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly, if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying new masonry. E. Built-in Work: 1. As the Work progresses, build in items shown, specified or required by others. Fill cores in one block width solidly with masonry around built-in items. 2. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place layer of cavity fill mesh in joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. F. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing: 1. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as specified. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with minimum cover of 5/8-inch on exterior side of walls and 1/2-inch at 00361334.0000

04 00 05-13

Masonry

2. 3.

4.

5.

6. 7.

other locations. Lap reinforcement minimum of six inches at ends of units. Do not bridge masonry control joints with reinforcing. Reinforce all masonry walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing unless specifically noted or specified to be omitted. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated “L” and “T” sections. Cut and bend units in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Space continuous horizontal reinforcing as follows: a. Space reinforcing at 16 inches on centers vertically, unless otherwise shown. Reinforce masonry openings greater than 12 inches wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing placed in two horizontal joints approximately eight inches apart, immediately above lintel and immediately below sill. Extend reinforcing minimum of 2.0 feet beyond jambs of opening. In addition to wall reinforcing, provide additional reinforcing at openings as required to comply with the Contract Documents. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or masonry control joints are shown at juncture, provide same type of bonding specified for structural bonding between wythes and space as follows: a. Provide masonry bond in alternate courses. b. Provide individual metal ties at not more than 2.0 feet on centers vertically, unless shown at closer spacing. c. Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcing using prefabricated “T” and “L” units.

G. Non Load Bearing Interior Partitions: 1. Build full height of story to underside of structure above, unless otherwise shown. 2. Tie non load bearing partitions and non load bearing interior wythe of cavity walls at top and sides with masonry anchors at terminations. Build in end blocks as shown and specified to facilitate placing compressible filler. Insert compressible filler in all horizontal and vertical joints where non load bearing masonry and non load bearing interior wythe of cavity walls terminate. Insert filler 3/4inches from both faces of masonry. Use filler four times as thick as the widest part of joint. Thickness of filler shall be minimum of 1.5 times the compressed thickness. Compress filler to less than thickness of joint and insert. At splices, overlap strips by three inches and compress ends to form tight joint. Finish with backer rod and sealant. 3. At terminations of non load bearing masonry walls and non load bearing interior wythe of cavity walls requiring fire rating, use firesafing insulation specified in Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation. Build in end blocks to facilitate placing firesafing insulation. Insert insulation in continuous vaportight solid blanket to 3/4 inches from both faces of masonry. Finish with backer rod and sealant. H. Structural Reinforced Unit Masonry Construction: 00361334.0000

04 00 05-14

Masonry

1. Comply with the requirements of ACI 530.1 and applicable codes. I.

Grouting Structural Reinforced Unit Masonry Construction: 1. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1 and applicable codes.

J.

Anchoring Masonry Work: 1. Provide anchoring devices of type specified. If not shown or specified, provide standard type for facing and back up involved in compliance with requirements of Laws and Regulations. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces such members to comply with the following: a. Provide an open space not less than 1/2-inch or more than oneinch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise shown. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. b. Anchor masonry to cast-in-place concrete members using triangular ties. c. Space anchors as shown, but not more than 2.0 feet on center vertically and 3.0 feet on center horizontally. d. Provide end blocks where masonry abuts structural support to facilitate installation of compressible filler, firesafing insulation, backer rod, and sealant. 3. Anchor single wythe masonry veneer to backing with metal ties as follows: a. Anchor veneer to structural members with metal anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. Provide anchors with flexible tie section, unless otherwise shown.

K. Masonry Control Joints: 1. Provide vertical control and expansion joints in masonry where shown. Build in related items as unit masonry Work progresses. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of compressible filler, calking and sealants. 2. Masonry Control and Expansion Joints Items: Build in sash block and premolded control joint strips as the Work progresses. L. Lintels and Bond Beams: 1. Provide masonry lintels and bond beams where openings of 16 inches or more are shown. Provide formed in place masonry lintels and bond beams. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels and bond beams. a. Unless otherwise shown, provide one horizontal number six deformed reinforcing bar for each 4 inches of wall thickness. b. For hollow masonry unit walls, use specially formed “U”-shaped lintel and bond beam units with reinforcing bars placed as shown, filled with coarse grout as specified. 2. Provide minimum bearing at each jamb of eight inches for all openings.

00361334.0000

04 00 05-15

Masonry

3. On concrete unit masonry walls where pattern bond remains visually exposed, increase minimum bearing of masonry lintels to maintain joint pattern of wall and install to be indistinguishable from surrounding masonry. 3.5

REPAIR, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent Work to provide neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of sealant compounds. C. Cleaning Exposed, Unglazed Masonry Surfaces: 1. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean sample wall area of approximately 20 square feet as described below. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of sample cleaning before proceeding to clean remainder of masonry Work. a. Dry-clean to remove large particles of mortar using wood paddles and scrappers. Use chisel or wire brush if required. b. Presoak wall by saturating with water and flush off loose mortar and dirt. c. Comply with requirements and recommendations for “Cleaning Clay Products Masonry” of Technical Notes on Brick and Tile Construction by Brick Industry Association for type of masonry and conditions involved in the Work. d. Apply cleaners per manufacturer’s instructions. e. Protect other Work from cleaning solutions and cleaning operations. 2. Do not use acid cleaning agent, abrasive tools or powders, or metal cleaning tools or wire brushes, unless specifically recommended in writing by manufacturer. D. Protection: 1. Protect unit masonry construction Work from deterioration, discoloration or damage during subsequent construction operations. 3.6

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor shall hire independent testing laboratory acceptable to Engineer to take samples and conduct tests to evaluate air entrainment, water retention, and compliance of products with Contract Documents, and to determine compressive strength of mortar and grout. Conduct tests in

00361334.0000

04 00 05-16

Masonry

accordance with ASTM C91. Provide tests results to Engineer prior to commencement of Work. B. After initial test, Engineer will require maximum of five additional tests to be conducted at his discretion. C. Test and inspect all non-load-bearing concrete unit masonry during construction, meeting requirements of Level 2 Quality Assurance as defined by ACI 530.1. D. Test and inspect all load-bearing concrete unit masonry during construction, meeting the requirements of Level 3 Quality Assurance as defined by ACI 530.1. E. Masonry walls that do not meet requirements of Special Inspections shall be repaired in manner acceptable to Engineer at no expense to Owner.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

04 00 05-17

Masonry

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 05 05 33 ANCHOR SYSTEMS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install anchor systems. 2. This Section includes all anchor systems required for the Work, but not specified under other Sections.

B.

Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before anchor systems Work.

1.2 A.

REFERENCES Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 350, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures. 3. ACI 355.2, Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete. 4. ANSI B212.15, Cutting Tools - Carbide-tipped Masonry Drills And Blanks For Carbide-tipped Masonry Drills. 5. ANSI/MSS SP-58, Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation. 6. ASTM A194/A194M, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. 7. ASTM A276, Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 8. ASTM A493, Specification for Stainless Steel Wire and Wire Rods for Cold Heading and Cold Forging. 9. ASTM A563, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 10. ASTM A1011/A1011M, Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, HotRolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength. 11. ASTM B633, Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. 12. ASTM C307, Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings.

00361334.000

05 05 33-1

Anchor Systems

13. ASTM C881/C881M, Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 14. ASTM D695, Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. 15. ASTM D790, Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 16. ASTM E329, Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection. 17. ASTM E488, Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements. 18. ASTM F593, Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 19. ASTM F594, Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 20. ASTM F1554, Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55 and 105ksi Yield Strength. 21. FS A-A-1922A, Shield, Expansion (Caulking Anchors, Single Lead). 22. FS A-A-1923A, Concrete Expansion Anchors. 23. FS A-A-1925A, Shield, Expansion (Nail Anchors). 24. FS A-A-55614, Shield, Expansion (non-drilling expansion anchors). 25. ICC-ES AC01, Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements. 26. ICC-ES AC58, Acceptance Criteria for Adhesive Anchors in Masonry Elements. 27. ICC-ES AC60, Acceptance Criteria for Anchors in Unreinforced Masonry Elements. 28. ICC-ES AC193, Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements. 29. ICC-ES AC308, Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements. 30. ISO 3506-1, Mechanical Properties of Corrosion-Resistant Stainless Steel Fasteners -- Part 1: Bolts, Screws and Studs. 31. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects. 1.3 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Qualifications: 1. Testing Laboratory: Shall comply with ASTM E329 and shall be experienced in tension testing of post-installed anchoring systems. 2. Post-installed Anchor Installer: a. Mechanical Anchors: Installer shall be experienced and trained by post-installed anchor system manufacturer in proper installation of manufacturer’s products. Product installation training by distributors or manufacturer’s representatives is unacceptable unless the person furnishing the training is qualified as a trainer by the anchor manufacturer.

00361334.000

05 05 33-2

Anchor Systems

b.

1.4

Adhesive Anchors: Installation shall be performed by personnel certified under an applicable certification program. Certification shall include written and performance tests in accordance with the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchors Installer Certification Program, or equivalent. Description of equivalent programs shall be submitted for ENGINEER’s approval and acceptance by the building official having jurisdiction.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Listing of all anchor systems products intended for use in the Work including product type, intended location in the Project, and embedded lengths. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer’s specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, acceptable base material conditions, acceptable drilling methods, and acceptable bored hole conditions. b. When required by ENGINEER, copies of valid ICC ES reports that presents load-carrying capacities and installation requirements for anchor systems.

B.

Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. For each type of anchor bolt or threaded rod, submit copies of laboratory test reports and other data required to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. 1) Reports shall demonstrate compliance with ductile steel element definition of ACI 350, Appendix D, Section D.1. b. Post-installed anchor system manufacturer’s certification that installer received training in the proper installation of manufacturer’s products required for the Work. c. For each adhesive anchor installer, submit ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification. 2. Manufacturer’s Instructions: a. Installation instructions for each anchor system product proposed for use, including bore hole cleaning procedures and adhesive injection, cure and gel time tables, and temperature ranges (storage, installation and in-service). 3. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit results of field quality control testing and inspections performed by testing laboratory.

00361334.000

05 05 33-3

Anchor Systems

1.5 A.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Storage and Protection: 1. Keep materials dry during delivery and storage. 2. Store adhesive materials within manufacturer’s recommended storage temperature range. 3. Protect anchor systems from damage at the Site. Protect products from corrosion and deterioration.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A.

General: 1. At locations where conditions dictate that Work specified in other Sections is to be of corrosion resistant materials, provide associated anchor systems of stainless steel materials, unless other corrosionresistant anchor system material is specified. Provide anchor systems of stainless steel materials where stainless steel materials are required in the Contract Documents. 2. Stainless Steel Nuts: a. For anchor bolts and adhesive anchors, provide ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8S (Nitronic 60) stainless steel nuts for stainless steel anchors used for anchoring equipment, gates, and weirs, and other locations, if any, where the attachment will require future removal for operation or maintenance. Provide lock washer or double nuts on each anchorage device provided for equipment, as required by equipment manufacturer. b. For other locations, provide for each anchorage device a nut as specified or as required by anchor manufacturer. When ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8S (Nitronic 60) nuts are not required for anchor bolts and adhesive anchors as specified in this Section, provide anti-seizing compound where stainless steel rods are used with stainless steel nuts of the same type. 3. Materials that can contact potable water or water that will be treated to become potable shall be listed in NSF/ANSI 61.

B.

Design Criteria 1. Size, Length, and Load-carrying Capacity: Comply with the Contract Documents. When size, length or load-carrying capacity of anchor system is not otherwise shown or indicated, provide the following: a. Anchor Bolts: Provide size, length, and capacity required to carry design load based on values and requirements of Paragraph 3.2.A of this Section. For conditions outside limits of critical edge distance and spacing in Paragraph 3.2.A of this Section, minimum anchor bolt embedment as shown or

00361334.000

05 05 33-4

Anchor Systems

2.

indicated in Paragraph 3.2.A of this Section apply and capacity shall be based on requirements of Laws and Regulations, including applicable building codes. b. Adhesive Anchors, Expansion Anchors, or Concrete Inserts: Provide size, length, type, and capacity required to carry design load. Anchor capacity shall be based on the procedures required by the building code in effect at the Site. Where Evaluation Service Reports issued by the ICC Evaluation Service are required in this Section, anchor capacities shall be based on design procedure required in the applicable ICC Evaluation Service Report. 1) General: Determine capacity considering reductions due to installation and inspection procedures, embedment length, strength of base fastening materials, spacing, and edge distance, as indicated in the manufacturer’s design guidelines. For capacity determination, concrete shall be assumed to be in the cracked condition, unless calculations demonstrate that the anchor system will be installed in an area that is not expected to crack under any and all conditions of design loading. 2) Concrete Adhesive Anchors: Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or approved by ENGINEER, provide minimum embedment depth of the greater of the following: required to develop tensile strength of anchor, or a minimum embedment of 10 anchor diameters; and minimum anchor spacing and edge distance of 12 anchor diameters. 3) Concrete Masonry Adhesive Anchors: Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or approved by ENGINEER, provide minimum anchor spacing and edge distance as indicated in anchor manufacturer’s instructions. 4) Concrete Expansion Anchors: Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or approved by ENGINEER, provide minimum embedment depth of six anchor diameters, and minimum anchor spacing and edge distance of seven anchor diameters. 5) Concrete Masonry Expansion Anchors: Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or approved by ENGINEER, provide minimum anchor spacing and edge distance as indicated in anchor manufacturer’s instructions. 6) Concrete Undercut Anchors: Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or approved by ENGINEER, provide minimum anchor spacing and edge distance as tabulated in anchor manufacturer’s instructions. Design Loads. Comply with the Contract Documents. When design load of supported material, equipment, or system is not otherwise shown or indicated, provide the following:

00361334.000

05 05 33-5

Anchor Systems

a.

b.

c.

d.

Equipment Anchors: Use design load recommended by equipment manufacturer. When equipment can be filled with fluid, use loads that incorporate equipment load and load imposed by fluid. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Use full weight of pipe, and fluid contained in pipe that are tributary to the support plus the full weight of valves and accessories located between the hanger or support being anchored and the next hanger or support. Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems, and HVAC, Plumbing, and Fire Suppression Systems and Piping: Use the full weight of supported system that is tributary to the support plus the full weight of accessories located between the hanger or support being anchored and the next hanger or support. When piping or equipment is to be filled with fluid, anchor systems shall be sized to support such loads in addition to the weight of the equipment, piping, or system, as applicable. Delegated Design: When anchor systems are used for supporting materials, equipment, or systems delegated to a design professional retained by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, or Supplier, provide anchor system suitable for loads indicated in delegated design documents and consistent with the design intent expressed in the Contract Documents.

C. Application: 1. Anchor Bolts: a. Where anchor bolt is shown or indicated, use cast-in-place anchor bolt unless another anchor type is approved by ENGINEER. b. Provide anchor bolts as shown or indicated, or as required to secure structural element to appropriate anchor surface. 2. Concrete Adhesive Anchors: a. Use where adhesive anchors are shown or indicated for installation in concrete. b. Suitable for use where subject to vibration. c. Suitable for use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. d. Suitable for use in submerged, intermittently submerged, or buried locations. e. Do not use in overhead applications, unless otherwise shown or approved by ENGINEER. f. Do not use for pipe hangers, unless otherwise shown or approved by ENGINEER. 3. Concrete Masonry Adhesive Anchors: a. Use where adhesive anchors are shown or indicated for installation in grout-filled or hollow masonry units. b. Suitable for use where subject to vibration.

00361334.000

05 05 33-6

Anchor Systems

c.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Suitable for use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. d. Do not use for pipe hangers, unless otherwise shown or approved by ENGINEER. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: a. Use where expansion anchors are shown or indicated for installation in concrete. b. Do not use where subject to vibration. c. Do not use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. d. Do not use in submerged, intermittently submerged, or buried locations. e. Suitable for use in overhead applications. Grout-filled Concrete Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: a. Use where expansion anchors are shown or indicated for installation on the interior face of grout-filled unit masonry. b. Do not use where subject to vibration. c. Do not use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. Hollow Concrete Masonry Sleeve Expansion Anchors: a. Use where expansion anchors are shown or indicated for installation in hollow concrete unit masonry or solid brick. b. Do not use for attaching safety-related systems, such as piping conveying hazardous or potentially hazardous materials, or fire suppression systems. c. Do not use where subject to vibration. d. Do not use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. Drop-in Expansion Anchors: a. Use drop-in expansion anchors installed in concrete where lightduty anchors are required to support piping or conduit two-inch diameter or smaller. b. Do not use for attaching safety-related systems, such as piping conveying hazardous or potentially hazardous materials, or fire suppression systems. c. Do not use where subject to vibration. d. Do not use at submerged, intermittently submerged, or buried locations. e. Do not use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. f. Suitable for use in overhead applications. Concrete Undercut Anchors: a. Use where undercut anchors are shown or indicated for installation in concrete. b. Suitable for use where subject to vibration. c. Do not use in submerged, intermittently submerged, or buried locations. d. Do not use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. e. Suitable for use in overhead applications. Concrete Inserts: a. Use only where shown or indicated in the Contract Documents.

00361334.000

05 05 33-7

Anchor Systems

b.

Allowed for use to support pipe hangers and pipe supports for pipe size and loading recommended by the concrete insert manufacturer. 10. Drive-In Expansion Anchors: a. Use drive-in expansion anchors installed in concrete, precast concrete, grouted masonry units, or brick, where light-duty anchors are required to support piping or conduit one-inch diameter and smaller. b. Do not use for attaching safety-related systems, such as piping conveying hazardous or potentially hazardous materials, or fire suppression systems. c. Do not use in overhead applications. 11. For Use in Precast Concrete Planks: a. To support piping or conduit six-inch diameter and smaller, use low-profile drop-in anchors, hollow concrete masonry adhesive anchors, or through-bolts. b. For piping greater than six-inch diameter, or to support safetyrelated systems, use through-bolts. Each through-bolt shall consist of threaded rod, nuts, washers, and bearing plate. 2.2

MATERIALS

A.

Anchor Bolts: 1. Interior Dry Non-corrosive Locations: Provide straight threaded carbon steel rods complying with ASTM F1554, Grade 55, with heavy hex nuts complying with ASTM A563 Grade55, unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings. Hooked anchor bolts are unacceptable. 2. Exterior, Buried, Submerged Locations, or When Exposed to Wastewater: Provide stainless steel straight threaded rods complying with ASTM F593, AISI Type 316, Condition A, with ASTM F594, AISI Type 316, stainless steel nuts. Provide ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8S (Nitronic 60) stainless steel nuts where required. Other AISI types may be used when approved by ENGINEER. Hooked bolts are unacceptable. 3. Equipment: Provide anchor bolts complying with material requirements of this Section and equipment manufacturer’s requirements relative to size, embedment length, and anchor bolt projection. Anchor bolts shall be straight threaded rods with washers and nuts as specified in this Section. Hooked bolts are unacceptable. 4. Anchoring of Structural Elements: Provide anchor bolts of size, material, and strength shown or indicated in the Contract Documents.

B.

Concrete Adhesive Anchors: 1. General:

00361334.000

05 05 33-8

Anchor Systems

a.

2.

3.

Adhesive anchors shall consist of threaded rods anchored into hardened concrete using an adhesive system. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. HIT-RE 500-V3 Injection Epoxy Adhesive Anchoring System, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. HIT-HY 200-A and HIT-HY 200-R Adhesive Anchoring System, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc c. SET-XP Adhesive anchoring system, by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. d. Or equal. Adhesive: a. Adhesive system shall use two-component adhesive mix. b. Adhesives shall have a current evaluation report by ICC Evaluation Service for use in both cracked and uncracked concrete with seismic recognition for SDC A through F as tested and assessed in accordance with ICC-ES AC308, which incorporates the requirements of ACI 355.4-11 d. Adhesives shall have minimum bond strength and minimum design bond strength in accordance with Table 05 05 33-A: TABLE 05 05 33-A: ADHESIVE BOND STRENGTH 1,2

Rod Diameter 1/2-inch 5/8-inch 3/4-inch 7/8inch 1-inch 1.25-inch

Uncracked Concrete 1670 1670 1670 1525 1360 1070

Bond Strength (psi) Cracked Dowel Concrete Size 880 #4 750 #5 665 #6 610 #7 595 #8 #9 595 #10

Uncracked Concrete 1500 1460 1415 1370 1330 1560 1240

Cracked Concrete 1080 1090 1015 835 760 850 475

Table Notes: 1. Bond strengths listed for hammer-drilled, dry hole. 2. Bond strengths listed for maximum short term concrete temperature of 130 degrees F and maximum long term concrete temperature of 110 degrees F. 4.

Anchor: a. Provide continuously-threaded, AISI Type 316 stainless steel adhesive anchor rod. Threaded rods shall comply with the concrete adhesive anchor manufacturer’s specifications as included in the ICC Service Evaluation Report for the anchor submitted. Nuts shall have specified proof load stresses equal to or greater than the minimum tensile strength of the stainless steel threaded rod used. Provide ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8S (Nitronic 60) stainless steel nuts where required.

00361334.000

05 05 33-9

Anchor Systems

C. Concrete Masonry Adhesive Anchors: 1. General: a. Grout-filled concrete masonry adhesive anchors shall consist of threaded rods anchored into grout-filled concrete block masonry using an adhesive system. b. Hollow concrete masonry adhesive anchors shall consist of threaded rods with a cylindrical mesh steel or plastic screen tube anchored into hollow concrete block masonry using an adhesive system. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. HIT-HY 70 Hybrid Adhesive Anchor System, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. Acrylic-Tie Adhesive, by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. c. Or equal. 3. Adhesive: a. Adhesive system shall use two-component adhesive mix. b. Hybrid adhesives shall comply with the following: 1) ASTM D695 compressive yield strength greater than 7,200 psi on a seven-day cure. c. Adhesives shall have current ICC Evaluation Service Report for use in grout-filled concrete masonry, tested and assessed in accordance with ICC-ES AC 58 and ICC-ES AC 60. 4. Anchor: a. Provide stainless steel adhesive anchor rod complying with ASTM F593, AISI Type 316, Condition CW, with ASTM F594, AISI Type 316 stainless steel nuts. Provide ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8S (Nitronic 60) stainless steel nuts where required. 5. Mesh Screen Tube (for hollow masonry applications): a. Provide with mesh size, length, and diameter as specified by adhesive anchor manufacturer. D. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: 1. General: a. Concrete wedge expansion anchors shall consist of stud, wedge, nut, and washer. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Kwik Bolt TZ Wedge Anchor, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. Strong Bolt 2 Wedge Anchor, by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. c. Or equal. 3. Anchors shall comply with physical requirements of FS A-A-1923A, Type 4. Provide concrete wedge expansion anchors suitable for use in cracked and uncracked concrete in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350, Appendix D. Demonstrate suitability of cracked concrete wedge anchors in accordance with ACI 355.2 prequalification tests. 00361334.000

05 05 33-10

Anchor Systems

4.

5.

6.

Interior Dry Non-corrosive Locations: Provide carbon steel anchors complete with nuts and washers, zinc plated, in accordance with ASTM B633. Other Locations: Provide expansion anchors complete with nuts and washers, AISI Type 304 stainless steel anchor body, in accordance with ASTM A276 or ASTM A493. Concrete wedge expansion anchors shall have a current ICC Evaluation Service Report for use in both cracked and uncracked concrete with seismic recognition in seismic design Categories A through F when tested and assessed in accordance with ICC-ES AC193.

E.

Grout-filled Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: 1. General: a. Grout-filled masonry wedge expansion anchors shall each consist of stud, wedge, nut, and washer. 2. Product and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Kwik-Bolt 3 Expansion Anchors, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. Wedge-All Wedge Anchors, by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. c. Or equal. 3. Anchors shall comply with physical requirements of FS A-A-1923A, Type 4. Anchors shall be non-bottom bearing type with single-piece steel expansion clip providing 360-degree contact with base material and shall not require oversized holes for installation. 4. Provide carbon steel anchors complete with nuts and washers, zinc plated, in accordance with ASTM B633. 5. Grout-filled masonry wedge expansion anchors shall have a current ICC Evaluation Service report for use in fully-grouted concrete masonry construction when tested and assessed in accordance with ICC-ES AC01.

F.

Hollow Concrete Masonry Sleeve Expansion Anchors: 1. General: a. Sleeve expansion anchors shall each consist of an externally threaded stud with full length expanding sleeve. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. HLC Sleeve Anchors, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. Dynabolt Sleeve Anchors, by ITW Red Head. c. Or equal. 3. Anchors shall comply with physical requirements of FS A-A-1922A. Anchors shall be non-bottom bearing type with single-piece steel expansion sleeve providing 360-degree contact with base material, and shall not require oversized holes for installation.

00361334.000

05 05 33-11

Anchor Systems

4.

5.

Interior Dry Non-corrosive Locations: Provide carbon steel anchors complete with nuts and washers, zinc plated, in accordance with ASTM B633. Other Locations: Provide expansion anchors complete with nuts and washers, Type 304 stainless steel, in accordance with ASTM A276 or ASTM A493.

G. Drop-in Expansion Anchors: 1. General: a. Drop-in expansion anchors shall each consist of an internally threaded, deformation-controlled expansion anchor with preassembled expander plug. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. HDI Drop-In Anchors, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. Drop-In Anchor, by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. c. Or equal. 3. Provide carbon steel anchors complete with nuts and washers, zinc plated, in accordance with ASTM B633, complying with physical requirements of FS A-A-55614, Type I. Anchors shall be flush or shell type. Provide low-profile anchors for use in precast concrete planks. H. Concrete Undercut Anchors: 1. General: a. Each concrete undercut anchor shall consist of threaded stud, thick-walled expansion sleeve, expander coupler, and nut and washer. Anchors shall be pre-set type or through-set type, as shown on the Drawings. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. HDA Undercut Anchor, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. DUC Ductile Undercut Anchor, by USP Structural Connectors. c. Or equal 3. Provide concrete undercut expansion anchors in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350, Appendix D. Demonstrate suitability of cracked concrete undercut anchors in accordance with ACI 355.2 prequalification tests. a. Anchor shall comply with ductility requirements of ACI 350 or ACI 318 Appendix D, Section D.3.3. 4. Installed anchor shall exhibit form fit between bearing elements and the undercut in the concrete. 5. Interior Dry Non-Corrosive Locations: Provide carbon steel anchors, complete with nuts and washers, zinc plated, in accordance with ASTM B633. 6. Other Locations: Provide stainless steel anchors, complete with nuts and washers, manufactured of AISI Type 316 stainless steel or

00361334.000

05 05 33-12

Anchor Systems

7.

materials complying with ISO 3506-1 and having corrosion resistance equivalent to AISI Type 316 stainless steel. Concrete undercut anchors shall have a current ICC Evaluation Service Report for use in both cracked and uncracked concrete for seismic recognition for seismic design Categories A through F when tested and assessed in accordance with ICC-ES AC193.

I.

Concrete Inserts: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Unistrut Corporation. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. Anvil International, Inc. d. Or equal. 2. Spot Concrete Inserts: a. Provide inserts recommended by insert manufacturer for required loading. Inserts shall comply with ANSI/MSS SP-58, malleable iron, Type 18. Spot inserts shall allow for lateral adjustment and have means for attachment to forms. Provide nuts compatible with insert and to suit threaded hanger rod sizes. 3. Continuous Concrete Inserts: a. Provide inserts recommended by insert manufacturer for required loading. Inserts shall be continuous type and shall be manufactured from minimum 12-gage cold-formed channel sections, complying with ASTM A1011/A1011M, stainless steel, Grade 33, complete with styrofoam inserts, end caps, and means for attaching to forms. Provide channel nuts compatible with insert suitable for threaded hanger rod sizes. 4. Provide inserts with plain finish.

J.

Drive-In Expansion Anchors: 1. General: a. Drive-In expansion anchors shall each consist of stainless steel drive pin and expanding alloy body. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Metal HIT Anchor, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. Zinc Nailon Anchor, by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. c. Or equal. 3. Provide Type 304 stainless steel drive pin with zinc alloy body. Anchor shall comply with physical requirements of FS A-A-1925A, Type 1.

K.

Unless approved by ENGINEER, do not use power-actuated fasteners or other types of bolts and fasteners not specified in this Section.

L.

Anti-Seizing Compound: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following:

00361334.000

05 05 33-13

Anchor Systems

a. Pure Nickel Never-Seez, by Bostik. b. Nickel-Graf, by Anti-Seize Technology. c. Or equal. Provide pure nickel anti-seizing compound.

2.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 A.

3.2 A.

INSPECTION Examine conditions under which materials will be installed and advise ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. INSTALLATION Anchor Bolts: 1. Provide anchor bolts as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or as required to secure structural element to the appropriate anchor surface. 2. Locate and accurately set anchor bolts using templates or other devices as required, prior to placing concrete. Wet setting of anchor bolts is unacceptable. 3. Protect threads and shank from damage during installation and subsequent construction operations. 4. Unless otherwise shown or approved by ENGINEER anchor bolts shall comply with Table 05 05 33-B:

00361334.000

Shear3 (lb)

Tension3 (lb)

Edge Distance and Spacing2

Tension3 (lb)

9 11.25 13.5 15.75 18 20.25

1,262 2,010 2,974 4,106 5,386 6,787

2,420 3,860 5,720 7,890 10,360 13,052

8.5 10.5 13 15 17 19

12.75 15.75 19.5 22.5 25.5 28.5

1,660 2,640 3,910 5,400 7,090 8,930

3,190 5,080 7,520 10,390 13,450 16,580

15

22.5

8,617

16,572

21

31.5

11,340 20,040

05 05 33-14

Minimum Embedment (inch) Minimum

Shear3, (lb)

1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 1/4

Edge Distance and Spacing2

6 7.5 9 10.5 12 13.5

Minimum Embedment (inch) Minimum

Bolt Diameter (inch)

TABLE 05 05 33-B: SINGLE ANCHOR ALLOWABLE LOADS ON ANCHOR BOLTS 1 F1554 Grade 36 F1554 F593 Type 316, Condition A Grade 55

Anchor Systems

Table Notes: 1. Table is based on ACI 318 and ACI 350, Appendix D, f’ c = 4000 psi. Table 05 05 33-B is not applicable to anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry. 2. Critical edge distance and spacing are indicated in the table. Capacity of anchor bolts for other combination of edge distances and spacing shall be evaluated in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350, Appendix D. 3. Values for shear and tension listed are not considered to act concurrently. Interaction of tension and shear will be evaluated by ENGINEER in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350, Appendix D. B.

Adhesive Anchors, Undercut Anchors, and Expansion Anchors – General: 1. Prior to drilling, locate existing reinforcing steel in vicinity of proposed holes. If reinforcing conflicts with proposed hole location, obtain ENGINEER’s approval of alternate hole locations to avoid drilling through or damaging existing reinforcing bars.

C. Adhesive Anchors: 1. Comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions and the following. 2. Drill holes to adhesive system manufacturer’s recommended drill bit diameter to the specified depth. Drill holes in hammering and rotation mode with carbide-tipped drill bits that comply with the tolerances of ANSI B212.15. Core-drilled holes are unacceptable. 3. Before setting adhesive anchor, hole shall be made free of dust and debris by method recommended by adhesive anchor system manufacturer. Hole shall be brushed with adhesive system manufacturer-approved brush and blown clean with clean, dry, oilfree compressed air to remove all dust and loose particles. Hole shall be dry as defined by adhesive system manufacturer. 4. Before injecting adhesive, obtain ENGINEER’s concurrence that hole is dry and free of oil and other contaminants. 5. Prior to injecting adhesive into the drilled hole, dispense, to a location appropriate for such waste, an initial amount of adhesive from the mixing nozzle, until adhesive is uniform color. 6. Inject adhesive into hole through injection system-mixing nozzle and necessary extension tubes, placed to bottom of hole. Discharge end shall be withdrawn as adhesive is placed but kept immersed to prevent formation of air pockets. Fill hole to depth that ensures that excess material is expelled from hole during anchor placement. 7. Twist anchors during insertion into partially-filled hole to guarantee full wetting of rod surface with adhesive. Insert rod slowly to avoid developing air pockets. 8. Provide adequate curing in accordance to adhesive system manufacturer’s requirements prior to continuing with adjoining Work that could place load on installed adhesive anchors. Do not begin 00361334.000

05 05 33-15

Anchor Systems

9.

adjoining Work until adhesive anchors are successfully tested or when allowed by ENGINEER. Limitations: a. At time of anchor installation, concrete shall have compressive strength (f’c) of not less than 2,500 psi. b. At time of anchor installation, concrete shall have age of not less than 21 days. c. Installation Temperature: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation temperature requirements. Provide temporary protection and other measures, such as heated enclosures, necessary to ensure that base material temperature complies with anchor systems manufacturer’s requirements during installation and curing of adhesive anchor system. d. Oversized Holes: Advise ENGINEER immediately if size of drilled hole is larger than recommended by anchor system manufacturer. Cost of corrective measures, including but not limited to redesign of anchors due to decreased anchor capacities, shall be paid by CONTRACTOR. e. Embedment depths shall be based on installation in normalweight concrete with compressive strength of 2,500 psi when embedded in existing concrete, and 4,000 psi when embedded in new concrete.

D. Expansion Anchors: 1. Comply with expansion anchor manufacturer’s written installation instructions and the following: 2. Drill holes using anchor system manufacturer’s recommended drill bit diameter and to the specified depth. Drill holes in hammering and rotation mode with carbide-tipped drill bits complying with tolerances of ANSI B212.15. Core drilled holes are unacceptable. 3. Before installing anchor, hole shall be made free of dust and debris by method recommended by anchor system manufacturer. Hole shall be brushed with anchor system manufacturer-approved brush and blown clean with clean, dry, oil-free compressed air to remove all dust and loose particles. 4. Before installing anchor, obtain ENGINEER’s concurrence that hole is dry and free of oil and other contaminants. 5. Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Drive anchors not less than four threads below surface of the attachment. Set anchors to anchor manufacturer’s recommended torque using a torque wrench. E.

Concrete Undercut Anchors: 1. Comply with undercut anchor manufacturer’s written installation instructions and the following. 2. Protect threads from damage during anchor installation.

00361334.000

05 05 33-16

Anchor Systems

3. 4.

5. 6. 7. 8.

F.

Drill hole to anchor manufacturer’s specified depth and diameter using a drill bit matched to the specific anchor. Before setting the undercut anchor, hole shall be free of dust and debris using method recommended by undercut anchor system manufacturer. Hole shall be blown clean with clean, dry, oil-free compressed air to remove all dust and loose particles. Insert the anchor by hand until anchor reaches bottom of hole. Set anchor in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions using anchor manufacturer’s specified setting tool. Verify that the setting mark is visible on the threaded rod above the sleeve. Anchor shall be set to manufacturer’s recommended torque, using a torque wrench.

Concrete Inserts: 1. Comply with concrete insert manufacturer’s installation instructions. 2. Inserts shall be flush with slab bottom surface. 3. Protect embedded items from damage during concrete placing. Ensure that embedded items are securely fastened to prevent movement during concrete placing, and ensure that embedded items do fill with concrete during concrete placing. 4. Inserts intended for piping greater than four-inch diameter shall be provided with hooked rods attached to concrete reinforcing.

G. Anti-Seizing Compound: 1. Provide anti-seizing compound in accordance with anti-seizing compound manufacturer’s installation instructions, at locations indicated in Paragraph 2.1.B of this Section. 2. Do not use anti-seizing compound at locations where anchor bolt or adhesive anchor will contact potable water or water that will be treated to become potable. 3.3 A.

3.4

CLEANING After embedding concrete is placed, remove protection and clean bolts and inserts. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1.

Furnish services of independent testing laboratory to perform field quality tensile testing of production adhesive anchors at the Site, unless otherwise specified. a. Testing shall comply with ASTM E488. b. Test at least ten percent of all types of adhesive anchors. If one or more adhesive anchors fail the test, CONTRACTOR shall pay cost of testing, or at ENGINEER’s option CONTRACTOR may arrange for testing paid by CONTRACTOR, for all adhesive

00361334.000

05 05 33-17

Anchor Systems

3. 4.

5.

B.

anchors of same diameter and type installed on the same day as the failed anchor. If anchors installed on the same day as the failed anchor also fail the test, ENGINEER may require retesting of all anchors of the same diameter and type installed in the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for retesting costs. c. ENGINEER will direct which adhesive anchors are to be tested and indicate test load to be used d. Apply test loads with hydraulic ram. e. Displacement of post-installed anchors shall not exceed D/10, where D is nominal diameter of anchor being tested. 1) Load each test anchor to failure. 2) Testing shall comply with ASTM E488. 3) Apply test loads with hydraulic ram. d. Anchors that fail to reach the specified test load shall be considered as not passing the test and shall be re-tested at no additional cost to OWNER. e. Testing agency shall submit test results to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER within 24 hours of completion of test. Correct defective Work by removing and replacing or correcting, as directed by ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall pay for all corrections and subsequent testing required to confirm competence in the installation of post-installed mechanical anchors. Testing agency shall submit test results to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER within 24 hours of completion of test.

Manufacturer’s Services: 1. Provide at the Site services of qualified adhesive manufacturer’s representative during initial installation of adhesive anchor systems to train CONTRACTOR’s personnel in proper installation procedures. Manufacturer’s representative shall observe to confirm that installer demonstrates proper installation procedures for adhesive anchors and adhesive material.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.000

05 05 33-18

Anchor Systems

SECTION 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A.

Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish miscellaneous metal fabrications including surface preparation and shop priming. 2. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in miscellaneous metal fabrications to accommodate the Work under this and other Sections, and attaching to miscellaneous metal fabrications all items such as sleeves, bands, studs, fasteners, and all items required for which provision is not specifically included under other Sections.

B.

Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the Work to be installed with, or attached to miscellaneous metal fabrications Work. 2. Hot-dip Galvanizing: Coordinate with steel fabricator detailing for and fabrication of assemblies to be hot-dip galvanized, to minimize distortion during galvanizing process.

C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 60 00, Grouting. 2. Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. 1.2 A.

REFERENCES Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ANSI A14.3, Ladders – Fixed –Safety Requirements. 2. ANSI Z359.1, Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems, and Components. 3. ASTM A36/A36M, Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 4. ASTM A53/A53M, Specification for Pipe Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 5. ASTM A123/A123M, Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 6. ASTM A153/A153M, Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

00361334.0000

05 50 13-1

Miscellaneous Metal

7.

8. 9.

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 1.3

ASTM A240/A240M, Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. ASTM A320/A320M, Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service. ASTM A384/A384M-02 Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies. ASTM A500, Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. ASTM A572/A572M, Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel. ASTM A992/A992M, Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. ASTM B209, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. ASTM B211, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod and Wire. ASTM B221, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. ASTM B308/B308M, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles. ASTM B429, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code – Steel. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, Structural Welding Code – Aluminum. AWS D1.6, Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel. NAAMM, Metal Finishes Manual.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Qualifications: 1. Welding: a. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, D1.2/D1.2M, or D1.6, as applicable. b. When requested by ENGINEER, provide certification that each welder employed on or to be employed for the Work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. Ensure that all certifications are current.

B.

Regulatory Requirements: Conform to the following: 1. 29 CFR 1910, Occupational Health and Safety Standards.

1.4 A.

SUBMITTALS Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings:

00361334.0000

05 50 13-2

Miscellaneous Metal

a.

2.

B.

1.5 A.

Fabrication and erection details for assemblies of miscellaneous metal Work. Include plans, elevations, and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Include setting drawings and templates for locating and installing miscellaneous metal items and anchorage devices. Product Data: a. Copies of manufacturer’s specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details, and installation instructions for products to be used in miscellaneous metal Work.

Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Test and Evaluation Reports: a. Mill test report that indicate chemical and physical properties of each type of material, when requested by ENGINEER. 2. Qualifications Statements: a. Copies of welder’s certifications, when requested by ENGINEER. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver products to Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchorage materials to be embedded in other construction in ample time to prevent delaying the Work.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS

A.

Steel: 1. W-Shapes and WT-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M. 2. S-Shapes and Channels: ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50. 3. Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B. 4. Angles, Plates, Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 5. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B.

B.

Aluminum: 1. Aluminum Shapes: ASTM B308/B308M, Alloy 6061-T6, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6061-T6. 2. Aluminum Tubes and Pipes: ASTM B429, Alloy 6061-T6. 3. Aluminum Bars and Rod: ASTM B211, Alloy 6061-T6. 4. Aluminum Plates: ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6.

C. Stainless Steel: 1. Plates and Sheets: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304L or Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Submerged or Intermittently Submerged: Type 316 stainless steel. 00361334.0000

05 50 13-3

Miscellaneous Metal

3. 4. 5.

Non-submerged: Type 304L stainless steel. Where Specified or Indicated on Drawings: Alloy 2507 (CE3NM) super duplex stainless steel Where Specified or Indicated on Drawings: Duplex stainless steel CD4MCu

D. Stainless Steel Fasteners and Fittings: ASTM A 320/A 320M, Type 304L or Type 316 Stainless Steel. E. 2.2

Zinc-coated Hardware: ASTM A153/A153M. MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS

A.

Shop Assembly: 1. Pre-assemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field-splicing and field-assembly of units at the Site. Disassemble units only to extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B.

Shelf Angles: 1. Provide structural steel shelf angles of sizes shown, for attachment to concrete or masonry construction. Provide slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than six inches from ends and not more than 2.0 feet on centers, unless otherwise shown. a. Provide galvanized shelf angles on outdoor construction. 2. Provide wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, for attachment of shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete.

C. Bollards: 1. Provide Schedule 80 hot dip galvanized steel pipe filled with concrete as shown on the Drawings. Paint as required. Unless otherwise shown or specified, finish-paint bollard “Safety Yellow.” D. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. Provide miscellaneous metal framing and supports that are not part of structural steel framework and are required to complete the Work. 2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes, and profiles shown on the Drawings or, if not shown, of required dimensions to receive adjacent grating, plates, tanks, doors, and other work to be retained by the framing. 3. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural shapes, plates, and bars, of all-welded construction using mitered corners, welded brackets, and splice plates and minimum number of joints for field connection. 4. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items to be anchored to the Work. 00361334.0000

05 50 13-4

Miscellaneous Metal

5.

6.

Furnish units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units are to be installed after concrete is placed. a. Except as otherwise shown, space anchors, 2.0 feet on centers, and provide units the equivalent of 1.25-inch by 1/4-inch by eightinch strips. b. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous frames and supports. c. Where shown or indicated, galvanize miscellaneous frames and supports that are not to be installed outdoors. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports shall be hot-dip galvanized and finish-painted.

E.

Fasteners and Hardware: Provide Type 316 stainless steel fasteners for aluminum fabrications and zinc-coated hardware for galvanized fabrications, unless otherwise shown or specified.

F.

Anchors and Expansion Anchors: Refer to Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems.

2.3

FINISHING

A.

Surface Preparation and Shop Priming: Perform surface preparation and apply primer coat to miscellaneous metal fabrications in the shop.

B.

Galvanizing: 1. Galvanizing of fabricated steel items shall comply with ASTM A123/A123M. 2. Details of fabrication of steel items and assemblies to be hot-dip galvanized shall conform to recommendations of ASTM A384/A384M to minimize the potential for distortion.

C. Aluminum Finish: Provide natural mill finish for aluminum Work unless otherwise shown or specified. 2.4 A.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Tests and Inspections: 1. Materials and fabrication procedures shall be subject to inspection and tests in the mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures complying with the Contract Documents.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION

00361334.0000

05 50 13-5

Miscellaneous Metal

A.

3.2

Examine conditions under which the Work is to be performed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. INSTALLATION

A.

Install miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, plumb, level, true, and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Brace temporarily or anchor temporarily in formwork where fabrications are to be built into concrete, masonry, or other construction.

B.

Anchor securely as shown and as required for the intended use, using concealed anchors where possible.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints. Field-weld steel connections that are not to be exposed joints and cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, D1.2/D1.2M and D1.6, as applicable to the material being welded. Grind steel joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. D. Protection of Aluminum from Dissimilar Materials: 1. Coat surfaces of aluminum that will contact dissimilar materials such as concrete, masonry, and steel. + + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

05 50 13-6

Miscellaneous Metal

SECTION 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, material, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install all miscellaneous rough carpentry Work. 2. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in miscellaneous rough carpentry to accommodate the Work under this and other Sections and building into miscellaneous rough carpentry items such as sleeves, anchorages, inserts and other items to be embedded in or penetrating miscellaneous rough carpentry for which placement is not specifically provided under other Sections. 3. Extent of miscellaneous rough carpentry is shown or indicated. 4. Types of materials required include: a. Miscellaneous blocking, and other miscellaneous wood framing. b. Lumber for temporary protection. c. Lumber for temporary support. d. Miscellaneous accessories. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before miscellaneous rough carpentry Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. 1.2

REFERENCES

A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ALSC PS 20, American Softwood Lumber Standard. 2. ASME B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Inch Series. 3. ASME B18.6.1 Wood Screws, Inch Series. 4. ASTM A653/A653M, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 5. ASTM D6841, Practice for Calculating Design Value Treatment Adjustment Factors for Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber.

00361334.0000

06 10 53-1

Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry

6. ASTM F1667, Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples. 7. AWPA M4, Care of Preservative Treated Wood Products. 8. AWPA P5, Waterborne Preservatives. 9. AWPA T1, Use Category System: Processing and Treatment Standard. 10. NIST PS-1, Construction and Industrial Plywood. 11. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB), Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber. 1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and the building code referred to in Section 01 42 00, References for size, spacing and attachment of wood members, unless more stringent requirements are shown or specified in the Contract Documents. B. Certifications: 1. Pressure Treatment: For each type of pressure treatment specified, submit certification by wood treating plant stating chemicals and process used, and certifying conformance with applicable standards referenced in the Contract Documents. a. For water borne preservatives, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to maximum of 19 percent prior to shipment to the Site. 2. Certificates of Grade: Where appearance of wood is important and grade marks will deface the Work, in lieu of grade markings on wood, submit certificates attesting that materials comply with grade requirements specified. 1.4

SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals; Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. List of species and grade of lumber proposed for each use. b. Fastener schedule with location, size, material and type of each fastener to be used in the Work. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Certificates of grade in accordance with Paragraph 1.3.B.2 of this Section. delivery, storage and handling. C. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading:

00361334.0000

06 10 53-2

Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry

1. Deliver products to Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchorage products that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry in ample time to prevent delaying the Work. 2. Handle treated materials in accordance with AWPA M4. 3. Comply with Section 01 65 00, Product Delivery Requirements. D. Storage and Protection: 1. Keep materials dry during delivery and storage. 2. Keep materials off ground using pallets, platforms, or other appropriate supports. Protect materials from corrosion and deterioration. Stack lumber, and provide air circulation within stacks. 3. Comply with Section 01 66 00, Product Storage and Handling Requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS

A. Lumber, General: 1. Factory-mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill and grading agency. Surfaces that will be exposed to view shall not have grade marks or other types of identifying marks. 2. Nominal sizes are shown or indicated, unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. Provide actual sizes as required by ALSC PS 20 for moisture content specified for each use. a. Provide dressed lumber, surfaced four sides (S4S), unless otherwise shown or specified. b. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. 3. Provide the following grade and species: a. Construction Grade, for material up to and including four-inch wide. b. No. 2 or better for material greater than four-inch wide up to and including 12-inch wide. c. Spruce-Pine-Fir, NLGA. d. Southern Pine, SPIB. 4. Lumber for Protection and Temporary Support: Size and grades to conform to Laws and Regulations, including OSHA. B. Fasteners and Anchorages: 1. Fasteners exposed to the weather as well as fasteners embedded in, or in contact with, preservative treated wood shall be hot-dip galvanized. 2. Common wire nails shall conform to ASTM F1667. 3. Wood screws shall conform to ASME B18.6.1. 4. Lag screws and lag bolts shall conform to ASME B18.2.1.

00361334.0000

06 10 53-3

Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry

5. Anchorage devices shall conform to Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. 6. Use joist hangers, framing anchors and clips where shown or specified. a. Joist hangers shall be steel, zinc coated, sized to fit the supporting member, of sufficient strength to develop full strength of the supported member in accordance with applicable building code, and furnished complete with special nails required by joist hanger manufacturer. b. Framing anchors shall be hot-dip galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, Z275 G90. Steel shall not be lighter than 18gage. Use special nails furnished by manufacturer for nailing. c. Clips shall consist of hot-dip galvanized conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, Z275 G90 steel angles, minimum 3/16-inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION

A. Examine substrates and supporting structure and conditions under which miscellaneous rough carpentry Work will be installed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2

INSTALLATION

A. Coordination: Fit miscellaneous rough carpentry Work to other Work and work under other contracts, as applicable, and scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other construction. B. General: 1. Discard units of material with defects that might impair quality of the Work, and units too small to fabricate the Work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. 2. Set miscellaneous rough carpentry Work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true, accurately cut and fitted. 3. Securely attach miscellaneous rough carpentry Work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as shown and indicated in the Contract Documents. Countersink nail heads on exposed miscellaneous rough carpentry Work and fill holes. Make tight connections between members. 4. Install fasteners without splitting of wood, pre-drill as required and for masonry anchors fastened to wood stud wall framing. C. Wood Grounds, Nailers, and Blocking: 00361334.0000

06 10 53-4

Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry

1. Provide where shown or indicated, and where required for attachment of other construction. Form to shapes as shown or indicated and cut as required for true line and level of Work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. 2. Attach substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown or indicated. 3. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative-treated, keybevelled lumber not less than 1.5-inch wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

06 10 53-5

Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 07 21 05 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install building insulation. 2. Extent of each type of building insulation is shown and indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items that must be installed with or before building insulation Work. 1.2

REFERENCES

A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ASTM C177, Test Methods for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-HotPlate Apparatus. 2. ASTM C203, Test Method for Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block-Type Thermal Insulation. 3. ASTM C236, Test Methods for Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box. 4. ASTM C272, Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural Sandwich Constructions. 5. ASTM C303, Test Method for Dimensions and Density of Preformed Block and Board-Type Thermal Insulation. 6. ASTM C518, Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 7. ASTM C520, Test Methods for Density of Granular Loose Fill Insulation. 8. ASTM C531, Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars and Monolithic Surfacings. 9. ASTM C549, Specification for Perlite Loose Fill Insulation. 10. ASTM C553, Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 11. ASTM C578, Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 00361334.0000

07 21 05-1

Building Insulation

12. ASTM C612, Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 13. ASTM C665, Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 14. ASTM C764, Specification for Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation. 15. ASTM D696, Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics between -30 Degrees C and 30 Degrees C with a Vitreous silica dilatometer. 16. ASTM D1621, Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 17. ASTM D2126, Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging. 18. ASTM E84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 19. ASTM E96, Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 20. ASTM E119, Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 21. UL 1479, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturers: a. Obtain building insulations, requiring hydrochlorofluorocarbon blowing agent from manufacturer(s) that manufacture product required using blowing agent acceptable for use until the year 2020 and complying in all respects with Copenhagen Amendments to the Montreal Protocol. b. Manufacturer shall provide complete technical services including preparation and review of Shop Drawings and submittals, installation methods, and proposed detailing for the Work. 2. Installer: Engage single installer for each type of building insulation. Each installer shall be skilled, trained, and have record of successful experience in applying and installing each product, and possess successful record of performing work in accordance with recommendations and requirements of manufacturer or that can submit written evidence of being acceptable to manufacturer for providing the required Work. Installers shall employ only tradesmen with specific skill and successful experience in each type of Work required. Submit to ENGINEER name and qualifications of each installer with the following information for at least three successful, completed projects per installer: a. Names and telephone numbers of owner and architect or engineer responsible for each project. b. Approximate contract cost of the building insulation system installed. c. Quantity (area) of building insulation installed. 00361334.0000

07 21 05-2

Building Insulation

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with code interpretations by authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. 1.4

SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Drawings showing extent of the building insulation Work and all details required for the Work, referencing system components provided as Samples. b. Complete selection of fire stop manufacturer’s recommended systems for each condition and kind of penetration encountered in the Work. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers for required number and kind of penetrations through fire-rated construction. Provide schedule of penetrations and fire stop system to be included for each condition and kind of penetration encountered. 2. Product Data: a. Material specifications and general recommendations from building insulation manufacturer for each type of building insulation product. Include manufacturer’s data substantiating that materials comply with Contract Documents. b. Test Reports: Copies of reports of tests on materials being furnished or previously-manufactured, identical materials verifying compliance with physical properties and environmental features specified in the Contract Documents. When requested by ENGINEER, submit qualifications and summary of experience of testing agencies in performing tests similar to those required. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: Certificate from manufacturer stating that manufacturer of foam-type rigid board insulation has used an environmentally safe blowing agent complying with specified requirements. 2. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions. Indicate by copy of transmittal form that installer has received copy of manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery and Handling of Materials: 1. Do not deliver insulation materials to the Site before the time of installation. 2. Deliver materials in sufficient quantities to allow uninterrupted continuity of the Work. 3. Handle materials carefully to avoid damage and breakage or compressing of boards to less than their specified thickness, or other damage. 4. Handle materials in manner that prevents inclusion of foreign materials. 00361334.0000

07 21 05-3

Building Insulation

5. Conform to Section 01 65 00, Product Delivery Requirements. B. Storage of Materials: 1. Store materials in dry, enclosed area, off ground and away form possible contact with water, ice, and snow. 2. Prevent damage to materials during storage, including minimizing the time materials are stored at the Site before being incorporated into the Work. Store only sufficient quantity of building insulation materials at the Site required for continuous advancement of the Work without causing delay. 3. Conform to Section 01 66 00, Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 1.6

SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions: 1. Complete the installation and concealment of building insulation materials as rapidly as possible to avoid damage from adjacent construction operations and adverse weather conditions. 2. Install building insulations when weather and temperature conditions comply with building insulations manufacturers’ written recommendations. 3. Install building insulations when damaging environmental condition are not forecasted for the time when exposed systems materials components would be exposed to potential damage from the elements. 4. If CONTRACTOR advances foamed-in-place cementitious insulation Work when weather conditions are not within manufacturer’s recommended temperature ranges, provide temporary enclosures with temporary heat to maintain manufacturer’s recommended temperatures during the initial curing period. Erecting and maintaining temporary enclosures and providing temporary heating shall be at no additional cost to OWNER. 5. Protect building insulation Work from precipitation, frost, and direct sunlight. 6. Do not apply pressure-sensitive tape when temperature is below 35 degrees F or above 110 degrees F. 7. Record decisions, conditions, and agreements to proceed with the Work when weather conditions may be unfavorable. State reasons for proceeding, along with names of persons involved, and changes or revisions (if any), if required, to allow the Work to proceed. 1.7 . SCHEDULING A. Proceed with building insulation Work when preceding Work is ready to receive the Work of this Section.

00361334.0000

07 21 05-4

Building Insulation

B. Do not advance installation of building insulation beyond that necessary for proper sequencing of the Work. Do not advance the Work when there is no proper and secure protection from damaging weather and construction activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Performance Criteria: 1. Thermal Conductivity: Thicknesses shown are for thermal conductivity, k-value at 75 degrees F, specified for each material. 2. Provide adjusted thicknesses based on thicknesses shown or specified for building insulations, as required to comply with required thermal resistances for material having different thermal conductivity. 2.2

MATERIALS

A. Foam Plastic Insulations: Provide the following types: 1. General: Rigid, closed-cell, thermally stabilized, extruded, hydrochlorofluro-carbon blown, foam board insulation consisting of 100 percent virgin extruded polystyrene modified resin complying with ASTM C578. 2. Provide blowing agent with lowest available ozone depletion potential, such as HCFC-142b or better. HCFC-141b is not acceptable. 3. Preformed Concrete Masonry Unit Core Insulation: Provide individually molded expanded polystyrene core insulation complying with ASTM C236, and ASTM C578, Standard Type I. a. Physical Properties: 1) Thermal Conductivity (k), ASTM C177: 0.26 Btu/inch/hour/square foot/degree F. 2) Density, ASTM C303: 0.90 to 1.14 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) minimum. 3) Compressive Strength (psi at 5 percent deformation), ASTM D1621: 10 to 13 pcf. 4) Water Vapor Transmission, ASTM E96: 1.4 perm/inch. 5) Dimensional Stability: ASTM D2126: 0.55 percent maximum. 6) Flame Spread, ASTM E84: Five maximum. 7) Smoke Development, ASTM E84: 130 maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Korfil Standard U-Shaped Block Insulation by Concrete Block Insulating Systems, Inc, Division of W. R. Grace Construction Products, Inc. 2) Blocfil by Blocfil Company, Division of Patek Investment Corporation. 3) Or equal.

00361334.0000

07 21 05-5

Building Insulation

4. Safing Insulation: Provide unfaced semi-rigid non-asbestos, non-combustible blankets composed of compounds of spun mineral fiber felt, complying with ASTM C665, Type I. a. Physical Properties: 1) Thermal Conductivity (k), ASTM C518: 0.25 Btu/inch/hour/square foot/degree F. 2) Density, Manufacturer’s Certified Test: Four pounds per cubic foot (pcf). 3) Flame Spread, ASTM E84: 15 maximum. 4) Smoke Developed, ASTM E84: Five maximum. 5) Fire Resistance Rating, ASTM E119: Three hours. b. Thickness: Four inches. c. Width: 2.0 feet. d. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Thermafiber Safing Insulation by USG Interiors, Inc. 2) FBX Safing Insulation by Fibrex, Inc. 3) Or equal. B. Loose Granular Perlite Insulations: Provide the following: 1. Loose Fill Insulation: Provide inert asbestos-free volcanic glass-like perlite aggregates expanded by special heat process and treated with non-flammable silicone complying with ASTM C549. a. Physical Properties: 1) Thermal Conductivity (k), ASTM C549: 0.37 Btu/inch/hour/square foot/degree F. 2) Density, ASTM C520: Five to eight pounds per cubic foot (pcf). 3) Flame Spread, ASTM E84: Zero. 4) Fuel Contributed, ASTM E84: Zero. 5) Smoke Development, ASTM E84: Zero. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Permalite by Grefco, Inc. 2) Or equal. C. Fire-Stop Sealants and Other Fire-Stop System Components: Provide the following: 1. Complete selection of fire-stop manufacturer’s recommended silicone rubber fire-stop systems. Provide complete systems complying with UL 1479 with two- or three-hour fire rating. Provide equal fire protection as provided by fire-rating of construction penetrated. 2. Provide multiple component systems coordinated to meet actual conditions encountered in the Work and as recommended by fire-stop manufacturer. In addition to providing fire resistance, fire-stop systems shall also be gas and watertight. 3. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. 3M Fire Stop Systems by 3M, Inc. b. Or equal. D. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories: Provide the following: 00361334.0000

07 21 05-6

Building Insulation

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION

A. CONTRACTOR and installer shall examine substrate and conditions under which building insulation Work will be performed and notify ENGINEER in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

00361334.0000

07 21 05-7

Building Insulation

3.2

PREPARATION

A. Surfaces to receive building insulation shall be clean of all debris, dirt, and other contamination before installation begins. 3.3

INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to Site conditions, before proceeding with the Work obtain from manufacturer and submit to ENGINEER specific installation recommendations from manufacturer. 2. Extend insulations full thickness over entire surface to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions. Fill voids with insulation. 3. Apply number of layers of insulation specified, each of required thickness, or required thickness to provide thermal value shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, to make up the total thickness. B. Safing Insulations and Fire-Stop Systems: 1. Install safing insulation and fire-stop systems to present continuous fire-rated fire barrier in areas shown and at perimeter of all fire-rated partitions and poke-through floor and wall penetrations, to maintain continuity of fire-rated construction whether or not shown. 2. Install fire stop sealants and other fire stop system components in thicknesses recommended by manufacturer at all locations where poke-through penetrations occur, at all locations where other penetrations such as ducts, pipe, cables, cable trays, and conduit occur and at perimeter of all fire-rated walls. 3. Include all components of manufacturer's fire/smoke-stop systems for complete system responsibility installed in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations and specifications. C. Loose Fill Insulation: 1. Pour granular insulation into spaces and onto surfaces to completely fill all void spaces. 2. Screed horizontal applications to uniform thickness. D. Correcting Defective Work: 1. System components that are dislodged, damaged, expanded, broken, penetrated, or crushed by subsequent installation operations or damaged by detrimental weather shall be immediately replaced with undamaged material in compliance with the Contract Documents and properly protected as specified. 2. Only original installer shall repair or replace deteriorated or defective Work.

00361334.0000

07 21 05-8

Building Insulation

3.4

PROTECTION

A. Protection from Elements: 1. Protect all components of the Work from detrimental weather conditions. Do not allow building insulation materials to become wet or soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Provide continuous protection of materials against damage, wetting and moisture absorption and storing materials as specified 2. Work that cannot, for reasons acceptable to ENGINEER, be covered with complete construction system before onset of weather detrimental to the Work, shall be completely covered and protected in manner that deflects precipitation from building insulations without damaging adjacent Work. 3. Protect foam plastic building insulation from exposure to sunlight. B. Protection During Construction: 1. Protect all components of the Work from construction operations including, but not limited to, backfilling, framing, and sheathing, aluminum siding, and concrete unit masonry Work, until work is completed and acceptable to ENGINEER. 2. Protect building insulations from damage and abuse by other contractors and installers until readiness for final payment. 3. Do not allow building insulations to come into contact with welding operations or other fire or ignition sources. 4. Do not allow construction traffic not associated with installation of building insulation in the area of building insulation Work. Protect the area from access by other installers and contractors until the building insulation Work has been incorporated into finished construction systems. C. Building insulation that becomes wet, damaged, or deteriorated shall be promptly removed from the Site and replaced with materials conforming to this Section.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

07 21 05-9

Building Insulation

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 07 22 16 ROOF BOARD INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install all roof board insulation. 2. Extent of each type of roof board insulation is shown. 3. Types of products required include the following: a. Extruded, pentane isomer blown, polyisocyanurate rigid board-type insulation. b. Miscellaneous materials and accessories. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with the roof board insulation Work. 2. All framing for openings, edge angles, nailers, curbs and other items shall be in place before start of roof board insulation Work. 3. Field-verify location of all roof penetrations, drain locations, and deck deflections. C. Related Sections: 1. 07 54 23, Thermoplastic Polyolefin Membrane Roofing. 1.2

REFERENCES

A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). a. ASTM C 150, Specification for Portland Cement. b. ASTM C 177, Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. c. ASTM C 203, Test Methods for Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block-Type Thermal Insulation. d. ASTM C 272, Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural Sandwich Constructions. e. ASTM C 303, Test Method for Dimensions and Density of Preformed Block and Board-Type Thermal Insulation. f. ASTM C 495, Test Method for Compressive Strength of Lightweight Insulating Concrete. 00361334.0000

07 22 16-1

Roof Board Insulation

2.

3.

4. 5. 1.3

g. ASTM C 518, Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. h. ASTM C 550, Test Method for Measuring Trueness and Squareness of Rigid Block and Board Thermal Insulation. i. ASTM C 1289, Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. j. ASTM D 696, Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics between -30 Degrees C and 30 Degrees C with a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer. k. ASTM D 1621, Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. ASTM D 1622, Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics. a. ASTM D 1623, Test Method for Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. b. ASTM E 84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. c. ASTM E 96, Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. Factory Mutual, (FM). a. FM Publication, Loss Prevention Data for Roofing Contractors, 1-29, Above-Deck Roof Components. b. FM Publication, Approval Guide. Underwriters Laboratories, (UL). a. UL Building Materials Directory. Florida Building Code, (FBC) including High Velocity Hurricane Zone of the F BC.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer's Qualifications: 1. Roof board insulation Work shall be performed by the installer of the associated roofing for undivided responsibility. 2. Submit proof of acceptability of installer by manufacturer to ENGINEER. B. Source Quality Control: 1. Obtain extruded polyiscoyanurate rigid board-type insulation from manufacturers who manufacture specified insulation using a blowing agent containing no chlorine-based compounds. 2. Engage a single manufacturer for each type of roofing insulation who shall provide the services of a technical representative to assist CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER by providing technical opinions on the adequacy of materials and methods of installation based on Shop Drawings approved by ENGINEER. 3. Provide such services during the time of delivery, storage, handling and installation of all roofing insulation. 4. The thicknesses shown are based on the thermal conductivity, k-value at 75°F specified for each material. Thicknesses of roof board 00361334.0000

07 22 16-2

Roof Board Insulation

insulation materials submitted by CONTRACTOR as "or equal" to specified materials shall have their thicknesses adjusted to provide the same thermal resistance as materials specified. C. Erection Tolerances: Provide the following for composite roof board insulation: 1. In addition to filling the space between all metal deck flutes, provide minimum of 1/8-inch of insulating concrete over the top of the metal deck. 2. Finished system shall not pond water and shall provide a uniformly sloped surface to low point roof drains. If at any time up to the time of Final Acceptance the roof shows signs of ponding water, the composite roof board insulation system shall be repaired to provide uniform slope to drain, at no additional cost to OWNER. 1.4

SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Field verified locations of all roof penetrations, drain locations, and deck deflections. b. Complete layout of all roof board insulation showing sizes, placement, number of courses and methods of fastening. Include statement that fastening method, location and density of fasteners have been approved by roof membrane manufacturer and comply with wind uplift requirements specified. c. Weights of all equipment to be used on roof. d. All required roof board insulation details approved by the roof board insulation manufacturer and the manufacturer of the respective roofing systems. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of roof board insulation required. Include data substantiating that the materials comply with specified requirements. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following 1. Certificates: a. qualifications. 2. Site Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit Job Conditions Report, prepared by composite roof board insulation installer, as specified, and in addition, include a notarized statement from the full-time on-Site technical representative and installer that the composite roof board insulation system was installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations as shown on approved Shop Drawings. 1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery of Materials: 00361334.0000

07 22 16-3

Roof Board Insulation

1. Do not deliver insulation materials to the Site before time of installation. 2. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, undamaged packages or acceptable bulk containers. B. Storage of Materials: 1. Do not allow insulation materials to become wet or soiled. 2. Protect plastic insulation from exposure to sunlight. 3. Protect plastic insulation against ignition. 4. Store packaged materials to protect them from the weather and physical damage. C. Handling of Materials: 1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection. 2. Do not use cement which shows indication of moisture damage, caking or other signs of deterioration. 1.6

JOB CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not install roof board insulation when weather conditions are such that the deck is not completely dry, there is ice or snow on the deck, or where there is no assurance that the roof board insulation can be completely protected from the weather by the end of the day’s Work. B. Protection: 1. Do not overload the building structure with the weight of stored materials or use of equipment. 2. Install temporary water cut-offs at the end of each day's Work to protect the roof board insulation. Remove the temporary water cut-offs upon resumption of the Work. 1.7

SEQUENCING

A. Proceed with and complete the Work only when materials, equipment and tradesmen required for the installation of the roofing membrane over the roof board insulation are at the Site and are ready to follow with this Work immediately (same day) after the roof board insulation Work. B. Proceed with and complete the Work only when materials, equipment and tradesmen required for the installation of the roofing membrane over the insulation are at the Site; are installing the vapor barrier, and are ready to follow with this Work immediately (same day) behind the roof board insulation Work. C. Do not install any more rigid board-type roof board insulation each day than can be covered with complete roofing system by the end of that working day. 00361334.0000

07 22 16-4

Roof Board Insulation

1.8

SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Manufacturer of the primary roofing membrane systems shall be a manufacturer who finds the generic types of insulation specified herein as acceptable and bondable if installed according to the roofing manufacturer's standards for complete product and performance responsibility. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS

A. Extruded Polyisocyanurate Rigid Board Roof board insulation: 1. Provide only insulation products that have been designed to comply with the Florida building Code including High Velocity Hurricane Zone of the Florida Building Code. Products must be Miami-Dade approved. 2. Rigid, rectangular boards of extruded closed-cell polyisocyanurate complying with ASTM C 1289, Type II, with low water vapor permeability and laminated to heavy black (non-asphaltic) fiberreinforced felt facers with one side of board containing perforated facers and the other side containing non-perforated facers. 3. Provide a blowing agent with zero ozone depletion potential, such as pentane. 4. Physical Properties: Provide the following: a. Minimum Compressive Strength, (at 10 percent deformation), ASTM D 1621: 25 psi minimum. b. Flame Spread, ASTM E 108: Class A. c. Smoke Development, ASTM E 84: 120 maximum. d. Vapor Transmission, ASTM E 96: 0.8 perms/inch. e. Thermal Resistance, ASTM C 518: 7/inch. f. Maximum Water Absorption, ASTM C 209: 0.10 percent by volume. 5. Size: 48-inches by 96 inches by 2-inch thick plus ¼-inch per foot tapered insulation. 6. Number of Layers: As required by thickness of roof board insulation shown. 7. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. ACUltra (Pentane Blown) Hydrocarbon ACFoam - II by Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Or equal. B. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Mechanical Anchors: The type recommended by the roof board insulation manufacturer for the type of deck used, and complying with fire and insurance rating requirements. 2. Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by roof board insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joints between units and filling voids. 00361334.0000

07 22 16-5

Roof Board Insulation

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION

A. CONTRACTOR and installer shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which the roof board insulation Work is to be performed, and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the roof board insulation Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. B. Commencement of the Work shall be understood by ENGINEER to mean that all conditions are acceptable to the manufacturer’s technical representative, CONTRACTOR and installer to provide acceptable Work under this Contract. 3.2

PREPARATION

A. Verify that vapor barrier has been installed on decks, with all joints and penetrations in the vapor barrier sealed using techniques recommended by the vapor barrier manufacturer to retain full perm rating of the vapor barrier. 3.3

INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for the particular conditions of installation in each case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to Site conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding. Incorporate recommendations into the Work only as approved by ENGINEER. Record all such discussions and the basis for discussions in Job Conditions Report. 2. Coordinate heights of wood blocking to provide flush transition between roof board insulation and perimeter wood blocking. 3. Extend roof board insulation full thickness as shown over entire surface to be insulated. 4. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with roof board insulation. B. Board-Type Roof board insulation Units: Install rigid board-type roof board insulation according to FM 1-29 Wind Storm Resistance Classification specified, and as follows: 1. Install wood nailers as required by roofing membrane manufacturer. 2. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at the rate of 3/4 gallons per 100 square feet, unless greater weight is required by roofing membrane system manufacturer, and allow primer to dry. Set each layer of roof board insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. 00361334.0000

07 22 16-6

Roof Board Insulation

3. Secure first layer or roof board insulation to deck using mechanically fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified boardtype roof board insulation to deck type shown and in accordance with the requirements of applicable governing authorities having jurisdiction and roofing membrane manufacturer's recommendations, whichever produces the greatest fastener density. 4. Apply two or more courses of roof board insulation to make up the total required thickness under roofing. C. Roof board insulation System: 1. Place expanded polystyrene rigid board insulation into the slurry within thirty minutes of insulating concrete placement with joints staggered in a running bond pattern. 2. Tightly butt all rigid boards together and install in a manner that provides full contact of slurry to board, and with adequate pressure to cause insulating concrete to enter the locking/keying openings of the rigid board. 3. Provide high and low point elevations shown. Provide smooth, uniformly sloped top of insulating concrete plane, sloped to drain at 1/4-inch per foot. 3.4

PERFORMANCE

A. Roof board insulation Work shall withstand the uplift forces of wind, as defined by the roofing guarantee. Refer to Section 07 54 23, Thermoplastic Polyolefin Membrane Roofing. B. Failures of the roof board insulation Work in bond or anchorage to the substrate, or between courses of roof board insulation, or within the roof board insulation, will be considered failures of materials or workmanship under the Roofing Guarantee. C. Failures of the composite roof board insulation Work in bond or anchorage to the substrate, or within the roof board insulation, will be considered failures of materials or workmanship under the insulation performance warranty. 3.5

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test the substrate for moisture content, by suitable means, wherever there is a possibility that exposed substrate has acquired moisture in excess of the maximum content for optimum application of the insulation, as determined by the manufacturer. 3.6

PROTECTION

A. Do not permit construction traffic over completed insulation Work, except as required for roofing. 00361334.0000

07 22 16-7

Roof Board Insulation

B. Protect roof board insulation Work from exposure to moisture, damage and deterioration, primarily by prompt installation of roofing Work to be placed over the roof board insulation. C. Do not expose completed composite roof board insulation Work to prolonged exposure to elements in excess of seven days. 3.7

INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Roof board insulation which has become wet, damaged, or deteriorated, as determined by ENGINEER, shall be promptly removed from the Site, even if already installed. B. Correct all improperly sloped, chipped, cracked, improperly set, ridged or rough areas in the roof board insulation to provide substrate acceptable to roofing manufacturer and ENGINEER. C. Final acceptance will be contingent upon the receipt by ENGINEER of a Job Conditions Report certifying conformance of the Work with the requirements of this Section and which includes all information requested by these Specifications.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

07 22 16-8

Roof Board Insulation

SECTION 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install all TPO roofing Work. 2. Extent of TPO roofing is shown or specified. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with the TPO roofing Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 53, Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 07 22 16, Roof Board Insulation. 3. Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 1.2

REFERENCES

A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). a. ASTM D 41 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing. b. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. c. ASTM C 208 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board. d. ASTM C 578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. e. ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. f. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. g. ASTM D 312 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing. h. ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension. i. ASTM D 1079 - Standard Terminology Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing, and Bituminous Materials.

00361334.0000

07 54 23-1

j.

2.

3. 4. 5. 6.

7. 1.3

ASTM D 2178 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. k. ASTM D 4263 - Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. l. ASTM D 4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity. m. ASTM D 4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity. n. ASTM D 4869 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Underlayment Used in Steep Slope Roofing. o. ASTM D 6878 - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing. Factory Mutual System, (FM). a. Factory Mutual Standard 4470 - Approval Standard for Class 1 Roof Covers. b. Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-28, 1-29. Florida Building Code, (FBC) including High Velocity Hurricane Zone of the F BC. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) - Low Slope Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, Current Edition. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): a. TGFU R1306 - "Roofing Systems and Materials Guide". b. UL-790 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings. ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 9.1 (2007): Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer’s Qualifications: 1. Engage a single installer skilled, trained and with successful experience in the installation of TPO roofings, who is a recognized roofing installer with specific skill and successful experience in the type of roofing specified, and equipped to perform workmanship in accordance with the Contract Documents, manufacturer's written instructions for guaranteed construction and the approved Shop Drawings and who agrees to employ only tradesmen with specific skill and successful experience in this type of Work. Submit names and qualifications to ENGINEER along with the following information on a minimum of three successful projects: a. Names and telephone numbers of owners, architects or engineers responsible for projects. b. Approximate contract cost of the TPO roofing. c. Amount of area installed. 2. The roofing installer shall be an approved roofing applicator who has qualified for appointment and has been trained by the manufacturer. 00361334.0000

07 54 23-2

3. Submit proof of acceptability of installer by manufacturer to ENGINEER. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain elastic sheets from only one manufacturer, who publishes complete information on the specified roofing system, and offers to guarantee the completed roofing installation, as required. 2. Take field dimensions prior to preparation of Shop Drawings. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Comply with applicable insurance rating bureau requirements as required by the Florida Building Code, unless more restrictive requirements are specified. 2. Provide materials and roofing systems which have been tested, listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories' Incorporated for Class "A" rating, and bear the UL label on each package or are shipped to the Site with a UL Certificate of Compliance. 3. Provide roofing materials which have been tested, listed and FM labeled for Class "A" maximum flame spread rating. D. Allowable Installation Tolerances: 1. Do not install Work until substrate preparation and tolerances have been approved by ENGINEER, TPO roofing manufacturer's Technical Representative and the TPO roofing installer and CONTRACTOR have verified to ENGINEER that substrates are within tolerances specified and acceptable to produce approved Work. Work advanced for any reason without such verification shall be stopped, removed and replaced with new material after substrate is approved, at no additional cost to OWNER. 2. Substrate Tolerances: a. Out-of-Plane: 1/8-inch maximum in 10 foot-0 inches and 1/16-inch maxi-mum in any 12-inches measured along the plane. b. Maximum Offset in Plane Alignment: 1/16-inch. c. Variation From Slope: 1/8-inch maximum in 10 foot - 0 inches. E. Pre-Installation Meeting: 1. Prior to the installation of the TPO roofing and associated Work, CONTRACTOR shall schedule and meet at the Site with the roofing installer, the installer of each component of associated Work, the installers of deck and composite insulating substrate construction to receive roofing Work, the installers of other work in and around roofing which must follow the roofing Work, including mechanical work, ENGINEER and other representatives directly concerned with performance of the Work. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to the TPO roofing Work, including but not necessarily limited to, the following: a. Review project requirements, including Contract Documents.

00361334.0000

07 54 23-3

b. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. c. Review status of substrate including drying, structural loading limitations and similar considerations. d. Review availability of materials, tradesmen, equipment and facilities required to make progress and avoid delays. e. Review required inspection, testing, certifying and accounting procedures. f. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions. g. Review regulations concerning code compliance, FM compliance, environmental protection, health, safety, fire and similar considerations. h. Review procedures required for protection of roofing during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Reconvene the meeting at the earliest opportunity if additional information must be developed in order to conclude the subjects under consideration. 1.4

SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Samples a. 12-inch by 12-inch sheet of each item specified and 6-inch long pieces of each required system component to be used in the Work. b. Each fastener type required marked as to type of material and with their intended purpose in the Work. c. All components of the TPO roofing and flashing systems labeled with their intended use in the Work. Compliance with all other requirements is exclusive responsibility of CONTRACTOR. 2. Shop Drawings: Submit the following: a. Copies of drawings completely dimensioned using field-verified dimensions on plans of each roof area and the accurate location of all roof penetrations roof mounted equipment, curbs, skylights and other features present on the roof areas specified by ENGINEER to be included under the Work of this Section and all details of construction and erection, including all flashing details coordinated with Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim, Section 07 22 16, Roof Board Insulation, and FM publications specified, and the location of all heavy-duty walkway protection paver patterns required by the manufacturer for warranted construction and as shown. CONTRACTOR shall submit all details requiring consideration and the performance of the details shall be approved by the TPO roofing manufacturer for guaranteed construction as specified. 3. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's specifications and product manuals indicating product informa-tion correlated to specified requirements, 00361334.0000

07 54 23-4

b.

manufacturer's installation instruc-tions, maintenance instructions and other data as may be required by ENGI-NEER. Copies of the FM Loss Prevention Data publications and appropriate Technical Advisory Bulletins published by Factory Mutual indicating compliance with wind uplift pressure-resistant performance criteria, ballast and paver requirements and the requirements for FM Approved 1-90 system construction and perimeter securement conditions.

B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Qualifications Statements: a. Installer's qualifications. 2. Certificates a. CONTRACTOR'S Review: Accompanying approval request, submit to ENGINEER a written statement signed by CONTRACTOR, stating that the Contract Documents for roofing and flashing have been reviewed with an agent of the roofing material manufacturer and that they are in agreement that the selected systems are proper, compatible and that the details shown are not in conflict with the roofing manufacturer's roofing and flashing details. Show by copy of transmittal form that a copy of the statement has been transmitted to the manufacturer. b. Statement of Application: Upon completion of the Work, submit a statement to ENGINEER signed by CONTRACTOR stating that the Work complies with the requirements of these Specifications and the installation methods comply with the manufacturer's printed instructions and were proper and adequate for the condition of installation and use. 3. Site Quality Control Submittals: a. Written reports describing results from required field testing as specified in Field Testing section of this specification. b. Final inspection report as specified in Inspection and Acceptance section of this specification. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Guarantee: a. CONTRACTOR shall execute his own written guarantee direct to OWNER warranting all TPO roofing and flashing weather- and watertight and perfect for a period of two years after date of Final Completion. Imperfections, by reason of defective materials, workmanship or arrangement of the various parts shall be made good to the satisfaction of the OWNER at CONTRACTOR'S expense. 2. Warranty: a. In addition to the above CONTRACTOR shall provide OWNER with manufacturer's standard ten year warranty. 1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 00361334.0000

07 54 23-5

A. Delivery of Materials: 1. Deliver materials to the Site in sufficient quantities to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. 2. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened and undamaged containers and rolls with labels intact and legible. 3. Materials requiring fire resistance classification shall be delivered to the Site with labels attached and packaged as required by labeling service. B. Storage of Materials: 1. Store materials in a dry, well ventilated, weather tight place, and in a manner which will ensure that there is no possibility of significant moisture pick-up. 2. Store in a manner which complies with fire and safety regulations. 3. Store emulsions at temperatures above 40°F. 4. Store materials on clean raised platforms with weather protective covering when stored outdoors. C. Handling of Materials: 1. Handle rolled goods so as to prevent damage to edge or ends. 2. Select and operate material handling equipment so as not to damage existing construction or applied roofing. 1.6

JOB CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions: 1. Proceed with TPO roofing and associated Work only when weather conditions will permit unrestricted use of materials and quality control of the Work being installed, complying with these Specification requirements and with the recommendations of the roofing materials manufacturers. 2. Proceed only when CONTRACTOR and their installer are willing to guarantee the Work as required and without additional reservations and restrictions. 3. Record decisions, conditions and agreements to proceed with the Work when weather conditions might be unfavorable. State the reasons for proceeding, with the names of the persons involved along with the changes, if any, or revisions, requirements or terms of the Contract. B. Protection: Provide continuous protection of materials against damage primarily by storing materials under cover and above ground and away from other construction traffic. C. Protection: 1. Provide continuous protection of materials against wetting and moisture absorption. 2. Protect materials against damage by construction traffic. 00361334.0000

07 54 23-6

1.7

SCHEDULING

A. Proceed with the TPO roofing and associated Work only after curbs, blocking, continuous wood sleepers, vents, drains and projections through the substrate have been installed, and when the substrate construction and framing of openings is completed. B. Proceed with and complete the Work only when materials, equipment and skilled tradesmen required for the installation of other TPO roofing components are at the site and are ready to follow with the Work immediately after composite roof insulation is acceptable for installation of the complete TPO roofing. C. Install all TPO roofing and associated Work in a manner that will ensure a complete roofing system at the end of each day's Work. Do not advance the installation of any one material beyond that which is necessary for proper sequencing of the TPO roofing Work. 1.8

GUARANTEE

A. Provide a roofing guarantee in the form and content specified, covering the TPO roofing and associated Work specified therein, signed by CONTRACTOR and their installer. Provide a two year roofing guarantee period, starting on the date of Final Completion of the completed construction Work, stating that for the duration of the guarantee CONTRACTOR and installer shall be responsible to fix leaks, replace TPO roofing and roof insulation components damaged by moisture penetration, and other defects caused by improper workmanship or the improper arrangement of the various system components. B. In addition to above, CONTRACTOR shall provide OWNER with manufacturer's standard ten year warranty. C. Specified TPO roofing manufacturer's standard details for guaranteed construction shall represent a minimum standard for the Work. Provide details as shown and in Factory Mutual Publications, where not in direct and irreconcilable conflict with specified TPO roofing manufacturer's requirements for guaranteed construction. Where such details are so considered by the TPO roofing manufacturer, provide a written statement from the manufacturer explaining the technical reasons for such determinations as part of Shop Drawing submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS

A. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. TPO Roofing System by Johns Inc. 00361334.0000

07 54 23-7

2. TPO Roofing System by GAF. 3. TPO Roofing System by Mule-Hide Products. 4. Or equal. 2.2

GENERAL

A. Roof System: Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, uniform, flexible sheet formed from a thermoplastic polyolefin, internally fabric or scrim reinforced. Provide only roof products that have been designed to comply with the Florida building Code including High Velocity Hurricane Zone of the Florida Building Code. Products must be Miami-Dade approved. 1. Membrane Attachment: Fully Adhered. B. Base Flashing: Provide a waterproof, Fully Adhered base flashing system at all penetrations, plane transitions and terminations. C. Insulation: Refer to specification section 07 22 16, Roof Board Insulation.

00361334.0000

07 54 23-8

2.3

THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) MEMBRANE

A. Membrane TPO 1. Color: White 2. Membrane Thickness: 60 mil nominal. a. Thickness over Scrim: 0.020 inches (0.508mm). b. Breaking Strength (ASTM D 751): 250 lbf/in (1.1 kN/m) minimum. c. Tear Resistance (ASTM D 751): 55 lbf/in (245 N/m) minimum. d. Elongation (ASTM D 751): 25 percent. 2.4

AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, with anchors. B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. C. Coverboard: Perlite Board: ASTM C 728, Type 3; composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders and waterproofing agents with top surface seal-coated. 2.5

FLASHING ACCESSORLES

A. Inside Corners: Pre-molded corner flashing for inside corners. 60 mil thickness. Color to match membrane. Special colors require custom fabrication process. B. Outside Corners: Injection molded corner used for flashing outside corners. 60 mil thickness. Color to match membrane. Special colors require custom fabrication process. C. TPO T-Joint Covers: Injection molded 60 mil thick TPO formed into a 4.5 inch (114mm) diameter circle used to seal step-offs at splice intersections. Color to match membrane. D. TPO Curb Wrap Corners: Pre-fabricated corner flashings made from 45 mil thick reinforced membrane. 6 inch wide base flange and a 12 inch overall height. Sizes available to fit curbs up to 6 foot by 6 foot (1828 x 1828 mm) in size. Color to match membrane. E. Molded Pipe Seals: A pre-molded flashing and clamping ring used for pipe penetrations. Available for 0.75 inch to 8 inch (19 - 203.2mm) diameter pipes. Color to match membrane.

00361334.0000

07 54 23-9

F. Split Pipe Seals: Pre-fabricated flashing consisting of 45 mil thick reinforced Membrane for pipes 1 inch to 6 inch (25.4 - 152.4mm) in diameter. A split (cut) and overlapped tab is incorporated to allow the pipe seal to be opened and wrapped around the pipe when it is not possible to pull a standard pipe flashing over a round penetration. Gray, tan and special colors require custom order fabrication. Custom sizes available on a special order basis. G. TPO Square Tubing Wraps: Pre-fabricated flashings made of 45 mil thick reinforced membrane for square tubing. A split (cut) and overlap tab are incorporated into these parts to allow the seals to be opened and wrapped around a square tubing penetration with an obstruction. Stock sizes include 3- inch, 4-inch, 5-inch and 6 inch (76, 102, 127, 152 mm) diameter square tubing. Gray, tan and special colors require custom order fabrication. Custom sizes available on a special order basis. H. TPO Molded Sealant Pockets: 1. A two-piece, interlocking injection molded, flexible pocket with a rigid polypropylene vertical wall and pre-formed deck flanges. Color to match membrane. 2. Used with Thermoplastic One-Part Pourable Sealer as specified in this section for waterproofing pipe clusters or other odd shaped penetrations. The removable built-in extension legs allow the oval pocket to adjust from 7.5 inches to 12 inches (191mm - 305mm) in length while maintaining a 6-inch width. I.

Pre-Fabricated Sealant Pockets: A two-piece, pre-fabricated sealant pocket that utilizes reinforced TPO membrane and coated metal to form a rigid, oversized sealant pocket with a weldable horizontal deck flange. Color to match membrane.

J.

Pressure-Sensitive Cover Strip: A nominal 6 inch (152mm) wide by 40 mil thick non-reinforced TPO membrane laminated to nominal 35-mil thick cured synthetic rubber pressure-sensitive adhesive. Used in conjunction with TPO Primer to strip in flat metal flanges (i.e., drip edges or rows of fasteners and plates). Color to match membrane.

K. TPO Pressure-Sensitive. 1. 10 inch (254mm): A nominal 10 inch (254mm) wide, 45 mil thick reinforced TPO membrane with nominal 3 inch (76mm) wide 35mil thick cured synthetic rubber pressure-sensitive adhesive laminated along both ends. The TPO 10-inch RUSS is used in place of narrow sheets to secure membrane in the perimeter roof area. The use of this product allows field membrane to be utilized over the entire roof area. L. Heat Weldable Walkway Rolls: Superior tear, puncture and weather resistance and designed to protect membrane in those areas exposed to repetitive foot traffic or other hazards. Walkway material may be heat 00361334.0000

07 54 23-10

welded to membrane using an automated heat welder or hand held heat welder. Walkway Rolls are 34 inches wide by 50 feet long and are nominal 180 mils thick.

00361334.0000

07 54 23-11

2.6

CLEANERS, PRIMERS, ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS

A. Bonding Adhesive: A high-strength solvent-based contact adhesive used for bonding membrane to various porous and non-porous substrates. 1. Base: Synthetic Rubber. 2. Color: Yellow. 3. Solids: 20.0 percent. 4. VOC: 670 grams/liter. B. Water Cut-Off Mastic: A one-component, low viscosity, self-wetting, Butyl blend mastic used as a compression sealing agent between membrane and applicable substrates. C. TPO Primer: Solvent-based product designed to prepare TPO membrane for improved adhesion to TPO surfaces prior to the application of pressuresensitive products and sealant pockets. D. Universal Single-Ply Sealant: A 100 percent solids, solvent free, VOC free, one-part polyether sealant that provides a weather tight seal to a variety of building materials. It is used for general caulking such as above termination bars and metal counter flashings and at scupper details. E. Thermoplastic One-Part Sealant: Single component, moisture curing, elastomeric polyether sealant that is compatible with Thermoplastic membranes. Provides a flexible, durable and long lasting seal around hard-to-flash penetrations in Thermoplastic Roofing Systems. F. Thermoplastic One-Part Sealant: Single component, moisture curing, elastomeric polyether sealant that is compatible with Thermoplastic membranes. Provides a flexible, durable and long lasting seal around hard-to-flash penetrations in Thermoplastic Roofing Systems. G. Multi-purpose contact adhesive recommended for enhancing bond of selfadhering sheet products and for bonding board insulation to various substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION

A. CONTRACTOR and installer shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which the TPO roofing and base flashing Work is to be performed, and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER.

00361334.0000

07 54 23-12

B. Verify adequacy of slope-to-drain, compressive strength, moisture content and other composite roof insulation features important to the successful installation of the TPO roofing and flashing systems before start of Work. 3.2

PREPARATION

A. Clean the substrate of dust, debris, substances and interferences detrimental to the Work. Where necessary to remove sharp projections, composite insulation surfaces shall be ground. B. Test the substrate for excessive moisture as recommended by the TPO roofing manufacturer. 3.3

INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Follow all applicable installation instructions and recommendations contained in the TPO roofing manufacturer's written installation and product manuals and the information contained on approved Shop Drawings. Where CONTRACTOR requests to deviate from written installation and product manuals and approved Shop Drawings, all such deviations shall be submitted to ENGINEER for approval along with TPO roofing manufacturer's written agreement and a statement of acceptability for compliance with guaranteed construction. 2. Begin installation only in the presence of the TPO roofing manufacturer's technical representative. 3. Cut sheets to the maximum size possible, in order to minimize seams and to accommodate contours of the deck. Do not seam within four feet of roof drains. 4. Clean all splices and lap areas using manufacturer's recommended splice cleaner. 5. Lap sheets and bond joints using the seaming system recommended by the manufacturer. 6. Cover top edges of each sheet at seams with uniform fillet of special sealant. 7. Install one-way breather vents as recommended by the TPO roofing manufacturer and as shown, but not less than one per 1,000 square feet. A. Membrane Placement and Attachment (Fully Adhered): 1. Position membrane over the acceptable substrate. Fold membrane sheet back lengthwise so half the underside of the membrane is exposed. 2. Apply Bonding Adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions, to the exposed underside of the membrane and the corresponding substrate area. Do not apply Bonding Adhesive along the splice edge of the membrane to be hot air welded over the

00361334.0000

07 54 23-13

adjoining sheet. Allow the adhesive to dry until it is tacky but will not string or stick to a dry finger touch. a. Roll the coated membrane into the coated substrate while avoiding wrinkles. Brush down the bonded section of the membrane sheet immediately after rolling the membrane into the adhesive with a soft bristle push broom to achieve maximum contact. b. Fold back the unbonded half of the sheet lengthwise and repeat the bonding procedures. 3. Position adjoining sheets to allow a minimum overlap of 2 inches. 4. Hot-air weld the membrane sheets using the Automatic Hot Air Welding Machine or Hot Air Hand Welder in accordance with the manufacturer's hot air welding procedures. A test weld sample should be made from a piece of scrap TPO to eliminate the need to remove a section from a completed seam. At all splice intersections, roll the seam with a silicone roller to ensure a continuous hot air welded seam. 5. Continue to install adjoining membrane sheets in the same manner, overlapping edges a minimum of 2 inches and complete the bonding procedures as stated previously. B. Flashing: 1. Flashing of parapets, curbs, expansion joints and other parts of the roof must be performed using reinforced membrane or prefabricated accessories. A non-reinforced membrane may be used for flashing pipe penetrations, Sealant Pockets, and scuppers, as well as inside and outside corners, when the use of pre-molded or prefabricated accessories is not feasible. 2. Follow manufacturer's typical flashing procedures for all wall, curb, and penetration flashing including metal edging/coping and roof drain applications. C. Walkways: 1. Install walkways at all traffic concentration points (such as roof hatches, access doors, rooftop ladders, etc.) and all locations as identified on the Contract Drawings. 2. Hot-air weld walkway pads to the membrane in accordance with the manufacturer's current application guidelines. D. Adhered Cover Board: Adhere cover board to substrate as follows: 1. Install each layer in a two-part urethane adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer’s instruction. 2. Install each layer in a one-part urethane adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer’s instruction. 3. Install to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 3.4

CLEAN UP:

00361334.0000

07 54 23-14

A. Perform daily clean-up to collect all wrappings, empty containers, paper, and other debris from the project site. Upon completion, all debris must be disposed of in a legally acceptable manner. B. Prior to the manufacturer's inspection for warranty, the applicator must perform a pre-inspection to review all work and to verify all flashing has been completed as well as the application of all caulking. 3.5

PROTECTION

A. Protect TPO roofing from damage during the construction period so that it will be undamaged in any way at the time of Final Completion. B. Replace Work which is soiled or otherwise damaged by the performance of the TPO roofing and associated Work and from improper installation techniques.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

07 54 23-15

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install sheet metal flashing and trim. 2. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in sheet metal flashing and trim to accommodate the Work under this and other Sections and building into the sheet metal flashing and trim all items such as sleeves, anchor bolts, inserts and all other items to be embedded in sheet metal flashing and trim for which placement is not specifically provided under other Sections. b. Providing openings in sheet metal flashing and trim to accommodate the work under other contracts and assisting other contractors in building into the sheet metal flashing and trim, piping, conduits, inserts and all other items required to penetrate sheet metal flashing and trim under other contracts. 3. Extent of the sheet metal flashing and trim is shown. 4. Types of products required include the following: a. Stainless steel sheet flashing. b. Lead sheet flashing. c. Shop-formed, snap-lock metal coping flashing and shop-formed cap flashing requiring no exposed fasteners or splice-plates. d. Surface-mounted reglets and counterflashing. e. Miscellaneous flashing not supplied under other Sections. f. Complete selection of custom and premium custom-blended fullstrength, polyvinylidene fluoride finishes and colors with extended life topcoat. g. Protective strippable film on all surfaces of snap-lock metal flashings. h. Miscellaneous accessories, fasteners, cleats and incidental sheet metal flashing and trim system components necessary for a complete installation. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with the sheet metal flashing and trim Work.

00361334.0000

07 62 00-1

Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

2. Work advanced without sheet metal flashing and trim items that are specified to be cast-in-place or built-in-place as the Work advances, shall be stopped, demolished and rebuilt incorporating specified sheet metal flashing and trim Work, at no additional cost to OWNER. C. Related Sections: 1. 07 54 23, Thermoplastic Polyolefin Membrane Roofing. 2. Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 1.2

REFERENCES

A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. The Aluminum Association, (AA). a. AA, ASD-1 - Aluminum Standards and Data. b. AA, DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. c. AA, SAA-46 - Anodized Architectural Aluminum. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). a. ASTM A 480, Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. b. ASTM A 666, Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. c. ASTM B 29, Specification for Refined Lead. d. ASTM B 32, Specification for Solder Metal. e. ASTM B 101, Specification for Lead-Coated Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. f. ASTM B 117, Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. g. ASTM B 209, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. h. ASTM B 370, Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. i. ASTM B 749, Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. j. ASTM D 395, Test Methods for Rubber Property-Compression Set. k. ASTM D 412, Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers - Tension. l. ASTM D 522, Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings. m. ASTM D 523, Test Method for Specular Gloss. n. ASTM D 624, Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers. o. ASTM D 746, Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact. p. ASTM D 968, Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive. q. ASTM D 1308, Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes. 00361334.0000

07 62 00-2

Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

r.

3.

4.

5.

6. 1.3

ASTM D 2240, Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. s. ASTM D 2244, Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. t. ASTM D 2247, Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity. u. ASTM D 3363, Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test. v. ASTM D 4214, Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation, (FM). a. FM Loss Prevention Data for Roofing Contractors, 1-49 Perimeter Flashing. National Roofing Contractors Association, (NRCA). a. NRCA, Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Incorporated, (SMACNA). a. SMACNA 1013, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. The Society for Protective Coatings, (SSPC). a. SSPC - Paint 12, Cold Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film).

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Engage a single installer who is a recognized flashing and trim installer, skilled and experienced in the type of flashing and trim Work required, and equipped to perform workmanship in accordance with recognized standards so that there will be undivided responsibility for the performance of the Work. Submit name and qualifications to ENGINEER along with at least three successfully completed Projects including names and telephone numbers of owners, architects and engineers, responsible for the project and the approximate contract price for flashing and trim work. B. Source Quality Control: 1.4

SUBMITALS

A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: a. Copies of manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations for sheet metal flashing and trim required. Include manufacturer's data substantiating that the materials comply with the requirements. b. Submit full selection of manufacturer's standard, custom and premium color charts. 00361334.0000

07 62 00-3

Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

2.

Shop Drawings: a. Drawings showing the manner of forming, jointing and securing flashings and trim. Show fully dimensioned joint details and waterproof connections to adjoining Work and details at obstructions and penetrations. b. Drawings showing the coordination of the Work of this Section with Section 04 00 05, Masonry, and Section 07 54 23 - Thermoplastic Polyolefin Membrane Roofing. Provide detailed Shop Drawings showing large scale details of sections and profiles of all sheet metal flashing and trim to be used in the Work, with all items, including fastener locations, cleats and other miscellaneous accessories necessary to complete the Work, fully dimensioned, properly located, quantified and presented such that sequence of installation is acceptable to each roofing system and adjacent construction material installer.

B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Qualifications Statements: a. Installer’s qualifications C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Gurantee: a. Submit guarantee as specified in section 1.7 2. Warranty a. Submit warranty as specified in section 1.7 1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery of Materials: 1. Deliver sheet metal flashing and trim materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, and undamaged containers and rolls, with labels intact and legible, indicating compliance with approved Shop Drawings. 2. Items delivered in broken, damaged, rusted, or unlabeled condition shall immediately be removed from Site and not offered again for approval by ENGINEER. B. Storage of Materials: 1. Store materials in an area undercover and protected from construction traffic. 2. Store materials in same package in which they were shipped, off the ground and on platforms protected from dirt and other contamination. 3. Store in a manner which does not permit water to remain on sheet metal flashing and trim materials and system components. C. Handling of Materials: 1. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim from dents, scratches, warps and bends. 00361334.0000

07 62 00-4

Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

2. Remove strippable protective film, immediately proceeding installation of each system component. 1.6

JOB CONDITIONS

A. Scheduling: 1. Do not proceed with sheet metal flashing and trim Work until curb and substrate construction, cant strips, blocking, reglets and other construction to receive the Work is completed. 2. Deliver materials to the Site in sufficient quantities to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. 3. Schedule the installation of sheet metal flashing and trim to coincide with the installation of built-up bituminous roofing, waterproofing, drains, piping, blocking, nailers, reglets, framing at openings, curbs, parapets and other adjoining and substrate Work. 4. Proceed with and complete the Work only when materials, equipment and knowledgeable tradesmen, required for the installation of sheet metal flashing and trim, are at the Site and are ready to follow, and integrate sheet metal flashing and trim Work with roofing Work, in order to maintain watertight conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Performance Criteria: 1. Sheet metal flashing and trim shall be permanently watertight, and not deteriorate in excess of manufacturer's published limitations. 2. Snap-lock coping shall be detailed, fabricated and installed to provide a minimum of FM 1-90 wind up-lift resistance and require no exposed fasteners of any kind. 3. Comply with fabrication details recommended by FM, SMACNA, NRCA and the requirements of the sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer, and as shown on approved Shop Drawings. 2.2

MATERIALS

A. Metal Sheet metal flashing and trim: 1. Stainless Steel Sheet metal flashing and trim: Provide 26 gage sheet stainless steel, Type 316, complying with ASTM A 666, with No. 2D dead soft, fully annealed finish, unless required to be harder temper for proper forming and performance for application indicated. 2. Aluminum Sheet metal flashing and trim: Provide aluminum complying with ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14. Provide sheet aluminum 0.032-inches thick with AA-C22A41 finish.

00361334.0000

07 62 00-5

Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

B. Flashing Reglets: 1. General: a. Provide snap-lock type reglets of Type 304 stainless steel, 0.020-inches minimum thickness. b. Provide reglets that engage counterflashing by use of a snap-lock or spring-lock profile. System shall employ only mechanical interlocking features for securing counterflashing in reglet, without the need for clips or screws. c. Provide manufacturer’s standard Type 304 stainless steel springlock profile flashing, 5-1/8-inches high, designed to incorporate a positive air break and to engage spring-lock reglet flange. d. Provide reglets with 1-inch end laps and spring-lock flashing with 3-inch end laps. 2. Surface-Mounted Reglets: Provide reglets for surface mounting, with slots for expansion, and a complete line of manufacturer’s standard accessories including drive pins, and 7/8-inch diameter stainless steel washers with neoprene facing. a. Provide engagement flange 2-1/2-inch high by 1/2-inch wide with snap-lock profile shaped to receive sealant at top lip edge and at mid-flange recess. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Type SM Surface Mounted Reglet by Fry Reglet Corporation. 2) Or equal. 3. Surface-Mounted Stucco Reglets: Provide reglets for surface mounting that incorporates a V-edged mounting flange which projects 7/8-inch from the face of the mounting flange and permits stucco to be applied directly over the reglet. a. Provide engagement flange 2-1/2-inch high by 1/2-inch wide with snap-lock profile, shaped to act as an edging bead for stucco. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Type STX Stucco Reglet by Fry Reglet Corporation. 2) Or equal. C. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Burning Rod for Lead: Same composition as lead sheet. 2. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead alloy grade 60A, used with an acid flux of the type recommended by the stainless steel manufacturer. Use a non-corrosive rosin flux over tinned surfaces. 3. Stainless Welding Rods: Type recommended by stainless steel sheet manufacturer for the type of metal sheets furnished. 4. Nails, Screws and Rivets: Same material as flashing sheet, or as recommended by manufacturer of flashing sheet. 5. Cleats: Same metal and gage as sheet being anchored, 2-inches wide, punched for two anchors. 6. Sealants: Refer to Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants.

00361334.0000

07 62 00-6

Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

7. Roofing Cement: Provide a medium to heavy trowel-grade, cut-back asphalt mastic roof cement reinforced with non-asbestos fibers, and containing petroleum solvents and special mineral stabilizers, complying with ASTM D 4586, Type II. 2.3

FABRICATION

A. Fabricated Metal Flashing: Shop-fabricate metal sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with profiles and sizes shown, and to comply with manufacturer's recommended details. Except as otherwise shown or specified, provide soldered flat-lock seams, and fold back metal to form a hem on the concealed side of exposed edges. Comply with metal producers' recommendations for tinning, soldering and cleaning flux from metal. B. Fabricated Elastic Flashings: Shop-fabricate elastic flashing to comply with profiles and sizes shown and to comply with elastomeric material manufacturer recommendations. C. Provide completely shop-fabricated corners and transition sheet metal flashing and trim for all coping, cap flashing and gravel stops; heliarc welded to ensure watertight joints. Grind all welds smooth so as to be indistinguishable from surrounding surfaces. Finish with specified paint system after fabrication. D. Where fabricator does not recommend grinding welds smooth, comply with SMACNA formed metal details requiring double-lock seamed construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION

A. CONTRACTOR and installer shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which the sheet metal flashing and trim Work is to be performed, and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with sheet metal flashing and trim Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. 3.2

PREPARATION

A. Before installing sheet metal flashing and trim, verify shapes, and dimensions to be covered. B. Prepare substrates as recommended by the sheet metal manufacturer. 3.3

INSTALLATION

00361334.0000

07 62 00-7

Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

A. General: 1. Separate dissimilar metals from each other by painting each metal surface in the area of contact with a heavy application of bituminous coating, or by other permanent separation as recommended by the manufacturers of the dissimilar metals. Comply with the following:

2.

3.

4.

5. 6.

7.

a. Separate stainless steel from dissimilar metals, including regular steel and iron, and from cementitious materials by a course of roofing felt wherever possible. Where felt application is not possible, coat the stainless steel or the other material with a 15-mil bituminous coating. Where felt is applied under sheets which will be soldered or welded, cover felt with a course of building paper before installing stainless steel. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for other forms of protection of the stainless steel against corrosion. Provide thermal expansion for running trim, flashing, valleys, and other items exposed for more than 15 feet-0 inches continuous length. Maintain a watertight installation at expansion seams. Locate expansion seams as shown or, if not shown, at the following maximum spacing for each general flashing use: a. Valleys: Midway between drains (at high points in slopes), but in no case more than 30 feet-0 inches apart, except as otherwise shown. b. Sheet metal flashing and trim: At 10 feet-0 inch intervals and 2 feet-0 inch each side of corners and intersections. Fabricate and install Work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves and avoidable tool marks, considering the temper and reflectivity of the metal. Provide uniform, neat flat-locked seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds and sealant. Except as otherwise shown, fold back the sheet metal to form a hem on the concealed side of exposed edges. All exposed edges of all sheet metal flashing shall be hemmed not less than 1/2-inch wide. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions wherever possible in exposed Work, and locate so as to minimize the possibility of leakage. Cover and seal Work as required for a watertight installation. a. Provide cleat-type anchorages for metal flashings and trim wherever practical, arranged to relieve stresses from building movement, and thermal expansion and contraction. On vertical surfaces lap two-piece flashings a minimum of 4-inches. On sloping surfaces, for slopes of not less than 6-inches in 12-inches, lap unsealed flashings a minimum of 6-inches. For slopes less than 6inches in 12-inches use soldered flat locked seams. For embedment of metal flashing flanges in built-up bituminous roofing or composition flashing or stripping, extend flanges for a minimum of 4-inches embedment.

00361334.0000

07 62 00-8

Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

B. Installation of Stainless Steel Sheet metal flashing and trim: 1. Tin the edges of plain stainless steel to be soldered, for a width of 1-1/2-inches, using solder for stainless steel and acid flux. Remove every trace of acid flux residue from the metal promptly after tinning or soldering. 2. Where welded joints are shown, provide upturned, 1/2-inch wide hooked flanges, and weld between adjoining sheets; lay seam flat. C. Installation of Aluminum Sheet metal flashing and trim: Bed base members and flashings of aluminum in roofing cement. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and anchorage of units. Provide gasket-type washers under exposed screw and bolt heads. Shim and seal under units as required to provide continuous, level, plumb and true lines. D. Installation of Reglets and Reglet Counterflashing: 1. Install surface-mounted reglets complying with manufacturer's written instructions to produce a watertight installation. Use sealant specified in Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 2. Install counterflashing with positive pressure against base flashing and reglet and with air break at mid-point to prevent capillary action. No screws or exposed fasteners shall be permitted in the finished Work except those required at each pre-punched hole for surface-mounted reglet attachment. 3. End lap counterflashing horizontally a minimum of 3-inches. 3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Polyvinylidene Fluoride Based Coatings: Determine conformity of sheet metal flashing and trim Work requiring painted finish to these Specifications as follows: 1. The manufacturer of the sheet metal flashing and trim Work shall set aside and label samples of each component of the sheet metal flashing and trim Work from each production lot for the Project. Protect samples from weather. 2. Make samples of sheet metal flashing and trim Work available at all times, for comparison with installed sheet metal flashing and trim Work as requested by OWNER, for the full time of the warranty. 3. Make color comparison measurements with a Hunter Tristimulus Color Difference Meter employing methods of computation in use at the National Bureau of Standards conforming to ASTM D 2224. 3.5

ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim until Final Acceptance of the Work. B. Do not permit workmen, or others, to step directly on flashing sheets in place, or to place or move equipment over sheet metal flashing and trim

00361334.0000

07 62 00-9

Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

surfaces. Protect surfaces during installation of permanent covering work and adjoining Work. C. Neutralize excess flux as the Work progresses with five percent to percent washing soda solution and rinse thoroughly. D. Clean exposed surfaces of every substance which is visible or might cause corrosion or prevent uniform oxidation of the metal surfaces. Exercise extreme care to remove fluxes and ferrous metal particles, including welding splatter and grinding dust.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

07 62 00-10

Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install joint sealants. 2. Extent of each type of calking and sealant is shown or indicated and includes the following: a. Interior and exterior joints in equipment and construction systems not filled by another material, and that are not required to be open for operation. b. Exposed-to-view joints of all fire-rated sealants. c. Joints specified to be recaulked. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before joint sealants. 2. Coordinate final selection of joint sealants so that materials are compatible with all calking and sealant substrates specified. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 00 05, Masonry. 1.2

REFERENCES

A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ASTM C510, Test Method for Staining and Color Change of Single- or Multicomponent Joint Sealants. 2. ASTM C661, Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer. 3. ASTM C793, Test Method for Effects of Accelerated Weathering on Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 4. ASTM C794, Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 5. ASTM C920, Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 6. ASTM C1021, Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing Building Sealants. 7. ASTM C1087, Test method for Determining Compatibility of LiquidApplied Sealants with Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems. 00361334.0000

07 92 00-1

Joint Sealants

8. ASTM C1193, Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 9. ASTM C1247, Practice for Durability of Sealants Exposed to Continuous Immersion in Liquids. 10. BAAQMD Regulation 8, Rule 51. 11. FS TT-S-00227, Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-component (for Calking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures). 12. FS TT-S-00230 Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component (for Calking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures). 13. NSF/ANSI Standard 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 14. SCAQMD Rule 1168. 1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: 1. Installer: a. Engage a single installer, approved by product manufacturer, regularly engaged in calking and sealant installation and with successful experience in applying types of products required, and who employs only tradesmen with specific skill and successful experience in the type of Work required. 2. Testing Laboratory: a. Furnish services of independent testing laboratory qualified according to ASTM C1021, for conducting testing required. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain materials only from manufacturers who will, if required: a. Furnish at the Site services of a qualified technical representative to advise installer of proper procedures and precautions for using materials. b. Test joint sealants for compatibility with substrates for conformance with FS-TT-S-00227, and recommend remedial procedures as required. 2. Before purchasing each sealant, investigate its compatibility with joint surfaces, joint fillers, and other materials in joint system. Provide products that are fully compatible with actual installation condition, verified by manufacturer’s published data or certification, and as shown on approved Shop Drawings and other approved submittals. C. Product Testing: Provide test results of laboratory pre-construction compatibility and adhesion testing, as specified in Article 3.1 of this Section, by qualified testing laboratory, based on testing of current sealant formulations within a 36-month period preceding the Notice to Proceed for the Work.

00361334.0000

07 92 00-2

Joint Sealants

1. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C920 and, where applicable, to other standard test methods. 2. Test other joint sealants for compliance using specified postconstruction field adhesion test. 1.4

SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Schedule of joint sealants installation, indication each specific surface where calking or sealants are to be provided and the material proposed for each application. 2. Product Data: a. Copies of manufacturer’s data sheets including color charts, specifications, recommendations, and installation instructions for each type of sealant, calking compound, and associated miscellaneous material required. Include manufacturer’s published data, indicating that each product complies with the Contract Documents and is intended for the applications shown or indicated. b. Product test reports. 3. Samples: a. Each type of actual cured material of each calking and sealant specified, in each of manufacturer’s standard colors. b. Samples will be reviewed by ENGINEER for color and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is responsibility of CONTRACTOR. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Certify that materials are suitable for intended use and materials meet or exceed requirements of the Contract Documents. b. Certification from manufacturer that products furnished are appropriate for surfaces and conditions to which they will be applied. c. Certify that applicator is approved by manufacturer. 2. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Results of tests on job mock-ups. b. Pre-construction and post-construction field test reports. c. Compatibility and adhesion test reports. d. Contractor’s Field Test Report Logs: 1) Indicate time present at the Site. 2) Include observations and results of field tests, and document compliance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and supplemental instructions provided to installers. 3. Qualifications: Submit qualifications for: 00361334.0000

07 92 00-3

Joint Sealants

a. Installer. b. Testing laboratory (if not already submitted under Section 01 45 23, Testing Laboratory Services Furnished by Owner, or Section 01 45 13, Testing Laboratory Services Furnished by Contractor). C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. and Maintenance Data: a. inspection intervals. b. for repairing and replacing failed sealant joints. 2. Warranty: Submit written warranties as specified in this Section. 1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Comply with Section 01 65 00, Product Delivery Requirements, and Section 01 66 00, Product Storage and Handling Requirements, and the following: 1. Delivery of Products: a. Deliver products in calking and sealant manufacturer’s original unopened, undamaged containers, indicating compliance with approved Shop Drawings and approved Sample color selections. b. Include the following information on label: 1) Name of material and Supplier. 2) Formula or Specification Section number, lot number, color and date of manufacture. 3) Mixing instructions, shelf life, and curing time, when applicable. 2. Storage of Products: a. Do not store or expose materials to temperature above 90 degrees F or store in direct sunlight. b. Do not use materials that are outdated as indicated by shelf life. c. Store sealant tape in manner that will not deform tape. d. In cool or cold weather, store containers for sixteen hours before using in temperature of approximately 75 degrees F. e. When high temperatures prevail, store mixed sealants in a cool place. 3. Handling: a. not open containers or mix components until necessary preparatory Work and priming are complete. 1.6

JOB CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions: 1. Do not install joint sealants under adverse weather conditions, or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer’s recommended limitations for installation. 2. Proceed with the Work when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper cure and development of high-early bond strength. 00361334.0000

07 92 00-4

Joint Sealants

3. Where joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric sealants when temperatures are in the lower third of manufacturer’s recommended installation temperature range, so that sealant will not be subjected to excessive elongation and bond stress at subsequent low temperatures. 4. When high temperatures prevail, avoid mixing sealants in direct sunlight. 5. Supplemental heat sources required to maintain both ambient and surface temperatures within the range recommended by manufacturer for material applications are not available at the Site. 6. Provide supplemental heat and energy sources, power, equipment, and operating, maintenance, and temperature monitoring personnel. 7. Do not use heat sources that emit carbon dioxide or carbon monoxide into areas of calking, sealants, and painting Work, and areas where OWNER’s personnel or construction personnel may work. Properly locate and vent such heat sources to outdoors so that joint sealants and other Work are unaffected by exhaust. 1.7

WARRANTY

A. Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer and CONTRACTOR, agreeing to repair or replace sealants that fail to perform as air-tight and watertight joints; or fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, or general durability; or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified in approved Shop Drawings and other submittals, as an inherent quality of material for exposure indicated. 1. Provide manufacturer warranty for period of one year from date of Substantial Completion of joint sealants Work. 2. Provide installer warranty for period of two years from date of Substantial Completion of joint sealants Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE B. Provide elastomeric joint sealants for interior and exterior joint applications that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. C. VOC Performance Criteria: 1. VOC content of sealants used shall comply with current VOC content limits of SCAQMD Rule 1168. Sealants used as fillers shall comply with or exceed requirements of BAAQMD Regulation 8, Rule 51. a. Sealants: 250 g/L. b. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. c. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 00361334.0000

07 92 00-5

Joint Sealants

D. Provide colors selected by ENGINEER from calking and sealant manufacturer’s standard and custom color charts. “Or equal” manufacturers shall provide same generic products and colors as available from manufacturers specified. 2.2MATERIALS A. Exterior and Interior Horizontal and Vertical Joints; Submerged and Intermittently Submerged in Potable Water or Water That Will be Treated to Become Potable: 1. One-component Polyurethane Sealant: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Sikaflex-1a by Sika Corporation. 2) Or equal. b. One-component, moisture cured, gun grade, polyurethane sealant, complying with: 1) FS TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class A; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 2) Adhesion-in-Peel, FS TT-S-00230C, ASTM C794 (minimum five pounds.): Glass, minimum 20 pounds per linear inch; Aluminum, minimum 20 pounds per linear inch; Concrete, minimum 20 pounds per linear inch. 3) Hardness (Standard Conditions), ASTM D2240: 20 to 25 (Shore A). 4) Stain and Color Change, FS TT-S-00227E and ASTM C510: No discoloration or stain. 5) Accelerated Aging, ASTM C793: No change in sealant characteristics after 250 hours in weatherometer. 6) Rheological Vertical Displacement at 120 degrees F, FS TT-S-00227E: No sag. 7) VOC Content: 100 g/L, maximum. 8) Listed in NSF/ANSI 61 2. Two-component Polyurethane Sealant: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Sikaflex- 2c NS by Sika Corporation. 2) Or equal. b. Two-component, moisture cured, gun grade, polyurethane sealant, complying with: 1) FS TT-S-00227E, Type II, Class A; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. 2) Adhesion-in-Peel, FS TT-S-00227E, ASTM C794 (Minimum five pounds per linear inch with no adhesion failure): 18 pounds. 3) Hardness (Standard Conditions), ASTM C661: 25 (Shore A). 4) Stain and Color Change, FS TT-S-00227E and ASTM C510: No discoloration or stain. 5) Accelerated Aging, ASTM C793: No change in sealant characteristics after 250 hours in weatherometer. 00361334.0000

07 92 00-6

Joint Sealants

6) Rheological Vertical Displacement at 120 degrees F, FS TT-S-00227E: No sag. 7) Content: 220 g/L, maximum. 8) in NSF/ANSI 61 B. Exterior and Interior Vertical Joints; Non-submerged: 1. Two-component Polyurethane Sealant: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Sikaflex- 2c NS by Sika Corporation. 2) Dymeric 240 FC by Tremco Sealant/Waterproofing Division of RPM International, Inc. 3) Or equal. b. Polyurethane based, two-component elastomeric sealant complying with: 1) FS TT-S-00227E: Type II (non-sag) Class A and ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. 2) Adhesion-in-Peel, FS TT-S-00227E and ASTM C794: (Minimum five pounds per linear inch with no adhesion failure): 10 pounds. 3) Hardness (Standard Conditions), ASTM C661: 25 to 35 (Shore A). 4) Stain and color change, FS TT-S-00227E and ASTM C510: No discoloration or stain. 5) Accelerated Aging, ASTM C793: No change in sealant characteristics after 250 hours in weatherometer. 6) Rheological Vertical Displacement at 120 degrees F, FS TT-S-00227E: No sag. 7) Content: 100 g/L, maximum. C. Exterior and Interior Horizontal Joints; Non-submerged: 1. Two-component Polyurethane Sealant: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Sikaflex- 2c SL by Sika Corporation. 2) THC/900 by Tremco Sealant/Waterproofing Division of RPM International, Inc. 3) Or equal. b. Polyurethane based, two-component elastomeric, self-leveling sealant complying with the following: 1) FS TT-S-00227E, Type I (self-leveling) Class A. and ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25 2) Water Immersion Bond, FS TT-S-00227E: Elongation of 50 percent with no adhesive failure. 3) Hardness (Standard Conditions), ASTM C661: 35 to 45. 4) Stain and Color Change, FS TT-S-00227E and ASTM C510: No discoloration or stain. 5) Accelerated Aging, ASTM C793: No change in sealant characteristics after 250 hours in weatherometer. 6) Content: 165 g/L, maximum. 00361334.0000

07 92 00-7

Joint Sealants

D. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Joint Cleaner: As recommended by calking and sealant manufacturer. 2. Joint Primer and Sealer: As recommended for compatibility with calking and sealant by calking and sealant manufacturer. 3. Bond Breaker Type: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended for compatibility with calking and sealant by calking and sealant manufacturer, to be applied to sealant-contact surfaces where bond to substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of calking and sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 4. Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other flexible, permanent, durable nonabsorptive material as recommended for compatibility with calking and sealant by calking and sealant manufacturer. Provide size and shape of rod that will control joint depth for sealant placement, break bond of sealant at bottom of joint, form optimum shape of sealant bead on back side, and provide highly-compressible backer to minimize possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is compressed. 5. Low-temperature Catalyst: As recommended by calking and sealant manufacturer. E. Products for Other Applications: 1. Fire-Rated Sealants: Refer to Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation. 2. Compressible Filler: Refer to Section 04 00 05, Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION

A. Examine joint surfaces, substrates, backing, and anchorage of units forming sealant rabbet, and conditions under which calking and sealant Work will be performed, and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work and performance of sealants. Do not proceed with calking and sealant Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Laboratory Pre-construction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers for testing indicated below samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use ASTM C1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Submit at least eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 00361334.0000

07 92 00-8

Joint Sealants

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For products that fail tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer’s written instructions for corrective measures including using specially formulated primers. 5. Immersion Testing: ASTM C1247 for potable water and wastewater. 6. Testing will not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted and mock-up field testing is acceptable. 3.2

PREPARATION

A. Protection: Do not allow joint sealants to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces including rough textured materials. Use masking tape or other precautionary devices to prevent staining of adjoining surfaces, by either the primer/sealer or calking and sealant materials. B. Joint Surface Preparation: 1. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installing sealant compound. Remove dirt, weakly adhering coatings, moisture and other substances that would interfere with bonds of sealant compound as recommended in sealant manufacturer’s written instructions as shown on approved Shop Drawings. 2. If necessary, clean porous materials by grinding, sandblasting, or mechanical abrading. Blow out joints with oil-free compressed air or by vacuuming joints prior to applying primer or sealant. 3. Roughen joint surfaces on vitreous coated and similar non-porous materials, when sealant manufacturer’s data indicates lower bond strength than for porous surfaces. Rub with fine abrasive cloth or steel wool to produce a dull sheen. C. Mixing: 1. Comply with sealant manufacturer’s written instructions for mixing multi-component sealants. 2. Thoroughly mix components before use. 3. Add entire contents of activator can to base container. Do not mix partial units. 4. Mix contents for minimum of five minutes or as recommended by sealant manufacturer, until color and consistency are uniform. 3.3

INSTALLATION

A. Install joint sealants after adjacent areas have been cleaned and before joint has been cleaned and primed, to ensure calking and sealant joints will not be soiled. Replace calking and sealant joints soiled after installation. 00361334.0000

07 92 00-9

Joint Sealants

B. Comply with sealant manufacturer’s written instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, and except where manufacturer’s technical representative directs otherwise, only as acceptable to ENGINEER. C. Prime or seal joint surfaces as shown on approved Shop Drawings and approved other submittals. Do not allow primer or sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces. Allow primer to dry prior to applying sealants. D. Apply masking tape before installing primer, in continuous strips in alignment with joint edge to produce sharp, clean interface with adjoining materials. Remove tape immediately after joints have been sealed and tooled as directed. E. Do not install sealants without backer rods and bond breaker tape. F. Roll back-up rod stock into joint to avoid lengthwise stretching. Do not twist, braid, puncture, or prime backer rods. G. Employ only proven installation techniques that will ensure that sealants are deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete “wetting” of joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. H. Install sealants to depths recommended by sealant manufacturer but within the following general limitations, measured at the center (thin) section of bead. 1. For horizontal joints in sidewalks, pavements, and similar locations sealed with elastomeric sealants and subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to depth equal to 75 percent of joint width, but not more than 5/8-inch deep or less than 3/8-inch deep. 2. For vertical joints subjected to normal movement and sealed with elastomeric sealants and not subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50 percent of joint width, but not more than 1/2-inch deep or less than 1/4-inch deep. I.

Remove excess and spillage of compounds promptly as the Work progresses.

J.

Cure calking and sealant compounds in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, to obtain high-early bond strength, internal cohesive strength, and surface durability.

3.4

EXISTING JOINTS 00361334.0000

07 92 00-10

Joint Sealants

A. Mechanically remove existing sealant and backer rod. B. Clean joint surfaces of residual sealant and other contaminates capable of affecting sealant bond to joint surface. C. Conduct laboratory pre-construction compatibility and adhesion testing on joint surfaces in accordance with Paragraph 3.1.B of this Section. D. Allow joint surfaces to dry before installing new sealants. 3.5

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Post-construction Field Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field-test joint sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows: a. Perform ten tests for the first 1,000 feet of joint length for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate. b. Perform one test for each 1,000 feet of joint length thereafter, and minimum of one test per each floor per elevation. c. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Fieldapplied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, and Method D, Water Immersion in Appendix X1 of ASTM C1193. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately by extending cut along one side and verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. d. Inspect joints for complete fill, absence of voids, and joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a log of field adhesion tests. e. Inspect tested joints and report on whether: 1) Sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer’s field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria. 2) Sealants filled the joint cavities and are free of voids. 3) Sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. f. Record test results in a log of field adhesion tests. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. g. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. 00361334.0000

07 92 00-11

Joint Sealants

h. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other requirements will be satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. i. Do not proceed with installation of elastomeric sealants over joint surfaces that have been painted, lacquered, waterproofed, or treated with water repellent or other treatment or coating unless a laboratory test for durability (adhesion), in compliance with FS TT-S-00227, has successfully demonstrated that sealant bond is not impaired by the coating or treatment. If laboratory test has not been performed or shows bond interference, remove coating or treatment from joint surfaces before installing sealant. B. Water Leak Testing: Field test for water leaks as follows: 1. Flood the joint exposure with water directed from a 3/4-inch diameter garden hose, without nozzle, held perpendicular to wall face, two feet from joint and connected to water system with 30 psi minimum normal water pressure. Move stream of water along joint at an approximate rate of 20 feet per minute. 2. Test approximately five percent of total joint system, in locations that are typical of every joint condition, and that can be inspected easily for leakage on opposite face. Conduct test in presence of ENGINEER, who will determine actual percentage of joints to be tested and actual period of exposure to water from hose, based on extent of observed leakage or lack of observed leakage. 3. Where nature of observed leaks indicates potential of inadequate joint bond strength, ENGINEER may direct that additional testing be performed at a time when joints are fully cured, and before Substantial Completion. 3.6

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Where leaks and lack of adhesion are evident, replace sealant. B. Clean adjacent surfaces of sealant and soiling resulting from the Work. Use solvent or cleaning agent recommended by sealant manufacturer. Leave all finish Work in neat, clean condition. C. Protect sealants during construction so that they will be without deterioration, soiling, or damage at time of readiness for final payment of the Contract. 3.7

PROTECTION

A. During and after curing period, protect joint sealants from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction 00361334.0000

07 92 00-12

Joint Sealants

operations or other causes, so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original Work.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

07 92 00-13

Joint Sealants

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 08 11 16 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install all aluminum doors and frames Work. 2. The extent of aluminum doors and frames Work is shown. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before the aluminum doors and frames Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 2. Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware. 1.2

REFERENCES

A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. Aluminum Association, (AA). a. AA DAF 45, Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 2. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturing Association, (AAMA). a. AAMA 701.1, Standard for Sliding Weatherstripping. 3. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). a. ASTM B 117, Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. b. ASTM D 522, Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings. c. ASTM D 523, Test Method for Specular Gloss. d. ASTM D 968, Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive. e. ASTM D 1308, Practice for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes. f. ASTM D 2244, Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. g. ASTM D 2247, Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity. h. ASTM D 4214, Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. 4. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, (NAAMM). 00361334.0000

08 11 16-1

Aluminum Doors and Frames

a. NAAMM, Hardware Location for Custom Hollow Metal Doors. b. NAAMM, Metal Finishes Manual. 5. The Society for Protective Coatings, (SSPC). a. SSPC Paint 12, Cold Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film). 6. Florida Building Code, (FBC) including High Velocity Hurricane Zone of the F BC. 1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Provide aluminum doors, transom and frames manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of Work. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years of experience in the production of aluminum doors and frames, and shall be able to show evidence of satisfactory operation in at least five installations. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain all products included in this Section regardless of the component manufacturer from a single aluminum doors and frames manufacturer. 2. The aluminum doors and frames manufacturer to review and approve or to prepare all Shop Drawings and other submittals for all components furnished under this Section. 3. All components shall be specifically constructed for the specified service conditions and shall be integrated into the overall assembly by the aluminum doors and frames manufacturer. 1.4

SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Copies of manufacturer's fabrication and installation drawings of aluminum doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of each door type, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, details of joints and connections. Show all door and frame reinforcements. b. Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those shown. 2. Samples: Submit the following: a. Samples of each required aluminum finish, on 12-inch long extrusions or 6-inch square sheets, of the alloys to be used for the Work. Where normal color and texture variations are to be expected, include two or more units in each sample, to show the range of such variations. b. Samples shall be reviewed by ENGINEER for color and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of CONTRACTOR. 00361334.0000

08 11 16-2

Aluminum Doors and Frames

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete in ample time to prevent delay of that Work. 2. Deliver aluminum doors and frames cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 2. Store doors and frames at the Site under cover. Place units up off the floors in a manner that will prevent corrosion and damage. Avoid the use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which could create a humidity chamber. If the cardboard wrapper on the door becomes wet, remove the carton immediately. Provide a 1/4-inch space between stacked doors to promote air circulation. C. Acceptance at Site: 1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide aluminum Alloy 6063-T5 or equal for properties of strength (not less than 22,000 pounds per square inch ultimate tensile strength), corrosion resistance, abrasion resistance, application of required finish, and control of color. B. Aluminum Sheets: 1. Provide aluminum Alloy 5005-H14, or equal, for properties of strength corrosion resistance, abrasion resistance, application of required finish, and control of color. 2. Provide smooth sheet for exposed faces of doors and panels, except as otherwise specified. C. Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or other non-corrosive metal fasteners guaranteed by the manufacturer to be compatible with the 00361334.0000

08 11 16-3

Aluminum Doors and Frames

doors, frames, stops, panels, hardware, anchors and other items being fastened. 1. For exposed fasteners (if any), provide Phillips flat-head screws with finish matching the item fastened. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, except where unavoidable for the assembly of units, and unavoidable for the application of hardware. Provide only concealed screws in glazing stops. D. Reinforcement and Brackets: Manufacturer’s standard formed or fabricated aluminum units, of shapes, plates or bars. E. Inserts: For required anchorage into concrete or masonry work, furnish inserts of 12- gauge steel stainless steel after fabrication. F. Expansion Anchor Devices: Stainless steel, drilled-in, expansion bolt anchors. G. Bituminous Coatings: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC Paint 12, compounded for 30-mil thickness per coat. 2.2

FABRICATION

A. General: 1. Sizes and Profiles: The required sizes for door and frame units and the profile requirements are shown. Variable dimensions for profiles (if any) are shown along with maximum and minimum dimensions as required to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. 2. The details shown are based upon standard details by one or more manufacturers. Similar details by other manufacturers will be acceptable, provided they comply with the size requirements, and with minimum/maximum profile requirements as shown. B. Flush Type Aluminum Doors: 1. Provide tubular frames members with minimum wall thickness of 1/8-inch, fabricated with reinforced mechanical or welded joints in accordance with manufacturer’s standard fabrication methods. Limit edge exposure and face molding exposure to 0.50-inch maximum width. 2. Fabricate flush doors with cores laminated between two sheets of 0.040-inch thick aluminum laminated to 1/8-inch thick oil-tempered hardboard with epoxy adhesive to form a door thickness of 1-3/4-inch and of a true 5-ply construction. 3. Provide cores of 20 percent phenolic resin-impregnated honeycomb material 80 lbs. per 3,000 sq. ft. ream, (7/16-inch cells) laminated with an epoxy adhesive between two sheets of 1/8-inch thick tempered hardboard.

00361334.0000

08 11 16-4

Aluminum Doors and Frames

4. Provide transom frames of the same material, finish, thickness and gauge as the door and frame material. 5. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. 100 BE Doors with Frame by Cline Aluminum Doors, Inc. b. Or equal. C. Door Louvers: 1. Fabricate louvers and mount flush into doors without overlapping moldings on surface of door-facing sheets. Provide internal support as recommended by louver manufacturer. Provide profile as shown. 2. Exterior Louvers: Fabricate units with stationary, weatherproof Z-shaped blades and U-shaped frames, not less than 1-3/8-inch thick. Space louver blades not more than 1-1/2-inches on center. Assemble units by welding. Provide removable insect screens on the interior side of the frame. D. Glass: 1. Clear, Fully Tempered, Float Glass: a. Uncoated, Monolithic, Clear, Fully Tempered, Float Glass: Provide clear glass, with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass, in compliance with ASTM C 1048, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), Kind FT. b. Provide heat-strengthened glass that has been heat-strengthened by manufacturer's special process (after cutting to final size,) to achieve a flexural strength of up to five times that of annealed glass strength; 1/4-inch thick, minimum. c. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Herculite Clear by PPG Industries, Incorporated. 2) Fully Tempered Clear Glass by Guardian Industries, Corporation. 3) Or equal. 2.3

HARDWARE

A. Flush Doors: Refer to Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware, and to the frame, door and hardware schedules and details, for the furnishing and installing of hardware items. Hardware templates only will be furnished to the manufacturer for the fabrication of door and frames to receive hardware not supplied by door manufacturer. B. Hardware Installation: Cut, reinforce, drill and tap frames and doors as required to receive hardware, except do not drill and tap for surface-mounted items until the time of installation. Comply with hardware manufacturer’s instructions and template requirements. Use concealed fasteners, wherever possible. 2.4

ALUMINUM FINISHES

00361334.0000

08 11 16-5

Aluminum Doors and Frames

A. General: 1. Preparation: After fabrication of doors and frames, but before lamination of panels, prepare the aluminum surfaces for finishing in accordance with the aluminum producer’s recommendations and standards of the finisher or processor. Process all components of each assembly simultaneously to attain complete uniformity of color. 2. Samples: a. Comply with industry standard colors and texture samples. Establish Samples of the required finish, for ENGINEER’S acceptance, prior to fabrication of the Work. ENGINEER reserves the right to reject material finishes with objectionable variations from the established samples. b. Prepare samples on extrusions and sheets of the exact alloys to be used for the Work, and show range of natural variations to be expected in finished Work, by duplicate samples of varying color and texture. B. Anodized Finishes: NAAMM AA-M10-C22-A41, (minimum thickness of 0.7mils), Clear. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION CONTRACTOR shall examine the substrate and conditions under which aluminum doors and frames Work are to be installed and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER.

3.2

INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations for the installation of aluminum doors and frames. B. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames, doors or panels. Anchor securely in place. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.3

ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of frames and doors. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances.

00361334.0000

08 11 16-6

Aluminum Doors and Frames

B. Where protective coating has been supplied, remove coating completely as soon as the completion of construction activities no longer requires its retention. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide protective treatment and other precautions required as recommended by manufacturer, through the remainder of the construction period, to ensure that doors and frames will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering) at the time of Final Acceptance.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

08 11 16-7

Aluminum Doors and Frames

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install door hardware. Furnish door hardware for all doors in compliance with these Specifications herein. 2. Extent of door hardware is specified. Door hardware is defined to include all items known commercially as door hardware, except special types of unique and non-matching hardware specified in the same Section as the door and door frame. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before, the door hardware. 2. Coordinate the Work of other Sections to provide clearances and accurate positioning of recessed or cast-in-place items. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 11 16, Aluminum Doors and Frames. 1.2

REFERENCES

A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. American National Standards Institute, (ANSI). a. ANSI A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. American National Standards Institute, (ANSI), in association with Builders Hardware Manufacturers' Association, (ANSI/BHMA). a. ANSI/BHMA A156.1, Butts and Hinges. b. ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Exit Devices. c. ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Door Controls - Closers. d. ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Architectural Door Trim. e. ANSI/BHMA A156.7, Template Hinge Dimensions. f. ANSI/BHMA A156.8, Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders. g. ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Mortise Locks and Latches, Series 1000. h. ANSI/BHMA A156.16, American National Standard for Auxiliary Hard-ware. i. ANSI/BHMA A156.18, Hardware - Materials and Finishes. j. ANSI/BHMA A156.21, Thresholds. 00361334.0000

08 71 00-1

Door Hardware

3.

4.

5. 6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

1.3

k. ANSI/BHMA A156.22, Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems. ANSI, in association with Door and Hardware Institute, (ANSI/DHI). a. ANSI/DHI A115.1, Preparation of Mortise Locks in 1-3/8-inch and 1-3/4-inch Standard Steel Doors and Frames. ANSI, in association with National Fire Protection Association, (ANSI/NFPA). a. ANSI/NFPA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. ANSI, in association with Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., (UL). a. UL 10B, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (Public Law 101-336), Appendix A to Title 28 Code of Federal Regulations Part 36 (Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities - ADAAG). Door and Hardware Institute, (DHI). a. DHI, Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. b. DHI, Recommended Locations for Builders’ Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames. c. DHI, Sequencing and Format for the Hardware Schedule. Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association, Division of National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, (HMMA). a. HMMA 830, Hardware Preparation and Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. Steel Door Institute, (SDI). a. SDI 109, Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. b. SDI 118, Basic Fire Door Requirements. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., (UL). a. UL 305, Panic Hardware. b. UL, Building Materials Directory.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: 1. Provide door hardware and accessories manufactured by firms specializing in the production of this type of Work and complying with specified standards of ANSI, BHMA, DHI, NFPA, HMMA, SDI and UL. 2. Provide door hardware from manufacturers who are members of BHMA and participate in BHMA certification programs. B. Installer’s Qualifications: 1. The door hardware installer shall have in his employ an architectural hardware consultant. The architectural hardware consultant shall be a member of the Door and Hardware Institute, (DHI), who has passed the DHI certification examine and successfully completed an apprenticeship program. The architectural hardware consultant shall be responsible for preparing door hardware schedules and Shop Drawings and be present at the Site for the purpose of checking and supervising the Work of the installer during the time of installation and 00361334.0000

08 71 00-2

Door Hardware

adjustment of the door hardware Work, and shall prepare a written field report on status of completed door hardware installation as specified. 2. Submit name and qualifications of the installer to ENGINEER. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Provide door hardware for fire-resistance-rated openings in compliance with NFPA 80. 2. Provide only door hardware that has been tested, listed and labeled by UL for the types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the door and door frame labels. 3. Modify features of door hardware items specified, and provide additional accessories and features as required to meet UL and NFPA requirements, at no additional cost to the OWNER. D. Codes: Comply with applicable requirements of codes. E. Source Quality Control: 1. Obtain each type of door hardware item from only one manufacturer. 2. Provide door hardware schedule, for submission to, and for approval by, ENGINEER, prepared in compliance with DHI standards. 3. Comply with specified BHMA standards. 1.4

SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: a. Copies of manufacturer's data for each item of door hardware. Include whatever information may be required to show compliance with specified requirements, and include instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and exposed finishes. Include mounting heights and locations for each item of door hardware. Provide ENGINEER with latest complete technical catalogue of all available door hardware manufactured by proposed manufacturers, even if manufacturer specified by ENGINEER is submitted by CONTRACTOR to perform the Work. Furnish templates to fabricators of other Work, which is to receive door hardware. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Copies of the Door Hardware Schedule in the manner and format specified, complying with the actual construction Progress Schedule requirements (for each draft). Include explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes used to present scheduled information. 1) Prepare and submit Door Hardware Schedule in compliance with HDI standards. b. Based on the door hardware requirements specified, organize the final Door Hardware Schedule into "hardware sets," indicating complete designation of every item required for each door or 00361334.0000

08 71 00-3

Door Hardware

c. d.

opening. Furnish initial draft of schedule at the earliest possible date, in order to facilitate the fabrication of other Work (such as hollow metal frames) which may be critical in the Project Schedule. Furnish final draft of schedule after Samples, manufacturer's data sheets, coordination with Shop Drawings for other Work, delivery schedules and similar information have been completed and accepted. Include a separate key schedule, showing clearly how OWNER'S final instructions on keying of locks have been fulfilled. Door Hardware Schedules are intended for coordination of the Work. Review and acceptance by ENGINEER does not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility to fulfill the requirements as shown and specified.

B. Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Test and Evaluation Reports: a. Certified independent laboratory test reports for BHMA certification program and certification tests for each type of product specified. 2. Qualifications Statements: a. Installer. C. Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and Maintenance Documentation: Upon completion of the Work, furnish five copies of detailed maintenance manuals, including the following information: a. Product name and manufacturer. b. Name, address, e-mail address and telephone number of manufacturer and local distributor. c. Detailed procedure for routine maintenance and cleaning. d. Detailed procedures for repairs such as dents, scratches and staining. e. Parts identification manual and maintenance manuals for each piece of door hardware. 1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete in ample time to prevent delay of that Work. 2. Deliver all items of door hardware in manufacturer’s original, undamaged packages, bearing accurate representation of the item within each package. 3. Pack each piece of door hardware separately, complete with screws, keying, instructions and templates, tagged to correspond with items submitted on approved Shop Drawings and as specified. B. Storage and Protection: 00361334.0000

08 71 00-4

Door Hardware

1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 2. Provide secure storage area for door hardware items, secured by locks and accessible only to door hardware installer, ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR. 3. Store door hardware in manufacturers' original packages. C. Acceptance at Site: 1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Items that arrive in a damaged condition shall be removed from the Site and not offered again for acceptance. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Description: 1. Where the door, shape, size, fire-resistance-rating, frequency of use, or function of a member receiving door hardware is such as to prevent, or make unsuitable, the types of door hardware specified, furnish similar types having as nearly as practicable the same operation but of type or kind more appropriate to the design intension and requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. Clearly identify and highlight to ENGINEER all such required modifications on Shop Drawings submitted for approval. 2. If door hardware for any location is not specified, provide door hardware equal in design and quality to adjacent door hardware specified for comparable openings at no additional cost to OWNER. 3. Furnish door hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements, as necessary for proper installation and function. 4. Unless otherwise specified, comply with DHI, Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and Recommended Locations for Builders’ Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames. 2.2

DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION

A. General: 1. Hand of Door: The Drawings show the swing or hand of each door leaf (left, right, reverse bevel, etc.). Furnish each item of door hardware for proper installation and operation of the door swing as shown. 00361334.0000

08 71 00-5

Door Hardware

2. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturer's products which have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates), except in conjunction with labels required by governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. 3. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of the basic metal and forming method specified, using the manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness. Do not substitute materials or forming methods for those specified. 4. Fasteners: Manufacture door hardware to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide door hardware, which has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. 5. Furnish screws for installation, with each door hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise specified. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match the hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces on other Work, to match the finish of such other Work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish. 6. Provide fasteners which are compatible with both the unit fastened and the substrate, and which will not cause corrosion or deterioration of door hardware, base material or fastener. 7. Provide concealed fasteners for door hardware units, which are not exposed when the door is closed, except to the extent no standard manufacturer units of the type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where the bolt head or the nut on the opposite face is exposed in other Work under any condition, except where it is not possible to adequately reinforce the Work and use machine screws or concealed fasteners of another standard type to satisfactorily avoid the use of through bolts. 8. Tools for Maintenance: Furnish two complete sets of specialized tools as required for OWNER'S continued adjustment, maintenance, removal and replacement of door hardware. B. Mortise Hinges: 1. Templates and Screws: Provide only template-produced units. 2. Base Metal: Except as otherwise specified, fabricate hinges from stainless steel and finish to match the latch and lock set. 3. Number of Hinges: Provide three hinges on each door leaf of less than 60-inches in height; provide one additional hinge for next 30-inches of door height or fraction thereof; provide two additional hinges for each 30-inches, or fraction thereof, for doors above 90-inches tall. 4. Hinge Size: Except as otherwise specified or as required to comply with UL and NFPA, provide hinges of the following sizes: a. Interior Doors: 1) Heavy Use, Maximum 36-Inches Wide: 4-1/2-inch heavyweight (0.180-inches). b. Exterior Doors, Maximum 36-Inches Wide: 4-1/2-inch heavyweight (0.180-inch). 00361334.0000

08 71 00-6

Door Hardware

c.

5.

6.

7. 8. 9.

Wide Exterior and Interior Doors: 1) Maximum 48-inches wide: 5-inch heavyweight (0.190-inch). Types of Hinges: Provide full-mortise type, ball-bearing hinges, swaged for mortise applications, inner leaf beveled, square cornered, unless manufacturer's recommendations indicate that half-mortise, half-surface, full-surface or other type should be used for the frame and door type or condition. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise specified, provide hinge pins as follows: a. Pins: Stainless steel. b. Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins. Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed. c. Tips: Slope ends of hinge barrel. Conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.7. Comply with UL, List of Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and Materials and NFPA 80 requirements. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. FBB 199 and FBB 191 by Stanley Commercial Hardware, Division of The Stanley Works. b. T4B3386 and TB3313 by McKinney Products Company, Division of ESSEX Industries, Incorporated. c. Or equal.

C. High-Security Mortise Locks and Latch Sets: 1. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike, for each location and use shown. Provide stainless steel curved lip strikes, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, finished to match lock or latch set trim. 2. Lock Throw: Provide minimum of 3/4-inch anti-friction latch bolt and 1-inch dead bolt throw. Comply with UL requirements for throw of latch bolts and deadbolts on fire-resistance-rated openings. 3. Materials: Provide the following features and materials: a. Latch Bolt: Two-piece; mechanical; anti-friction, stainless steel. b. Dead Bolt: One-piece, stainless steel with two enclosed hardenedsteel roller armor pins. c. Case: Wrought steel, zinc dichromatized. d. Cylinders: High-security; brass; pick- and drill-resistant; ANSI/BHMA A156.5 - E09211A. e. Armor Front: 8-inches by 1-1/4-inches wide, minimum; steel. f. Escutcheon: 8-inches by 2-1/2-inches wide by 3/16-inches thick, minimum; stainless steel, US 32D. g. Hubs: Sintered steel, copper infiltrated. h. Lever with Stop Pin: Brass, plated to match stainless steel, with additional built-in stop to prevent over-torquing of lever. i. All components shall be of marine quality, wherever possible. 4. Backset: 2-3/4-inches. 00361334.0000

08 71 00-7

Door Hardware

5. Modify specified locks and latches to comply with UL, Building Materials Directory, and List of Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and Materials and NFPA 80 requirements. 6. Finish: US 32D satin. 7. Conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Security Grade 1. 8. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. High Security SL8700 Mortise Lockset Augusta - ASL Lever Handles and Trim by Yale Security, Incorporated, Division of Yale Security Group. b. Or equal. D. Panic Exit Devices: 1. Exit Doors: Where shown, provide panic exit devices, of the type required, including UL labels. 2. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought stainless steel jambmounted top latch bolt and bottom latch bolt for each location and use shown to allow independent opening and closing of each leaf of double doors with panic exit devices; complying with UL List of Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and Materials and NFPA 80 requirements. 3. Lock Throws: Provide minimum of 3/4-inch latch bolt throw complying with UL List of Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and Materials and NFPA 80 requirements. 4. Provide concealed vertical rod type exit device and mortise type exit devices as specified. 5. Provide the following features and materials: a. Latch Bolt: Two-piece; mechanical; anti-friction, stainless steel. b. Dead Bolt: One-piece, stainless steel with two enclosed hardenedsteel roller armor pins. c. Case: Wrought steel, zinc dichromatized. d. Cylinders: High-security; brass; pick- and drill-resistant; ANSI/BHMA A156.5 - E09211A. e. Armor Front: 8-inches by 1-1/4-inches wide, minimum; steel. f. Escutcheon: 8-inches by 2-1/2-inches wide by 3/16-inches thick, minimum; stainless steel, US 32D. g. Hubs: Sintered steel, copper infiltrated. h. Crossbar: Oval, seamless with interlocking expansion collets and roll pins; knurled, satin stainless steel, 0.062-inches minimum thickness, with steel reinforcing tube. i. Concealed bolts: Minimum 1/2-inch diameter, stainless steel. 6. Backset: Provide minimum backset of 2-3/4-inches. 7. Finish: US 32D satin. 8. ANSI/BHMA: A156.3, Type 3 and Type 8, Grade 1; F08, entrance by lever, key locks or unlocks lever for entrances shown as accessible to people with disabilities as required by ADAAG; and F05, entrance by thumb piece, key locks or unlocks thumb piece. 9. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 00361334.0000

08 71 00-8

Door Hardware

a. 1530-L8 (F) and -T8 (F) Series Mortise Exit Devices and 1520(F) CVR Concealed Vertical Rod Exit Devices; with Escutcheon Trim and Augusta - ASL Lever Handles and Thumbpiece/Handle/Cylinder Unit by Yale Security, Incorporated, Division of Yale Security Group. b. Or equal. E. Cylinders and Keying System: 1. Existing System: Grandmaster key or great-grandmaster keys the locks to OWNER'S existing system, with a new master key for the Project. 2. Review the keying system with OWNER’S and provide the type required (master, grandmaster or great grandmaster), either new or integrated with OWNER'S existing system. 3. Furnish all locks with manufacturer's cylinders for interchangeablecore pin tumbler inserts. Furnish only temporary inserts for the construction period, and remove these before Substantial Completion. Construction control keys and cores shall not be part of OWNER’S permanent keying system. Permanent cores and keys shall be furnished to OWNER prior to Substantial Completion. 4. Comply with the OWNER'S instructions for master keying and, except as otherwise specified, provide individual change key for each lock which is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. 5. Permanent keys and cores shall be stamped with the applicable key mark for identification. These visual key control marks or codes shall not include the actual key cuts. Permanent keys shall also be stamped “DO NOT DUPLICATE”. 6. Cylinder Material: Brass, bronze or Series 300 stainless steels. 7. Cylinder Features: Seven-pin, high-security, removable core. 8. Key Material: Nickel silver. 9. Key Quantity: Furnish three keys for each lock and five keys for each master and grandmaster system. Provide one extra key blank for each lock. 10. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, three-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150 percent of the number of locks required for the Project. Provide a hinged-panel type cabinet, for wall mounting. F. Overhead, Surface-Mounted, Door Closers: 1. Provide all doors, unless specially shown or specified as being provided with floor-mounted or concealed overhead closers, with surface-mounted overhead door closers. Provide both active and inactive door leafs with closers. 2. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specified, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit, 00361334.0000

08 71 00-9

Door Hardware

3.

4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

13. 14. 15. 16.

depending upon size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where parallel arms are specified, and for closers on exterior doors, provide closer unit one size larger than recommended for use with standard arms. Use parallel arm arrangement for doors that would otherwise have the door closer appearing in finished corridors or entries. Comply with UL, Building Materials Directory, and List of Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and Materials, and NFPA 80. Modify closers specified as required. Provide hold open feature for all non-fire-resistant-rated doors, unless otherwise specified. Provide corner bracket mounting on exterior doors. Select all arms to clear weather-stripping, and overhead door holders. Provide long arm to allow door to swing 180 degrees where long arm will eliminate floor-mounted stops. Provide closers with spring power adjustment feature capable of increasing spring power 15 percent minimum in all closer sizes. Provide individual regulating valves for closing and latching speeds, and separate adjustable back check valve. Provide delayed closing action feature on all door closers. Position valve at top of closure. Provide the following materials and features: a. Full Metal Cover: Aluminum. b. Case: Cast-iron. c. Arms: Plated to match full metal covers. d. Other Parts: Steel. e. Extreme temperature fluid. f. Security torx machine screws. g. Ten-year warranty. h. Provide manufacturer's optional corrosion protection. Finishes: US 26D satin chrome. Color coordinate all arms and other accessories. Highly Corrosive Atmospheres: Provide all closers with specified manu-facturer's optional corrosion protection. ANSI/BHMA: A156.4, C02011, in compliance with PT 1 and PT 4. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. DC2000DA M71, M73, M74, M75, M87 by Corbin Russwin, Incorporated, Division of Yale Security Group. b. Or equal.

G. Extra Heavy-Duty Overhead Holders and Stops: 1. Provide surface-mounted, extra heavy-duty overhead holders and stops with hold-open feature for doors included in List of Door Hardware Items at end of Part 3. 2. Materials: Provide the following materials: a. Arm: Type 316 stainless steel, 3/4-inch diameter rod minimum. b. All Other Parts: Extruded brass. 00361334.0000

08 71 00-10

Door Hardware

3. Coordinate placement of extra heavy-duty overhead holder and stop with weather-stripping for non-interference. Provide angle jamb brackets as required to mount to surfaces encountered in the Work. Coordinate and provide additional drop-brackets for non-interference with overhead closer mounting. 4. Design and reinforce connections of extra heavy-duty holder and stops where they are fastened to other materials, to resist a superimposed load of 30 pounds per square foot acting on the plane of the doors. Mount to door using a minimum of four countersunk mounting holes with four 5/16-inch diameter stainless steel pan head machine screws. 5. Provide all manufacturer recommended door reinforcements and coordinate the furnishing of hardware templates required for the installation of the units. 6. Finish: US 26D satin chrome, except rod shall be US 32D satin. 7. ANSI/BHMA: A156.8, C58511. 8. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. GJ79H Extra Heavy-Duty Surface-Mounted Overhead Door Holders with J Mounting (as required) by Glynn-Johnson Part of Worldwide Ingersoll-Rand. b. Or equal. H. Flush Bolts: 1. Provide flush bolts on the inactive leaf of all pairs of doors, unless otherwise specified. 2. Provide flush bolts at the top and bottom of door. 3. Provide downset of 12-inches for all automatic flush bolts, and manufacturers' automatic flush bolt strikes, for the locations specified in List of Door Hardware Items at end of Part 3. 4. Comply with UL, Hardware, Automatic or Surface Bolts, and NFPA 80, for automatic flush bolt requirements. 5. Provide the following features and materials: a. Flush Bolts: All parts bronze. b. Flush Bolt Levers: Forged Brass. c. Flush Bolt Plate: Forge Brass. d. Flush Bolt Guide and Strike: Wrought Brass. e. Flush Bolt Rods: 1/2-inch round rods, bronze, 12-inches minimum length. f. Bolt Head: Brass. 6. Provide extension flush bolts with 3/4-inch throws and with top bolt not over 6 foot-0 inches above finished floor. Provide bottom flush bolt 12inches long. 7. ANSI/BHMA: A156.16: L14081, L14251 and L14091. 8. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. GJ FB6 Extension Flush Bolts by Glynn-Johnson Part of Worldwide Ingersoll-Rand. b. Or equal. I.

Astragals: 00361334.0000

08 71 00-11

Door Hardware

1. Provide metal astragal bar, not less than 1/8-inch by 2-inches, for exposed flathead screw mounting on active leaf of all pairs of doors. Comply with UL and NFPA requirements for types and locations of astragals. 2. Provide astragal of cold-rolled steel with prime painted finish. 3. Provide astragal of extruded aluminum with clear anodized finish. 4. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. No. 357 Series by Pemko Manufacturing Company. b. Or equal. J.

Dust-Proof Strikes: 1. Provide brass dust-proof strikes, which incorporate a slotted plunger raised to flush position by spring tension for all flush bolts. 2. Provide 5/8-inch inside diameter dust-proof strikes; threshold mounted and surface mounted. 3. Finish: US 26D satin chrome. 4. ANSI/BHMA: A156.16, L14011-L14012. 5. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. DP-1 and DP-2 by Glynn-Johnson Part of Worldwide IngersollRand. b. Or equal.

K. Stripping and Seals: 1. Provide perimeter weather stripping at all exterior doors. Provide stripping and seals for interior doors where scheduled in List of Door Hardware Items at end of Part 3. 2. Continuity of Stripping: Except as otherwise specified, stripping at each opening shall be continuous and without unnecessary interruptions at door corners and hardware. 3. Replaceable Seal Strips: Resilient or flexible seal strip of every unit shall be easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by the manufacturer. 4. Provide bumper-type weather-stripping at jambs and head, including a resilient insert and metal retainer strip, surface-applied, of the following metal, finish and resilient bumper material: a. Housing: Extruded aluminum with dark bronze anodized finish; 0.062-inch minimum thickness of main walls and flanges. b. Dimensions: 1-3/8-inches by 7/8-inches, stop-mounted. c. Seals: Closed-cell extruded silicone. d. ANSI/BHMA: A156.22, R3E264. e. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) No. 350DSPK and 2891 DPK (for parallel arms) by Pemko Manufacturing Company. 2) Or equal. L. Thresholds: 1. All exterior doors shall be provided with thresholds. 2. Metal: Mill finish extruded bronze. 3. Surface Pattern: Fluted tread, manufacturer's standard. 00361334.0000

08 71 00-12

Door Hardware

4. Provide countersunk stainless steel screws and expansion shields. 5. Width: Five-inches wide and of length sufficient to span full width of rough openings, coped and scribed neatly at and around door frames. 6. Construction: a. Single-piece, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. 7. Profile: Provide manufacturer's unit, which conforms to the minimum size and profile requirements specified. a. Floor Drop: Except where no change in floor elevation is shown from one side of threshold to the other, provide profile that accommodates 1/2-inch drop in floor elevation, unless another dimension is shown. b. For doors equipped with panic hardware, including floor bolts, provide profile with stop bar of proper size and shape to function as the strike plate for the floor bolts. 8. Thickness: 1/2-inch, minimum. 9. ANSI/BHMA: A156.21, J12100. 10. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. 171B by Pemko Manufacturing Company. b. Or equal. M. Silencers: 1. Provide silencers for all door frames. 2. Provide pneumatic design that, once installed, forms an air pocket to reduce noise. 3. Provide minimum of three per strike side of door jambs. 4. ANSI/BHMA: A156.16, BHMA 6.5, L03011. 5. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. GJ 64 by Glynn-Johnson Part of Worldwide Ingersoll-Rand. b. Or equal. N. Wall and Floor Stops: Provide the following where scheduled in List of Door Hardware Items at end of Part 3: 1. Dome-Type Floor Stops: a. Cast bronze extra heavy-duty wall mounted door stop, one per leaf. b. Coordinate height of dome-type floor mounted doors stops with threshold condition and undercut of door. c. Finish: US 26D satin chrome. d. ANSI/BHMA: A156.16, L12161. e. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) FB13/14R, FB17 by Glynn-Johnson Part of Worldwide Ingersoll-Rand Corporation. 2) Or equal. 2. Wall Stops: a. Cast bronze extra heavy-duty wall mounted door stop, one per leaf. b. Convex rubber bumper. c. ANSI/BHMA: A156.16, L12101. 00361334.0000

08 71 00-13

Door Hardware

d. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) GJ 50C by Glynn-Johnson Part of Worldwide Ingersoll-Rand Corporation. 2) Or equal. O. Sealants: Provide elastomeric sealant complying with FS TT-S-00227, Type 2 (non-sag) Class A for use with thresholds. 2.3

HARDWARE FINISHES

A. Provide matching finishes for door hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent possible in compliance with ANSI/BHMA A156.18. B. Reduce differences in color and textures as much as commercially possible where the base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units of door hardware exposed at the same door or opening. In general, match all items to the manufacturer's standard finish for the latch and lock set for color and texture. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION

A. CONTRACTOR shall examine the substrate to receive door hardware, and the conditions under which the Work will be performed, and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the door hardware Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. 3.2

PREPARATION

A. Templates: Furnish door hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other Work to be factory-prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check the Shop Drawings of such other Work, to confirm that adequate provisions are made for the proper installation of the door hardware. B. Prepare Work to receive door hardware Work in compliance with ANSI/DHI A115.1. 3.3

INSTALLATION

A. Installer shall check and approve the installation before operation. Installer shall assure that the system operates to the OWNER'S satisfaction. B. Mount door hardware units at heights recommended in, Door and Hardware Institute, “Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” and “Recommended Locations for Builders’ Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames", except as 00361334.0000

08 71 00-14

Door Hardware

otherwise specified or required to comply with governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site, HMMA 830 and ADAAG requirements. C. Install each door hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and approved Shop Drawings. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely, then remove, and store in a secure place during the finishapplication. After completion of the finishes, re-install each item. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. F. Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile of door frames, with mitered corners and hair-line joints. Join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings for spindles, bolts and similar items, if any. G. Screw thresholds to substrate with No. 10 or larger screws, of the proper type for permanent anchorage and of bronze or stainless steel that will not corrode in contact with the threshold metal. H. Set thresholds in a bead of elastomeric sealant to completely fill concealed voids and exclude moisture from every source. Do not plug drainage holes or block weeps. Remove excess sealant before sealant cures to a firm set. I.

Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with the type lubrication recommended by manufacturer (graphite-type if no other recommended). Replace units that cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application.

J.

Final Adjustment: Where door hardware installation is made more than one month prior to Substantial Completion, return to the Work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of all door hardware items in each space and area. Clean and re-lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of door hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operating of heating and ventilating equipment.

00361334.0000

08 71 00-15

Door Hardware

K. Provide manufacturer’s authorized representative to instruct and train OWNER'S personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware during the final adjustment of door hardware. L. Door hardware, which is blemished or defective, will be rejected even though it was set in place before defects were discovered. Remove and replace with new door hardware. Repair all resultant damage to other Work. M. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the acceptance of door hardware in each area, the installer, accompanied by the representative of the latch and lock manufacturer, shall return to the Project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper function of doors and door hardware. Consult with and instruct OWNER'S personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. Clean and lubricate operational items wherever required. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installation of door hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance or the door hardware. 3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Provide a written field report, prepared by installer’s architectural hardware consultant, identifying actual condition, location, manufacturer, and product designation for each item of door hardware actually present on each door at the Site, including whether door hardware is adjusted and operating properly, compared with each item referenced to approved Shop Drawings and Contract requirements. B. Installer’s hardware consultant shall provide opinions to, and assist ENGINEER in determining, acceptability of installation as Work proceeds. All comments and discussions, conversations and meetings with ENGINEER shall be included in written field report for submission to ENGINEER for review and approval at completion of door hardware installation. C. As part of written field report to be submitted to ENGINEER for approval, recommend remedial actions for Work not in compliance with these Specifications. No payment for Work shall be made until remedial recommendations and actions have been approved by ENGINEER and incorporated into the Work. 3.5

LIST OF DOOR HARDWARE ITEMS

A. Scheduled items for each door are generic and rely on information specified above. The listing of hardware functions and types provided are only a general guideline for the final Door Hardware Schedule. CONTRAC00361334.0000

08 71 00-16

Door Hardware

TOR shall submit a Door Hardware Schedule acceptable to all governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. B. Provide the following door hardware items: 1. Set 1: Doors: Qty Description 3 Hinges 1 Closer 1 Panic Exit Device 3 Silencers 1 Stops 2. Set 1: Doors: Qty Description 6 Hinges 1 Closer (active door) 2 Extra Heavy-Duty Overhead Holders and Stops 1 Panic Exit Device (active door) 1 Flush Bolt top and bottom (inactive door) 1 Astragal 3 Silencers 1 Weatherstripping 1 Stops

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

08 71 00-17

Door Hardware

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 09 91 00 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and apply paint systems. a. CONTRACTOR is responsible for surface preparation and painting of all new and existing interior and exterior items and surfaces throughout the Project areas included in the general contract and other contracts described in this Section. 2. Extent of painting includes the Work specified below. Painting shown in schedules may not provide CONTRACTOR with complete indication of all painting Work. Refer to Article 2.2 of this Section where all surfaces of generic types specified are specified for preparation and painting according to their status, intended function, and location, using the painting system for that surface, function, and location as specified, unless specifically identified on the Drawings as a surface not to receive specified painting system. a. Follow the Painting Schedule in Article 3.8. b. All new and specifically identified existing surfaces and items except where natural finish of material is specified as a corrosionresistant material not requiring paint; or is specifically shown as indicated by written note, or specified as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint them the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. c. Surface preparation and painting of all new and specifically identified existing items, both interior and exterior, and other surfaces, including items furnished by OWNER, are included in the Work, except as otherwise shown or specified. d. Removal of all substances, top coats, primers and all intermediate coats of paint and other protective or decorative coatings on those items and surfaces to remain that are identified to receive a painting system under this Section, to provide surfaces acceptable for application of painting specified. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation, removal, and demolition procedures under other Sections and coordinate them with the Work specified in this Section. 2. Coordinate painting of areas that will become inaccessible once equipment and similar fixed items have been installed. 3. Furnish information to ENGINEER on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use and ensure compatibility with prime coats used. 00361334.0000

09 91 00-1

Painting

Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and repaint as required. Notify ENGINEER in writing of anticipated problems using specified painting systems with surfaces primed by others. Reprime equipment primed in factory and other factory-primed items that are damaged or scratched. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. D. Work Not Included: The following Work is not included as painting Work, or are included under other Sections or in other contracts: 1. Shop Priming: Shop priming of structural metal, miscellaneous metal fabrications, other metal items and fabricated components such as shop-fabricated or factory-painted process equipment, plumbing equipment, heating and ventilating equipment, electrical equipment, and accessories shall conform to applicable requirements of this Section but are included under other Sections. 2. Pre-finished Items: a. Items furnished with such finishes as baked-on enamel, porcelain, and polyvinylidene fluoride shall only be touched up at Site by CONTRACTOR using manufacturer's recommended compatible field-applied touchup paint. b. Items furnished with finishes such as chrome plating or anodizing. 3. Concealed Surfaces: Non-metallic wall or ceiling surfaces in areas not exposed to view, and generally inaccessible areas, such as furred spaces, pipe chases, duct shafts, and elevator shafts. 4. Concrete surfaces. 5. Concrete floors, unless specifically shown as a surface to be painted. 6. Face brick, glazed structural tile, and prefaced, ground-faced or splitfaced concrete unit masonry. 7. Exterior face of architectural precast concrete. 8. Collector bearings, shafts and chains, wood flights, wood stop logs, and wood or fiberglass baffles. 9. Corrosion-Resistant Metal Surfaces: Where the natural oxide of item forms a barrier to corrosion, whether factory- or Site-formed, including such materials as copper, bronze, muntz metal, terne metal, and stainless steel. 10. Operating Parts and Labels: a. Do not paint moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, interior of motors, and fan shafts. b. Do not paint over labels required by governing authorities having jurisdiction at Site, or equipment identification, performance rating, nameplates, and nomenclature plates. c. Cover moving parts and labels during the painting with protective masking. Remove all protective masking upon completion of Work. Remove all paint, coatings, and splatter that comes in contact with such labels. 00361334.0000

09 91 00-2

Painting

11. Structural and miscellaneous metals covered with concrete need not receive primers, intermediate, or finish coats of paint. 12. Existing structures, equipment, and other existing surfaces and items unless otherwise shown or specified. E. Description of Colors and Finishes: 1. Color Selection: a. ENGINEER reserves the right to select non-standard colors for paint systems specified within ability of paint manufacturer to produce such non-standard colors. Provide such colors at no additional expense to OWNER. 2. Color Coding of Pipelines, Valves, Equipment, and Ducts: a. Color-coding of pipelines, valves, equipment and ducts shall comply with applicable standards of ANSI A13.1, ANSI Z535.1, CFR 1910.144, Recommended Standards for Water Works, and Recommended Standards for Wastewater Facilities. For piping and equipment not covered by the above standards, conform to OWNER’s color standards. b. For equipment located on roofs and equipment that is exposed-toview, color will be selected by ENGINEER. 1.2

REFERENCES

A. Referenced Standards: Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ANSI A13.1, Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems. 2. ANSI Z535.1, Safety Color Code. 3. ASTM D16, Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials and Applications. 4. ASTM D2200, Pictoral Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces. 5. ASTM D4262, Testing Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched Concrete Surfaces. 6. ASTM D4263, Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. 7. ASTM D4541, Test Methods for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion-Testers. 8. ASTM E329, Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. 9. Great Lakes Upper Mississippi River Board of Public Health and Environmental Managers (GLUMRB) Recommended Standards for Water Works. 10. GLUMRB, Recommended Standards for Wastewater Facilities. 11. Ozone Transport Commission, (OTC), OTC Model Rule for Architectural and Industrial Maintenance Coatings. 12. SSPC PA 2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages. 13. SSPC VIS 1, Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel. 14. SSPC VIS 2, Method of Evaluating Degree of Rusting/Painted Steel Surfaces. 00361334.0000

09 91 00-3

Painting

15. SSPC Volume 2, Systems and Specifications. 1.3

DEFINITIONS

A. Coating terms defined in ASTM D16 apply to this Section. 1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage a single applicator regularly performing installation of painting systems, with documented skill and successful experience in installing types of products required and agrees to employ only tradesmen trained, skilled, and with successful experience in installing types of products specified. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Provide independent testing agency with experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct testing specified in accordance with ASTM E329. Testing agency shall be selected by OWNER and paid for by CONTRACTOR. C. Source Quality Control: Obtain products from manufacturers that will provide services of a qualified manufacturer’s representative at Site at commencement of painting Work to advise on products, mock-ups, installation, and finishing techniques, at completion of the Work to advise ENGINEER on acceptability of completed Work, and during course of Work as requested by ENGINEER. Submit “or equal” products, when proposed, with direct comparison to products specified, including information on durability, adhesion, color and gloss retention, percent solids, VOC’s grams per liter, and recoatability after curing. “Or equal” manufacturers shall furnish same color selection as manufacturers specified, including intense chroma and custom pigmented colors in painting systems. Color Pigments: Provide pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit surfaces and services indicated. Comply with the following: Lead and Chromate: Lead and chromate content shall not exceed amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction. Through CONTRACTOR, paint manufacturer shall notify ENGINEER of colors that are not suitable for long-term color retention in areas subject to hydrogen sulfide fume exposure. Manufacturer shall identify colors that meet requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at Site for use in locations subject to contact with potable water or water that will be treated to become potable. Comply with paint manufacturers’ recommendations on preventing coating contact with levels of carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide that may cause yellowing during application and initial stages of curing of paint coatings. 00361334.0000

09 91 00-4

Painting

D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with VOC content limits of Ozone Transport Commission (OTC), Model Rule for Architectural and Industrial Maintenance Coatings. E. Pre-Painting Conference: Conduct a pre-painting conference at the Site to review specified requirements. Meeting attendees shall include painting applicator and its foreman, paint manufacturer’s technical representative, installers of other work in and around painting that must follow painting Work, ENGINEER, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of painting Work. 1.5

SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: a. Copies of manufacturer’s technical data sheets, including surface preparation, number of coats, dry film thickness, test performance data including paint analysis, VOC and chemical component content in comparison to maximum allowed by the Contact Documents, and application instructions for each product proposed for use b. Submit proof of acceptability of proposed application techniques by paint manufacturer selected. c. Copies of CONTRACTOR’s proposed protection procedures in each area of the Work explaining methods of protecting adjacent surfaces from splatter, for confining application procedures in a manner that allows other work adjacent to surface preparation and painting Work to proceed safely and without interruption, and for maintaining acceptable application, curing, and environmental conditions during and after painting systems application. d. List each material and cross-reference to the specific painting system and application, including a list of site-specific surfaces to which painting system will be applied. Identify by manufacturer’s catalog number and general classification. State number of gallons of each product being purchased for delivery to Site and square foot area calculated to be covered by each painting system specified based on theoretical loss of 20 percent. Where actual area to be covered by paint system exceeds area submitted to ENGINEER for that system, proof of additional material purchase shall be provided to ENGINEER. Calculated coverage shall be as specified for each component of each painting system specified. This requirement does not take precedence over CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to provide dry film thickness required for each component of each painting system. e. Identify maximum exposure times allowable for each paint system component before next coat of paint can be applied. Submit 00361334.0000

09 91 00-5

Painting

2.

proposed methods for preparing surfaces for subsequent coats if maximum exposure times are exceeded. f. Information on curing times and environmental conditions that affect curing time of each paint system component and proposed methods for accommodating variations in curing time. Identify this information for each painting system in the Work. g. Specification for spray equipment with cross-reference to paint manufacturer’s recommended equipment requirements. Samples: a. Copies of manufacturer's complete color charts for each coating system.

B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Certificate from paint manufacturer stating that materials meet or exceed Contract Documents requirements. b. CONTRACTOR shall provide notarized statement verifying that all painting systems are compatible with surfaces specified. All painting systems components shall be reviewed by an authorized technical representative of paint manufacturer for use as a compatible system. Verify that all painting systems are acceptable for exposures specified and that paint manufacturer is in agreement that selected systems are proper, compatible, and are not in conflict with paint manufacturer’s recommended specifications. Show by copy of transmittal form that a copy of letter has been transmitted to paint applicator. 2. Test Reports: a. Certified laboratory test reports for required performance and analysis testing in compliance with ASTM E329. b. Adhesion testing plan and procedures. c. Results of adhesion testing on existing surfaces containing paints or other coatings to be topcoated with paint systems specified. Prior to adhesion testing, submit a testing plan establishing methods, procedures and number of tests in each area where existing coatings are to remain and become substrate for painting Work. Based on results of adhesion testing, recommend methods, procedures, and painting system modifications, if necessary, for proceeding with Work. d. Locations of and test methods for soil sampling before beginning Work and after Substantial Completion. e. Proposed methods for testing, handling, and disposal of waste generated during Work. f. Results of alkalinity and moisture content tests performed per ASTM D4262 and ASTM D4263. g. Results of film thickness, holidays, and imperfections tests. 3. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Provide paint manufacturer’s storage, handling, and application instructions prior to commencing painting Work at Site. 00361334.0000

09 91 00-6

Painting

4. Manufacturer’s Site Reports: Provide report of paint manufacturer’s representative for each visit to Site by paint manufacturer’s representative. 5. Special Procedure Submittals: a. Proposed protection procedures for each area of Work, explaining methods of protecting adjacent surfaces from splatter, for confining application procedures in a manner that allows other work adjacent to surface preparation and painting Work to proceed safely and without interruption. b. Site-specific health and safety plan. c. Procedures for maintaining acceptable application, curing and environmental conditions during and after painting systems application. d. Procedures for providing adequate lighting, ventilation, and personal protection equipment relative to painting Work. 6. Qualifications: a. Applicator. b. Testing laboratory C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Maintenance Manual: Upon completion of the painting Work, furnish ENGINEER five copies of detailed maintenance manual including the following information: a. Complete and updated product catalog of paint manufacturer’s currently available products including complete technical information on each product. Identify product names and numbers of each product used in the painting Work. b. Name, address, e-mail address and telephone number of manufacturer, local distributor, applicator and technical representative. c. Detailed procedures for routine maintenance and cleaning. d. Detailed procedures for light repairs such as dents, scratches and staining. 2. Statement of Application: Upon completion of the painting Work, submit a notarized statement to ENGINEER signed by CONTRACTOR and painting applicator stating that Work complies with requirements of the Contract Documents and that application methods, equipment, and environmental conditions were proper and adequate for conditions of installation and use. 1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Product Delivery Requirements: Deliver products to Site in original, new, and unopened packages and containers, accurately and legibly and accurately labeled with the following: 1. Container contents, including name and generic description of product. 2. Manufacturer’s stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Manufacturer’s name. 4. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 00361334.0000

09 91 00-7

Painting

5. 6. 7. 8.

Grams per liter of volatile organic compounds. Thinning instructions, where recommended. Application instructions. Color name and number.

B. Product Storage Requirements: 1. Store acceptable materials at Site. 2. Store in an environmentally controlled location as recommended in paint manufacturer’s written product information. Keep area clean and accessible. Prevent freezing of products. 3. Store products that are not in actual use in tightly covered containers. 4. Comply with health and fire regulations of authorities having jurisdiction at Site. C. Product Handling Requirements: 1. Handle products in a manner that minimizes the potential for contamination, or incorrect product catalyzation. 2. Do not open containers or mix components until necessary preparatory work has been completed and approved by ENGINEER and painting Work will start immediately. 3. Maintain containers used in storing, mixing, and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1.7

SITE CONDITIONS

A. Site Facilities: 1. Supplemental heat sources, as required to maintain both ambient and surface temperatures within range recommended by paint manufacturer for paint system applications, are not available at the Site. 2. Provision of supplemental heat energy sources, power, equipment, and operating, maintenance, and temperature-monitoring personnel is CONTRACTOR’s responsibility. 3. Do not use heat sources that emit carbon dioxide or carbon monoxide into areas being painted. Properly locate and vent heat sources to exterior so that paint systems and personnel are unaffected by exhaust products. B. Existing Conditions: 1. Existing surfaces to receive painting Work shall have their surfaces prepared to meet requirements of painting systems specified. Prior to initiating painting Work, perform adhesion tests on existing surfaces to be painted. Perform testing per ASTM D4541 or other method acceptable to ENGINEER. Number and location of tests shall be sufficient to determine the condition of existing coatings and suitability of existing coatings to remain to provide an acceptable substrate for new coatings. Submit testing plan prior to testing and provide ENGINEER the adhesion test results.

00361334.0000

09 91 00-8

Painting

2. Provide abrasive blasting, scraping, or other abrading or surface film removal, or preparatory techniques accepted by ENGINEER. 3. Before commencing painting in an area, surfaces to be painted and floors shall be cleaned of dust using commercial vacuum cleaning equipment equipped with high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA( filters and dust containment systems. 4. After painting operations have started in a given area, cleaning only with commercial vacuum cleaning equipment with high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters and dust containment systems. C. Environmental Requirements: 1. Comply with manufacturer’s published requirements. D. Protection: 1. Cover or otherwise protect finished Work of other trades and those surfaces not being painted concurrently and not to be painted. 2. During surface preparation and painting, facility shall remain in operation. Use procedures that prevent contamination of process or cause or require facility shutdown. 3. Coordinate and schedule surface preparation and painting to avoid exposing personnel to hazards associated with painting Work. Provide required personnel safety equipment per requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at Site. 4. Submit protection procedures to be employed. Do not begin surface preparation and painting Work until ENGINEER accepts protection techniques proposed by CONTRACTOR. 5. When working with flammable materials, provide fire extinguishers and post temporary signs warning against smoking and open flame. 1.8

COMPONENTS REQUIRING COATING:

A. The Contractor shall coat all the components described below. The list attempts to generally identify key components to be coated and the applicable coating system, but shall not be utilized as a basis for concluding that common sense extension of the overall intent is not applicable because an item is not specifically named. In general, exclusive of items identified herein not to be coated, all new facilities, structures and equipment tanks, etc. shall be coated. B. New Non-Submerged Metals and Miscellaneous Non-Metallic, Nonsubmerged Items (i.e., non-buried pipe, fittings, valves, supports, conduit (excluding aluminum), brackets, metal fabrications, etc.). All 304 SS, galvanized, aluminum, FRP, PVC, CPVC and copper surfaces shall be scarified and solvent cleaning per SSPC SP-1. 1. Above grade pipe, fittings, valves of all materials except 316 SS. 2. Above grade PVC, fitting, valves. 3. Pipe supports, excluding 316 SS or aluminum. 4. Structural members, including brackets and supports. 5. All nuts, bolts and washers excluding 316 SS except on piping. 00361334.0000

09 91 00-9

Painting

6. Electric pull box covers. 7. All new non-buried, non-submerged ferrous, PVC, FRP, galvanized, 304 SS and aluminum surfaces not specifically excluded or named elsewhere. C. New Motors, Pumps, other Mechanical Equipment: This section shall apply to all new pumps, motors and miscellaneous mechanical equipment, 1. High Service pumps and motors. 2. Backwash pump motors. 3. Other miscellaneous equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PAINTING SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS

A. Products and Manufacturers: Where referenced under painting systems, provide painting systems manufactured by the following: 1. Tnemec Company, Incorporated (TCI). 2. The Carboline Company, subsidiary of RPM International Inc (TCC). 3. Sherwin-Williams Company (SWC). 4. Or equal. 2.2

PAINTING SYSTEMS

A. New Concrete Unit Masonry Walls; Moderate Corrosion and Abrasion Resistant, Non-submerged, Interior: 1. Surface Preparation: Surface Preparation: Refer to section 3.2. 2. Filler, Surfacer and Patching Compound: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 68 percent volume solids, high-build, threecomponent, waterborne cementitious acrylic block filler; 75 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 130 Envirofill (TCI); Sanitile 600 TG (TCC); CementPlex 875 (SWC): One coat, 10 to 14 dry mils. 3. Intermediate/Finish: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 80 percent volume solids, high-build, chemicalresistant, high-gloss, modified, polyamine or polyamido-amine catalyzed epoxy finish; 180 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 280 Tneme-Glaze (TCI); Carboguard 890 LT (TCC); Cor-Cote HP (SWC): Two coats, 6.0 to 12.0 dry mils, per coat. B. New Ferrous Metals, Structural Steel, Miscellaneous Ferrous Metals, Exterior Surfaces of Valves, Pumps, Exterior Surfaces of Ferrous Piping, and Exterior Surfaces of All Ferrous Metal; Non-submerged, Interior: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to section 3.2. 2. Shop Primer: 00361334.0000

09 91 00-10

Painting

a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 67 percent volume solids, build, two-component, cycloaliphatic amine-catalyzed epoxy or polyamido-amine epoxy coating; 250 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline (TCI); Carboguard 954 HB (TCC): One coat, 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils. 3. Field Primer and Touch-Up: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 67 percent volume solids, build, two-component, cycloaliphatic amine-catalyzed epoxy or polyamido-amine epoxy coating; 250 grams per liter VOC, maximum b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline (TCI); Carboguard 954 HB (TCC); One coat, 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils. 4. Finish: High-Gloss: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 67 percent volume solids, build, two-component, cycloaliphatic amine-catalyzed epoxy or polyamido-amine epoxy coating; 250 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline (TCI); Carboguard 954 HB (TCC): One coat, 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils. 5. Final Clear Coat for High Service Pumps and Backwash Pumps: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 49 percent volume solids, two-component, waterborne acrylic polyurethane or aliphatic acrylic polyurethane coating; 247 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 1080 Endura-Shield WB (TCI); Carbothane 134 VOC (TCC); Centurion WB Urethane (SWC): Two coats, 2.0 to 3.0 dry mils. C. New and Existing Ferrous Metals, Non-Ferrous Metals, and Galvanized Metals; Low VOC Content, Non-Submerged, Exterior: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to section 3.2. 2. Ferrous Metal Primer: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 67 percent volume solids, build, two-component, cycloaliphatic amine-catalyzed epoxy coating; 250 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series V69 Hi-Build Epoxoline (TCI); Carboguard 890 LT (TCC); Macropoxy HS (SWC): One coat, 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils. 3. Ferrous Metal Touch-Up: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 80 percent volume solids, modified polyamido-amine or polyamine epoxy; 296 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 00361334.0000

09 91 00-11

Painting

1) Series 166 Epoxoline HS (TCI); Carboguard 1207 HB (TCC); Macropoxy HS Epoxy (SWC): One coat, 6.0 dry mils. 4. Galvanized and Non-Ferrous Primer. a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 67 percent volume solids, build, two-component, cycloaliphatic amine-catalyzed epoxy coating; 250 grams per liter VOC, maximum . b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series V69 Hi-Build Epoxoline (TCI); Carboguard 890 LT (TCC); Macropoxy HS (SWC): One coat, 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils. 5. Intermediate – Ferrous Metals Only: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 80 percent volume solids, modified polyamido-amine or polyamine epoxy; 296 grams per liter VOC, maximum . b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 166 Epoxoline HS (TCI); Carboguard 1207 HB (TCC); Macropoxy HS Epoxy (SWC): One coat, 6.0 dry mils . 6. Finish: Gloss: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 49 percent volume solids, two-component, waterborne acrylic polyurethane or aliphatic acrylic polyurethane coating; 247 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 1080 Endura-Shield WB (TCI); Carbothane 134 VOC (TCC); Centurion WB Urethane (SWC): Two coats, 2.0 to 3.0 dry mils. D. New and Existing Galvanized Metal, Non-Ferrous Metal, and Fiberglass; Non-submerged, Interior: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to section 3.2. 2. Primer: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum, 39 percent volume solids single-component, selfcross linking acrylic primer-sealer, 140 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 115 Uni-Bond DF (TCI); Galoseal Wash Primer (TCC); Pro-Cryl Universal Primer (SWC): One coat, 2.0 to 4.0 dry mils. 3. Finish: Satin: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum, 41 percent volume solids, single component, selfcross linking acrylic; 208 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 116 Uni-Bond (TCI); Carbocrylic 3359 (TCC); DTM Acrylic Coating (SWC): One coat, 2.0 to 4.0 dry mils. E. New and Existing Aluminum in Contact with Dissimilar Materials: 00361334.0000

09 91 00-12

Painting

1. Surface Preparation: Comply with paint manufacturer’s published recommendations for products, surface condition, and surface preparation. 2. Primer/Finish: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 100 percent volume solids, high-build, twocomponent, polyamido-amine or polyamine epoxy; 49 grams per gallon VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 165 Epoxoline 100 (TCI); Carboguard 954 HB (TCC); Dura-Plate UHS (SWC): Two coats, 8.0 to 15.0 dry mils, per coat. F. New and Existing PVC and CPVC Piping and Fiberglass Insulation Covering; Non-submerged, Interior: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to section 3.2. 2. Primer: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 37 percent volume solids single-component, selfcross linking acrylic primer-sealer; 226 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 115 Uni-Bond DF (TCI); Carbocrylic 3358 (TCC); DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish (SWC): One coat, 2.0 to 4.0 dry mils. 3. Finish: Satin: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 37 percent volume solids, single component, selfcross linking acrylic; 226 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 116 Uni-Bond (TCI); Carbocrylic 3358 (TCC); DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish (SWC): One coat, 2.0 to 4.0 dry mils. G. New and Existing Exterior Surfaces of Steel Pipe; Buried Exterior: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to section 3.2. 2. Primer/Finish: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 75 percent volume solids, build, coal tar polyamide epoxy coating; 330 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 46 Hi-Build H-413 Tneme-Tar (TCI); Bitumastic 300M (TCC); Targuard (SWC): Two coats, 9.0 dry mils, per coat. 2.3

CALKING AND SEALANTS

A. Refer to Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 2.4

INSTRUMENTS

A. Instruments: 00361334.0000

09 91 00-13

Painting

1.

Provide one new dry-film thickness gauge for checking film thickness, one holiday detector to detect holidays or holes in the coating, and one set of visual standards to check surface preparation. Calibrate dry film thickness gauge at Site using Bureau of Standards standard shim blocksProducts and Manufacturers: Provide the following: a. Film Thickness Testers: Model FM-III manufactured by Mikrotest, or equal. b. Holiday detector shall be Model M-1 as manufactured by Tinker & Rasor, or equal. c. Visual Standards: ASTM D2200, Swedish Standards, SSPC VIS 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which painting Work is to be performed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. B. Do not paint over existing paint where there is no assurance that existing paint will provide an acceptable surface for long-term adherence and durability of painting systems specified, or where paint manufacturer requires removal of all existing paint to recommend use of specified painting system. 3.2

SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: 1. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition. When the specified and recommended manufacturer's surface preparation system differ, use the system which in the Engineer's opinion is the more restrictive (conservative). Do not apply any primer, first coat or subsequent coats until the Engineer has approved the surface preparation. B. Preparation: 1. Carefully remove all hardware, hardware accessories, machine surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish-painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove if necessary, for the complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall the removed items by workmen skilled in the trades involved. 00361334.0000

09 91 00-14

Painting

C. Cleaning: 1. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program the cleaning and painting so that contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly-painted surfaces. D. Compatibility: 1. Confirm compatibility with substrates where existing facilities are to be recoated as part of this project. Scarify or otherwise prepare existing coated surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. E. Ferrous Metals: 1. All new ferrous surfaces shall be sand blasted to a "Near White, SSPC-SP10" condition as specified by the Steel Structures Painting Council. Coatings shall be applied to all blasted surfaces before surface oxidation appears, but in any case, prior to the end of the same workday on which the blasting occurred. 2. New pumps, motors, or similar equipment shall be shop primed only using the specified system. Intermediate and finish coats shall be field applied. The manufacturer of all pumps, motors, and similar mechanical equipment shall submit a written certification to the Engineer that the surface preparation and prime coats satisfy the specification requirements. This certification shall be submitted and accepted prior to release for shipment. Touch up shall be applied as required. The equipment manufacturer shall submit written documentation confirming the surface preparation and coating is per specification. The Contractor is specifically advised that the dry film thickness of all factory applied coatings will be field confirmed by the Engineer. Any coating not meeting the requirements of the specifications, in the sole opinion of the Engineer, shall be removed, surface preparation repeated and the coating re-applied in the field to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3. All existing ferrous surfaces to be recoated shall be high pressure washed to achieve complete removal of all stains, dirt, grime, mold, mildew, etc. The pressure shall be as required to achieve the desired result without damage to the existing coating. Subsequently, any areas with remaining contamination with oils or greases shall be solvent cleaned. Rust shall be removed by hand-tool cleaning and existing coatings scarified, if recommended by the coating manufacturer for proper adhesion. Particular care shall be taken during the surface preparation to protect the functional integrity of all mechanical equipment during the surface preparation procedure. Noncoated items such as nameplates, rotating shafts, non-painted valves and couplings shall be masked or otherwise protected during the surface preparation and coating operations. 4. Except as noted in item 2 above, all surface preparation and coating work shall be performed in the field, unless otherwise specifically identified in the specification or on the drawings. 00361334.0000

09 91 00-15

Painting

F. Cementitious Materials: 1. Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block, to be painted by removing all efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze. Concrete surfaces, other than concrete block, shall be brush blasted per SSPC SP-7 to open bug holes. 2. Determine the alkalinity and moisture content of the surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. If the surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of the finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where the moisture content exceeds that permitted in the manufacturer's printed directions. The Contractor shall provide written documentation to the Engineer that the alkalinity and moisture content of any cementitious surface is acceptable and within the coating manufacturer's recommended limits for application of the coating. 3. All existing cementitious surfaces to be recoated shall be pressure washed to completely remove all stains, chemicals, dust, grime, mold, mildew, etc. The pressure shall be as required to achieve the desired result without damage to the existing coating. Solvent cleaning shall be used to remove any oils or greases remaining after the pressure washing. Pressure washing and water blasting shall be performed in a fashion that does not cause physical damage to the substrate. Care shall be taken to not damage caulking attachments, openings, fascia, architectural items, screens, etc. during the surface preparation procedures. The application of the coating to existing facilities shall occur as soon after the completion of surface preparation as practical, before re-contamination of the substrate and in no case more than 45 days after completion of the surface preparation. 4. Repair all cracks to the satisfaction of the Engineer on cementitious structures prior to the application of coating systems. Repair of cracks shall be considered to include restoration of surface profile to a condition consistent with adjacent similar structures where the surface preparation work has inadvertently or intentionally caused damage. 5. Unless otherwise noted, all surface preparation and coating work shall be performed in the field. G. PVC, FRP, PE, Aluminum, Stainless Steel, Copper Surfaces, Not Previously Painted: 1. Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with an acceptable nonpetroleum based solvent. Galvanized surfaces shall be prepared according to SSPC SP-1 scarified prior to applying coatings. 3.3

PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND STRUCTURES

A. Protect property and structures adjacent to the Work from waste residues resulting from cleaning, surface preparation, and painting Work.

00361334.0000

09 91 00-16

Painting

B. Use shrouding, vacuum blasting, or other acceptable methods for cleaning and surface preparation of exterior surfaces. C. During blast cleaning and surface preparation of interior and exterior surfaces, control exhausting of dust and grit using shrouding, negativepressure containment/dust collection systems, or other means to protect adjacent property and structures and prevent dust and grit from escaping. Similarly, control removal and temporarily store residues to protect adjacent property and structures. D. For painting of exterior surfaces, use rollers, shrouding, or other acceptable methods as required to protect adjacent property and structures from windblown paint residues. E. Submit proposed procedures for cleaning, surface preparation, and paint application that describe in detail methods to be used to protect adjacent property and structures from residues. Do not proceed with cleaning, surface preparation, or painting until proposed procedures are accepted by ENGINEER. 3.4

MATERIALS PREPARATION

A. General: Mix and prepare painting products in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's product data sheets. 3.5

APPLICATION

A. General: 1. Apply paint systems by brush, roller, or airless spray per paint manufacturer's recommendations and in compliance with Paint Application Specifications No. 1 in SSPC Volume 2, where applicable, and in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's product data sheets. 2. Surfaces of items not normally exposed-to-view do not require same color as other components of system of which they are a part, but require same painting system specified for exposed surfaces of system. 3. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint before final installation of registers or grilles. 4. Paint backs of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 5. Omit field-applied primer on metal surfaces that have been primed in the shop. Touch-up paint to shop-primed coats and pre-finished items only when approved by ENGINEER using compatible primers and paint manufacturer’s recommended compatible field-applied finishes. 6. Welds shall be stripe-coated with intermediate or finish coat of paint after application of prime coat. B. Minimum/Maximum Paint Film Thickness: Comply with manufacturer’s published recommendations for coating type and surface. 00361334.0000

09 91 00-17

Painting

C. Scheduling Surface Preparation and Painting: Comply with manufacturer’s published recommendations for coating type and surface. D. Prime Coats: Recoat primed and sealed walls and ceilings where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to result in a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects caused by insufficient sealing. E. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. F. Brush Application: 1. Brush-out and work all brush coats onto the surfaces in an even film. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections are unacceptable. Neatly draw all glass and color break lines. 2. Brush-apply all primer or first coats, unless otherwise allowed to use mechanical applicators. G. Mechanical Applicators: 1. Use mechanical methods for applying paint when allowed by applicable ordinances, paint manufacturer, and approved by ENGINEER. 2. Limit roller applications, if approved by ENGINEER, to interior wall finishes for second and third coats. Apply each roller coat to provide equivalent hiding as brush-applied coats. 3. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats. Do not double back with spray equipment for purpose of building up film thickness of two coats in one pass. H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint Work not in compliance with specified requirements as required by ENGINEER. 3.6

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Notify ENGINEER after completing each coat of paint. After inspection and checking of film thickness, holidays, and imperfections, and after acceptance by ENGINEER, proceed with succeeding coat. Provide testing instruments specified in Article 2.4 of this Section for testing by CONTRACTOR. Testing instruments shall become property of OWNER. 1. ENGINEER will witness all testing and shall be notified of scheduled testing at least twenty-four hours in advance. 2. Apply additional coats, if required, to produce specified film thickness and to correct holidays and to completely fill all surface air holes. B. For magnetic substrates, measure thickness of dry film nonmagnetic coatings following recommendations of SSPC PA-2. These procedures supplement manufacturers’ approved instructions for manual operation of measurement gauges and do not replace such instructions. 00361334.0000

09 91 00-18

Painting

C. Record time, location, number of coats, dry film thickness, holidays, and other imperfections and submit testing results to ENGINEER. 3.7

ADJUSTMENT AND CLEAN-UP

A. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to ENGINEER. B. During progress of the Work, remove from Site all discarded paint products, rubbish, cans, and rags at end of each workday. C. Upon completion of painting, clean paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. D. At completion of Work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces as determined by ENGINEER.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

09 91 00-19

Painting

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install signage. a. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all signage furnished under this Section for the entire Project in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Extent of signage is shown and specified. B. Coordination: 1. Coordinate adhesives and fasteners with mounting surfaces. Review other Sections to ensure compatibility of signage mounting accessories with various surfaces on which signage will be installed. 2. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before signage Work. 3. Notify other contractors in advance of installing signage to provide other contractors with sufficient time for installing items included in their contracts to be installed with or before signage Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. 2. Section 09 91 00, Painting. 1.2

REFERENCES

A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. AA DSA-45, Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 2. ASME A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 3. ANSI/ICC A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 4. ANSI Z535.1, Marking Physical Hazards Safety Color Code. 5. ANSI Z535.2, Environmental and Facility Safety Signs. 6. ANSI Z535.3, Criteria for Safety Symbols. 7. ASTM B26/B26M, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings. 8. ASTM B584, Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 9. ASTM E527, Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys in the Unified Numbering System (UNS). 10. CDA, Properties of Cast Copper Alloys. 00361334.0000

10 14 00-1

Signage

11. NFPA 704, System for the Identification of the Hazards of Materials for Emergency Response. 12. UL 924, Safety of Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment. 1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: 1. Signage Manufacturers: a. Engage firms specializing in producing types of products specified, in compliance with the Contract Documents, with documented record of successful in-service performance, and that possess sufficient production capacity to avoid delaying the Work. b. Submit to ENGINEER name and experience record of manufacturers. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain each separate type of signage from a single Supplier and from a single manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the following: 1. OSHA, 29 CFR Part 1910.1200, Hazard Communication Standard. 2. OSHA, 29 CFR Part 1910, Subpart Z, Toxic and Hazardous Substances. 3. OSHA, 29 CFR Part 1910.144, Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards. 4. OSHA, 29 CFR Part 1910. 145, Specification for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags. 5. United States Access Board, Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines. 6. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Public Law 101-36, 28 CFR Part 36, Appendix A, Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG), relative to characters and symbols contrast only. 1.4

SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Schedule of all signage required for the Work, indicating signage type location, and other information to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. b. Fabrication and erection information for each type of signage c. Valve schedule for small-diameter valves, in accordance with this Section. d. Complete, camera-ready, color graphic layouts of customdesigned signs based on specified requirements and manufacturer recommendations.

00361334.0000

10 14 00-2

Signage

e. Complete selection of each specified manufacturer's standard and custom graphic layouts and pictograms, colors, and alphabetic/text styles. f. Full-size graphic layout drawings for plaques, individual dimensional letters and numbers, and other items where final graphic appearance is necessary prior to signage fabrication, incorporating all required graphic features specified or shown. g. Mounting and Installation Data: 1) Drawings of and information on anchorages and accessory items. 2) Submit location template drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent construction. 3) Coordinate mounting position, method, and proposed mounting accessories and fasteners with actual Project conditions. Indicate required mounting accessories on plan drawings showing locations of required exit signs based on measurements taken at the Site. Show final location and identify type of mounting surface for each exit sign. Coordinate location of exit signs for non-interference with other Work and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Product Data: a. Copies of manufacturer’s technical data, including catalog information and specifications, for each product specified. 3. Samples: a. Each color and finish of exposed materials and accessories required for signage. b. ENGINEER's review of Samples will be for color and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is CONTRACTOR's responsibility. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Manufacturer's Instructions: a. Templates for anchorages to be installed in concrete or masonry. b. Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for support and foundations of signs installed outdoors. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Warranty Documentation: a. General and special warranties required under this Section. D. Maintenance Material Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Extra Stock Materials: a. Furnish extra stock materials from the same manufactured lot as the materials installed. b. Submit documentation of actual quantities of signage installed for the Project and calculations indicating the required quantity of extra stock materials. c. Furnish the following spare parts and accessories: 00361334.0000

10 14 00-3

Signage

1) For every 20 of each type (snap-on, strap-on, adhesive type) of pipe markers installed: a) One complete mounting assembly. 2) For every 20 equipment nameplates installed: a) One complete nameplate mounting assembly. 3) For every 20 valve tags and pipe tags installed: a) One stainless steel cable and splice.

00361334.0000

10 14 00-4

Signage

1.5

WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified for each type of sign in this Article shall not deprive OWNER of other rights or remedies OWNER may otherwise have under the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents. The obligations of CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents shall not be limited in any way by the provisions of the specified special warranty. B. Special Warranty on Products: 1. Provide each signage manufacturer’s written warranty, running to the benefit of OWNER, agreeing to correct, or at option of OWNER, remove or replace materials specified in this Section found to be defective during a period of five years after the date of Substantial Completion. 2. Special warranty shall cover defective Work that includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of metal and polymer finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. General: 1. Details shown or indicated for signage, such as alpha-numeric and text type representation, letter spacing, designs of borders, and other graphic features, are generic and intended only to establish text, general positions, and symbols. 2. Colors shall be brilliant, distinctive shades, matching the safety colors specified in ANSI Z535.1 and OSHA 1910.144. 3. Accident prevention signs and tags shall comply with OSHA 1910.145. 4. Health, safety, and warning signs shall comply with ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2, ANSI Z535.3, OSHA 1910.144, and 1910.145, unless otherwise shown or indicated. Colors shall be as indicated in Table 1 of ANSI Z535.1. In addition to text, safety symbol pictograms shall be incorporated into each sign. 2.2 PANEL SIGNS – HEALTH, SAFETY, WARNING, AND FLOOR LOADING, AND FIRE EXTINGUISHER LOCATION

00361334.0000

10 14 00-5

Signage

A. Product Description: Provide rigid fiberglass reinforced plastic signs with fade-resistant embedded graphics. B. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Graphic Blast Word and Picture Series, by Best Sign Systems, Inc. 2. Blast Etched Fiberglass Signs, by Visigraph Corporation. 3. Or equal. C. General: 1. Size and Thickness: 0.125-inch thick; 10 inches by 14 inches, unless otherwise shown or indicated. 2. Graphics and Text: Standard Helvetica Medium characters and matching arrow type-face; upper and lower case, one-inch high capitals and, in addition, Grade 2 Braille alphabet message designations and other text. 3. Exposure: As recommended by sign manufacturer for both indoor and outdoor use and with an upper service temperature limit of 190degrees F. Average durability for outdoor use shall be 15 years. D. Safety Instruction Signs: Standard color of sign background shall be white; panel shall be green with white letters and numbers. Letters and numbers used against white background shall be black. Provide two signs to be used through out the project as directed by the OWNER. E. Warning Signs: Standard color of sign background shall be orange; panel shall be black with orange insert with black letters and numbers. Letters and numbers used against orange background shall be black. Provide two signs to be used through out the project as directed by the OWNER. F. No Smoking Signs: Standard color of sign background shall be white. Letters and numbers used against white background shall be red. Provide two signs to be used through out the project as directed by the OWNER. G. Fire Extinguisher Location Signs (surface-mounted units only): Standard color of sign background shall be red with white letters and numbers. Each sign shall include international fire extinguisher pictogram and directional arrow indicating location of fire extinguisher. H. Auxiliary Products: 1. Mounting Brackets: Provide sign manufacturer’s standard mounting brackets for installing projected or double-sided signs. 2.3

PIPE MARKERS

A. Description: Provide pipe markers for each pipeline provided under the Contract, and for other piping indicated to receive pipe markers.

00361334.0000

10 14 00-6

Signage

B. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Custom High Performance Pipe Markers (B-689), and SnapOn and StrapOn Pipe Markers (B-915), by Brady Worldwide, Inc., Signmark Division. 2. Custom Ultra-Mark High Performance Pipe Markers, by Seton Identification Products, a Tricor Direct Company. 3. Or equal. C. Pipe Markers: 1. Lettering of Titles/Legend and Color Field Size: a. Letter size and color field length shall be as indicated in Table 10 14 00-A of this Section: TABLE 10 14 00-A, PIPE MARKERS: SIZE OF TEXT AND COLOR FIELD Outside Diameter of Pipeline or Size of Text Minimum Length Covering* (Legend of Color (inches) Characters) Field** 3/4 to 1.25 1/2-inch 8 inches 1.5 to 1-7/8 3/4-inch 8 inches 2 to 5-7/8 1.25-inch 12 inches 6 to 9-7/8 2.5-inch 24 inches 10 and Larger 3.5-inch 32 inches *Outside diameter includes pipe diameter plus insulation and jacketing. **Length of sign and color field shall be as required to accommodate required legend, and shall not be less than minimum length indicated unless required otherwise by space constraints. b. Text and symbols shall be Standard Helvetica Medium, all upper case. Pipe markers shall include text with separate arrow signs indicating direction of flow of pipeline contents. Pipe markers with arrows shall be located as specified in Part 3 of this Section. c. Pipe markers indicating pipeline contents shall identify pipeline contents by complete name, as indicated in Table 10 14 00-B of this Section. Obtain from ENGINEER interpretation of required pipe marker text for pipelines provided under the Project that are not listed in Table 10 14 00-B of this Section. 2. Pipe Marker Materials: a. General: The following are applicable to all types of pipe markers furnished under this Section: 1) Provide pipe markers with ultraviolet light-resistant, sealed, subsurface color graphics, recommended by sign manufacturer, suitable for both indoor and outdoor use. 2) Pipe markers shall be resistant to abrasion, chemical reagents, and physical agitation such as washdowns and wind.

00361334.0000

10 14 00-7

Signage

3) Provide manufacturer’s full selection of standard and custom sizes and graphics. 4) Where manufacturer has established minimum order quantities for custom units provide minimum order quantities at no additional cost to OWNER. b. Materials: Provide the following at CONTRACTOR’s option, suitable for outside diameter of the associated pipe and pipe covering: 1) Adhesive, Wrap-Around Pipe Markers: Adhesive pipe markers shall be coiled construction, 0.006-inch total thickness, PVF over laminated polyester, with peel-off backing. Suitable for for service temperature ranging from -40 degrees F to 230 degrees F. 2) Snap-on Pipe Markers: Snap-on pipe markers shall be cylindrically coiled, printed plastic sheets. Pipe marker total thickness for pipe and pipe covering from 3/4-inch to 2-3/8inch outside diameter shall be not less than 0.020-inch. Pipe marker total thickness for pipe and pipe covering from 2.5-inch through six-inch ourside diameter shall be not less than 0.030inch. Suitable for service temperature ranging from -40 degrees F to 180 degrees F. 3) Strap-on Pipe Markers: Provide strap-on pipe markers where pipe diameter is large enough to preclude overlap of pipe marker material around the circumference of the pipe. Strapon pipe markers shall be flat, printed plastic sheets, not less than 0.020-inch total thickness, constructed to be attached to the pipe with bands. Suitable for service temperature ranging from -40 degrees F to 180 degrees F. Provide each pipe marker with two 1/4-inch wide band straps of nylon, plastic, or stainless steel, lengths as required by circumference of pipe and pipe covering. Provide manufacturer’s recommended banding tools for banding. PIPELINE SERVICE Toxic and corrosive fluids Potable, cooling, boiler feed, and other water Compressed air PIPELINE 00361334.0000

LETTERCOLOR Black

BACKGROUND COLOR Safety orange

EXAMPLE LETTERS

White

Safety green

LETTERS

White

Safety blue

LETTERS

LETTER

BACKGROUND

10 14 00-8

EXAMPLE Signage

SERVICE COLOR COLOR Gases (non White Safety purple LETTERS flammable, noncombustible) Steam Black Safety white LETTERS Contaminated White Safety gray LETTERS water (noncorrosive, non-toxic) User-defined White Safety black LETTERS 3. Pipe markers shall have the text or abbreviations in color combinations as directed by the owner to identify the pipeline service hazard. pipe marker colors shall comply with asme a13.1, unless otherewise indicated.

00361334.0000

10 14 00-9

Signage

2.4

EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

A. Description: 1. Provide equipment nameplate for each equipment item furnished under the Contract, and for other equipment items indicated to receive nameplates. Equipment nameplates specified in this Article are in addition to equipment manufacturer’s standard nameplate with manufacturer name, model number, serial number, and similar information. 2. Install equipment nameplates as indicated in Part 3 of this Section. Mechanically fasten equipment nameplates to the associated equipment item. B. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Brady-Etch Stainless Steel ID Tags (B-748) custom engraved, by Brady Worldwide, Inc., 2. Custom Screenprinted Nameplates – Stainless Steel, by Seton Identification Products, a Tricor Direct Company 3. Or equal. C. Equipment Nameplates: 1. Material: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel, 26-gage, with rounded corners. Suitable for temperatures ranging from -40 to 89 degrees C. Provide each equipment nameplate with not less than two holes, each approximately 3/16-inch diameter, for mechanically fastening nameplate to the associated equipment. Provide appropriate stainless steel fasteners. 2. Nameplate Size: a. Size shall be as required for required text, and shall be not less than one-inch by four inches. 3. Text Engraved on Nameplates: a. Text Size: Equipment nameplate titles shall have text as large as possible to fit on nameplate; text shall be not less than 1/2-inch high. All text on a given nameplate shall be one size. b. Text and symbols shall be Standard Helvetica Medium, all uppercase. c. Left-justify multiple lines of text d. Where more than one item of the same type of equipment is furnished, consecutively number each associated equipment nameplates as shown or indicated; for example “Pump No. 1”, “Pump No. 2”, “Pump No. 3”, and so on. e. 4. Operating Stands for Valves and Gates: a. Nameplate material, size, and text requirements are the same as indicated above for other equipment nameplates.

00361334.0000

10 14 00-10

Signage

b. Operating stands for valves and gates shall carry the respective legends “V. No. ___” or “S.G. No. ___,” with the appropriate equipment number to be indicated by ENGINEER. 5. Background and text color of nameplates for valve and gate operators shall be the same colors specified above for other equipment nameplates. 6. Background and text color of nameplates for valves and gates shall be the same as for the associated pipe markers. 2.5

VALVE AND PIPELINE TAGS

A. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Custom Engraved Stainless Steel Valve Tags, by Brady Worldwide, Inc. 2. Custom Stainless Steel Valve Tags, by Seton Identification Products, a Tricor Direct Company 3. Or equal. B. Metal Tags: 1. For each valve and for pipelines smaller than 3/4-inch outside diameter, provide permanently-legible, round metal tags, each two-inch diameter, Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel, with engraved lettering filled with black enamel. Provide tags with 3/16-inch diameter hole located that does not interfere with legend. 2. Legend for Valve Tags: a. Based on information provided on the Drawings, submit to ENGINEER not less than 4 days before system startup, a valve schedule indicating all required valves. b. For each valve, the valve schedule shall indicate: location, valve type, valve number, words to identify valve's function, type of operator, and normal operating position. c. Information presented in the valve schedules shall be coded on tags in a system provided by or acceptable to OWNER. Each valve shall be coded and identified by ENGINEER utilizing a combination of up to twelve letters and numbers. 3. Legend for Small Pipeline Tags: Comply with requirements for pipe markers relative to legend. Where legend is not indicated, obtain interpretation from ENGINEER. 4. Miscellaneous Valve and Small Pipeline Tag Accessories: a. Stainless Steel Wire: Nylon-coated; 0.048-inch outside diameter. b. Clamps: Brass. c. Lead Seals: Monel; four ply, 0.014-inch by 10 inches long; for attaching tags. d. Hand Sealing Press: As recommended by tag manufacturer for crimping lead seals. 2.6

AUXILIARY MATERIALS

00361334.0000

10 14 00-11

Signage

A. Very-High-Bond High-Performance Bonding Tape: 1. Provide all surface-mounted signage with very-high-bond foam tape backing except where specified as requiring mechanical fasteners. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Scotch Brand (Very-High-Bond) 4942 VHB Double Coated Acrylic Foam Tape and No. 94 Acrylic Primer, by 3M Industrial Tape and Specialties Division. b. Or equal. 3. Provide a very-high-bonding pressure sensitive joining system consisting of double-coated conformable acrylic foam tape and release liners. 4. Thickness: 0.045-inch. 5. Tape Width: 1.5 inches. 6. Color: Dark gray. 7. Bonding Adhesive: Acrylic; very-high-bond, solvent and shear resistance. 8. Primer: High-performance tape manufacturers recommended acrylic primer. B. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of non-magnetic stainless steel of size and type required and recommended by the associated individual signage manufacturer. C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts. Provide toothed stainless steel or lead expansion bolts for drilled-in-place anchors. D. Mounting Brackets: 1. Provide manufacturer’s standard mounting brackets for each of the following sign types: hanging, projected, double-sided. 2. Provide inserts, and mechanical and adhesive anchoring devices as specified in this Article for installation of signage. 2.7

FABRICATION

A. Shop Assembly: 1. Fabricate and preassemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible. 2. Disassemble units only to extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 3. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 2.8

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within tolerance of plus or minus 1/16-inch measured diagonally across each sign. 00361334.0000

10 14 00-12

Signage

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION

A. Examine substrates and conditions under which signage will be installed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2

INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Location: a. Install signage and appurtenances at the locations shown or indicated. When locations are not shown or indicated, install signage at locations directed by ENGINEER. b. Provide exit signs at locations shown or indicated. Surface-mount signs above each point of egress, unless otherwise shown or indicated. c. Lightly mark and locate position of each sign. Obtain ENGINEER’s acceptance of marked locations before mounting. 2. Installation – General: a. Install signs level, plumb, and at proper height. b. Signage shall be securely mounted with concealed, very-highbond acrylic foam tape, specified adhesives, or mechanical fasteners where specified. Attach signs to surfaces in accordance with sign manufacturer's instructions, unless otherwise shown or indicated. c. Provide very-high-bond acrylic foam tape on back of signage using a full perimeter of specified tape. Leave no gaps in tape perimeter at back of signage; peel off second release liner and press onto surfaces. 3. Repair or replace damaged units. B. Pipe Markers, Equipment Nameplates, and Pipe and Valve Tags: 1. Location of Pipe Markers and Pipe Tags: a. Provide pipe markers with text (pipeline contents or service) and adjacent arrow indicating the direction of flow of pipeline contents on each piping system provided under the Project and other piping systems shown or indicated as to receive pipe markers. b. Locations: Provide pipe markers at each of the following locations: 1) At intervals of not more than 30 linear feet apart 2) Directly adjacent to each side of each penetration by the pipeline of the following: wall, floor, ceiling, roof. 3) Adjacent to each change in flow direction. 4) On each branch where pipes connect together including but not limited to tees, wyes, and crosses.

00361334.0000

10 14 00-13

Signage

5) Adjacent to each side of each valve (including but not limited to check valves, isolation valves, control valves, and other valves), strainer cleanouts, and each equipment item along the pipeline. 6) Comply with ASME A13.1. c. Provide flow-direction arrows at intervals not greater than 15 linear feet. Where flow may be bi-directional, provide arrows adjacent to each other to indicate both directions. d. Pipe marker locations will be determined by ENGINEER, but in general place pipe markers where personnel view of label is unobstructed. When pipeline is overhead, install label on the two lower quarters of the pipe or pipe covering. Pipe markers shall be clearly visible from personnel operating positions, especially operating positions adjacent to valves and equipment. e. Provide pipe tags, where specified, at locations as specified for pipe markers. 2. Location of Valve Tags and Valve Nameplates: a. Valve nampeplates and valve signs for large valves shall be located on or adjacent to the valve. b. For smaller valves, attach tags to valve bonnet or valve flange bolts. c. For valves to receive equipment nameplates, as specified in this Section, install nameplate as requied for other equipment nameplates. d. Do not attach tags, nameplates, or signs to valve handwheels or other valve actuators. 3. Equipment Nameplates: a. Locate nameplates on equipment bases and on structures at readily-visible elevation in such positions relative to the equipment and structures as to prevent damage to nameplate. b. Position nameplace for ease of reading by operations and maintenance personnel. 3.3

PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. After installation, clean soiled signage surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Protect signage from damage until completion of the Work.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

10 14 00-14

Signage

SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install all fire protection specialties Work. 2. Extent of fire protection specialties Work is shown and specified. 3. Types of fire protection specialties Work required includes: a. Dry chemical extinguishers. b. Mounting accessories and miscellaneous fasteners. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate installation of items that must be installed with or before fire protection specialties. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 10 14 00, Signage. 1.2

REFERENCES

A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. UL Fire Classification Rating. 1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Provide fire protection specialties products from one manufacturer. B. Regulatory Requirements: Provide fire protection specialties approved and labeled by UL. 1.4

SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: Submit the following: a. Manufacturer’s technical data, certification of UL rating, and installation instructions for fire protection specialties.

00361334.0000

10 44 00-1

Fire Protection Specialties

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. General: Provide manufacturer’s standard mounting brackets for portable fire extinguishers size as specified. B. Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers: 1. Ten-pound capacity, enameled steel container with pressure-indicating gauge, for Class A, Class B, Class C fires, UL rating 4A-60 BC. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Cosmic Model 10E by J.L. Industries. b. Or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION

A. Examine substrates and conditions under which fire protection specialties will be installed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to ENGINEER. 3.2

INSTALLATION OF FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. When exact locations of fire protection specialties are not shown on Drawings, locate as directed by ENGINEER. B. Securely fasten products to structure, square and plumb, per Supplier’s instructions. Mounting heights shall be: 1. Install fire extinguishers with gross weight less than 40 pounds with top of fire extinguisher no more than 4.0 feet above finished floor. 2. Clearance between bottom of fire extinguisher and finished floor shall be at least four inches. C. Identification Devices: Provide signs level and plumb directly above surface mounted portable fire extinguishers, securely mounted, attached to substrate per sign manufacturer’s instructions. Signage shall be per Section 10 14 00, Signage. D. Recharge fire extinguishers provided under this Contract so that most recent inspection date coincides as nearly as possible with date of Substantial Completion. Inform OWNER in writing of next required inspection and recharging date. + + END OF SECTION + + 00361334.0000

10 44 00-2

Fire Protection Specialties

SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC DUCTWORK, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install hangers and supports complete with required appurtenances for HVAC ductwork, piping, and equipment. 2. The Work shall comply with vibration, seismic, and wind control requirements in Section 40 05 96, Vibration, Seismic, and Wind Controls. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before, the hangers and supports for HVAC ductwork, piping, and equipment Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 60 00, Grouting. 2. Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. 3. Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel Framing. 4. Section 05 50 13, Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications. 5. Section 40 05 96, Vibration, Seismic, and Wind Controls. 1.2

REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 1. ANSI B1.1 – Unified Inch Screw Threads (ASME B1.1). B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). 1. ASCE 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1. ASTM A36/A36M – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A47/A47M – Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 3. ASTM A123/A123M – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 4. ASTM A153/A153M – Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (HotDip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 00361334.0000

23 05 29-1

HVAC Hangers and Supports

5. ASTM A307 – Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. 6. ASTM A575 – Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades. 7. ASTM A668/A688M – Standard Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for General Industrial Use. D. American Welding Society (AWS). 1. AWS B2.1 – Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification. E. Federal Specifications (FS). 1. FS WW-H-171 – Hangers and Supports, Pipe. F. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS). 1. MSS SP 58 – Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and Manufacture. 2. MSS SP 69 – Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 1. NFPA 90A – Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. H. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). 1. HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible. 2. Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems. 1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: a. Minimum of five years of experience producing substantially similar equipment and able to show evidence of at least five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years. 2. Professional Engineer: a. Engage a registered professional engineer legally qualified to practice the State of Florida and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. b. Submit qualifications data. c. Responsibilities include but are not necessarily limited to: 1) Carefully reviewing system performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents. 2) Preparing written requests for clarifications or interpretations of performance or design criteria for submittal to ENGINEER by CONTRACTOR.

00361334.0000

23 05 29-2

HVAC Hangers and Supports

3) Preparing or supervising the preparation of design calculations and related drawings, Shop Drawings, testing plan development, test-result interpretation and a comprehensive engineering analysis verifying compliance of the system with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4) Signing and sealing all calculations and design drawings, and Shop Drawings. 5) Certifying that: a) it has performed the design of the system in accordance with the performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents, and b) the said design conforms to all applicable local, state and federal codes, rules and regulations, and to the prevailing standards of practice. 3. Installer: a. Engage an experienced installer to perform the work of this Section who has specialized in installing hangers and supports for HVAC ductwork, piping, and equipment similar to that required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. b. Submit name and qualifications to ENGINEER along with the following information on a minimum of three successful projects: 1) Names and telephone numbers of owners, architects or engineers responsible for projects. 2) Approximate contract cost of the hangers and supports for HVAC ductwork, piping, and equipment. 3) Amount of area installed. 4. Welding: a. Qualify processes and operators in accordance with AWS B2.1 as appropriate for material to be welded. b. Provide certification that operators employed on or to be employed for the Work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. Ensure that all certifications are current. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain all equipment included in this Section regardless of the component manufacturer from a single hangers and supports for HVAC ductwork, piping, and equipment manufacturer. 2. Require the hangers and supports for HVAC ductwork, piping, and equipment manufacturer to review and approve or to prepare all Shop Drawings and other submittals for all components furnished under this Section. 3. All components shall be specifically constructed for the specified service conditions and shall be integrated into the overall equipment assembly by the hangers and supports for HVAC ductwork, piping, and equipment manufacturer. 00361334.0000

23 05 29-3

HVAC Hangers and Supports

C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. International Building Code (IBC). 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 3. Local and State Building Codes and Ordinances. 4. Permits: CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all required permits, fees and inspections. 1.4

SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Drawings showing fabrication methods, assembly, accessories, and installation details. b. Setting drawings, templates, and directions for the installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages. c. Drawings showing floor supported components and installation arrangement. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer’s literature, illustrations, specifications, weight, dimensions, required clearances, materials of construction, and performance data for all equipment. b. Complete component list. c. Detailed description of each component. d. Catalog cut sheets for each component. e. Deviations from Contract Documents. Any exceptions to the Contract Documents must be clearly defined. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any additional expenses that may occur due to any exception made. f. Other technical data related to specified material and equipment as requested by ENGINEER. 3. Delegated Design Submittals: a. 1/4-inch scale HVAC ductwork, piping, and equipment layouts, dimensioned to show length of runs, with all expansion joints, alignment guides, anchors and appurtenances required for proper control of HVAC ductwork, piping, and equipment forces. The drawings shall include all forces acting on the HVAC ductwork, piping, and equipment and the corresponding reactions of the compensation and anchor devices provided. b. All drawings, design calculations, and a letter indicating that the hanger and support systems have been properly designed shall be signed and sealed by a registered professional engineer legally qualified to practicein the State of Florida. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Independent certification reports. 2. Manufacturer Instructions: 00361334.0000

23 05 29-4

HVAC Hangers and Supports

a. Instructions and recommendations for handling, storing, protecting the equipment. b. Installation Data. 3. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Factory test reports. 4. Qualifications Statements: a. Manufacturer, when requested by ENGINEER. b. Professional Engineer, when requested by ENGINEER. c. Installer, when requested by ENGINEER. d. Welding, when requested by ENGINEER. 1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. 2. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete, in ample time to prevent delay of that Work. 3. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for rigging of equipment. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 2. Store all equipment in covered storage off the ground and prevent condensation and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for long-term storage. C. Acceptance at Site: 1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace lost equipment or components and repair damage to new condition, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Design Criteria: 1. Designs generally accepted as exemplifying good engineering practice and using stock or production parts shall be utilized wherever possible.

00361334.0000

23 05 29-5

HVAC Hangers and Supports

2. Accurate weight balance calculations shall be made to determine the required force at each hanger and support location and the weight load at each force concentration point. 3. Hangers and supports shall be capable of supporting and restraining HVAC ductwork, piping, and equipment in all conditions of operation. They shall allow free expansion and contraction, and prevent excessive stress resulting from transferred weight being induced into the HVAC ductwork, piping, and equipment. 4. Hangers and supports shall be designed so that they cannot become disengaged by movements of the supported HVAC ductwork, piping, and equipment. 5. Rod length shall be limited to a maximum length of eight linear feet. 6. HVAC ductwork, piping, and equipment that cannot be hung by rod and hanger arrangement shall be floor or wall supported. 7. All structural components shall be designed based on static and dynamic loads imposed by the supported HVAC ductwork, piping, and equipment and shall include a safety factor of 2 for the yield strength. Minimum angle sizes shall be 2-inch x 2-inch x1/4-inch. 8. Load ratings, materials and installation shall be consistent with the recommendations from the latest edition of MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and FS WW-H-171. 9. Hanger and support design calculations for all HVAC ductwork, piping, and equipment shall be signed and sealed by a registered professional engineer legally qualified to practice in the State of Florida. 2.2

MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Provide product of one of the following: 1. Erico International Corporation. 2. Anvil International. 3. Or equal. 2.3

DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION

A. Materials: 1. Hangers, supports, restraints, and appurtenances located in corrosive areas shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Hangers, supports, restraints, and appurtenances located in noncorrosive or dusty areas shall be hot dipped galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M and ASTM A153/A153M. 3. Hangers, supports, restraints, and appurtenances located outdoors shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 4. Steel used for the support of uninsulated copper piping or plastic piping shall be PVC coated. 5. Refer to the Corrosive and Non-Corrosive Area Designation Table shown on the Drawings for a list of these areas.

00361334.0000

23 05 29-6

HVAC Hangers and Supports

B. Components of hangers and supports shall conform to the following: 1. Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A, unless otherwise specified below. 2. Forgings: ASTM A668/A688M. 3. Malleable Iron: ASTM A47/A47M. 4. Rods and Bars: ASTM A575. 5. Threads: Unified Screw Threads, Class 2A and 2B, ANSI B1.1. 6. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M. C. Hanger Attachments: The following types of attachments shall be considered acceptable: 1. Adjustable Steel Clevis: FS WW-H-171E, Type 1. 2. Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamp: FS WW-H-171E, Type 3. 3. Steel Pipe Clamp: FS WW-H-171E, Type 4. 4. Adjustable Swivel Pipe Ring: FS WW-H-171E, Type 6. 5. Adjustable Steel Band Hanger: FS WW-H-171E, Type 7. 6. Riser Clamp: FS WW-H-171E, Type 8. 7. Light-Duty Clevis Hanger: FS WW-H-171E, Type 12. 8. Long Clips: FS WW-H-171E, Type 26. 9. Offset J-Hooks: FS WW-H-171E, Type 27. 10. Steel Pipe Covering Protection Saddle: FS WW-H-171E, Type 40A. 11. Insulation Protection Shield: FS WW-H-171E, Type 41. 12. Pipe Saddle Support: FS WW-H-171E, Type 37. 13. Pipe Stanchion Saddle: FS WW-H-171E, Type 38. 14. Pipe Saddle Support with Base: FS WW-H-171E, Type 36. 15. Adjustable Roller Hanger: FS WW-H-171E, Type 42. D. Structural Attachments: The following types of attachments shall be considered acceptable: 1. Side Beam Clamp: FS WW-H-171E, Type 20. 2. Center I-Beam Clamp: FS WW-H-171E, Type 21. 3. Welded Steel Bracket: FS WW-H-171E, Types 32 and 33. 4. Side Beam Bracket: FS WW-H-171E, Type 35. E. Hanger Rod Attachments: Use as required to complete assembly: 1. Forged Steel Clevis: FS WW-H-171E, Type 14. 2. Adjustable Turnbuckle: FS WW-H-171E, Type 15. 3. Forged Steel Welders Eye Nut: FS WW-H-171E, Type 17. F. Concrete anchorage shall be provided in accordance with Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. G. Structural steel shall be provided in accordance with Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel Framing. H. Miscellaneous metal fabrications shall be provided in accordance with Section 05 50 13, Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications.

00361334.0000

23 05 29-7

HVAC Hangers and Supports

2.4

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Shop Tests: 1. Equipment shall be completely manufactured and pre-assembled in accordance with Reference Standards. Perform the following tests and inspections at factory before shipment: a. Tested and inspected for approval as a unit by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., UL Label or equal. b. Factory test equipment to ensure that the entire package has been properly fabricated and assembled, that the package meets the specified performance requirements including manufacturer’s data report. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION

A. Examine conditions under which materials and equipment will be installed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Take field measurements where required prior to installation to ensure proper fitting of Work. 3.2

INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install the equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents and by manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Obtain written interpretation from ENGINEER in the event of conflict between manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations and the Contract Documents. 2. Install in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 3. Do not modify structures to facilitate installation of equipment, unless approved in writing by ENGINEER. 4. Installation to conform to requirements of all local and state codes. B. Ductwork: 1. The construction and installation of hangers and supports for ductwork shall conform to the recommendations given in the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, except as specified. 2. Hanger rods shall have threaded ends. 3. All ductwork shall be supported from trapeze type hangers. No sheet metal duct hangers or straps will be allowed. 4. A pair of rods shall be provided at each duct support point. 00361334.0000

23 05 29-8

HVAC Hangers and Supports

C. Piping: 1. Insulated pipes with vapor barriers shall have an insulation protection shield conforming to FS WW-H-171E, Type 41 tack-welded to hanger. 2. Insulated pipes without vapor barriers shall have a steel protection saddle conforming to FS WW-H-171E, Type 40A. 3. All uninsulated copper piping shall be supported by plastic coated steel pipe attachments. 4. All piping shall be braced as required, to prevent sway in any direction. 5. All insulated piping 3-inch diameter and larger shall be supported by roller hangers conforming to FS WW-H-171E, Type 42. 6. Additional supports shall be placed immediately adjacent to any change in direction. 7. Supports for Vertical Piping: a. Provide riser clamp placed under hub, fitting or coupling with approved solid bearing on steel sleeve at each floor level. b. Where riser clamps are used with plastic piping they shall be modified so as not to exert any compressive forces on the pipe. c. Support spacing shall not exceed code requirements. 8. Allow clearances for expansion and contraction of piping. D. Anchorages and Base Plates: 1. Provide anchorages in new or existing concrete, as applicable, in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s recommendations and the Contract Documents. Install anchors in accordance with Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. 2. Where used, pour concrete bases up to one inch below equipment baseplate or support leg as applicable. Base with equipment mounted shall then be accurately shimmed to grade and spaces between filled with non-shrink grout in accordance with Section 03 60 00, Grouting. After grout has reached its initial set, exposed edges shall be neatly cut back 1/2 inch. E. Anchorage shall be provided in accordance with Section 40 05 96, Vibration, Seismic, and Wind Controls. 3.3

ADJUSTING

A. Adjust all equipment for proper settings. 3.4

CLEANING

A. Thoroughly clean all equipment and accessories prior to installation. B. Remove all dirt, rust, dust, etc. from equipment and accessories after installation. C. Remove and dispose of all debris and waste from the Site resulting from installation. 00361334.0000

23 05 29-9

HVAC Hangers and Supports

3.5

SCHEDULES

A. Hangers and Supports for Ductwork: 1. Spacing: a. Ductwork shall be supported at distances not exceeding the spacing specified below: 1) Metal Ductwork: a) Maximum Spacing: 10 feet. 2) Flexible and Other Factory-Made Ductwork (such as FRP): a) Maximum Spacing: In accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. 2. Hanger Rod Sizes: a. Hanger rods shall be sized based on static and dynamic loads imposed by the supported ductwork and shall include a safety factor of 2 for the yield strength. b. Rod load shall not exceed rod manufacturer’s recommended capacity. B. Hangers and Supports for Piping: 1. Spacing: a. Piping shall be supported at distances not exceeding the spacing specified below or in accordance with MSS SP 69: 1) Copper Tube: a) Maximum Horizontal Spacing: 6 feet. b) Maximum Vertical Spacing: 10 feet. 2) Copper Pipe: a) Maximum Horizontal Spacing: 12 feet. b) Maximum Vertical Spacing: 10 feet. 3) Steel Pipe: a) Maximum Horizontal Spacing: 12 feet. b) Maximum Vertical Spacing: 15 feet. 2. Hanger Rod Sizes: a. Hanger rods shall be sized based on static and dynamic loads imposed by the supported piping and shall include a safety factor of 2 for the yield strength. b. Rod load shall not exceed rod manufacturer’s recommended capacity. C. Hangers and Supports for HVAC Equipment: 1. Provide spacing and hanger rod sizes in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s installation instructions.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

23 05 29-10

HVAC Hangers and Supports

SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to perform the testing, adjusting, and balancing for HVAC as specified herein. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before, the testing, adjusting, and balancing for HVAC Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 10 14 00, Signage. 1.2

REFERENCES

A. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC). 1. AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 1. ASHRAE Handbook – Fundamentals. C. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). 1. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems. D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). 1. SMACNA HVAC Systems – Testing, Adjusting & Balancing Handbook. 1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: 1. Balancer: a. Engage an experienced balancer to perform the work of this Section who has specialized in testing, adjusting, and balancing for HVAC systems similar to that required for this Project. b. Minimum of five years of experience in testing, adjusting, and balancing substantially similar equipment and able to show 00361334.0000

23 05 93-1

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

c.

evidence of at least five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years. Submit name and qualifications to ENGINEER along with the following information on a minimum of five successful projects: 1) Names and telephone numbers of owners, architects or engineers responsible for projects. 2) Approximate contract cost of the testing, adjusting, and balancing for HVAC Work. 3) Amount of area tested, adjusted, and balanced. 4) Biographical information on employee proposed to directly supervise the testing, adjusting, and balancing Work.

B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC). 2. National Electrical Code (NEC). 3. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 5. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). 6. Local and State Building Codes and Ordinances. 7. Permits: CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all required permits, fees and inspections. 1.4

SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: a. Data sheets with name of devices, manufacturer’s name, model number, latest date of calibration, and correction factors for each testing, adjusting, and balancing instruments. b. Other technical data related to specified material and equipment as requested by ENGINEER. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Certification by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), Association Air Balance Council (AABC), or equal. 2. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Specimen copies of report forms for ENGINEER’S review and approval. 1) Forms shall be 8-1/2 by 11-inch paper for loose-leaf binding, with blanks for certification of report and listing all required testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements and ratings. 3. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Written startup and field test reports presenting results of required field testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1) Certified reports shall be in typed format on approved forms imprinted with the company’s name. 00361334.0000

23 05 93-2

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

2) Reports shall include procedure outline used to test, adjust, and balance the systems and the types of instruments used. 3) Minimum three certified copies of testing, adjusting, and balancing reports to the ENGINEER for review. 4) Reports must be submitted to ENGINEER and OWNER for approval prior to OWNER’S acceptance for responsibility. 4. Qualifications Statements: a. Balancer, when requested by ENGINEER. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Maintenance Contracts: a. Maintenance and Repair: 1) Provide all labor, tools, and equipment to provide a Preventive Maintenance Program and make repairs for all equipment and controls during the One Year Correction Period after the Final Acceptance by OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall provide the following services for the same period of one year: a) Receive calls for all problems and take steps to immediately correct deficiencies, which may exist. b) Provide a monthly inspection of all equipment, and record the findings on a checklist hereinafter specified. c) Provide a Preventive Maintenance Schedule for the principle items of equipment. d) Respond to OWNER and make repairs for all equipment and controls within 24-hours of notification by OWNER. b. Check List: 1) Provide a checklist and post a copy of it, where directed by the OWNER. 2) Include each piece of equipment specified or shown. 3) Provide four columns for required quarterly inspections. 4) Provide columns for the following: a) Equipment condition. b) Equipment operation. c) Equipment lubrication. d) Preventive maintenance. 5) Preventive maintenance shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and accepted practice. 2. Operations and Maintenance Data: a. Submit complete Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, including, test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation, and spare parts information. b. Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the requirements of Section 01 78 23, Operations and Maintenance Data. 1.5

SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: 00361334.0000

23 05 93-3

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

1. Testing, adjusting, and balancing for HVAC shall be performed when outside ambient conditions are approximate to the local ASHRAE Handbook – Fundamentals design conditions for all heating and cooling functions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE

A. Equipment Description: 1. Air Balance Instruments: a. Provide all velometers, anemometers, pitot tubes, differential air pressure gages, manometers, hook gages, static pressure probe units, and all other instruments and accessories as required to perform all air balance tests of HVAC equipment, ducts, registers, grilles, etc. b. Flow-measuring hoods (manufactured, not fabricated) shall be acceptable for measurement of ceiling diffuser performance only. 2. System Performance Measuring Instruments: a. Provide insertion thermometers, sling psychrometers, tachometers, revolution counters, clamp-on volt-ammeter recorders, and other instruments as required to measure all facets of the complete HVAC system performance. B. Performance Criteria: 1. Instrumentation shall be in accordance with NEBB, AABC, or SMACNA requirements and shall be calibrated to the accuracy standards demanded by these organizations. 2.2

ACCESSORIES

A. Balancing Sheaves and Belts: 1. Balancing sheaves and belts shall be provided for all belt driven equipment. 2. Sheaves and belts shall be provided to match construction and duty provided by the equipment manufacturer. 3. Equipment sheaves and belts replaced or not required to achieve balancing shall be submitted to the OWNER as spare parts. 2.3

IDENTIFICATION

A. All equipment and component identification, including valve tags, shall be provided in accordance with Section 10 14 00, Signage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION

00361334.0000

23 05 93-4

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

A. Heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment and components shall be completely installed and in continuous operation, as required, to accomplish the testing, adjusting and balancing Work specified. B. Inspect all HVAC equipment and components for proper operation prior to testing, adjusting and balancing. 1. Fan Belt Deflection: Not less than 1/4-inch or more than 1/2-inch. 2. Finned Coils: Plate type fins shall be combed out with a fin comb for the appropriate fin spacing. Helical fins shall be straightened with blunt bladed instrument. C. Pre-Startup Inspection: 1. Verify proper equipment mounting and setting. 2. Verify that control, interlock and power wiring is complete. 3. Verify alignment of motors and drives. 4. Verify proper piping connections and accessories. 5. Verify that lubrication is completed. D. First Run Observations: 1. Verify direction of rotation. 2. Verify setting of safety controls. 3. Monitor heat build-up in bearings. 4. Check motor loads against nameplate data. E. Equipment Check: 1. Verify proper overload heater sizes. 2. Verify function of safety and operating controls. 3. Verify proper operation of equipment. 4. Report on inspection, observation and checking procedures. F. Promptly report defects which may affect the Work to ENGINEER. G. Should corrective measures caused by faulty installation require re-testing, adjusting and balancing, such Work shall be at no additional cost to the OWNER. 3.2

APPLICATION

A. General: 1. Test, adjust, and balance all systems, ductwork, piping, etc. and their control systems in accordance with the AABC National Standards for Total System Balance, NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems, SMACNA HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting & Balancing Handbook, or in compliance with the standard procedure manual published by the testing, adjusting, and balancing organization affiliated with CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall submit one copy of the standard procedure manual to the ENGINEER for their records. 00361334.0000

23 05 93-5

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

2. CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary instruments, tools, ladders, etc. to complete all testing, adjusting, and balancing Work. 3. CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for safe keeping of all instruments, tools, ladders, etc. during the course of the Work. 4. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the protection and safeguarding of the Work and shall provide every protection against accidents, injury, and damage to persons and property. 5. CONTRACTOR shall keep dust, dirt, and debris to an absolute minimum and reinstall all removed ceiling components to their original positions at the end of each day’s Work. 6. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for removal and reinstallation of ceiling system and replacement of any component damaged. 7. CONTRACTOR shall install additional access panels at no extra cost to the OWNER, as is required to gain access to equipment concealed above ceilings, behind walls, or any other concealed space. 8. Systems shall be tested, adjusted, and balanced with clean filters and strainers. 9. Where equipment is provided with a variable speed controller (VSC) or variable frequency drive (VFD), balance the equipment first with the VSC or VFD and then with balancing dampers (air systems) or valves (hydronic systems). All systems shall be optimized through the VSC or VFD by balancing with the minimum static pressure needed to meet design flow conditions. B. Air Systems: 1. Preliminary: a. Identify and list size, type and manufacturer of all equipment to be tested, including air terminals. 2. Central Systems: a. Test rpm for all equipment, including adjusting of each fan, air handling unit, and air conditioning unit to design requirements within the limits of mechanical equipment provided. b. Test and record motor voltages and running amperes including motor nameplate data, and starter heater ratings for each unit as listed above. c. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply, exhaust and return ducts, determine airflow at all fans and units and adjust fans and units to within five percent of design requirements. d. Test and record system static pressure, suction and discharge. e. Test and adjust system for design outside air, (cfm). f. Test and adjust system for design recirculated air, (cfm). g. Test and record heating apparatus entering air temperatures, (dry bulb). h. Test and record cooling apparatus entering air temperatures, (dry bulb and wet bulb). i. Test and record heating apparatus leaving air temperatures, (dry bulb). 00361334.0000

23 05 93-6

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

j.

Test and record cooling apparatus leaving air temperatures, (dry bulb and wet bulb). k. Record all fan and air handling unit speeds. l. Record air quantity delivered by each fan and air-handling unit. 3. Distribution: a. Sheave and belt replacement shall be provided as the first means of accomplishing the balancing Work before volume dampers are adjusted from their initial open positions. b. Adjust volume dampers, control dampers, splitter dampers, etc., to proper design airflow in main ducts, branch ducts, and zones. 4. Air Terminals: a. Identify each air terminal as to location and determine required flow reading. b. Test and adjust each air terminal to within tolerance of design requirements as listed below. 1) Positive Zones: a) Diffusers and Supply Air Terminals: 0 percent to +10 percent. b) Exhaust and Return Air Terminals: 0 percent to -10 percent. 2) Negative Zones: a) Diffusers and Supply Air Terminals: 0 percent to -10 percent. b) Exhaust and Return Air Terminals: 0 percent to +10 percent. 3) Neutral Zones: a) All Air Terminals: -10 percent to +10 percent. c. Test procedure on air terminals shall include recording comparison of required airflow and observed airflow, adjustment of terminal, and recording of final airflow. d. Adjust flow patterns from air terminal units to minimize drafts to the extent that the design and equipment permits. 5. Verification: a. Prepare summation of readings of observed airflow for each system, compare with required airflow, and verify that duct losses are within specified allowable range. b. Verify design airflow at fans as described above. c. If determined that the air system has not been properly balanced, CONTRACTOR shall rebalance and recheck all equipment and components in the presence of the ENGINEER and as accepted by the ENGINEER. C. Temperature Control System: 1. Set and adjust automatically operated devices to achieve required sequence of operations. 2. Testing organization shall verify all controls for proper calibration and list those controls requiring adjustment by control system installer. 00361334.0000

23 05 93-7

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Balancer’s Services: 1. Provide a qualified, factory-trained service person to perform the following: a. After HVAC equipment installation, inspect and adjust equipment, verify proper operation, and assist with field testing. b. Instruct operations and maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment. 2. Balancer’s service person shall make visits to the Site as follows: a. First visit shall be for checking completed installation, start-up of system; and performing field testing. Minimum number of hours on-Site: 8 hours. b. Technician shall revisit the Site as often as necessary until installation is acceptable. 3. All costs, including expenses for travel, lodging, meals and incidentals, and cost of travel time, for visits to the Site shall be included in the Contract Price. 3.4

SCHEDULES

A. Test, adjust, and balance all HVAC equipment:

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

23 05 93-8

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

SECTION 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install duct insulation complete with accessories. 2. This Work also includes: a. Repairing all existing duct insulation in all areas that is damaged or displaced due to new construction by CONTRACTOR with materials and procedures identical to the existing duct insulation. B. Coordination: 1. Duct insulation shall not be installed until ductwork has been field tested and approved by ENGINEER. 2. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before, the duct insulation Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 91 00, Painting. 2. Section 10 14 00, Signage. 1.2

REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM C411 – Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 1. NFPA 90A – Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 2. NFPA 90B – Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and AirConditioning Systems. 3. NFPA 255 – Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). 1. UL 181 – Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors. 2. UL 723 – Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 00361334.0000

23 07 13-1

Duct Insulation

1.3

DEFINITIONS

A. Concealed spaces – spaces in which ductwork are installed and are withdrawn or removed from observation or kept from plain sight. Spaces above hung ceiling are examples of concealed spaces. B. Exposed spaces – spaces in which ductwork are installed and laid open to view; unconcealed. All outdoor locations shall be considered exposed spaces. 1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: a. Minimum of five years of experience producing substantially similar material and able to show evidence of at least five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years. 2. Installer: a. Engage an experienced installer to perform the work of this Section who has specialized in installing duct insulation similar to that required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. b. Submit name and qualifications to ENGINEER along with the following information on a minimum of three successful projects: 1) Names and telephone numbers of owners, architects or engineers responsible for projects. 2) Approximate contract cost of the duct insulation. 3) Amount of area installed. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 2. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). 3. Local and State Building Codes and Ordinances. 4. Permits: CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all required permits, fees and inspections. 1.5

SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Drawings showing fabrication methods, assembly, accessories, and installation details. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer’s literature, illustrations, specifications, weight, dimensions, required clearances, materials of construction, and performance data for all material. b. Deviations from Contract Documents. Any exceptions to the Contract Documents must be clearly defined. CONTRACTOR 00361334.0000

23 07 13-2

Duct Insulation

c.

shall be responsible for any additional expenses that may occur due to any exception made. Other technical data related to specified material and equipment as requested by ENGINEER.

B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Independent certification reports: 1) UL Label. 2. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Instructions and recommendations for handling, storing, protecting the material. b. Installation Data. 3. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Factory test reports. 4. Qualifications Statements: a. Manufacturer, when requested by ENGINEER. b. Installer, when requested by ENGINEER. 1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 2. Store all material in covered storage off the ground and prevent condensation and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for long-term storage. C. Acceptance at Site: 1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to material or components. Replace lost material or components and repair damage to new condition, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Design Criteria:

00361334.0000

23 07 13-3

Duct Insulation

1. All insulation systems including covering, mastics, adhesives, sealers and facings shall have the following Fire Hazard Classifications in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723: a. Flame Spread Index: 25 maximum. b. Smoke Developed Index: 50 maximum. 2. All insulation systems shall not flame, glow, smolder or smoke when tested in accordance ASTM C411 at service temperature of 250 degrees F. 3. All insulation systems shall meet fire safety standards NFPA 90A, 90B, and 255 where applicable. B. Performance Criteria: 1. Acoustical thermal insulation used as internal insulation and exposed to the airstream in ducts shall be shown to be durable when tested in accordance with UL 181. 2.2

MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Provide product of one of the following: 1. CertainTeed. 2. Johns Manville. 3. Owens Corning. 4. Or equal. 2.3

DETAILS OF MATERIALS

A. Rigid Thermal Insulation: 1. Type: Rigid fiberglass board with vapor barrier facing. 2. Density: Minimum six pound per cubic foot. 3. Facing: Foil-Scrim-Kraft (FSK). 4. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.22 Btu-in/hr-ft2-degree F at 75 degrees F mean temperature. 5. Water Vapor Transmission: Maximum 0.05 perm. 2.4

IDENTIFICATION

A. All external duct insulation shall be legibly printed or identified at intervals not greater than 36 inches with the name of the manufacturer, the thermal resistance R-value at the specified thickness and the flame spread and smoke-developed indexes of the composite materials. B. All duct insulation identification shall be provided in accordance with Section 10 14 00, Signage. 2.5

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Shop Tests:

00361334.0000

23 07 13-4

Duct Insulation

1. Material shall be completely manufactured and pre-assembled in accordance with Reference Standards. Perform the following tests and inspections at factory before shipment: a. Tested and inspected for approval as a unit by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., UL Label. b. Factory test material to ensure that the entire package has been properly fabricated and assembled, and that the package meets the specified performance requirements including manufacturer’s data report. c. Flame Spread. d. Smoke Developed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION

A. Examine conditions under which materials and equipment will be installed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. All ductwork leaks shall be repaired prior to installation of duct insulation. C. Take field measurements where required prior to installation to ensure proper fitting of Work. 3.2

INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install the material in accordance with the Contract Documents and by manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Obtain written interpretation from ENGINEER in the event of conflict between manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations and the Contract Documents. 2. Install in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 3. Do not modify structures to facilitate installation of material, unless approved in writing by ENGINEER. 4. Installation to conform to requirements of all local and state codes. B. Duct insulation shall be continuous through walls and floor openings except where walls or floors are required to be firestopped or required to have a fire resisting rating. C. Install insulation so as to make surfaces smooth, even, substantially flush with adjacent insulation and installed in a manner to maintain the integrity of the vapor barrier. 3.3

CLEANING

00361334.0000

23 07 13-5

Duct Insulation

A. Thoroughly clean all exterior and interior surfaces of ductwork and accessories prior to installation and prior to putting into service. B. Remove all dirt, rust, dust, etc. from material after installation. C. Remove and dispose of all debris and waste from the Site resulting from installation. 3.4

SCHEDULES

A. Insulation Thicknesses: 1. Insulation for ductwork shall be minimum 1-1/2 inches thick with a minimum installed thermal resistance value of R-5. B. Insulation Types: 1. Rigid thermal insulation shall be used on ductwork in exposed spaces. C. Insulation Locations: 1. All supply, return, and exhaust ductwork and plenums including appurtenances (e.g., VAV boxes, volume dampers, diffusers, grilles, etc.) associated with air conditioning units. 2. All heated or air conditioned ductwork located outdoors or in unheated spaces. 3. Any additional ductwork and plenums including appurtenances where condensation may occur due to contact with surrounding atmosphere.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

23 07 13-6

Duct Insulation

SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install refrigerant piping complete and operational with accessories. 2. The Work shall comply with vibration, seismic, and wind control requirements in Section 40 05 96, Vibration, Seismic, and Wind Controls. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before the refrigerant piping Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 91 00, Painting. 2. Section 10 14 00, Signage. 3. Section 23 05 29, Hangers and Supports for HVAC Ductwork, Piping, and Equipment. 4. Section 40 05 96, Vibration, Seismic, and Wind Controls. 1.2

REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 1. ASHRAE Standard 15 – Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 1. ASME/ANSI B16.18 – Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. ASME/ANSI B16.22 – Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 3. ASME B40.100 – Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1. ASTM B32 – Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 2. ASTM B280 – Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.

00361334.0000

23 23 00-1

Refrigerant Piping

3. ASTM B813 – Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube. 4. ASTM B828 – Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings. E. American Welding Society (AWS). 1. AWS A5.8/A5.8M – Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. 2. AWS A5.31 – Specification for Fluxes and Braze Welding. 3. AWS B2.2 – Specification for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification. 4. AWS B2.3 – Specification for Soldering Procedure and Performance Qualification. 1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: a. Minimum of five years of experience producing substantially similar material and able to show evidence of at least five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years. 2. Professional Engineer: a. Engage a registered professional engineer legally qualified to practice the state of Florida and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. b. Submit qualifications data. c. Responsibilities include but are not necessarily limited to: 1) Carefully reviewing system performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents. 2) Preparing written requests for clarifications or interpretations of performance or design criteria for submittal to ENGINEER by CONTRACTOR. 3) Preparing or supervising the preparation of design calculations and related drawings, Shop Drawings, testing plan development, test-result interpretation and a comprehensive engineering analysis verifying compliance of the system with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4) Signing and sealing all calculations and design drawings, and Shop Drawings. 5) Certifying that: a) it has performed the design of the system in accordance with the performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents, and b) the said design conforms to all applicable local, state and federal codes, rules and regulations, and to the prevailing standards of practice. 3. Installer:

00361334.0000

23 23 00-2

Refrigerant Piping

a. Engage an experienced installer to perform the work of this Section who has specialized in installing refrigerant piping similar to that required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. b. Submit name and qualifications to ENGINEER along with the following information on a minimum of three successful projects: 1) Names and telephone numbers of owners, architects or engineers responsible for projects. 2) Approximate contract cost of the refrigerant piping. 3) Amount of area installed. 4. Brazing and Soldering: a. Qualify processes and operators in accordance with AWS B2.2 and B2.3 as appropriate for material to be brazed or soldered. b. Provide certification that operators employed on or to be employed for the Work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. Ensure that all certifications are current. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 3. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). 4. Local and State Building Codes and Ordinances. 5. Permits: CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all required permits, fees and inspections. 1.4

SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Drawings showing fabrication methods, assembly, accessories, and installation details, including supports, expansion joints, guides and anchors. b. 1/4-inch scale piping layouts, dimensioned to show length of runs, sizes, support spacing and expansion provisions. c. Setting drawings, templates, and directions for the installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer’s literature, illustrations, specifications, weight, dimensions, required clearances, materials of construction, and performance data for all equipment. b. Complete component list. c. Detailed description of each component. d. Catalog cut sheets for each component. e. Deviations from Contract Documents. Any exceptions to the Contract Documents must be clearly defined. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any additional expenses that may occur due to any exception made. 00361334.0000

23 23 00-3

Refrigerant Piping

f.

Other technical data related to specified material and equipment as requested by ENGINEER. 3. Delegated Design Submittals: a. 1/4-inch scale piping layouts, dimensioned to show length of runs, with all expansion joints, alignment guides, anchors and appurtenances required for proper control of piping forces. The drawings shall include all forces acting on the refrigerant piping system and the corresponding reactions of the compensation and anchor devices provided. b. All drawings and a letter indicating that the expansion compensation system has been properly designed shall be signed and sealed by a registered professional engineer legally qualified to practice in the state of Florida. 4. Testing Plans, Procedures, and Testing Limitations: a. Plan for performing required field testing. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Instructions and recommendations for handling, storing, protecting the equipment. b. Installation Data. c. Instructions for handling, start-up, and troubleshooting. 2. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Written report presenting results of required field testing. 3. Supplier Reports: a. Submit written report of results of each visit to Site by Supplier’s service personnel, including purpose and time of visit, tasks performed, and results obtained. Submit within two days of completion of visit to the Site. 4. Qualifications Statements: a. Manufacturer, when requested by ENGINEER. b. Professional Engineer, when requested by ENGINEER. c. Installer, when requested by ENGINEER. d. Brazing and Soldering, when requested by ENGINEER. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Record Documentation: a. During progress of the Work keep an up-to-date set of the Drawings showing field and Shop Drawing modifications. Immediately upon completion of the Work, submit “pdf” of CADD drawings showing the actual in place installation of all refrigerant piping and equipment installed under this Section at a scale satisfactory to the OWNER. The drawings shall show all piping on plans and in sections, with all reference dimensions and elevations required for complete Record Drawings of the systems. Two paper prints shall also be furnished. The prints and electronic copies of

00361334.0000

23 23 00-4

Refrigerant Piping

the CADD files shall be furnished no later than 30 days after completion of the Contract and prior to final payment. 1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. 2. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete, in ample time to prevent delay of the Work. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 2. Store all equipment in covered storage off the ground and prevent condensation and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for long-term storage. C. Acceptance at Site: 1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace lost equipment or components and repair damage to new condition, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. System Description: 1. The Drawings show the general arrangement of all systems. Should local conditions necessitate rearrangement of one or more of the systems, CONTRACTOR, before proceeding with the Work, shall prepare and submit complete drawings showing all details of the proposed rearrangement for written approval. 2. The connections shown to the various units are intended as an indication only. The actual connections at the time of installation to be made and arranged to suit the requirements of each case and adequately provide for expansion and circulation and minimize the amount of space required for the same. 3. The Drawings do not show all offsets, fittings, accessories and details, which may be required. CONTRACTOR shall carefully examine all of the General Construction, Electrical, Mechanical, Structural and other Drawings and the respective Specifications for conditions which may 00361334.0000

23 23 00-5

Refrigerant Piping

affect the installation of the Work, and shall arrange the Work accordingly, furnishing all required items to meet such conditions which are not specified as work “by others,” to complete the systems to the true extent of the Contract Documents. 2.2

DETAILS OF MATERIALS

A. Tubing: 1. Tubing shall be seamless copper tube of Type ACR, hard or annealed, complying with ASTM B280. 2. Tubing shall be clean, dehydrated, and supplied with a nitrogen charge and pressure tight plugs for each length. B. Fittings: 1. Fittings shall be in long pattern and shall be wrought copper or copper alloy conforming to the requirements of ASME/ANSI 16.22 or cast copper alloy conforming to the requirements of ASME/ANSI 16.18. 2. Unions shall be wrought or cast copper with a 300 psig working pressure, female pattern, brass to brass seat, and ground joint. 3. Flanges shall be wrought or cast copper with a 300 psig working pressure, tongue-and-groove raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced. 4. Gaskets shall be of a material suitable for the refrigerant, temperature and pressure for which they will be used. C. Joints: 1. Joints shall be soldered using alloys containing less than 0.2 percent lead (Pb) as listed in ASTM B32. Soldering flux shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B813. Joint preparation and operations shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM B828. 2.3

ACCESSORIES

A. Solenoid Valves: 1. Manufacturer: Provide product of one of the following: a. Sporlan Division. b. Or equal. 2. Hermetic, direct acting, normally closed, with manual lift stem and dual voltage 4-wire coil as required. 3. Pressure drop shall not exceed two psig when full open. 4. Solder or brazed connections. 5. Minimum 500 psig working pressure. B. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: 1. Manufacturer: Provide product of one of the following: a. Sporlan Division. b. Or equal. 00361334.0000

23 23 00-6

Refrigerant Piping

2. Thermostatic modulating type with external equalizer, complete with sensing bulb and distributor. 3. Sized, as required, by specific evaporator requirements. 4. Solder or brazed connections. 5. Minimum 500 psig working pressure. C. Isolation Valves: 1. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. EBVT Series, as manufactured by Sporlan Division. b. Type 937, as manufactured by Henry Technologies. c. Or equal. 2. Forged brass body with brass or plated steel stem, polished brass full port ball, extended copper fittings, and equalizer port (access fitting). 3. Teflon ball seals. 4. Solder or brazed connections. 5. Minimum 500 psig working pressure. D. Check Valves: 1. Manufacturer: Provide product of one of the following: a. Henry Technologies. b. Or equal. 2. Spring type. 3. Cast bronze or forged brass body. 4. Teflon seat. 5. Solder or brazed connections. 6. Minimum 425 psig working pressure. E. Liquid-Moisture Indicators: 1. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. See-All Series, as manufactured by Sporlan Division. b. Or equal. 2. Single port, leak-proof, copper plated steel body with extended copper fittings. 3. Self-cleaning molded sight glass with plastic safety cap. 4. Reversible color moisture indicator. 5. Solder or brazed connections. 6. Minimum 500 psig working pressure. F. Filter-Driers: 1. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Catch-All Series, as manufactured by Sporlan Division. b. Or equal. 2. Combination filter-drier type. 3. Heavy-steel body with neoprene gasketed removable flange. 4. Spring loaded core with replaceable non-dusting and non-channeling molded desiccant briquettes and sintered bronze outlet filter. 5. Pressure drop shall not exceed one psig. 6. Angle type solder or brazed connections. 00361334.0000

23 23 00-7

Refrigerant Piping

7. Minimum 500 psig working pressure. G. Strainers: 1. Manufacturer: Provide product of one of the following: a. Sporlan Division. b. Henry Technologies. c. Or equal. 2. Wye pattern with forged brass body, stainless steel or monel wire mesh screen, and cleanout plug. 3. Mesh size shall as recommended by manufacturer for application. H. Vibration Eliminators: 1. Seamless tin bronze or stainless steel core with high tensile bronze braid covering. 2. Pressure tested and dehydrated. 3. Minimum 7 inches in length. 4. Solder or brazed connections. 5. Minimum 500 psig working pressure. I.

Mechanical Link Seals: 1. Manufacturer: Provide product of one of the following: a. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. b. Thunderline Corporation. c. Calpico, Inc. d. Or equal. 2. Provide mechanical link seals through walls or floors with adjusting bolts suitable for 20 psig of pressure where shown or specified. 3. Details of Construction: a. Non-Fire Rated Seals: 1) Pressure Plates: Glass reinforced nylon composite. 2) Bolts and Nuts: Type 316 stainless steel. 3) Sealing Element: EPDM. b. Fire Rated Seals: 1) Pressure Plates: Zinc dichromate steel. 2) Bolts and Nuts: Two part zinc dichromate steel with corrosion inhibiting coating. 3) Sealing Element: Silicone. 4) 1-1/2-hour fire rating.

J.

Sleeves and Wall Pipes: 1. General: a. Wall pipes and wall sleeves shall be provided in accordance with the following schedule when passing through new or existing concrete or masonry structures, except where noted otherwise: From To Fitting Dry area Wet area Wall Pipe Dry area Earth Exterior Wall

Pipe 00361334.0000

23 23 00-8

Refrigerant Piping

Dry area Dry area Plain Sleeve Earth Earth Plain Sleeve Exterior Exterior Plain Sleeve b. Material of construction shall be Type 316 [304] stainless steel where located in corrosive areas and G90 hot dipped galvanized steel in non-corrosive areas. Refer to the Corrosive and NonCorrosive Area Designation Table on the Drawings for a list of these areas. 2. Sleeves: a. Wall sleeves shall be Schedule 40. b. Shall be of sufficient size to pass the pipe and the insulation covering the pipe. c. Shall extend 2-inches above the finished floor. d. Shall be provided with split type escutcheon plates at the floor and wall openings. e. Shall terminate flush with walls and ceilings. f. Shall not be required in existing concrete walls where walls are core drilled and the resulting hole has a smooth inside surface. g. Shall be caulked with a fire retardant caulking compound at firewalls and a gas tight caulking compound at gas tight walls. 3. Wall Pipes: a. Wall pipes shall be equipped with a water stop. b. Shall be of sufficient length to pass through the wall and provide adequate clearance for fastening. c. The end of the wall pipes shall be of a type consistent with the piping to be connected to them and shall conform to their standards and specifications. d. All wall pipes shall have the same interior protection as specified for the connecting piping. Exterior protection shall be as specified for the yard piping. K. Insulation: 1. Refrigerant piping shall be individually insulated in twin-tube, flexible, closed-cell, CFC-free (ozone depletion potential of zero), elastomeric material. 2. Insulation shall have a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.27 Btu-in/hrft2-degree F at 75 degrees F and a maximum water vapor transmission of 0.08 perm-in. 3. Insulation shall have a maximum Flame Spread Index of 25 and a maximum Smoke Developed Index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. L. Weatherproof Insulation Jacketing: 1. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. VentureClad as manufactured by Venture Tapes. b. Or equal.

00361334.0000

23 23 00-9

Refrigerant Piping

2. Material: Heavy duty multilayered laminate coated with acrylic pressure sensitive adhesive. 3. Thickness: 24 mills. 4. Tensile Strength: 188 Lbs/in 5. Puncture: 80 Lbs. 6. Emittance: 0.03 7. Water Vapor Transmittance: 0.00 Perm 8. Temperature Rating: -40 to 248 degrees F. 9. Fastening: Self-adhering adhesive. 10. Finish: Embossed Aluminum 11. Schedule: Apply insulation jacketing where refrigerant piping insulation is exposed to the outdoor elements. M. Structural Supports: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide and install all hangers, rods, supports, bolts, nuts, washers, inserts, and appurtenances as required to mount all refrigerant piping. 2. All hangers, rods, supports, bolts, nuts, washers, inserts, and appurtenances shall conform to Section 23 05 29, Hangers and Supports for HVAC Ductwork, Piping, and Equipment. 2.4

IDENTIFICATION

A. All piping and equipment identification shall be provided in accordance with Section 10 14 00, Signage. B. Isolation valves shall be identified where their intended purpose is not obvious. Numbers shall not be used to label the valves, unless a key to the numbers is located near the valves. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION

A. Examine conditions under which materials and equipment will be installed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Take field measurements where required prior to installation to ensure proper fitting of Work. 3.2

PREPARATION

A. Protection of Surrounding Areas/Surfaces: 1. Properly plug or cap the open ends of all piping at the end of each day’s Work or other stopping point through construction. Equipment

00361334.0000

23 23 00-10

Refrigerant Piping

shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, and chemical or mechanical damage. 3.3

INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install the piping and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents and by manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Obtain written interpretation from ENGINEER in the event of conflict between manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations and the Contract Documents. 2. Install in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 3. Do not modify structures to facilitate installation of piping, unless specifically approved by ENGINEER. 4. Installation shall conform to requirements of all local and state codes. B. All refrigerant piping installations shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15. C. Reduction in pipe sizes shall be made using concentric reducer couplings. D. All pipes, whether insulated or not, shall be identified with pipe labels and the direction of flow indicated. E. Install oil traps and oil return line tubing in refrigerant piping, in accordance with the air conditioning unit manufacturer recommendations. F. All valves shall be manually opened and closed before installation to check their operation, and the interior of the valves shall be cleaned. Joints shall be made as specified. G. Install the valves so that they can be conveniently operated. H. Valves shall be supported as integral components of the piping systems. I.

Isolation valves shall be installed on each side of strainers and filter-driers, in liquid and suction lines at evaporator coils, and where shown on the Drawings.

J.

For systems containing more than 6.6 pounds of a refrigerant in systems using positive-displacement compressors, isolation valves shall be installed: 1. At the inlet of each compressor, compressor unit or condensing unit. 2. At the discharge outlet of each compressor, compressor unit or condensing unit and each liquid receiver.

K. Liquid-moisture indicators shall be installed upstream of any expansion valves, in the liquid line to the receiver, and where shown on the Drawings.

00361334.0000

23 23 00-11

Refrigerant Piping

L. Liquid line filter-driers shall be installed immediately upstream of any other liquid line controls, such as thermostatic expansion valve, solenoid valve, and liquid-moisture indicator. M. Suction line filter-driers shall be installed immediately upstream of the compressor. N. Each filter-drier shall have a 3-valve full by-pass connection. O. Strainers shall be installed immediately upstream of each expansion and solenoid valve, evaporator pressure regulator, back pressure valve, compressor suction valve, and where shown on the Drawings. P. Vibration eliminators shall be used for all inlet and discharge final connections to compressors and other vibration producing equipment. Q. Pressure gauges shall be installed on both the suction and discharge of the compressor, and where shown on the Drawings. R. Pressure gauge ranges shall be selected for proper sensitivity, so that the dial indicator points to the approximate center of the dial in normal operation. S. Before setting wall sleeves, pipes, castings and pipes to be cast-in-place, CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the Drawings and Figures, which may have a direct bearing on the pipe locations. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating the proper location of the pipes and appurtenances during the construction with all trades. T. Field coordinate for exact pipe penetrations and routing of all piping. U. Provide mechanical link seals with sleeves or wall pipes at all piping penetrations through wall, roof and floor slabs. V. Escutcheon plates shall be provided for all exposed piping penetrations. W. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate accessories included in packaged and split air conditioning equipment. Any accessories not included that are specified in section 2.3. ACCESSORIES, shall be provided by CONTRACTOR, except where otherwise noted. Accessories may be omitted at the ENGINEER’S discretion if the air conditioning equipment manufacturer objects to accessories that void the equipment warranty or could cause damage to the equipment. In such a case, CONTRACTOR shall provide a letter from the air conditioning manufacturer stating the reason for the objection. The ENGINEER will review the objection and provide final resolution. X. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install a complete charge of refrigerant.

00361334.0000

23 23 00-12

Refrigerant Piping

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field Tests: 1. Remove and plug the connection points of any controls or relief valves that could be damaged by test pressure. 2. Remove all expansion valves and install temporary bypasses. 3. Front seat both the compressor suction and discharge valves. 4. Open the liquid line shutoff valve at the condenser, and any auxiliary valves in the hot gas and liquid lines. 5. Apply control power to open all solenoid valves. 6. Connect a cylinder of oil free dry nitrogen to the front seat port of the compressor discharge valve. 7. Introduce dry nitrogen into the system to a design test pressure listed on the condensing unit, compressor or compressor unit nameplate, as required by ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15. 8. Test all piping for leaks by observing system pressure drop and applying a bubble test to all joints and connections. 9. After testing is completed, bleed the test pressure and repair any leaks found. 10. After the system is assumed to be free of leaks, charge enough refrigerant through the liquid line charging valve to raise the pressure to 15 psig. Remove the refrigerant connection and charge enough dry nitrogen into the system to raise the system pressure to the listed design test pressure. 11. Test all joints with an electronic leak detection meter. Record all test results. 12. After the results of the pressure tests have been approved, release test pressure and mechanically evacuate the system to a minimum of 22inches Hg vacuum and maintain for 24 hours with no leaks. Disconnect the vacuum pump prior to vacuum leak test. 13. Record and report the test results. 14. After test results have been approved by ENGINEER, remove plugs and temporary bypass, and fully charge the system with the specified refrigerant. 15. All leaking joints shall be disassembled and remade using new materials. Retesting shall be conducted on all portions failing the tests. B. Inspection: 1. Examine areas to receive piping and accessories for: a. Defects that adversely affect execution and quality of the Work. b. Deviations beyond allowable tolerances. c. Start the Work only when conditions are satisfactory. 2. The ENGINEER reserves the right to reject or authorize replacement of piping and accessories found to be defective or deviated from allowable tolerances. 3.5

ADJUSTING

00361334.0000

23 23 00-13

Refrigerant Piping

A. Adjust all controls for proper settings. B. While system is operable, balance all equipment to achieve design conditions. 3.6

CLEANING

A. Remove all dirt, rust, dust, etc. from refrigerant piping after installation. B. Remove and dispose of all debris and waste from the Site resulting from installation. 3.7

SCHEDULES

A. All refrigerant piping shall be sized in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.

+ + END OF SECTION + +

00361334.0000

23 23 00-14

Refrigerant Piping

SECTION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install metal ductwork complete and operational with accessories. 2. The Work shall comply with vibration, seismic, and wind control requirements in Section 40 05 96, Vibration, Seismic, and Wind Controls. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before, the metal ductwork Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 10 14 00, Signage. 2. Section 23 05 29, Hangers and Supports for HVAC Ductwork, Piping, and Equipment. 3. Section 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. 4. Section 40 05 96, Vibration, Seismic, and Wind Controls. 1.2

REFERENCES

A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA). 1. AMCA Standard 500-D – Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating. 2. AMCA Publication 511 – Certified Ratings Program - Product Rating Manual for Air Control Devices. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 1. ASHRAE Standard 52.2 – Method of Testing General Ventilation AirCleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Sheet and Plate.

00361334.0000

23 31 13-1

Metal Ductwork

3. ASTM A653/A653M – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, ZincCoated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. D. American Welding Society (AWS). 1. AWS B2.1 – Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification. E. National Bureau of Standard’s Voluntary Product Standard. 1. NBS PS 15-69 – Standard for Contact-Molded Reinforced Polyester Chemical Resistant Process Equipment. F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 1. NFPA 90A – Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 2. NFPA 90B – Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and AirConditioning Systems. 3. NFPA 701 – Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films. G. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). 1. Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems. 2. HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible. 3. Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards. 4. Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards. H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). 1. UL 181 – Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors. 2. UL 181A – Closure Systems for Use With Rigid Air Ducts. 3. UL 181B – Closure Systems for Use With Flexible Air Ducts and Air Connectors. 4. UL 555 – Fire Dampers. 5. UL 555S – Smoke Dampers. 6. UL 900 – Air Filter Units. 1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: a. Minimum of five years of experience producing substantially similar equipment and able to show evidence of at least five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years. 2. Installer: a. Engage an experienced installer to perform the work of this Section who has specialized in installing metal ductwork similar to

00361334.0000

23 31 13-2

Metal Ductwork

that required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. b. Submit name and qualifications to ENGINEER along with the following information on a minimum of three successful projects: 1) Names and telephone numbers of owners, architects or engineers responsible for projects. 2) Approximate contract cost of the metal ductwork. 3) Amount of area installed. 3. Welding: a. Qualify processes and operators in accordance with AWS B2.1 as appropriate for material to be welded. b. Provide certification that operators employed on or to be employed for the Work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. Ensure that all certifications are current. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 3. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). 4. Local and State Building Codes and Ordinances. 5. Permits: CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all required permits, fees and inspections. 1.4

SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Drawings showing fabrication methods, assembly, accessories, and installation details. b. 1/4-inch scale duct layouts, dimensioned to show length of runs, sizes, support spacing and expansion provisions. c. Detailed installation drawing of each individual component showing: 1) Mounting requirements. 2) Locations. d. Setting drawings, templates, and directions for the installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer’s literature, illustrations, specifications, weight, wall thicknesses, design pressures, dimensions, required clearances, materials of construction, and performance data for all equipment. b. Complete component list. c. Detailed description of each component. d. Catalog cut sheets for each component. e. Deviations from Contract Documents. Any exceptions to the Contract Documents must be clearly defined. CONTRACTOR

00361334.0000

23 31 13-3

Metal Ductwork

f.

shall be responsible for any additional expenses that may occur due to any exception made. Other technical data related to specified material and equipment as requested by ENGINEER.

B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Certification that all stainless steel ductwork, accessories, and hardware are of the Type specified. 2. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Instructions and recommendations for handling, storing, protecting the equipment. b. Installation Data. 3. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Factory test reports. 4. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Written report presenting results of required field testing. 5. Supplier Reports: a. Submit written report of results of each visit to Site by Supplier’s service personnel, including purpose and time of visit, tasks performed, and results obtained. Submit within two days of completion of visit to the Site. 6. Qualifications Statements: a. Manufacturer, when requested by ENGINEER. b. Installer, when requested by ENGINEER. c. Welding, when requested by ENGINEER. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Record Documentation: a. During progress of the Work keep an up-to-date set of the Drawings showing field and Shop Drawing modifications. Immediately upon completion of the Work, submit “pdf” of CADD drawings showing the actual in place installation of all ductwork and equipment installed under this Section at a scale satisfactory to the OWNER. The drawings shall show all ductwork on plans and in sections, with all reference dimensions and elevations required for complete Record Drawings of the systems. Two paper prints shall also be furnished. The prints and electronic copies of the CADD files shall be furnished no later than 30 days after completion of the Contract and prior to final payment. 1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work.

00361334.0000

23 31 13-4

Metal Ductwork

2. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete, in ample time to prevent delay of that Work. 3. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for rigging of equipment. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 2. Store all equipment in covered storage off the ground and prevent condensation and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for long-term storage. C. Acceptance at Site: 1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace lost equipment or components and repair damage to new condition, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 1.6

SITE CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions: 1. The Contract Documents show the general arrangement and extent of the Work to be done. The exact location and arrangement of all parts shall be determined as the Work progresses. The exact location of all parts of the Work is governed by the general building plans and the actual building conditions. 2. The Drawings are intended as an indication of the arrangement of equipment and ductwork and are as nearly correct as can be determined in advance of the actual construction of the Work. Equipment, ductwork, and appurtenances found to interfere with the construction of the building, plumbing apparatus and piping, electrical wiring or other obstructions, etc., must be changed in location to clear such obstructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. System Description: 1. The Drawings show the general arrangement of all systems. Should local conditions necessitate rearrangement of the systems, CONTRACTOR, before proceeding with the Work, shall prepare and

00361334.0000

23 31 13-5

Metal Ductwork

submit complete drawings showing all details of the proposed rearrangement for written approval. 2. The connections shown to the various units are intended as an indication only. The actual connections at the time of installation to be made and arranged to suit the requirements of each case and adequately provide for expansion and minimize the amount of space required for the same. 3. The Drawings do not show all offsets, fittings, accessories and details, which may be required. CONTRACTOR shall carefully examine all of the General Construction, Electrical, Mechanical, Structural and other Drawings and the respective Specifications for conditions which may affect the installation of t